JP2020185327A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: If a ball arrives at an arrangement position of a probability variable area opening/closing board 75a at timing when the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is in an open state by a probability variable area solenoid 75b (See Fig. 8) when a jackpot is won and a special game state occurs and when a second opening/closing plate 74a of a second variable winning device 74 is opened in a predetermined round (for example, a first round of a jackpot type "latent probability variation B"), the balls are detected by a probability variable switch 75c and then flow into a discharge passage 76 since a probability area 75 in which the probability variable area switch 75c is arranged is opened by the probability variable opening/closing plate 75a.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 6

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched toward a game area provided on a game board, and a flow direction provided in the game area and capable of changing the flow direction of the game ball. A predetermined game value is given based on the game ball entering one of the plurality of entrances where the changing means are arranged, and a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the winning of a specific entrance. , When a player wins an advantageous state such as winning in a lottery, a game ball can be entered into the ball entry means, and a predetermined game value is given to the player (for example, a patent). Document 1).

JP-A-2017-148264

However, in the above-mentioned game machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a launching means for launching a game ball, a first entry means capable of entering the game ball launched by the launching means, and the first entry. It is possible to change the flow direction of the game ball, the information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information due to the game ball entering the ball means, the determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the flow direction of the game ball. When a game ball enters the second and third ball-entry means and the first ball-entry means, respectively, in which the flow direction changing means is arranged, a predetermined first game value is given to the player. The first game value-imparting means, the second game value-imparting means for imparting a second game value different from the first game value when the game ball enters the second ball-entry means, and the third ball-entry means. A gaming machine comprising a third game value-imparting means for imparting a third game value different from the first game value when a game ball enters the means, wherein the second ball-entry means is the said. A first region located upstream of the third entry means and through which the game balls flowing in from the second entry means or the third entry means can pass, and the game balls can flow into the first region. The first area switching means for switching whether or not the inflow is possible, and the first game value, the second game value, and the third game value, which are different from the first game value, the second game value, and the third game value when the game ball flows into the first area. By using the fourth game value imparting means for imparting the fourth game value and the determination result of the determination means, the game ball of the second entry means can enter, or the third entry means. The game ball is provided with a pattern selection means for selecting a combination pattern of the state in which the game ball can enter and the state in which the game ball can flow in the first area by the first area switching means.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the second ball entry means is a first movable means for changing the flow direction of the game ball as the flow direction changing means, and the first movable means. (1) A first driving means for driving the movable means so as to be displaceable in an open state or a closed state is provided, and the first movable means is in a state where the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second entry means. In the closed state, the game ball is configured to be able to roll on the upper surface thereof, and the third ball entry means is the first movable means when the first movable means is in the closed state. The upper surface is arranged at a position where the game ball can enter after rolling from the upstream side to the downstream side.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the first guiding means for guiding the gaming ball that has entered the second entering means to the first region side and the first guiding means. (3) The first region includes a second guide means for guiding the game ball that has entered the ball entry means toward the first region side, and a confluence portion where the first guide means and the second guide means merge. Is arranged on the downstream side of the confluence.

The game machine according to claim 4 is the game machine according to claim 3, wherein the first area switching means is in a state where the game ball of the second ball entry means can enter, or the third ball entry means. The first region is set to the inflowable state in relation to the state in which the game ball can enter, and the first guiding means reaches the first region after the game ball has entered the second entering means. The second guide means takes a predetermined second time from the entry of the game ball into the third entry means to the arrival at the first region. The first hour is shorter than the second hour.

The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to claims 1 to 4, wherein the third ball entry means is a second movable means for changing the flow direction of the game ball as the flow direction changing means. And a second driving means for driving the second movable means in a displaceable state in an open state or a closed state, the second movable means makes it difficult for a game ball to enter or enters the third entering means. In the closed state, which makes it impossible, the game ball is configured to be rollable on the upper surface thereof.

According to the game machine according to claim 1, a launching means for launching a game ball, a launching means for launching a game ball, and a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means. Information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information due to the game ball entering the first ball entry means, determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and flow of the game ball. When a game ball enters the second and third ball-entry means and the first ball-entry means in which the flow direction changing means capable of changing the direction are arranged, respectively, a predetermined first game is given to the player. A first game value-imparting means for imparting value, a second game value-imparting means for imparting a second game value different from the first game value when a game ball enters the second ball entry means, and the above. A gaming machine comprising a third game value-imparting means for imparting a third game value different from the first game value when a game ball enters the third ball-entry means, wherein the second ball is entered. The means is arranged on the upstream side of the third ball entry means, and the game ball is passed to the first region and the first region through which the game ball flowing in from the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means can pass. The first area switching means for switching whether or not the inflowable state is enabled, and the first game value, the second game value, and the third game when the game ball flows into the first area. By using the fourth game value imparting means for imparting the fourth game value different from the value and the determination result of the determination means, the game ball of the second entry means can enter, or the first. (3) A pattern selection means for selecting a combination pattern of a state in which the game ball of the ball entry means can enter and a state in which the game ball of the first area can be entered by the first area switching means is provided. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second ball entry means displaceably drives the first movable means for changing the flow direction of the game ball and the first movable means in an open state or a closed state as the flow direction changing means. The first movable means includes one driving means, and the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the first movable means when the second moving means is in the closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter. The third ball-entry means is configured to be movable, and when the first movable means is in the closed state, after the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the first movable means from the upstream side to the downstream side. It is placed in a position where it can enter the ball. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first guiding means that guides the game ball that has entered the second entry means toward the first region side, and the second guiding means that guides the game ball that has entered the third entry means toward the first region side. The guide means and a confluence portion where the first guide means and the second guide means merge are provided, and the first region is arranged on the downstream side of the confluence portion. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine according to claim 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first region switching means enters the first region in relation to a state in which the game ball of the second entry means can enter or a state in which the game ball of the third entry means can enter. The first guide means is configured to take a predetermined first time from the entry of the game ball into the second entry means to the arrival at the first region. The 2 guiding means is configured to require a predetermined second time from the entry of the game ball into the third entry means to the arrival at the first region, and the first time is the second time. Shorter. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines according to claims 1 to 4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the third ball entry means displaceably drives the second movable means for changing the flow direction of the game ball and the second movable means in an open state or a closed state as the flow direction changing means. The second movable means includes two driving means, and the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the second movable means when the third ball entering means is in the closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter. It is configured to be movable. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front enlarged view schematically showing the front view of the attacker unit provided with the 1st variable winning device, the 2nd variable winning device and the probability variation region. (A) is a schematic diagram of the attacker unit for explaining the behavior of the ball flowing into the attacker unit when the first variable winning device is in the open state and the probability variation region opening / closing plate is in the closed state. FIG. 6B is a cross-sectional view for explaining the behavior of a sphere that has flowed into the attacker unit when the first variable winning device is in the open state and the probability variation region opening / closing plate is in the open state. It is a schematic cross-sectional view of an attacker unit. (A) is a schematic diagram of the attacker unit for explaining the behavior of the ball flowing into the attacker unit when the second variable winning device is in the open state and the probability variation region opening / closing plate is in the closed state. It is a cross-sectional view, and (b) is for demonstrating the behavior of the sphere which flowed into the attacker unit when the 2nd variable winning apparatus is in an open state, and the probability variation area opening / closing plate is in an open state. It is a schematic cross-sectional view of an attacker unit. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows typically the structure of various counters, a buffer for a counter, a 1st hold ball storage area, a 2nd hold ball storage area, a hold ball execution area, a normal figure hold ball storage area, and a normal figure hold ball execution area. .. It is a figure which showed an example of a jackpot random number table schematically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table for special figure 1, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table for special figure 2. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the big prize opening opening and closing table. It is a figure which showed the example of the probability change area opening / closing table schematically. The operation timing of the 1st big prize opening solenoid, the 2nd big winning opening solenoid and the probability variation area solenoid in each round of the big hit type "time saving A" of the 1st special symbol, the 1st big winning opening switch, the 2nd big winning opening switch It is a timing chart schematically showing the detection timing of a sphere in the probability variation region switch, the interval, and the setting timing of the probability variation transition flag. The operation timing of the 1st big winning opening solenoid, the 2nd big winning opening solenoid and the probability variation area solenoid in the 1st to 3rd rounds of the jackpot type "time saving A" of the 1st special symbol, the 1st variable winning device and the 2nd The timing of the interval, which is the closing period of the variable winning device, the time until the ball winning the first variable winning device or the second variable winning device reaches the probability variation region opening / closing plate, the first large winning opening switch, the second It is a timing chart which schematically shows the relationship of each time between the detection timing of a sphere in a big winning opening switch and a probability change area switch, and the setting timing of a probability change transition flag. The operation timing of the 1st big prize opening solenoid, the 2nd big winning opening solenoid and the probability variation area solenoid in each round of the big hit type "time saving B" of the 1st special symbol, the 1st big winning opening switch, the 2nd big winning opening It is a timing chart which shows typically the detection timing of a sphere in a switch and a probability change area switch, and the setting timing of an interval and a probability change transition flag. The operation timing of the 1st big prize opening solenoid, the 2nd big winning opening solenoid and the probability variation area solenoid in each round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A" of the 1st special symbol, the 1st big winning opening switch, and the 2nd big winning It is a timing chart which shows typically the detection timing of a sphere in a mouth switch and a probability change area switch, and the setting timing of an interval and a probability change transition flag. The operation timing of the 1st big winning opening solenoid, the 2nd big winning opening solenoid and the probability variation area solenoid in the 1st to 3rd rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A" of the 1st special symbol, the 1st variable winning device and The timing of the interval, which is the closing period of the second variable winning device, the time until the ball winning the first variable winning device or the second variable winning device reaches the probabilistic region opening / closing plate, and the first large winning opening switch, It is a timing chart which schematically shows the relationship of each time between the detection timing of a ball in the 2nd big winning opening switch and the probability change area switch, and the setting timing of a probability change transition flag. The operation timing of the 1st big prize opening solenoid, the 2nd big winning opening solenoid and the probability variation area solenoid in each round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B" of the 1st special symbol, the 1st big winning opening switch, and the 2nd big winning It is a timing chart which shows typically the detection timing of a sphere in a mouth switch and a probability change area switch, and the setting timing of an interval and a probability change transition flag. The operation timing of the 1st big prize opening solenoid, the 2nd big winning opening solenoid and the probability variation area solenoid in each round of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A" of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol, and the 1st big winning opening switch, It is a timing chart which schematically shows the detection timing of a sphere in the 2nd big winning opening switch and the probability change area switch, and the setting timing of an interval and a probability change transition flag. The operation timing of the 1st big prize opening solenoid, the 2nd big winning opening solenoid and the probability variation area solenoid in each round of the big hit type "time saving C" of the 2nd special symbol, the 1st big winning opening switch, the 2nd big winning opening switch It is a timing chart schematically showing the detection timing of a sphere in the probability variation region switch, the interval, and the setting timing of the probability variation transition flag. The operation timing of the 1st big prize opening solenoid, the 2nd big winning opening solenoid and the probability variation area solenoid in each round of the big hit type "latent probability fluctuation C" of the 2nd special symbol, the 1st big winning opening switch, and the 2nd big winning It is a timing chart which shows typically the detection timing of a sphere in a mouth switch and a probability change area switch, and the setting timing of an interval and a probability change transition flag. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation processing executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the big prize opening opening and closing control processing executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the opening setting process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the passage determination processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the closing condition determination process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot end processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. (A) is a diagram illustrating the "character selection" effect in which the character selection screen in which "character A" is selected in the third symbol display device appears during the interval period of the jackpot state, and (b). Is a diagram illustrating a “character selection” effect in which a character selection screen in which a selection target is changed and “character B” is selected appears from the state of (a). It is a figure which showed the display content of the 3rd symbol display device in the jackpot state, and (a) is the figure which illustrated the state which the number of rounds, the firing mode, the number of winning prize balls, etc. was displayed, and (b). Is a diagram illustrating a state in which the probability variation region winning launch mode is displayed in addition to the number of rounds, the launch mode, the number of prize balls won, and the like. (A) is a front enlarged view schematically showing a front view of an attacker unit provided with a first variable winning device, a second variable winning device, and a probability variation region according to a second embodiment, and FIG. It is a right side enlarged view which schematically represented the side view of the attacker unit from the A direction of a). (A) is a front enlarged view schematically showing a front view of an attacker unit provided with a first variable winning device, a second variable winning device, and a probability variation region according to a third embodiment, and FIG. It is a right side enlarged view which schematically represented the side view of the attacker unit from the B direction of a). It is a front enlarged view schematically showing the front view of the attacker unit provided with the 1st variable winning device, the 2nd variable winning device and the probability variation region of the 4th embodiment. It is a front enlarged view schematically showing the front view of the attacker unit provided with the 1st variable winning device, the 2nd variable winning device and the probability variation region of the 5th embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the upper variable winning apparatus and the lower variable winning apparatus which can be opened in each jackpot type of 6th Embodiment, and the number of prize balls per winning in the upper variable winning apparatus and the lower variable winning apparatus. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the grand prize opening opening / closing table of 6th Embodiment. It is a front enlarged view schematically showing the front view of the attacker unit provided with the 1st variable winning device, the 2nd variable winning device and the probability variation region of the 7th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine of the 8th embodiment. 9 is a front enlarged view schematically showing a front view of an attacker unit including a first variable winning device, a second variable winning device, and a probability variation region according to a ninth embodiment. (A) is a schematic view of the right side portion of the game board for explaining the behavior of a right-handed ball when both the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device in the tenth embodiment are in the closed state. FIG. 6B is a cross-sectional view showing the behavior of a right-handed ball when the first variable winning device in the tenth embodiment is in the open state and the second variable winning device is in the closed state. It is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right side part of the game board for demonstrating, (c) is the 1st variable winning apparatus in the tenth embodiment in a closed state, and 2nd variable winning apparatus in an open state. It is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right side part of the game board for demonstrating the behavior of the right-handed ball in a certain case.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 40, a first embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 3) having a large number of nails and winning openings (ball entry openings) 63, 64a, 64b, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 8) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached. The details of the game board 13 will be described later in FIG.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 8) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the upper surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front.

The frame button 22 is displayed, for example, when the stage of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later is changed, or when the interval time during the jackpot game occurs, which will be described later. This button is pressed and operated by the player during the "character selection" effect. Further, the frame button 22 is a variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol used in the first lottery game or the second special symbol used in the second lottery game (hereinafter, the third symbol). It is also used as an operation button for allowing the player to select the effect content in the notice display executed in the variable display of.

The first lottery game is a lottery game caused by the ball entering the first starting port 64a (see FIG. 3), which will be described later (hereinafter, the ball entering may be referred to as "winning"). is there. Further, the second lottery game is a lottery game caused by winning a prize in the second starting port 64b (see FIG. 3), which will be described later (hereinafter, the first lottery game and the second lottery game are collectively referred to as simply. Sometimes referred to as "lottery game").

Further, the variable effect is an effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later, and as described later, a ball fired in the front area of the game board 13 is a specific winning opening (see FIG. 3). For example, it is executed when a prize is won in the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b described later. See FIG. 3), and after the symbol (the third symbol described later) is changed for a predetermined time, the stop display is displayed. It is a production that presents to the player the result (whether or not it is a big hit) of the lottery performed for the prize by combining the symbols. In the first embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is configured so that only one lottery game can be executed, and the first special symbol based on the first lottery game and the second special based on the second lottery game are executed. Based on the first lottery game, the third symbol is used in common with the symbols (hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as "special symbols"). It is configured to display either the lottery result or the lottery result based on the second lottery game.

Further, the stage is a production mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later, are unified. In the pachinko machine 10, the “city stage” and “sky” are used. There are three stages, "Stage" and "Island Stage". The above-mentioned variable effects and various effects such as "reach display" executed during the variable effects are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage.

Further, the "reach display" refers to a display one step before the "big hit display" indicating that a big hit occurs in the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later. .. Specifically, the third symbol of the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 7), which will be described later, stops at the same symbol, and the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 7) does not stop yet and continues to fluctuate. It means the state of being.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the "reach display" is roughly divided into one unit element constituting the "normal reach" effect (hereinafter, one unit element constituting the effect is referred to as a "variable element"). It is executed by developing from the variable element of the "normal reach", and is executed by developing from the variable element of "super reach" which has a higher expectation of big hit than the variable element of the "normal reach" and the variable element of the same "normal reach". There is a variable element of "special reach" that has a higher expectation of big hit than the variable element of "super reach".

The change of the stage is performed during the period when the fluctuation effect is not performed (that is, during the demo display), or during the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation" in which the third symbol is changed at high speed invisible to the player in the fluctuation effect. This is performed when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player. Then, each time the frame button 22 is operated, the change is repeated in the order of "city stage"-> "sky stage"-> "island stage"-> "city stage"->. Immediately after the power is turned on, the "city stage" is set as the initial stage.

Further, when the variable element of "normal reach" is started in the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later, the variable element of "normal reach" is changed to the variable element of "super reach". When developing into a variable element of "special reach", a selection screen of a variable element of "super reach" or a variable element of "special reach" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 among the variable elements of "normal reach". It may be configured as follows.

Specifically, on the selection screen, a plurality of candidates that can be selected as the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" are displayed, and while the selection screen is displayed, the frame button 22 is displayed. It is configured so that the selected candidate is changed when the player presses it. Then, the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" is determined based on the production candidate selected when developing into the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach". As for the variable element of "super reach", the variable element of "special reach" is executed by the third symbol display device 81 according to the determination.

In the first embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed, but instead of the frame button 22, the player directs the pachinko machine 10 in a predetermined direction (for example, with respect to the pachinko machine 10). It may be configured by an operation lever that can be tilted forward (forward, backward, right and left). Then, the effect stage may be selected and changed, or the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" may be determined based on the direction in which the operating lever is tilted.

Further, although the frame button 22 is configured to be arranged on the front side side view of the upper plate 17, the arrangement position of the frame button 22 can be any arrangement position as long as it can be pressed by the player. It may be arranged, for example, on the upper surface side of the upper plate 17, or may be arranged in the vicinity (upper surface or side surface) of the lower plate 50 described later.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined "reach display", and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, lighting portions 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as a light emitting diode (Light Emitting Diode; hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") are provided. ..

In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and at the time of jackpot or "reach display", the built-in LEDs are lit or blinked to cause the illumination units 29 to 33. Lights or flashes to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the "reach display" is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 in the front view, a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (see FIG. 3). ) Is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (Acrylonitrile Butadiene Style) in which the area around the illuminated portions 29 to 33 is chrome-plated in order to bring out more glitter, hereinafter abbreviated as “ABS”. .) A resin plating member 36 is attached.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit, not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit.

A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 8). The touch sensor 51a for permitting the drive of the operation handle 51, the push button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by the change of the electric resistance. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) to detect.

When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is continuously fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Specifically, when the player continues to operate the operation handle 51 while the balls are stored in the upper plate 17, 100 balls (one at intervals of 0.6 seconds) are produced per minute. It is configured to be fired. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

Next, as shown in FIG. 2, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board has a micro-processing unit (Micro-Processing Unit, hereinafter abbreviated as "MPU") as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, and a lottery. A random number generator used for the above, a clock pulse generation circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. are installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100 and 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 3, the game board 13 is formed on a transparent resin base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in the front view, and as a means for changing the flow direction, a large number of nails and wind turbines for ball guidance are used. And rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63 where a predetermined winning ball can be obtained by winning a ball, a first starting port 64a for the first lottery game and a second starting port 64b for the second lottery game. An attacker having a start port unit 64 having a normal electric service 64c, a first variable winning device 72 and a second variable winning device 74 that are opened when a big hit occurs due to a first lottery game or a second lottery game. The unit 71, the ordinary symbol gate 67 for the drive lottery of the ordinary electric service 64c, the variable display device unit 80 having the third symbol display device 81, etc. are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. Be done.

The general winning opening 63, the starting opening unit 64, the attacker unit 71, the ordinary symbol gate 67, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed with screws or the like. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 8) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 3) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 3) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center (hereinafter, the act of firing a ball with the force of hitting the return rubber 69 and passing the ball through the right side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80 is referred to as "right-handed". The act of passing the fired ball through the left side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80 is referred to as "left-handed"). In the first embodiment, in the left-handed game, the ball can enter the first starting port 64a, while the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 of the second starting port 64b and the attacker unit 71 It is configured so that the ball is difficult to enter. Further, in a right-handed game, the normal electric service 64c is opened due to the ball passing through the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 of the attacker unit 71 or the normal symbol gate 67. The ball can enter the second starting port 64b, but it is difficult (impossible) for the ball to enter the first starting port 64a.

Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

A special symbol display device 37 provided with a first LED group 37a and a second LED group 37b composed of a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means is arranged on the upper right side of the front view of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 3). Has been done. The special symbol display device 37 is subjected to variable display of each special symbol according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 8) described later (hereinafter, the variable display of the special symbol is referred to as “dynamic display”). At the same time, the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed.

The first LED group 37a determines the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation display has not been executed, among the balls that have won (winned) in the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, which will be described later. It is indicated by the lighting state. Further, the number of rounds of the jackpot and the error display are also indicated by the lighting state of the first LED group 37a corresponding to the state. The first LED group 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors suggests various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. be able to.

The "round" in the jackpot means from the opening to the closing of either the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74, which will be described later, in order to divide the number of winning balls in the jackpot. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, "30 seconds" has passed since either the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 was opened, or the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74. While any one of the variable winning devices 74 is open, 10 balls are won in the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74, so that one "round" is executed. There is.

The second LED group 37b is composed of a total of 16 LEDs, that is, an upper LED group composed of eight LEDs and a lower LED group also composed of eight LEDs. In the upper LED group, the first special symbol (hereinafter, the first special symbol may be abbreviated as "special diagram 1") indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the lower LED group, the second special symbol (hereinafter, the second special symbol may be abbreviated as "special diagram 2") indicating the determination result of the second lottery game is displayed in a variable manner.

Specifically, the upper LED group has a variable display (first) until the variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on the winning of the first starting port 64a provided in the starting port unit 64 elapses. In the embodiment, the leftmost LED in the upper LED group is lit in order from the rightmost LED one by one, and the lighting pattern is repeatedly displayed), and then a symbol indicating the determination result (8 in the first embodiment). Depending on the combination of each lighting pattern of the LED, the stop display is performed with one of a total of 256 types of stop symbols).

Further, the lower LED group has a variable display (in the first embodiment) until the variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on the winning of the second starting port 64b provided in the starting port unit 64 elapses. , The leftmost LED in the lower LED group is turned on one by one on the right side, and the lighting pattern is repeatedly displayed), and then a symbol showing the determination result (in the first embodiment, each of the eight LEDs). Depending on the combination of lighting patterns, stop display is performed with any of a total of 256 types of stop symbols).

In any of the LED groups, if the judgment result is a loss, only the leftmost LED is lit and displayed, and if the judgment result is a big hit, each LED group is lit and displayed in a lighting pattern corresponding to the big hit. Will be done. The details of the stop pattern of each LED group will be described later.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, whether or not a ball enters the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b is determined to be a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, a prize is won. The jackpot type is also determined according to the starting ports 64a and 64b.

The jackpot type determined here is a "probability" corresponding to "10 rounds (hereinafter, the round may be simply referred to as" R ") probability variation jackpot" based on the winning of the first starting port 64a. "Hidden probability fluctuation A" and "latent probability fluctuation B" corresponding to "variation A" and "5R latent probability variation jackpot", and "time saving A" and "time saving B" corresponding to "5R time saving jackpot" are prepared. (See FIG. 11 (a)). Further, based on the winning of the second starting port 64b, the "probability fluctuation A" corresponding to the "10R probability variation jackpot", the "latent probability variation C" corresponding to the "10R latent probability variation jackpot", and the "10R time saving jackpot" "Time saving C" corresponding to "" is prepared (see FIG. 11B).

Here, the "10R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot of 10 rounds. Further, the "10R latent probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to the "probability fluctuation state" after the maximum number of rounds is 10 rounds, but does not notify that the "probability fluctuation state" is given. is there. Further, the "10R time saving jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the "time reduction state" after the jackpot of 10 rounds. Further, the "5R latent probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to the "probability fluctuation state" after the maximum number of rounds is 5 rounds, but does not notify that the "probability fluctuation state" is given. is there. Further, the "5R time saving jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the "time reduction state" after the jackpot of 5 rounds.

Here, the "normal game state" refers to a low probability state that is not a "probability fluctuation state" or a "time reduction state", and refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of a special symbol and the hit probability of a normal symbol are normal. .. That is, in the "normal game state", the jackpot probability of the special symbol is lower than in the "probability fluctuation state", and the hit probability of the normal symbol is lower than in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state". Therefore, the player is not in a gaming state in which the ball is easily won in the second starting port 64b (hereinafter, a state in which the ball is easily won in the second starting port 64b is sometimes referred to as a "winning assistance state"). It is the most unfavorable game state for.

Next, the "time reduction state" is a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is as low as the "normal game state", but the so-called "time saving function" in which the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased is added. Say. That is, in the "time shortened state", the ordinary electric service 64c provided in the starting port unit 64 is likely to be opened, and as a result, the ball enters the second starting port 64b in the starting port unit 64. It is an easy game state, that is, a winning assistance state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "time reduction state" is set after the jackpot of the jackpot type "time reduction A", "time reduction B" or "time reduction C" (see FIGS. 11 (a) and 11 (b)). , It is maintained until a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in the first embodiment) of special symbol variation effects are executed for each jackpot. Then, after the dynamic display of the special symbol a predetermined number of times is executed, the state is configured to shift from the "time reduction state" to the "normal game state".

Next, the "probability fluctuation state" refers to a high probability state in which the jackpot probability of the subsequent special symbol is increased as an added value after the jackpot ends. That is, the "probability fluctuation state" refers to the time during the so-called probability change, in other words, the state of the game in which the transition to the special game state is easy.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the jackpot types “probability variation A”, “latent probability variation A”, “latent probability variation B” or “latent probability variation C” (FIGS. 11 (a) and 11 (b)). After the big hit (see), until the special symbol variation effect is executed 50 or 100 times (so-called special time. Hereinafter, the acronym of Special Time (special time) may be abbreviated as "ST". During (), the jackpot probability of the special symbol becomes a high probability state.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the "probability fluctuation state", the "probability change state with time reduction" to which the above "time reduction function" is added and the "probability change without time reduction" to which the "time reduction function" is not added are provided. A state (hereinafter, a “probability change state without time reduction” may be referred to as a “latent probability fluctuation state”) is provided. That is, in the "probability change state with time reduction", the jackpot probability of the special symbol is high, and the ordinary electric service 64c, which will be described later, is likely to be in the open state. As a result, the second start port 64b in the start port unit 64 It will be in a winning assistance state where it is easy for the ball to win. On the other hand, in the "probability change state without time reduction", the jackpot probability of the special symbol is high, but the normal electric service 64c is unlikely to be in the open state (it is not easy to become), so the second start is the same as in the "normal game state". It will be in a non-winning assistance state, which is not a winning assistance state for the mouth 64b.

The "probability change state with time reduction" is the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", "latent probability fluctuation A", "latent probability fluctuation B" or "latent probability fluctuation C" (see FIGS. 11 (a) and 11 (b)). After the big hit, it is maintained until a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in the first embodiment) of special symbol variation effects are executed for each big hit. On the other hand, after the dynamic display of the special symbol of the specified number of times is executed, the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A" or "latent probability fluctuation B" (see FIGS. 11A and 11B) In the case of the "probability change state with time reduction" based on, the state shifts to the "probability change state without time reduction", and the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A" or "latent probability fluctuation C" (see FIGS. 11 (a) and 11 (b)). ) In the case of the "probability change state with time reduction" based on the jackpot, it is configured to shift to the "normal game state".

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as an effect mode of the "probability fluctuation state", a "probability change notification effect mode" for notifying the player that the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased is a high probability state. , A "latent probability variation effect mode" is provided in which the player is not notified that the jackpot probability is in a high probability state.

The "probability change notification effect mode" is such that the player is notified by the third symbol display device 81 or the like described later that the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased during the "probability change notification effect mode". It is configured in. In the first embodiment, when the jackpot type “probability variation A” (see FIGS. 11A and 11B) is won, the “probability variation notification effect mode” is executed after the jackpot is completed.

On the other hand, the "latent probability variation effect mode" notifies the player that the "latent probability variation effect mode" is in a high probability state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased during the "latent probability variation effect mode" by the third symbol display device 81 or the like described later. It is configured not to. That is, the "latent probability variation effect mode" performs an effect equivalent to the effect corresponding to the "time saving notification effect mode" or the "normal notification mode", and asks the player whether it is a "probability fluctuation state" or a "time reduction state". Alternatively, it is configured to make it indistinguishable (difficult) whether it is in the "normal gaming state" and to give the gameability to predict which gaming state it is staying in.

In the first embodiment, when the jackpot type "latent probability variation A", "latent probability variation B" or "latent probability variation C" (see FIGS. 11A and 11B) is won, the jackpot After the end of, the "latent probability change effect mode" is executed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as an effect mode of the "time reduction state", a "time reduction notification effect mode" for notifying the player that the above "time reduction function" is given is provided. .. In this "time saving notification effect mode", the player is notified by the third symbol display device 81 or the like described later that the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased during the "time saving notification effect mode". It is configured. In the first embodiment, when the jackpot type "time saving A", "time saving B" or "time saving C" (see FIGS. 11A and 11B) is won, "time saving notification" is given after the jackpot is completed. "Direction mode" is executed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a "normal effect mode" different from the "time saving notification effect mode (latent probability variation effect mode)" and the "probability variation notification effect mode" is provided as the effect mode of the "normal game state". Has been done. This "normal effect mode" is such that the player is notified by the third symbol display device 81 or the like, which will be described later, that the state has not shifted to a state advantageous to the player during the "normal effect mode". It is configured in. In the first embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, when the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" is completed, or when the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A" or "latent probability fluctuation B" is completed. After the jackpot (see FIGS. 11A and 11B) is completed, the "normal effect mode" is executed when the variation effect of the special symbol is completed 50 times.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that the "latent probability variation effect mode" executes an effect equivalent to the "time saving notification effect mode" or the "normal effect mode". With this configuration, the player can see whether the current gaming state is the "probability fluctuation state", the "time reduction state", the "probability fluctuation state", or the "normal gaming state". It is not possible to clearly recognize which gaming state the player is staying in because it is indistinguishable (difficult). With this configuration, while the "latent probability variation effect mode" is being executed, a game property that allows the player to guess which game state is being created is created, and the interest of the game can be improved. ..

Further, when the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A" or "latent probability fluctuation B" (see FIGS. 11 (a) and 11 (b)) is completed and the special symbol variation effect is completed 50 times thereafter. The game state of is an advantageous state for the player because it is internally in the "probability fluctuation state" until the next special symbol variation effect is executed 50 times, but the "normal effect mode" is in the effect. It will be in the running state. On the other hand, when the special symbol variation effect is completed 50 times after the jackpot type "time reduction A" or "time reduction B" (see FIG. 11A) is completed, the subsequent gaming state is internally "normal". It is a "game state", and the "normal production mode" is executed in terms of production. For this reason, the player can perform the special symbol variation effect 50 times after the jackpot type "time reduction A" or "time reduction B" ends, and even after the "time reduction state" ends, the jackpot wins. It is not possible to distinguish whether it is a jackpot based on the type "time saving A" or "time saving B" or a jackpot based on the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A" or "latent probability fluctuation B".

With this configuration, a situation in which a "normal effect mode" indicating a "normal game state" is executed by not making the player recognize whether the player is in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "normal game state". Even so, it is possible to make the player guess the possibility of being in the "probability fluctuation state" internally and to continuously execute the game. Therefore, even after the "time reduction state" is completed, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to continue playing the game and promote the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, a display mode of the second LED group 37b for each jackpot type will be described. As the stop display (lighting display) of the upper LED group for the first special symbol, there is one type of display pattern corresponding to the loss, 63 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "time reduction A", and the jackpot type "time reduction B". There are 63 types of corresponding display patterns, 64 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", 64 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B", and the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A". There is one type of corresponding display pattern, for a total of 256 types of display patterns. Then, each display pattern does not have a specific regularity for each jackpot type, and a random display pattern is associated in advance. Therefore, when the player sees the display pattern of the upper LED group, the stop display of the loss and the stop display of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A" can be recognized, while the jackpot types "time reduction A" and "time reduction B" can be recognized. , "Hidden probability fluctuation A" or "latent probability fluctuation B", whichever is the stop display is difficult to identify.

In addition, as the stop display (lighting display) of the lower LED group for the second special symbol, there is one type of display pattern corresponding to the loss, 127 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "time saving C", and the jackpot type "latent probability". There are 127 types of display patterns corresponding to "variation C" and one type of display pattern corresponding to the jackpot type "probability variation A", for a total of 256 types of display patterns. Then, like the upper LED group, each display pattern does not have a specific regularity for each jackpot type, and a random display pattern is associated in advance. Therefore, when the player sees the display pattern of the lower LED group, the stop display of the loss and the stop display of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A" can be recognized, while the jackpot type "time reduction C" or "latent probability". It is difficult to identify which stop display of "variation C" is.

With this configuration, even if each jackpot type is displayed in the stop display of the second LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, if all the jackpot types corresponding to each stop display are not grasped. Since it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the winning jackpot type, a game property that allows the player to guess which game state is created while the "latent probability variation effect mode" is being executed is created. , The interest of the game can be improved.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. In the game area of the game board 13, there are (1 or) a plurality (3) general winning openings 63 in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won.

The plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged one at an upper portion, a middle portion, or a lower portion of one general winning opening unit. At the upper part of the entrance of each general winning opening 63, a plurality of nails are planted as means for changing the flow direction of the ball by colliding with the ball, and the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64a or the second. Only when a ball that has not won a prize in a winning opening such as a starting port 64b passes through a flow path between nails between a plurality of nails planted in the upper part of each general winning opening 63, is it possible to enter each general winning opening 63. A ball that does not pass through the inter-nail flow path between the nails, that is, a ball that is repelled by each nail into a flow path other than the inter-nail flow path, is prevented from flowing into the general winning opening 63. It is configured in. In each general winning opening 63, the ball that did not win in the upper general winning opening 63 is in the middle or lower general winning opening 63, and the ball that did not win in the upper and middle general winning openings 63 is in the lower part. It is configured so that it can win a prize in the general winning opening 63 of.

The ball that has won a prize in each general winning opening 63 flows down the collecting passage provided on the downstream side of the merging portion through the merging portion where the guide passages provided on the back side of the general winning opening unit meet. It is configured to be detectable by one general winning opening switch (not shown) arranged (buried) in the gathering passage. Since each general winning opening 63 is configured to give (pay out) the same value (prize ball) to the winning of one ball, the balls won from each general winning opening 63 are aggregated. There is no problem even if the ball is detected by the general winning opening switch of 1 to 1. As a result, it is possible to reduce the cost of parts as compared with the case where the general winning opening switch is provided for each guide passage.

The ball detected by the general winning opening switch is a collecting plate provided on the back side of the game board 13 like the balls detected by the winning opening switches 72c, 74c, 75c (see FIG. 4) and the like described later. It is configured to be aggregated into one out passage (not shown) by (not shown) and detected by an out switch 66a (see FIG. 8) described later. Further, if the ball is not detected by the out switch 66a within a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the ball is detected by the general winning opening switch, it is considered that the ball is clogged in the collecting plate. , It may be configured to perform a predetermined abnormality notification.

At the lower center of the game area, a start port unit 64 in which a first start port 64a, a second start port 64b, and a normal electric service 64c into which a ball flowing down the game area can enter is arranged. .. The start port unit 64 mainly includes a first start port 64a through which a ball can enter, a second start port 64b through which a ball can enter when the normal electric service 64c is opened, and the second start port 64b. It is composed of a normal electric service 64c as a means for changing the flow direction capable of preventing the ball from entering the starting port 64b.

When a ball wins a prize in the first starting port 64a provided in the starting port unit 64, the first starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first starting port switch is turned on. As a result, the main control device 110 (see FIG. 8) draws a jackpot for the first special symbol (that is, the first lottery game). Then, the dynamic display of the special symbol according to the lottery result is indicated by the upper LED group in the second LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the variation effect of the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Will be executed. The first starting port 64a is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

The ball detected by the first start port switch (not shown) is on the back side of the game board 13 like the ball detected by the winning port switches 72c, 74c, 75c (see FIG. 4) and the like described later. It is configured to be aggregated into one out passage (not shown) by an assembly plate (not shown) provided in the above, and detected by an out switch 66a (see FIG. 8) described later. Further, if the ball is not detected by the out switch 66a within a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the ball is detected by the first start port switch, it is considered that the ball is clogged in the collecting plate. Therefore, it may be configured to perform a predetermined abnormality notification.

Below the first starting port 64a, a second starting port 64b is provided so that a ball can enter only when the ordinary electric service 64c is in the open state. When the ball enters the second starting port 64b, the second starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main cause described later is due to the turning on of the second starting port switch. A jackpot lottery for the second special symbol is made by the control device 110 (see FIG. 8). Then, the display according to the lottery result is shown by the lower LED group of the second LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is shown by the third symbol display device 81. Is executed. The second starting port 64b is also one of the winning openings in which one ball is paid out as a prize ball when a ball enters.

The ball detected by the second start port switch (not shown) is on the back side of the game board 13 like the ball detected by the winning port switches 72c, 74c, 75c (see FIG. 4) and the like described later. It is configured to be aggregated into one out passage (not shown) by an assembly plate (not shown) provided in the above, and detected by an out switch 66a (see FIG. 8) described later. Further, if the ball is not detected by the out switch 66a within a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the ball is detected by the second start port switch, it is considered that the ball is clogged in the collecting plate. Therefore, it may be configured to perform a predetermined abnormality notification.

As described above, above the front view of the second starting port 64b, the second starting port 64b is opened by opening and closing two blade members covering the opening through which the ball enters the second starting port 64b. An ordinary electric service 64c that can be displaced to an open state (expanded state) or a closed state (reduced state) is provided. The normal electric service 64c is in a closed state in which the blades are closed (the blades are erected upward) in the normal state, and the ball cannot enter the second starting port 64b or is difficult to enter. There is.

On the other hand, when the variable display on the ordinary symbol display device 83 is stopped at the symbol of "◯", the ordinary electric service 64c is operated for a predetermined time. From the state where the blades of the ordinary electric service 64c stand up while the ordinary electric service 64c is operating. It is in a state of being movable in a substantially V shape (inverted C shape), and the second starting port 64b is in an open state. When the second starting port 64b is in the open state, the ball can enter the second starting port 64b, or the ball is more likely to enter the ball than in the closed state. That is, as a result of the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83, the ball stops at the symbol "○" and hits, and when the second starting port 64b is opened, the ball enters the second starting port 64b. It is possible to make a lot of big hit lottery.

An attacker unit 71 is arranged on the right side of the start port unit 64 in front view, and a horizontally long rectangular shape that can change the flow direction of the ball by colliding with the ball on the upper side of the attacker unit 71 in front view. A first variable winning device 72 having a first opening / closing plate 72a formed in the above is provided, and the flow direction of the ball can be changed by colliding with the ball on the lower side of the first variable winning device 72 in front view. A second variable winning device 74 having a horizontally long rectangular second opening / closing plate 74a is provided.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the normal time when the jackpot is not won (for example, in the "normal game state"), the inflow of balls into the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74. By holding the first opening / closing plate 72a and the second opening / closing plate 74a as means for changing the flow direction, the flow direction of the ball to flow into the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74. Is changed by colliding with the front surface (closed surface) of the first opening / closing plate 72a or the second opening / closing plate 74a so that the ball does not enter the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74. Has been done. On the other hand, when the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the main control device 110 (see FIG. 8) becomes a big hit, it is special so that it becomes a big hit stop symbol after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The second LED group 37b of the symbol display device 37 is lit and displayed, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the first opening / closing plate 72a of the first variable winning device 72 or the second opening / closing plate 74a of the second variable winning device 74 is opened according to the type (type) of the generated big hit, and flows down the game area. The ball is changed by colliding with the rear surface (open surface) of the first opening / closing plate 72a or the second opening / closing plate 74a, so that the ball can easily win a prize in the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74. The game state transitions to the special game state (big hit). As this special gaming state, the first opening / closing plate 72a or the second opening / closing plate 74a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until "30 seconds" elapses or until 10 balls are won). To.

The opened first opening / closing plate 72a or the second opening / closing plate 74a is closed when a predetermined time elapses or when a predetermined number of balls win a prize, and after the closing, the first opening / closing plate has not been opened. 2 The opening / closing plate 74a or the first opening / closing plate 72a is opened for a predetermined time. That is, in one jackpot, the first opening / closing plate 72a and the second opening / closing plate 74a are alternately opened so that the balls can alternately win the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74. It is configured. The opening / closing operation of the first opening / closing plate 72a and the second opening / closing plate 74a can be repeated up to a total of, for example, 10 times (10 rounds). The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state (big hit state) that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) in a larger amount than usual. Prize balls will be paid out.

Further, the ball that has flowed into the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 can flow into the attacker unit 71 (that is, the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74). A probability variation region 75 (so-called “V region”; see FIG. 4) is provided. The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to switch whether or not a ball can flow into the probabilistic region 75 by a probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a provided in the probabilistic region 75 in a special gaming state (big hit state). Has been done. Further, while the probability change area opening / closing plate 75a is open, the probability change area switch 75c is switched and controlled to enable or disable the ball detection, and the ball flowing into the probability change area 75 is effectively set to the probability change area switch 75c. By passing when the ball has passed, it is notified that the ball has passed through the probability variation region 75 (for example, the V winning notification effect is executed only at the time of the big hit of "probability variation A"), and after the special gaming state is completed, "probability" It is configured to generate a "fluctuation state".

The ball that has flowed into the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 is discharged from the back side of the game board 13 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge passage 76 regardless of whether the ball has passed through the probability variation region 75. It is configured to be. More specifically, the ball detected by the first large winning opening switch 72c (see FIG. 4), which will be described later, is provided on the back side of the game board 13 like the ball detected by the general winning opening switch or the like. It is configured to be aggregated into one out passage (not shown) by a collecting plate (not shown) and detected by an out switch 66a (see FIG. 8) described later. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the ball is detected by the first special winning opening switch 72c or the second special winning opening switch 72c, the ejection described later is performed within a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds or 5 seconds). When the ball is not detected by the switch 76a (or the out switch 66a), it is considered that the ball is clogged in the attacker unit 71 (collecting plate), and a predetermined abnormality notification is performed.

Here, the details of the attacker unit 71 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is an enlarged front view schematically showing a front view of the attacker unit 71. As shown in FIG. 4, the attacker unit 71 is mainly composed of a first variable winning device 72, a second variable winning device 74, a probability variation region 75, and a discharge passage 76. Further, as described above, the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are configured so that the balls fired in the so-called right-handed game can flow in, and are fired in the so-called left-handed game. The ball is configured so that it cannot flow in.

The first variable winning device 72 mainly includes a horizontally long rectangular first opening / closing plate 72a that covers the passage 72d before detecting the first large winning opening, and the first opening / closing plate 72a on the front side with the lower side of the first opening / closing plate 72a as an axis. The first large winning opening solenoid 72b (see FIG. 8) for opening and closing the opening / closing plate 72a, the first large winning opening switch 72c for detecting a winning ball in the first variable winning device 72, and the first large winning opening switch 72c. The passage before the first big winning opening detection 72d where the ball before being detected by the winning opening switch 72c flows down, and the passage after the first big winning opening detection where the ball after being detected by the first big winning opening switch 72c flows down. The 72e and the deceleration rib 72f for decelerating the ball flowing down in the passage 72e after the detection of the first winning opening are provided. Then, the passage 72e after detecting the first major winning opening is configured to merge with the passage 74e after detecting the second major winning opening of the second variable winning device 74, which will be described later, at the merging portion 73.

The first prize opening switch 72c is embedded in the passage of the first variable winning device 72, and when the ball is detected by the first prize opening switch 72c, 15 prize balls are paid out. Further, when 10 balls are detected by the first large winning opening switch 72c after the first opening / closing plate 72a is opened, the opening first opening / closing plate 72a is closed and one round is completed. It is configured to do.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the ball is detected by the first big winning opening switch 72c, the first predetermined period (retention allowable time. The passage 72e and the discharge passage 76 after the first big winning opening detection, which will be described later, are passed. When the ball is detected by the discharge switch 76a, which will be described later, after a period during which the ball can flow down (for example, 10 seconds), that is, within a predetermined period after the ball is detected by the first prize opening switch 72c, the discharge switch 76a If the ball is not detected by, it is considered that the ball has stayed in the first variable winning device 72, and the ball has stayed in the first variable winning device 72 by the third symbol display device 81 or the like. It is configured so that the winning abnormality notification suggesting to the player or the person concerned with the hall can be executed. With this configuration, for example, even if a fraudulent act is performed in which only the first large winning opening switch 72c continuously detects the ball, the fraudulent act can be quickly detected. Become.

When the first opening / closing plate 72a is open, the first large winning opening detection front passage 72d allows the ball that has flowed into the first variable winning device 72 to be first large due to the bottom that is gently inclined to the right side in the front view. It is configured to guide toward the winning opening switch 72c. While the first opening / closing plate 72a is open, the ball launched by the right-handed game flows down from between the left side nail group 77 and the right side nail group 78 provided directly above the front view of the attacker unit 71, and then flows down. , Collides with the leftmost portion of the first opening / closing plate 72a in front view and flows into the passage 72d before detecting the first winning opening. Then, the ball rolls from the bottom of the leftmost front end of the passage 72d before detecting the first grand prize opening to the right side of the front view, reaches the first grand prize opening switch 72c, and reaches the first grand prize. Detected by the mouth switch 72c.

Here, the ball that has flowed down from the right side to the left side of the first variable winning device 72 by the right-handed game has flowed down between the left side nail group 77 and the right side nail group 78, and then with the first opening / closing plate 72a. After the collision, the upper surface of the first opening / closing plate 72a and the passage 72d before detecting the first winning opening are rolled toward the left side of the front view while maintaining the momentum of flowing down to the left side of the front view. Then, the momentum of the ball that has rolled to the left is canceled by the downward-sloping inclination of the passage 72d before the detection of the first large winning opening, and the rightward direction in front view along the downward-sloping inclination of the passage 72d before the detection of the first large winning opening. Flow down to. Therefore, the time to reach the first prize opening switch 72c from the leftmost end of the front view of the passage 72d before detecting the first prize opening is by climbing the inclination of the passage 72d before detecting the first prize opening to the left side of the front view. Since it stays a little, it is configured to take about 0.8 seconds.

The first large winning opening detection post-detection passage 72e is a passage for guiding the ball detected by the first large winning opening switch 72c to the probability variation region 75 side provided in the attacker unit 71. A deceleration rib 72f for reducing the flow speed of a ball flowing down in the passage is provided in a part of the passage 72e after detecting the first winning opening. The deceleration ribs 72f include a plurality of back ribs provided on the front side of the passage 72e after detecting the first winning opening, and a plurality of ribs provided on the front side of the passage 72e after detecting the first winning opening. The ribs on the front side of the above are arranged so as to be alternately and evenly distanced, and when the ball flows down (rolls) in the passage 72e after detecting the first winning opening, the ball repeatedly collides with each rib and meanders. It is configured to flow down while decelerating. Therefore, it is configured that it takes about 2.5 seconds to reach the probability variation region 75 from the most upstream side of the passage 72e after detecting the first winning opening.

That is, it takes at least 0.8 seconds for the ball flowing into the first variable winning device 72 to flow down the passage 72d before detecting the first large winning opening before reaching the probability variation region 75 in the attacker unit 71. , It is configured to take a total of about 3.3 seconds, which is about 2.5 seconds for flowing down the passage 72e after detecting the first prize opening. As a result, for example, even if a ball flows into the first variable winning device 72 immediately after the first opening / closing plate 72a is opened, it takes at least about 3.3 seconds for the ball to reach the probability variation region 75. Therefore, if the opening time of the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a of the probabilistic region 75 is not opened for about 3.3 seconds or more from the opening start of the first opening / closing plate 72a, the ball does not flow into the probabilistic region 75. ing.

Therefore, when the first opening / closing plate 72a of the first variable winning device 72 is opened, for example, the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is closed within about 3.3 seconds from the opening of the first opening / closing plate 72a. In that case, even if the ball wins in the first variable winning device 72, the ball cannot flow into the probability variation region 75.

The second variable winning device 74 mainly has a horizontally long rectangular second opening / closing plate 74a that covers the passage 74d before detecting the second major winning opening, and the second opening / closing plate 74a on the front side with the lower side of the second opening / closing plate 74a as an axis. A second large winning opening solenoid 74b (see FIG. 8) for opening and closing the opening / closing plate 74a, a second large winning opening switch 74c for detecting a winning ball in the second variable winning device 74, and the second large winning opening switch 74c. The passage before detecting the second big winning opening 74d where the ball before being detected by the winning opening switch 74c flows down, and the passage after detecting the second big winning opening where the ball after being detected by the second big winning opening switch 74c flows down. 74e and are provided. Then, the passage 74e after detecting the second large winning opening is configured to join the passage 72e after detecting the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 72 at the merging portion 73.

The second big prize opening switch 74c is embedded in the passage of the second variable winning device 74, and when the ball is detected by the second big winning opening switch 74c, 15 One prize ball will be paid out. Further, when 10 balls are detected by the second big winning opening switch 74c after the second opening / closing plate 74a is opened, the second opening / closing plate 74a is closed and one round is completed. It is configured.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the ball is detected by the second major winning opening switch 74c, a second predetermined period (retention allowable time. A passage after detecting the second major winning opening, which will be described later) is different from the first predetermined period. A period during which the ball can flow down the 74e and the discharge passage 76, for example, 5 seconds), when the ball is detected by the discharge switch 76a described later, that is, after the ball is detected by the second large winning opening switch 74c, it is determined. If the ball is not detected by the discharge switch 76a within the period, it is considered that the ball has stayed in the second variable winning device 74, and the ball stays in the second variable winning device 74 by the third symbol display device 81 or the like. It is configured to be able to execute the winning abnormality notification that suggests to the player or the person concerned with the hall that the game has been completed. With this configuration, for example, even if a fraudulent act is performed in which only the second major winning opening switch 74c continuously detects the ball, the fraudulent act can be quickly detected. Become. Further, since the second big winning opening switch 74c is arranged closer to the discharge switch 76a than the first big winning opening switch 72c, it takes less time than when the ball is detected by the first big winning opening switch 72c. By configuring to perform the above-mentioned abnormality detection process, it is possible to accurately monitor the ball that has won the second variable winning device 74.

In the passage 74d before detecting the second large winning opening, when the second opening / closing plate 74a is open, the ball flowing into the second variable winning device 74 is seconded by the bottom that is gently inclined downward to the left in the front view. It is configured to guide to the grand prize opening switch 74c. While the second opening / closing plate 74a is open, the ball flowing down from between the left side nail group 77 and the right side nail group 78 provided directly above the front view of the attacker unit 71 is the most front view of the second opening / closing plate 74a. It collides with the right end part and flows into the passage 74d before detecting the second big winning opening, and then rolls from the bottom of the leftmost front end of the passage 74d before detecting the second big winning opening to the right side of the front view. It reaches the two major winning opening switches 74c and is detected by the second winning opening switch 74c.

Here, the ball that has flowed down from the right side of the front view of the first variable winning device 72 by the right-handed game has flowed down between the left side nail group 77 and the right side nail group 78, and then collides with the second opening / closing plate 74a. Then, while maintaining the momentum of flowing down to the left side in the front view, the upper surface of the second opening / closing plate 74a and the passage 74d before detecting the second winning opening are rolled toward the left side in the front view. Then, while the momentum of the ball that has rolled to the left is amplified by the downward slope of the passage 74d before the detection of the second prize opening, the front view is along the downward slope of the passage 74d before the detection of the second prize opening. It flows down to the left. Therefore, the time required to reach the second large winning opening switch 74c from the rightmost front view of the passage 74d before detecting the second large winning opening is accelerated by the inclination of the passage 74d before detecting the second large winning opening. It is configured to take about 0.3 seconds.

The second large winning opening detection post-detection passage 74e is a passage for guiding the ball detected by the second large winning opening switch 74c to the probability variation region 75 side provided in the attacker unit 71. Unlike the passage 72e after detecting the first winning opening, the passage 74e after detecting the second winning opening is not provided with a member (for example, a deceleration rib 72f) for reducing the flow speed of the ball. Further, the passage 74e after the detection of the second prize opening is shorter than the passage 72e after the detection of the first prize opening (for example, 1/4 of the length of the passage 72e after the detection of the first prize opening). There is. Therefore, it is configured that it takes about 0.7 seconds to reach the probability variation region 75 from the most upstream side of the passage 74e after the detection of the second special winning opening.

That is, it takes at least about 0.3 seconds for the ball flowing into the second variable winning device 74 to flow down the passage 74d before detecting the second major winning opening before reaching the probability variation region 75 in the attacker unit 71. , It is configured to take a total of about 1.0 second, which is about 0.7 seconds for flowing down the passage 74e after detecting the second major winning opening. As a result, for example, when a ball flows into the second variable winning device 74 immediately after the second opening / closing plate 74a is opened, the ball reaches the probability variation region 75 in at least about 1.0 second. Therefore, if the opening time of the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a of the probabilistic region 75 is not opened for about 1.0 second or more from the opening start of the second opening / closing plate 74a, the ball does not flow into the probabilistic region 75. On the other hand, when the second opening / closing plate 74a is opened for about 3 seconds from the start of opening, if one ball is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, a maximum of about 5 balls are fired. It is configured so that it can flow into the probability variation region 75.

Therefore, when the second opening / closing plate 74a of the second variable winning device 74 is opened, for example, the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is opened for at least about 3.0 seconds from the opening of the second opening / closing plate 74a. When there is, the ball that has won the second variable winning device 74 can flow into the probability variation region 75.

The probability variation region 75 is located on the downstream side of the confluence portion 73 between the passage 72e after the detection of the first prize opening and the passage 74e after the detection of the second prize opening, and mainly includes the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a and the probability variation region opening / closing. It is composed of a probabilistic region solenoid 75b (see FIG. 8) capable of opening and closing the plate 75a, and a probabilistic region switch 75c.

The probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a is a retractable opening / closing plate that is arranged at a position visible to the player from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 and covers the upstream side of the probabilistic region switch 75c. It is configured to be openable and closable by 75b.

The probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a is arranged so that the upper surface thereof is flush with the bottom surface (rolling surface of the sphere) of the passage in the attacker unit 71 in the closed state (protruding state), and the first variable winning device The ball that has flowed into the 72 or the second variable winning device 74 is guided to the discharge passage 76. The ball guided to the discharge passage 76 is guided to the discharge passage 76, which will be described later, and is detected by the discharge switch 76a, and then discharged to the outside of the attacker unit 71 (on the back side of the game board 13).

On the other hand, when the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is in the open state (immersive state), the upstream side (upper side) of the probability variation region switch 75c is opened and flows into the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74. After guiding the ball to the passage in which the probability variation region switch 75c is arranged, it is guided to the discharge passage 76. When a sphere is detected by the probability variation region switch 75c, it is effectively set on condition that the probability variation region 75 is valid and that it is a predetermined jackpot type (for example, jackpot type "probability variation A"). It is configured to be able to execute a V winning notification effect that suggests to the player that the ball has passed through the probability variation region 75. The probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a may be configured by a retractable opening / closing plate that does not guide the ball to the probabilistic region switch 75c in the immersed state but guides the ball to the probabilistic region switch 75c in the protruding state. Further, when the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is rotated and opened, the ball is guided to the probability variation region switch 75c, and when the plate is closed without rotation, the ball is not guided to the probability variation region switch 75c. It may be composed of a moving open type opening / closing plate.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the ball is detected by the first big winning opening switch 72c or the second big winning opening switch 74c, a predetermined period (retention allowable time. Passage 72e after detecting the first big winning opening) or A period during which the ball can flow down the passage 74e after the detection of the second big winning opening. For example, when the ball is detected by the probability change area switch 75c before the lapse of 10 seconds), the probability change area 75 that is open during the big hit. While a "probability fluctuation state" can occur as if a ball has flowed into the ball, if the ball is detected by the probability change region switch 75c after the lapse of the predetermined period, the ball is not detected by the big winning opening switches 72c and 74c and the probability changes If the sphere is detected by the area switch 75c, or if the sphere is not detected by the probability variation area switch 75c within the above-mentioned predetermined period in the jackpot type that can give a "probability fluctuation state", the jackpot middle or probability variation region 75 is opened. It is configured to perform a predetermined abnormality notification as if the ball has flowed into the probability variation region 75 illegally or abnormally in a situation where the ball has not been performed. With this configuration, for example, even if a fraudulent act of detecting a ball in the probabilistic region 75 is performed during a non-big hit or in a state where the probabilistic region 75 is not open, the fraudulent act can be quickly performed. It will be possible to discover in.

Further, the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is made of a transparent or substantially transparent resin. Therefore, by configuring the position (driving mode) of the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a so that it is difficult for the player to recognize, the player can determine whether the passage to the probabilistic region switching plate 75c is opened or closed by the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a. It can be difficult to distinguish. The probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a may be made of a colored resin.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6, the inflow pattern of the balls that have flowed into the first variable winning device 72 of the attacker unit 71 will be described. FIG. 5A is for explaining the behavior of the ball flowing into the attacker unit 71 when the first variable winning device 72 is in the open state and the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is in the closed state. FIG. 5B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the attacker unit 71, and FIG. 5B shows the inside of the attacker unit 71 when the first variable winning device 72 is in the open state and the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is in the open state. It is a schematic cross-sectional view of the attacker unit 71 for demonstrating the behavior of the sphere which flowed into. Further, FIG. 6A describes the behavior of the ball flowing into the attacker unit 71 when the second variable winning device 74 is in the open state and the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is in the closed state. FIG. 6B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the attacker unit 71 for the purpose, and FIG. 6B shows an attacker unit when the second variable winning device 74 is in the open state and the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is in the open state. It is a schematic cross-sectional view of the attacker unit 71 for demonstrating the behavior of the sphere which flowed into 71.

As shown in FIG. 5A, when a jackpot is won and a special gaming state occurs, the first variable winning device 72 in a predetermined round (for example, the 1st round of the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation A”). The first opening / closing plate 72a is opened, and a ball flowing down from between the left nail group 77 and the right nail group 78 can flow into the attacker unit 71 (first variable winning device 72). Then, the ball that has flowed into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72 is first detected by the first large winning opening switch 72c, and then the deceleration rib 72f provided in the passage 72e after detecting the first large winning opening. After detecting the first big winning opening, it flows down in the passage 72e while colliding with. At this time, when the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is closed (protruding state) by the probability variation region solenoid 75b (see FIG. 8), the passage (probability variation region 75) in which the probability variation region switch 75c is arranged is the probability variation region opening / closing plate. Since it is closed (protruded) by the 75a, the ball passes through the upper surface of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a and flows into the discharge passage 76.

The ball that has flowed into the discharge passage 76 is detected by the discharge switch 76a provided in the discharge passage 76, and is discharged to the outside of the attacker unit 71. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, whether or not the number of balls detected by the first special winning opening switch 72c or the second large winning opening switch 74c matches the number of balls detected by the discharge switch 76a. If they match, it can be determined that the ball that has flowed into the attacker unit 71 has been discharged without staying in the attacker unit 71, while if they do not match, it can be determined that the balls have flowed into the attacker unit 71. It is configured to determine that the ball is stagnant and perform a predetermined abnormality notification (for example, a winning abnormality notification to the attacker unit 71). In this way, by performing a predetermined abnormality notification, it is possible to make the player recognize that an abnormality has occurred based on the winning of the attacker unit 71, and also to the hall related persons to the attacker unit 71. It is possible to notify that the winning abnormality has occurred and to quickly resolve the abnormal state.

The ball discharged to the outside of the attacker unit 71 is subsequently detected by the out switch 66a (see FIG. 8) and discharged to the outside of the game board 13. Here, by determining whether or not the number of balls fired in the game area matches the number of balls detected by the out switch 66a, the balls fired in the game area stay in the game area (so-called). , It becomes possible to detect that a grape phenomenon (a phenomenon in which balls are connected and clogged on the board surface of the game board 13)). Then, when the ball is staying in the game area, it is possible to make the player recognize that the abnormality has occurred by performing a predetermined abnormality notification (for example, grape occurrence notification). , It is possible to notify the person concerned in the hall that an abnormality has occurred in the game area and quickly resolve the abnormal state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5B, when a jackpot is won and a special gaming state occurs, the first variable winning device 72 is used in a predetermined round (for example, the 1st round of the jackpot type “time saving B”). When the first opening / closing plate 72a of the above is opened, the ball reaches the arrangement position of the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a at the timing when the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a is in the open state (immersive state) by the probabilistic region solenoid 75b (see FIG. 8). When it arrives, the passage (probability region 75) in which the probability variation region switch 75c is arranged is opened (immersed) by the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a, so that after the sphere is detected by the probability variation region switch 75c. , Flows into the discharge passage 76. As described above, the ball that has flowed into the discharge passage 76 is detected by the discharge switch 76a provided in the discharge passage 76, and is discharged to the outside of the attacker unit 71.

In the first embodiment, the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is open-driven in synchronization with the opening of the first opening / closing plate 72a, and the open state is maintained only for 3 seconds, while the first variable winning device The time required for the ball flowing into the 72 to reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is configured to take at least about 3.3 seconds or more. Therefore, since the ball flowing into the first variable winning device 72 is set so as not to reach the arrangement position of the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a at the timing when the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a is opened. 1 It is configured so that the ball does not flow into the probability variation region 75 as a result of winning the variable winning device 72.

Next, as shown in FIG. 6A, when a big hit is won and a special gaming state occurs, in a predetermined round (for example, the 2nd round of the big hit type “time saving A”), the second variable winning device 74 The second opening / closing plate 74a of the above is opened, and a ball flowing down from between the left side nail group 77 and the right side nail group 78 can flow into the attacker unit 71 (second variable winning device 74). Then, the ball that has flowed into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 is first detected by the second large winning opening switch 74c, and then merges with the passage 72e after detecting the first large winning opening at the merging portion 73. .. At this time, when the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is closed (protruding state) by the probability variation region solenoid 75b (see FIG. 8), the passage (probability variation region 75) in which the probability variation region switch 75c is arranged is the probability variation region opening / closing plate. Since it is closed (protruded) by the 75a, the ball passes through the upper surface of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a and flows into the discharge passage 76. As described above, the ball that has flowed into the discharge passage 76 is detected by the discharge switch 76a provided in the discharge passage 76, and is discharged to the outside of the attacker unit 71.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 6B, when a jackpot is won and a special gaming state occurs, a second variable winning prize is won in a predetermined round (for example, the 1st round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B"). When the second opening / closing plate 74a of the device 74 is opened, the ball is arranged at the timing when the probability changing region opening / closing plate 75a is in the open state (immersive state) by the probability changing region solenoid 75b (see FIG. 8). When the position is reached, the passage (probability region 75) in which the probability variation region switch 75c is arranged is opened (immersed) by the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a, so that the sphere is detected by the probability variation region switch 75c. After that, it flows into the discharge passage 76. As described above, the ball that has flowed into the discharge passage 76 is detected by the discharge switch 76a provided in the discharge passage 76, and is discharged to the outside of the attacker unit 71.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the ball winning from the second variable winning device 74 can reach the arrangement position of the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a while the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a is open. While it is configured to be detectable by the area switch 75c, the ball winning from the first variable winning device 72 cannot reach the arrangement position of the probability changing area opening / closing plate 75a while the probability changing area opening / closing plate 75a is open. , It is configured to be undetectable by the probability change area switch 75c. With this configuration, the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 (hereinafter, the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are collectively referred to as "variable winning device 74" during one jackpot. By alternately opening the devices 72, 74 "), the closing period (hereinafter," interval period ") of the variable winning devices 72, 74 for dividing the round is reduced to one jackpot. While reducing the time required and quickly imparting game value to the player, the probability-changing areas 75 are shared by the variable winning devices 72 and 74 of the second, and the probability-changing areas 75 and discharge are provided for each of the variable winning devices 72 and 74. It is not necessary to provide the passage 76, the number of parts of the attacker unit 71 can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening (not shown) that is opened and closed separately from the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 is provided in the game area, and the second LED group 37b corresponding to the big hit is lit in the special symbol display device 37. In this case, the large opening is opened for a predetermined time, and the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 is triggered by a ball winning a prize in the large opening during the opening of the large opening for a predetermined time. A gaming state that is released a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special gaming state. Further, a game in which only one variable winning device is provided in the game area, and when the second LED group 37b corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the special symbol display device 37, the one variable winning device is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times. The state may be formed as a special gaming state.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. A normal symbol gate 67 is provided above the front view of the attacker unit 71 and on the right side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80 described later. The ordinary symbol gate 67 is provided with a through hole (not shown) for the ball to pass through in the vertical direction. When the ball passes through the normal symbol gate 67, the normal symbol switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and the main control device 110 performs a winning lottery for the normal symbol due to the turning on. It should be noted that the ordinary symbol gate 67 only serves as a lottery opportunity for the variable display of the ordinary symbol, and is configured so that the prize balls and the like are not paid out even when the balls pass.

As described above, the starting port unit 64 is provided with a normal electric service 64c. The ordinary electric service 64c is mainly composed of a rotating plate and a rotating solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the rotating plate.

The main control device 110 of the first embodiment normally keeps the rotating plate of the ordinary electric service 64c in an upright state and covers the left and right sides of the second starting port 64b to reach the second starting port 64b. The inflow of balls is prevented. Then, when a hit is won by the variable display of the normal symbol, the rotating solenoid (not shown) is driven for a predetermined time, and the rotating plate of the ordinary electric service 64c is upright for the predetermined time. It is driven to the open state (tilted state) tilted to the right by a predetermined angle (for example, 45 degrees) from the state to allow the ball to flow into the second starting port 64b, and flows down in the vicinity of the starting port unit 64. It is configured so that the ball can easily win a prize in the second starting port 64b, that is, a winning assisting state.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that the probability of winning in the variable display of the normal symbol changes according to the game state. Specifically, in the "normal game state" or the "probability change state without time reduction", the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to the low probability state (for example, 1/10), and it is difficult to win in the variable display of the normal symbol. Therefore, the rotating plate of the ordinary electric service 64c is made difficult to be in an open state (tilted state) so that it is difficult to win a prize in the second starting port 64b. On the other hand, in the "time reduction state" or the "probability change state with time reduction", the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to the high probability state (for example, 9/10), and it is easy to win in the variable display of the normal symbol. The rotating plate of the electric service 64c is easily opened (tilted), and the second starting port 64b can be easily won a prize.

In addition, instead of changing the hit probability of the normal symbol from the "normal game state" or the "probability change state without time reduction" such as "time reduction state" or "probability change state with time reduction", it depends on the game state of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the time for the rotating plate of the ordinary electric service 64c to rotate and the number of times for the rotating plate of the ordinary electric service 64c to rotate may be changed at one time. Specifically, in the "probability change state with time reduction" or "time reduction state", the time for the rotating plate of the normal electric service 64c to rotate may be longer than that in the "normal game state" or "probability change state without time reduction". The number of times that the rotating plate of the ordinary electric service 64c rotates in one hit may be made larger than that in the "normal game state" or the "time saving no probability change state". In addition, in the "probability change state with time reduction" or "time reduction state", the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased, the rotation time of the rotating plate of the normal electric service 64c is lengthened, and the rotation of the normal electric service 64c is increased. At least two of the number of rotations of the plate may be increased at the same time.

The variable display device unit 80 is arranged from the central portion of the game area to the right side area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by a ball entering the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (starting prize), and changes in the third symbol while synchronizing with the dynamic display in the special symbol display device 37. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") for producing an effect, and an LED for variably displaying a normal symbol triggered by the passage of a ball of a normal symbol gate 67. A symbol display device 83 is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 17-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 8) described later, for example, left, middle, and right. Three symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 7) are displayed.

Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 7) is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row Z1 to Z3 to display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is designed to be displayed variably. The third symbol display device 81 of the first embodiment is commonly used in the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol, and is used for controlling the main control device 110. While the accompanying game state is displayed by the special symbol display device 37, the decorative display corresponding to the display of the special symbol display device 37 is performed by using the third symbol of the third symbol display device 81. It is a thing. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 7A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 7B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", of which odd numbers ("1", "3", "5", "7", The main design with "9") has a large number added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers ("0", "2", "4", "6", "8") are the characters such as the kimono, the furoshiki, and the helmet that almost fill the front of the wooden box. A model attached symbol is added, and an even number is added so that an even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery result of any of the special symbols by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 8) described later is a big hit, a variable effect in which the same main symbols are aligned is produced. It is configured so that a big hit will occur after the fluctuation production is finished. When the jackpot type of "probability variation A" to be described later is won, a variation effect is performed in which the main symbols with the numbers "7" (corresponding to the "probability variation notification symbol") are aligned. On the other hand, jackpot types other than "probability fluctuation A" described later, that is, "time reduction A", "time reduction B", "time reduction C", "latent probability fluctuation A", "latent probability fluctuation B" or "latent probability fluctuation C" If you win the jackpot type of "", the main symbol with a number other than the number "7", that is, the main symbol with the numbers "1" to "6", "8" or "9" ("" A variation effect is performed in which (corresponding to the non-probability change notification symbol) is aligned. With this configuration, the player can identify the type of jackpot that occurs by simply checking the main symbols (excluding the main symbols with the number "7") aligned in the variable effect. Can not.

As shown in FIG. 7A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into three in the vertical direction, and the lower two-thirds are reserved with the main display area Dm that fluctuates the third symbol. It is composed of a cockpit display area Db that displays the number of balls and the like, and the other upper 1/3 is a sub-display area Ds that displays a notice effect, a character, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right. The left symbol column Z1 is displayed in the display area Dm1, and the middle symbol column Z2 is displayed in the display area Dm2. The right symbol column Z3 is displayed in the display area Dm3.

In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending order (or descending order) of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variation effect is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3, the arrangement of numbers may be different from each other. For example, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols may be arranged so as to appear in descending order, while in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols may appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol is placed on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each variation effect. Stop is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols; hereinafter referred to as "big hit display") is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, while the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) is performing the variation effect (dynamic display) of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the sphere is displayed. When a ball enters the 1 start port 64a, the number of times the ball is entered (the number of reserved balls) is held up to 4 times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, and the special figures 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d of the first reserved symbol display area Db1 corresponding to the first special symbol of the cockpit display area Db. Also shown. In the special figure 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, one reserved symbol (“○” symbol in the normal display mode) for each reserved ball of the first special symbol (the number of reserved balls is one). White circle symbols)) are displayed, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of reserved symbols displayed in the special figures 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d.

That is, in the special figure 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, when one reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. Is one time, and when two reserved symbols are displayed in the special figure 1 first and second reserved symbol display areas Db1a and Db1b, one for each, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed. Indicates that is twice, and when a total of three reserved symbols are displayed in each of the special figure 1 first to third reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1c, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed. Is 3 times, and when a total of 4 reserved symbols are displayed in the special figure 1 1st to 4th reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the 1st special symbol is displayed. Indicates that is 4 times. Further, when the reserved symbols are not displayed in the special figure 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 0 and there is a holding variable effect. Indicates not to.

Further, while the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) is performing the variation effect (dynamic display) of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the sphere is displayed. 2 When a ball enters the starting port 64b, the number of times the ball is entered (the number of reserved balls) is held up to 4 times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, and the special figures 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d of the second reserved symbol display area Db2 corresponding to the second special symbol of the cockpit display area Db. Also shown. In the special drawing 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d, one reserved symbol (“○” symbol in the normal display mode) for each reserved ball (one reserved ball) of the second special symbol White circle symbols)) are displayed, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of reserved symbols displayed in the special figures 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d.

That is, in the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d, when one reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol Is one time, and when a total of two reserved symbols are displayed in the special figure 2 first and second reserved symbol display areas Db2a and Db2b, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is displayed. 2 is the number of times, and when a total of 3 reserved symbols are displayed in the special figure 2 1st to 3rd reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2c, the number of reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol is displayed. Is 3 times, and when a total of 4 reserved symbols are displayed in the special figure 2 1st to 4th reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d, the number of reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol is displayed. Indicates that is 4 times. Further, when the reserved symbols are not displayed in the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 and there is a variable effect of being reserved. Indicates not to.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time, and only one of the lottery games is executed. It is configured in. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when any of the running lottery games is completed and the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the reserved balls of the second special symbol are stored, respectively, The second lottery game of the second special symbol is preferentially executed (so-called special figure 2 priority change) over the first lottery game of the first special symbol. The lottery game may be executed in the order of winning, or the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol may be executed at the same time.

In the central portion of the cockpit display area Db, an execution symbol display area Db0 for displaying an execution symbol indicating that the variation effect is executed in the main display area Dm is provided. The execution symbol display area Db0 is provided in the central portion of the cockpit display area Db, that is, on the right side of the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a and on the left side of the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a. It is configured to display execution symbols larger than each reserved symbol displayed in the reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d and Db2a to Db2d. Further, in the execution symbol display area Db0, the reserved symbol displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a or the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a is moved (shifted) and displayed as an execution symbol. To.

The execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is deleted when the variation effect is completed, and along with the deletion of the execution symbol, the displayed reserved symbol is on the lower side (on the right side if it is the first special symbol, the first). 2 If it is a special symbol, it will be moved and displayed as a reserved symbol (on the left). Specifically, for example, in a situation where the reserved symbol of the second special symbol does not exist and there are four reserved symbols of the first special symbol, the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol ends. When the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is deleted, when the reservation symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a, as the execution symbol in the execution symbol display area Db0. It is displayed by moving (shifting). Further, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a. Further, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 third reserved symbol display area Db1c, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b. Further, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 fourth reserved symbol display area Db1d, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the special figure 1 third reserved symbol display area Db1c.

Further, for example, in a situation where there are four reserved symbols of the second special symbol, the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is deleted with the end of the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. When this is done, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the execution symbol in the execution symbol display area Db0. Further, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 2 second reserved symbol display area Db2b, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a. Further, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 2 third reserved symbol display area Db2c, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the special figure 2 second reserved symbol display area Db2b. Further, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 2 fourth reserved symbol display area Db2d, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the special figure 2 third reserved symbol display area Db2c.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the execution symbol is continuously displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 while the variation effect is being executed in the main display area Dm (in the variation element of "super reach" or "special reach". Except in the variable elements of). On the other hand, when the variation effect is completed, or when the variation element of "super reach" or the variation element of "special reach" is being executed, the execution symbol is deleted. That is, when the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, it indicates that the variation effect is being executed (continued) in the main display area Dm, and the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0. If not, it indicates that the variation effect is not executed (not continued) in the main display area Dm, or the variation element of "super reach" or the variation element of "special reach" is executed.

Further, in the cockpit display area Db, the "hold change notice" can be executed by using the hold symbol and the execution symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db. This "hold change notice" is to change the display color of the hold symbol and the execution symbol in a plurality of stages from before the execution of the variation effect to during the execution of the jackpot expectation of the variation effect executed in the main display area Dm. It is a notice suggested by.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as a "hold change notice", the display colors of the hold symbol and the execution symbol are displayed from "white", which is a normal display mode, to "blue", which is a blue display mode, and red. It is configured to be changeable to the "red" aspect or the "rainbow color" of the rainbow-colored display aspect. This pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the selection ratio of the display color of the reserved symbol and the executed symbol is different when the "big hit display" occurs in the variable effect or when the "reach display" occurs. By changing the display color of the reserved symbol and the executed symbol from the normal display mode (“white”) to another display mode (for example, “blue”), the variation effect indicated by the reserved symbol and the executed symbol becomes “ It is possible to suggest to the player for each display color the possibility that "reach display" or "big hit display" may occur.

Specifically, in the "holding change notice", the variation indicated by the holding symbol and the executing symbol when the holding symbol and the execution symbol are displayed in the "blue" mode rather than the normal display mode ("white"). In the production, the ratio of "reach display" and "big hit display" is set high. In addition, when the reserved symbol and the executed symbol have a display mode of "red" rather than "blue", the ratio of "reach display" or "big hit display" is higher in the variation effect indicated by the reserved symbol and the executed symbol. Set. Furthermore, when the reserved symbol and the executed symbol have a display mode of "rainbow color" rather than "red", the ratio of "reach display" or "big hit display" in the variation effect indicated by the reserved symbol and the executed symbol is higher. Set high.

In addition, when the display mode of the reserved symbol and the executed symbol is "red", the mode of the effect mainly "super reach" in the variable effect indicated by the "red" reserved symbol or the executed symbol (mainly). The mode of production may be referred to as "directed mode") or "special reach" directed mode (hereinafter, "super reach" directed mode or "special reach" directed mode may be collectively referred to as "super reach or higher" directed mode. ) Is set to be confirmed. Further, when the display mode of the reserved symbol and the executed symbol is "rainbow color", the appearance of the "big hit display" is set to be confirmed in the variable effect indicated by the reserved symbol or the executed symbol of the "rainbow color". Has been done. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the display modes of the reserved symbol and the executed symbol are "reach display" and "big hit display" in the order of normal ("white") → "blue" → "red" → "rainbow color". It is set so that the degree of expectation for the appearance of is high.

It should be noted that the display mode of "rainbow color" in the "hold change notice" is set so that it does not appear in the hold symbol but can appear only in the execution symbol. This is because, after the display mode of "rainbow color" in which the occurrence of the jackpot is confirmed in the reserved symbol is displayed, if the reserved symbol is not executed due to some abnormality (for example, power off), the player gains. Dissatisfaction arises because the jackpot that should be done is not obtained. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned dissatisfaction from occurring by configuring the reserved symbol so that the display mode of "rainbow color" in which the occurrence of the jackpot is confirmed does not appear in advance.

In addition, when the reserved symbol shifts due to the execution (digestion) of the variation effect in the state where the displayed mode of the reserved symbol has changed due to this "hold change notice", the displayed mode of the changed reserved symbol shifts. It is configured to be inherited (inherited) and reflected in the previous reserved symbol or executed symbol. That is, when the display mode of the reserved symbol changes, even when the changed reserved symbol shifts to another reserved symbol display area Db1 to Db3 or the executed symbol display area Db0 with the execution of the variation effect, the display before the shift is performed. The mode is configured to be maintained as it is as the display mode of the reserved symbol or the executed symbol after the shift.

Therefore, for example, when the display color of the reserved symbol changes to "red" in the special figure 1 fourth reserved symbol display area Db1d, the reserved symbol changes from the special figure 1 third reserved symbol display area Db1c to the special figure 1 second reserved. When shifting from the symbol display area Db1b → special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a → execution symbol display area Db0, the “red” reserved symbol or execution symbol is configured to be continuously displayed. To.

In the first embodiment, the number of reserved balls for the variable effect based on the entry into the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b is configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is set. The number of balls is not limited to four, and may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). Further, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls ( For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, it is not necessary to display the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81. If the third symbol display device 81 does not display the information regarding the number of reserved balls (reserved symbols, etc.), the "reserved change notice" by the reserved symbols cannot be executed, so other character symbols, etc. are additionally added. By making it appear, it may be configured to execute a look-ahead notice similar to the "pending change notice".

Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls, which are equal to the maximum number of hold lamps of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and hold balls are provided according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state. It may display a number. When the number of reserved balls is displayed by the hold lamp, it is natural that the same look-ahead notice as the "hold change notice" of the first embodiment is executed by providing a plurality of display colors of the hold lamp. Is possible.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. The small areas Ds1 to Ds3 are areas for displaying a character and a preview effect image, respectively. The images displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 give the player a feeling of expectation that will be a big hit as a result of the variation effect performed in the main display area Dm. The cockpit display area Db includes a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) for which the variation effect has not been executed among the balls entered in the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. This is an area for displaying the execution symbol related to the fluctuation effect during execution.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 7B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, in the left small area Ds1, a moving image such as the appearance of a notice symbol is displayed, and the variation effect performed in the main display area Dm is in a state where it is easier to transition to a jackpot than usual. Suggested to the player.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, in the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a headband in the first embodiment) normally performs a predetermined operation, and the variation effect is performed in the main display area Dm. Based on this, a special action other than the predetermined action is performed, the color of the boy's hair, which is usually black, or the color of the headband, which is usually white, changes, or another character appears. Is done.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, in the right small area Ds3, a level meter (not shown) that gradually suggests whether or not a big hit occurs in the fluctuation effect performed in the main display area Dm appears. Is displayed. This level meter increases (adds) each time the expected occurrence of "reach display" and the expected jackpot in the running fluctuation effect increase based on the appearance of the notice symbol etc. in the variation effect. It is configured to suggest that the jackpot is confirmed when the display limit (MAX display) of the level meter is reached. Therefore, the sub-display area Ds has a function of suggesting the occurrence of "reach display" in the main display area Dm.

Returning to FIG. 3, the description will be continued. The ordinary symbol display device 83 performs variable display in which a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as display symbols (ordinary symbols) are alternately lit each time the sphere passes through the ordinary symbol gate 67. .. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the first embodiment), the ordinary electric service 64c is in an operating state according to the gaming state ( The rotating plate is rotated).

The number of reserved balls of the normal symbol gate 67 is held up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is lit and displayed on the normal symbol holding lamp 84. Four ordinary symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps 84, and are arranged above the third symbol display device 81. Then, the number of holds is displayed according to the number of lights of the normal symbol hold lamp 84.

The variable display of the normal symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the normal symbol display device 83 as in the first embodiment, and the special symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. It may be done by using a part of 81. Similarly, the normal symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, as with the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, and the passage of the normal symbol gate 67 is not limited to four times, but is three times or less, or five times or more. It may be set to the number of times (for example, 8 times). Further, when the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, the normal symbol holding lamp 84 may not be used to display the lighting.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that do not enter any of the winning openings (entrance openings) 63, 64a, 64b, and 71 are guided through the out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). Further, as described above, the ball flowing into the out port 66 is detected by the out switch 66a (see FIG. 8) arranged on the collecting plate (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13. It is configured to be able to detect that a ball hit into the game area is discharged out of the game area. Further, the balls that have entered each of the winning openings (entrance openings) 63, 64a, 64b, and 71 are aggregated by the collecting plate and detected by the out switch 66a. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted as means for changing the flow direction in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill as a means for changing the flow direction ) Is arranged.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a read-only memory (Read Only Memory; hereinafter abbreviated as “ROM”) 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and controls stored in the ROM 202. Random Access Memory (hereinafter abbreviated as "RAM") 203, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing a program, and other interrupt circuits and timer circuits. Various circuits such as a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, the main pachinko machines 10 include a jackpot lottery, setting of dynamic display and variation effect in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results of variable display in the normal symbol display device 83. Perform various processes. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer 203c for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Further, the ROM 202 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a hold number table 202c, a stop pattern table 202d, a variation pattern table 202e, a big winning opening opening / closing table 202f, and a probability variation area opening / closing table 202g. The main control device 110 executes the above-mentioned main control by the various counters stored in the RAM 203 and the various tables stored in the ROM 202.

Here, with reference to FIG. 9, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like can be used for a big hit lottery, a dynamic display setting of the special symbol display device 37, a variation effect setting of the third symbol display device 81, a lottery of the variable display display result of the normal symbol display device 83, and the like. To do so, it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Further, in the description of the various counters, various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will also be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 13.

For the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display setting of the special symbol display device 37, and the setting of the variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the stop type of the jackpot symbol are used. The jackpot type counter C2 used for selection, the stop pattern selection counter C3 used for selecting the effect mode of the fluctuation effect, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the fluctuation pattern selection. The variable type counter CS1 used for is used.

Further, the random number counter C4 per normal figure is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to "0".

Each counter is updated, for example, at "4 ms" intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), and some counters are irregular in the main process (see FIG. 35). Is updated to, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203c set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 includes a first holding ball storage area 203d composed of four holding areas (first holding first to fourth areas) related to the first special symbol, and four holding areas related to the second special symbol. A second reserved ball storage area 203e composed of areas (second reserved first to fourth areas) is provided, and each of these areas has a ball entering the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. Each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is stored according to the timing.

Each counter will be described in detail. The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 899") and reaches the maximum value (for example, "899" in the case of a counter that can take a value of "0 to 899"). After reaching "0", it returns to "0". In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated from the initial value. Will be done.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the jackpot random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of "0 to 899", the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of "0 to 899". The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 35).

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64a (starting winning), it is provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting port 64a (first special symbol). 1st Hold Stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of any of the 1st hold areas 1 to 4. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting opening 64b (starting winning), it is provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting opening 64b (second special symbol). 2nd Hold Stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of any of the 2nd hold areas 1 to 4.

The value of the random number for which the jackpot random number counter C1 is a jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the jackpot stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1, 203e1 in the hold area. When the value of the random number counter C1 matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 202a, it is determined to be a jackpot.

Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202. The jackpot random number table 202a is used when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state (a period other than the “probability fluctuation state”) of a special symbol that is a “normal gaming state” or a “time shortening state”. For the probability state and for the high probability state used when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the "probability fluctuation state (during probability change)" which is a high probability state of a special symbol with a higher probability of becoming a big hit than the low probability state. It can be divided into two types: Then, the number of big hit random numbers included in each of the low-probability state and the high-probability state is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of values (big hit random number value) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state is three, and the value "7,307,582" is the jackpot random number. It is stored in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" and the "time reduction state") is set to be 3/900 = 1/300.

On the other hand, the number of random numbers (big hit random numbers) that are jackpots in the high probability state is 9, and the values "28,122,298,390,486,567,656,750,866" are It is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol in the high probability state (that is, the "probability fluctuation state") is set to be 9/900 = 1/100.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number value for the low probability state and the jackpot random number value for the high probability state stored in the jackpot random number table 202a are each jackpot random number value so as not to be duplicated. Is set. Here, if there is a value that becomes a jackpot random number regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the value can be easily predicted from the outside, so that there is a high possibility that the jackpot will be illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in the first embodiment, the jackpot is changed by changing the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state). Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the value of the random number, it is possible to suppress fraud.

Returning to FIG. 9, the description will be continued. The jackpot type counter C2 determines the jackpot type when a jackpot occurs, and is added one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 99"), and the maximum value (for example, "0 to 99") is added. In the case of a counter that can take the value of "", it is configured to return to "0" after reaching "99"). The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64a (starting winning), it is provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting port 64a (first special symbol). Among the first reserved first to fourth areas, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first reserved area as the first reserved area. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting opening 64b (starting winning), it is provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting opening 64b (second special symbol). Among the second hold first to fourth areas, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the same second hold area as the second hold area.

Here, for example, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area 1 in the first holding ball storage area 203d or the second holding ball storage area 203e is not a random number that is a jackpot, that is, it is lost. If it is a random number, the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect and the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") are those at the time of loss. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the 1 hold area in the 1st hold ball storage area 203d or the 2nd hold ball storage area 203e is a random number that becomes a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern or stop in the fluctuation effect. The type is the one at the time of big hit. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined according to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

The value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of "0 to 99". The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in the ROM 202. The jackpot type table 202b includes a jackpot type table 202b1 for special figure 1 referred to in the first lottery game of the first special symbol, and a jackpot type for special figure 2 referred to in the second lottery game of the second special symbol. A table 202b2 is provided.

Here, the jackpot type table 202b1 for special figure 1 and the jackpot type table 202b2 for special figure 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 (a) and 11 (b). FIG. 11A is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot type table 202b1 for special figure 1 corresponding to the first special symbol stored in ROM 202, and FIG. 11B is also stored in ROM 202. It is a figure which shows typically an example of the jackpot type table 202b2 for special figure 2 corresponding to the 2nd special symbol. As shown in FIGS. 11 (a) and 11 (b), the jackpot type table 202b associates the type of the special symbol, the jackpot type according to the type of the special symbol, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2. It is a table.

The probability that each jackpot type will be selected in the event of a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table 202b according to the set probability.

Further, the probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the jackpot type table 202b corresponding to each game state may be prepared, and the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type may be changed in each jackpot type table 202b.

As for the jackpot type, as described above, after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol are both high probabilities until the variation effect of the special symbol is executed 100 times. "Probability fluctuation A" which is a "10R probability variation jackpot" that is in a state (so-called ST100 times and time reduction 100 times) and notifies that it is a "probability fluctuation state", and a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds Later, until the variation effect of the special symbol is executed 100 times, the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol are both in a high probability state (so-called ST 100 times and time reduction 100 times). Between "latent probability fluctuation C", which is a "10R latent probability variation jackpot" that does not notify that it is in a "probability fluctuation state", and after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, until the special symbol variation effect is executed 100 times. , The hit probability of a normal symbol is in a high probability state, but the jackpot probability of a special symbol is in a low probability state (so-called time reduction of 100 times), which is a "time reduction state", which is a "10R time reduction jackpot". After the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 5 rounds, the jackpot probability of the special symbol becomes a high probability state (so-called ST100 times) until the variation effect of the special symbol is executed 100 times, and the special symbol Until the fluctuation effect of is executed 50 times, the hit probability of the normal symbol becomes a high probability state (so-called time reduction 50 times), but the "5R latent probability change jackpot" that does not notify that it is a "probability fluctuation state" "Hidden probability fluctuation A" and "latent probability fluctuation B", and after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 5 rounds, the hit probability of the normal symbol is high until the special symbol variation effect is executed 50 times. "Time saving A" and "Time saving B" which are "5R time saving big hits" that shift to the "time saving state" where the jackpot probability of the special symbol becomes a low probability state (so-called time saving 50 times) is there.

In the jackpot type table 202b1 for special figure 1 and the jackpot type table 202b2 for special figure 2, each jackpot type is associated with a possible value of the jackpot type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type.

In the example of the jackpot type table 202b1 for special figure 1 of FIG. 11A, the value “0 to 19” of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the “time saving A” which is the “5R time saving jackpot”, and also “ The value "20 to 39" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "time saving B" which is "5R time saving jackpot", and the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "latent probability fluctuation A" which is "5R latent probability variation jackpot". The values "40 to 59" are associated with each other, and the value "60 to 79" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the "latent probability fluctuation B" which is also the "5R latent probability variation jackpot", and the "10R probability variation jackpot". The value "80 to 99" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the "probability fluctuation A".

In the winning / failing lottery of the first special symbol in the first embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of any one of the first reserved ball storage areas 203d becomes a jackpot. If it is a value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first holding area is determined from the jackpot type table 202b1 for special figure 1.

For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "15", "time saving A" corresponding to "5R time saving jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "35", the jackpot type counter C2 If "time saving B" corresponding to "5R time saving jackpot" is determined as the type and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "48", "latent probability fluctuation A" corresponding to "5R latent probability variation jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type. Is determined, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "77", the "latent probability fluctuation B" corresponding to the "5R latent probability variation jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "95". If so, the "probability fluctuation A" corresponding to the "10R probability variation jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

That is, when a big hit is won in the first lottery game of the first special symbol (that is, the lottery based on the entry into the first starting port 64a), "time reduction A", "time reduction B", and "latent probability fluctuation" Each jackpot type of "A", "latent probability variation B", and "probability variation A" is configured to be evenly selected at a rate of 20%.

Further, in the example of the jackpot type table 202b2 for special figure 2 of FIG. 11B, the value “0 to 39” of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the “time saving C” which is the “10R time saving jackpot”. The value "40 to 59" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the "latent probability variation C" which is the "10R latent probability variation jackpot", and the jackpot type is associated with the "probability variation A" which is the "10R probability variation jackpot". The values "60 to 99" of the counter C2 are associated with each other.

In the winning / failing lottery of the second special symbol in the first embodiment, the jackpot random number stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of any of the holding areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e is the same as in the winning / failing lottery of the first special symbol. When the value of the counter C1 is a jackpot value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 in the same holding area is the jackpot type table for special figure 2. Determined from 202b2.

For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "10", the "time reduction C" corresponding to the "10R time reduction jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "55", the jackpot type counter C2 is a jackpot. If the "latent probability variation C" corresponding to the "10R latent probability variation jackpot" is determined as the type and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "80", the "probability variation A" corresponding to the "10R probability variation jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type. Is decided.

That is, when a jackpot is won in the second lottery game of the second special symbol (that is, a lottery based on the entry into the second starting port 64b), the jackpot type of "time saving C" is selected at a rate of 40%. The jackpot type of "latent probability variation C" is selected at a rate of 20%, and the jackpot type of "probability variation A" is selected at a rate of 40%.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the lottery game with the second special symbol has a greater game value for the player than the lottery game with the first special symbol, so that the player can do the second. A game of receiving a lottery with a special symbol, that is, whether to enter the ball into the second starting port 64b rather than entering the first starting port 64a is born, and variations are provided in the game to enhance the interest of the game. ..

Here, the opening patterns of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 (big winning openings) and the opening patterns of the probability variation region 75 in each jackpot type will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the jackpot of each special symbol is won, each round (1 round to 5 rounds, or 1 round to 10 rounds) at the time of the jackpot is based on the jackpot type of the jackpot. The same applies hereinafter.) The opening patterns of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 (driving patterns of the first opening / closing plate 72a and the second opening / closing plate 74a) are set for each round, and the opening patterns of the probability variation region 75 (probability variation region) for each round are set. The drive pattern of the opening / closing plate 75a) is set.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 corresponding to the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the opening / closing pattern is set to "X1" in "time saving A", and " In "Time saving B", the opening / closing pattern is set to be "X2", and in "Hidden probability fluctuation A", the opening / closing pattern is set to be "X1" as in "Time saving A", and "Hidden probability fluctuation B". In ", the opening / closing pattern is set to be" X2 "as in" time saving B ", and in" probability fluctuation A ", the opening / closing pattern is set to" Y1 "(see FIG. 11A). ). Further, as the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 corresponding to each jackpot type of the second special symbol, the opening / closing pattern is set to be "Y2" in "Time saving C", and in "Hidden probability fluctuation C", Similar to "Time saving C", the opening / closing pattern is set to be "Y2", and in "probability variation A", the opening / closing pattern is set to "Y1" (see FIG. 11B).

Here, with reference to FIG. 12, the opening / closing patterns of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 for each jackpot type will be described. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the large winning opening opening / closing table 202f. The big winning opening opening / closing table 202f shown in FIG. 12 shows the variable winning devices 72 and 74 that are opened in each round for each big hit type in each special symbol, and the front view of the attacker unit 71 for each round. When the first variable winning device 72 arranged on the right side is opened, it is expressed as "right", and when the second variable winning device 74 arranged on the left side of the front view of the attacker unit 71 is opened, "right" is expressed. "Left" is expressed. In the first embodiment, when one of the variable winning devices 72, 74 (for example, the first variable winning device 72) is open, the other variable winning device 74, 72 (for example, the second variable winning device 72) is open. 74) is configured to be closed, and only one of the variable winning devices 72, 74 is opened, and at the same time, the two variable winning devices 72, 74 are not opened.

As shown in FIG. 12, the opening / closing patterns “X1” of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 corresponding to the jackpot types “time saving A” and “latent probability fluctuation A”, which are jackpots of a maximum of 5 rounds of the first special symbol, are In odd rounds (ie, 1 round, 3 rounds and 5 rounds), the "right", i.e., the first variable winning device 72 is opened so that balls can flow into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72. At the same time, the second variable winning device 74 is closed, and the ball cannot flow into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74.

Further, the opening / closing pattern "X1" is "left" in even-numbered rounds (that is, 2nd round and 4th round), that is, the second variable winning device 74 is opened and the attacker unit 71 is inside the second variable winning device 74. The ball can flow into the attacker unit 71, and the first variable winning device 72 is closed, so that the ball cannot flow into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72.

That is, in the opening / closing pattern "X1", the ball can flow into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72 in the first round of the jackpot, and the attacker from the second variable winning device 74 in the next round (that is, the second round). Balls can flow into the unit 71, and then alternately from the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 into the attacker unit 71 for each round until the end of the jackpot (that is, the end of the fifth round). The ball can flow in. Therefore, the number of open rounds of the first variable winning device 72 is "3", and the number of open rounds of the second variable winning device 74 is "2".

Next, as shown in FIG. 12, the opening / closing patterns "X2" of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 corresponding to the jackpot types "time saving B" and "latent probability fluctuation B", which are jackpots of a maximum of 5 rounds of the first special symbol. In odd rounds (ie, 1 round, 3 rounds and 5 rounds), "left", that is, the second variable winning device 74 is opened and a ball flows into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74. At the same time, the first variable winning device 72 is closed, and the ball cannot flow into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72.

Further, the opening / closing pattern "X2" is "right" in even-numbered rounds (that is, 2nd round and 4th round), that is, the first variable winning device 72 is opened and the attacker unit 71 is inside the first variable winning device 72. The second variable winning device 74 is closed, and the ball cannot flow into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74.

That is, in the opening / closing pattern "X2", the ball can flow into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 in the first round of the jackpot, and the attacker from the first variable winning device 72 in the next round (that is, the second round). Balls can flow into the unit 71, and then alternately from the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 into the attacker unit 71 for each round until the end of the jackpot (that is, the end of the fifth round). The ball can flow in. Therefore, the number of open rounds of the first variable winning device 72 is "2", and the number of open rounds of the second variable winning device 74 is "3".

Next, as shown in FIG. 12, the opening / closing patterns "Y1" of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 corresponding to the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", which is a jackpot of a maximum of 10 rounds of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, are , In odd rounds (ie, 1 round, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, 7 rounds and 9 rounds), the "left", i.e., the second variable winning device 74 is opened and the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74. The ball can flow into the attacker unit 71, and the first variable winning device 72 is closed, so that the ball cannot flow into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72.

Further, the opening / closing pattern "Y1" is "right" in even-numbered rounds (that is, 2 rounds, 4 rounds, 6 rounds, 8 rounds and 10 rounds), that is, the first variable winning device 72 is opened and the first variable winning device 72 is opened. The ball can flow into the attacker unit 71 from the variable winning device 72, and the second variable winning device 74 is closed, so that the ball cannot flow into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74. ing.

That is, in the opening / closing pattern "Y1", the ball can flow into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 in the first round of the jackpot, and the attacker from the first variable winning device 72 in the next round (that is, the second round). Balls can flow into the unit 71, and then alternately from the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 into the attacker unit 71 for each round until the end of the jackpot (that is, the end of the 10th round). The ball can flow in. Therefore, the number of open rounds of the first variable winning device 72 is "5", and the number of open rounds of the second variable winning device 74 is "5".

Next, as shown in FIG. 12, the variable winning devices 72 and 74 corresponding to the jackpot types "time saving C" and "latent probability fluctuation C", which are jackpots of up to 10 rounds of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The opening / closing pattern "Y2" is "right" in odd rounds (ie, 1 round, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, 7 rounds and 9 rounds), that is, the first variable winning device 72 is opened and the first variable winning device 72 is opened. The ball can flow into the attacker unit 71 from the device 72, and the second variable winning device 74 is closed, so that the ball cannot flow into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74. ..

Further, the opening / closing pattern "Y2" is "left" in even-numbered rounds (that is, 2 rounds, 4 rounds, 6 rounds, 8 rounds and 10 rounds), that is, the second variable winning device 74 is opened and the second variable winning device 74 is opened. The ball can flow into the attacker unit 71 from the variable winning device 74, and the first variable winning device 72 is closed, so that the ball cannot flow into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72. ing.

That is, in the opening / closing pattern "Y2", the ball can flow into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72 in the first round of the jackpot, and the attacker from the second variable winning device 74 in the next round (that is, the second round). Balls can flow into the unit 71, and then alternately from the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 into the attacker unit 71 for each round until the end of the jackpot (that is, the end of the 10th round). The ball can flow in. Therefore, the number of open rounds of the first variable winning device 72 is "5", and the number of open rounds of the second variable winning device 74 is "5".

In this way, the jackpot types (that is, the jackpot types "time saving A" and "latent probability fluctuation A", the jackpot types "time saving B" and "latent probability fluctuation B", and the jackpot type "time saving C" have the same opening and closing patterns. ”And“ latent probability fluctuation C ”), respectively, so that the jackpot type cannot be determined only by the opening / closing patterns of the variable winning devices 72 and 74, making it difficult for the player to recognize which jackpot type has been won. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by configuring it (impossible) and creating a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played.

Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, "time saving A", "latent probability fluctuation B", and "time saving C" are used as opening patterns of the probability variation region 75 corresponding to each jackpot type of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Is set so that the opening pattern is "A", and "time saving B", "latent probability fluctuation A" and "latent probability fluctuation C" are set so that the opening pattern is "B", and "probability fluctuation A" is set. ", The opening pattern is set to be" C "(see FIGS. 11 (a) and 11 (b)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 13, the opening pattern of the probability variation region 75 for each jackpot type will be described. FIG. 13 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the probability variation region opening / closing table 202g. The probability variation area opening / closing table 202g shown in FIG. 13 indicates whether or not the probability variation area 75 is opened for each round in each jackpot type in each special symbol, and when the probability variation area 75 is opened, ". It is expressed as "open", and when the probability variation region 75 is closed without being opened, it is expressed as a blank.

In addition, in the jackpot type in which the corresponding round is not performed (“time saving A”, “time saving B”, “latent probability fluctuation A” and “latent probability fluctuation B” in which the 6th round or later is not performed), in the round not executed, “ -"Is expressed.

As shown in FIG. 13, the jackpot types "time reduction A" and "latent probability fluctuation B" of the first special symbol, and the opening pattern "A" of the probability variation region 75 in the jackpot type "time reduction C" of the second special symbol are In the first and third rounds, the probability variation region 75 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds from the start of opening the variable winning devices 72 and 74), and then in the round, the probability variation region 75 is closed. The effective pattern "A" is set so that the probability variation region 75 is maintained in the closed state in the other rounds (that is, the second round, the fourth round, and the fifth round).

That is, in the case of the opening pattern "A" of the probability variation region 75, the "probability fluctuation state" is given after the jackpot ends by the ball passing through the probability variation region 75 opened in the first round or the third round. ..

Here, the jackpot types "time reduction A" and "time reduction C" are the time until the ball flowing into the attacker unit 71 reaches the probability variation region 75 in the first round and the third round in which the probability variation region 75 is opened. The first variable winning device 72 is open for a long time (for example, about 3.3 seconds or more). Therefore, even if the probability variation region 75 is opened in the first and third rounds of the jackpot types "time reduction A" and "time reduction C", the ball winning the first variable winning device 72 is the probability variation region 75. By the time it reaches the arrangement position, the opening time of the probability variation region 75 has expired and the probability variation region 75 has been closed, so that the ball does not flow into the probability variation region 75. Therefore, it is configured so that the "probability fluctuation state" does not occur after the end of the jackpot.

In the jackpot types "time reduction A" and "time reduction C", the second variable winning device 74 has a short time (for example, about 1.0 second) for the ball flowing into the attacker unit 71 to reach the probability variation region. , The probability variation region 75 is set to be opened in the closed 2nd and 4th rounds.

On the other hand, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B", in the first and third rounds in which the probability variation region 75 is opened, the time required for the ball flowing into the attacker unit 71 to reach the probability variation region 75 is short. The variable winning device 74 is open. Therefore, in the first and third rounds of the jackpot types "time reduction A" and "time reduction C", when the probability variation region 75 is opened, the ball winning the second variable winning device 74 is placed at the probability variation region 75 arrangement position. The probability variation region 75 is maintained in the open state at the timing of reaching the probability variation region 75, and the ball can flow into the probability variation region 75. Therefore, the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B" is configured so that a "probability fluctuation state" can occur after the jackpot ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13, the opening pattern of the probability variation region 75 in the jackpot type “time saving B” and “latent probability variation A” of the first special symbol and the jackpot type “latent probability variation C” of the second special symbol. In "B", the probability variation region 75 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds from the opening start of the variable winning devices 72 and 74) in the second and fourth rounds, and then the probability variation region 75 is closed in the round. To. The effective pattern "B" is set so that the probability variation region 75 is maintained in the closed state in the other rounds (that is, the 1st round, the 3rd round, and the 5th round).

That is, in the case of the opening pattern "B" of the probability variation region 75, the "probability fluctuation state" is given after the jackpot ends by the ball passing through the probability variation region 75 opened in the second or fourth round. ..

Here, in the jackpot type "time reduction B", in the second and fourth rounds in which the probability variation region 75 is opened, it takes a long time for the ball flowing into the attacker unit 71 to reach the probability variation region 75 (for example,). (Approximately 3.3 seconds or more) The first variable winning device 72 is open. Therefore, in the second and fourth rounds of the jackpot type "time saving B", even if the probability variation region 75 is opened, the ball winning the first variable winning device 72 reaches the probability variation region 75 arrangement position. By the time this is done, the opening time of the probability variation region 75 has expired and the probability variation region 75 has been closed, so that the ball does not flow into the probability variation region 75. Therefore, it is configured so that the "probability fluctuation state" does not occur after the end of the jackpot.

In the jackpot type "time saving B", the second variable winning device 74 has a short time (for example, about 1.0 second) for the ball flowing into the attacker unit 71 to reach the probability variation region 75. Is set to be open in the closed rounds 1, 3, and 5.

On the other hand, in the jackpot types "latent probability fluctuation A" and "latent probability fluctuation C", the ball flowing into the attacker unit 71 reaches the probabilistic region 75 in the second and fourth rounds when the probabilistic region 75 is opened. The second variable winning device 74, which takes a short time to complete, is open. Therefore, in the second and fourth rounds of the jackpot types "latent probability fluctuation A" and "latent probability fluctuation C", when the probability variation region 75 is opened, the ball that wins the second variable winning device 74 is the probability variation region. The probabilistic region 75 is maintained in the open state at the timing of reaching the 75 arrangement position, and the ball can flow into the probabilistic region 75. Therefore, the jackpot types "latent probability fluctuation A" and "latent probability fluctuation C" are configured so that a "probability fluctuation state" can occur after the jackpot ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13, the opening pattern “C” of the probability variation region 75 in the jackpot type “probability variation A” of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is in the first round, the third round, and the ninth round. The probability variation region 75 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds from the opening start of the variable winning devices 72 and 74), and then the probability variation region 75 is closed in the round. The effective pattern "C" is set so that the probability variation region 75 is maintained in the closed state in other rounds (that is, 2 rounds, 4 rounds to 8 rounds, and 10 rounds).

That is, in the case of the opening pattern "C" of the probability variation region 75, the ball passes through the probability variation region 75 opened in the first round, the third round, or the ninth round, so that the "probability fluctuation state" is reached after the jackpot ends. Is given.

Here, the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A" is the time until the ball flowing into the attacker unit 71 reaches the probability variation region 75 in the first round, the third round, and the ninth round in which the probability variation region 75 is opened. The second variable winning device 74, which is short, is open. Therefore, in the first round, the third round, and the ninth round of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", when the probability variation region 75 is opened, the ball winning the second variable winning device 74 is placed at the probability variation region 75 arrangement position. The probability variation region 75 is maintained in the open state at the timing of reaching the probability variation region 75, and the ball can flow into the probability variation region 75. Therefore, the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A" is configured so that a "probability fluctuation state" can occur after the jackpot ends.

In this way, in each jackpot type, the variable winning devices 72 and 74 that are opened in each round are set, and the opening or closing of the probability variation region 75 is set corresponding to the round. Then, the jackpot type cannot be determined only by the opening patterns of the variable winning devices 72 and 74, so that it is difficult (impossible) for the player to recognize which jackpot type is won, and in which game state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a playability that makes the player guess whether the game is being played.

Further, in the first embodiment, when a jackpot type that generates a "probability fluctuation state" is won after the jackpot ends, the second variable winning device 74 is a round in which the probability variation region 75 is opened in a plurality of rounds in the jackpot. Is configured to be open. Therefore, even if the ball cannot pass through the probability variation region 75 in any one round in which the probability variation region 75 is open, by opening the probability variation region 75 again in the other round, the probability variation region 75 can be opened again. It is possible to pass the sphere through the probability variation region 75. Therefore, due to a sudden trouble (for example, a game abnormality such as a launch abnormality, a player's poor physical condition, etc.), there is a problem in passing the ball to the probability change area 75 in one round in which the probability change area 75 is opened. Even in such a case, by opening the probability variation region 75 again in another round and providing the possibility of passing the ball through the probability variation region 75, the player is comfortable without suffering a disadvantage due to an unexpected situation. The game can be realized, and the interest of the game can be improved. If a ball flows into the probability variation region 75 even once during one big hit, the ball may not flow into the probability variation region 75 in the subsequent rounds.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the jackpot, when the ball passes in the situation where the probability variation region 75 is effectively set, the “probability fluctuation state” is given (generated) after the jackpot ends. It is configured so that the "probability fluctuation state" is not given (generated) even if the sphere passes through the probability variation region 75 which is set to invalid.

Conventionally, when a probability-changing region through which a ball can pass is provided in the attacker unit 71 that is opened at the time of a big hit, the probability-changing region is controlled to open and close by an opening / closing lever or the like, and the ball flowing into the attacker unit 71 passes through the probability-changing region. There is a pachinko machine that generates (give) a "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot ends.

In such a pachinko machine, when a jackpot occurs, the jackpot symbol corresponding to, for example, a "time reduction state" or a "normal gaming state" is not notified to the player whether or not a "probability fluctuation state" occurs. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the like, a "latent probability variation effect mode (that is, a" time saving notification effect mode "or a" normal notification effect mode ". The same shall apply hereinafter)" is performed, and the player is in a "probability fluctuation state". ", But an effect as if a" time reduction state "or a" normal game state "is generated. Then, during the jackpot, the opening / closing lever is controlled to open / close at a predetermined timing based on the jackpot type.

Specifically, for example, in the case of a jackpot type that generates a "probability fluctuation state", the jackpot is controlled by opening and closing the opening / closing lever so that the ball flowing into the attacker unit 71 passes through the probability variation region. It is configured to generate a "probability fluctuation state" after the end. On the other hand, in the case of the jackpot type that does not generate the "probability fluctuation state", the opening / closing lever is controlled to open / close so that the ball flowing into the attacker unit 71 does not pass through the probability variation region, and the "probability fluctuation" is performed after the jackpot ends. It is configured to generate a "time reduction state" or a "normal game state" without generating a "state".

With this configuration, it is difficult (impossible) for the player to recognize whether the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is the "probability fluctuation state", the "time shortening state", or the "normal gaming state". , It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played. Further, even in the "time shortened state" or the "normal gaming state", the player is made to guess that it may be the "probability fluctuation state" (internally) contrary to the production mode, and the game is continuously executed. As a result, the operating rate of the pachinko machine can be improved.

However, since the pachinko machine is configured to generate a "probability fluctuation state" when the sphere passes through the probability variation region even when the "latent probability variation effect mode" is executed, the inside of the attacker unit 71 The player keeps paying attention to whether or not the ball passes through the probabilistic region, and when the player visually recognizes that the ball has passed through the probabilistic region, the player indicates that a "probability fluctuation state" occurs. It will be recognized by, and the expected playability will collapse. In addition, if the player continuously executes the "latent probability change effect mode" after the player recognizes the occurrence of the "probability fluctuation state", the player cannot be given the interest of the game, but rather the game. On the other hand, there is a risk of awakening.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the valid state or the invalid state of the probabilistic region 75 provided in the attacker unit 71 is configured to be switchable, and the probabilistic region is configured for each round of the jackpot according to the jackpot type. The drive control is performed so as to open the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a provided in the probability variation region 75, and the valid or invalid setting of the probability variation region 75 is controlled to be switched (internally) in a state in which the player cannot recognize it. Then, when the sphere passes through the probability variation region 75 that is effectively set during the jackpot, a “probability fluctuation state” is generated after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, even if the sphere passes through the probability variation region 75 which is set to be invalid, the "probability fluctuation state" is not generated after the jackpot ends.

That is, for example, when the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is opened and the sphere can flow into the probability variation region 75, when the probability variation region 75 is effectively set, the sphere presses the probability variation region 75 (probability variation region switch 75c). When it passes, it is configured to generate a "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, when the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is opened and the ball can flow into the probability variation region 75 and the probability variation region 75 is set to be invalid, the sphere passes through the probability variation region 75 (probability variation region switch 75c). However, it is configured so that the "probability fluctuation state" does not occur after the jackpot ends.

With this configuration, even if the sphere passes through the probability variation region 75, if the probability variation region 75 is not effectively set internally, the “probability fluctuation state” does not occur after the jackpot ends, so the probability variation region Even when the player visually recognizes the passage of the ball to 75, it can be configured so that the occurrence of the "probability fluctuation state" is not confirmed after the end of the jackpot. With this configuration, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, even when the "latent probability variation effect mode" is being executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, even if a sphere irregularly flows into the probabilistic region 75 in a situation where the "probability fluctuation state" is not assumed to be given, the probabilistic region 75 is intentionally set to be invalid. It is possible to prevent the game value from being given.

Returning to FIG. 9, the description of various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to, for example, add "1" in order within the range of "0 to 99", reach the maximum value (that is, "99"), and then return to "0".

In the first embodiment, the number of held fluctuation effects and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 determine the rough production mode of the fluctuation effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of jackpot and loss. Be selected. Specifically, only the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode or "non-reach (normal)" effect mode in which "reach display" does not occur and the variable element of "normal reach" as "reach display" are executed. The "normal reach" production mode and the "super reach" production mode in which the variable element of the "normal reach" is executed and the variable element of the "super reach" is executed, and the "special reach" which is also developed from the variable element of the "normal reach". 5 effects modes are selected with the "special reach" effect mode in which the variable element of "" is executed.

Here, each effect mode will be described in detail. Among the production modes, the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode and the "non-reach (normal)" production mode are referred to as "non-reach (normal)" production modes in each display area Dm1 to Dm3 (see FIG. 7A) of the main display area Dm. This is an effect mode in which the same third symbol does not stop in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3 and the "reach display" does not occur after the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation" is performed.

The fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation" is displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 7A) in the fluctuation effect performed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 7) of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol is a variable element that is scrolled downward in the vertical direction of the display screen at high speed. In this "high-speed fluctuation", the third symbol is changed so that the player cannot clearly recognize the display content of the third symbol, and the stop result of the fluctuation effect displayed last time is irregularly mixed (shuffled). Is executed as.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is performed, the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" is performed except for a specific effect mode ("non-reach (shortened)" effect mode). It is configured to be used. The fluctuation element of the "low speed fluctuation" is visually recognized by the player after the fluctuation element of the "high speed fluctuation" in the fluctuation effect performed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 7A) of the third symbol display device 81. A variable element that scrolls the third symbol at a low speed at a possible speed. In the fluctuation element of this "low speed fluctuation", the third symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 7A) while causing the player to recognize the display content of the third symbol. Stop and display the design. When the same third symbol stops in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3, it develops into a variable element of "normal reach" as "reach display" occurs, while in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3. When a different third symbol is stopped, the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, and the variation effect is terminated (except when it develops into a "pseudo-ream" described later).

Therefore, in the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode, the "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is performed, and then the "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is performed, and each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 7A). ) Stop in turn, and the variation effect of 1 ends. On the other hand, in the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode, the "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is not performed after the "high-speed fluctuation" is performed, and after the end of the "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element, each symbol sequence Z1 to Z1 Z3 stops at the same time, and the variation effect of 1 ends.

Among the effect modes, the "normal reach" effect mode is the same as the left symbol column Z1 and the right symbol column Z3 in the variable effect of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 7A) in the main display area Dm. Immediately after the third symbol stops, the variable element of "normal reach" is executed, and the variable element of "reach display", that is, the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" does not develop. This is one of the production modes. In the variable element of this "normal reach", as described above, the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left symbol row Z1 (left display region Dm1) and the right symbol row Z3 (right display area Dm3) of the main display area Dm is It is displayed in a larger size than usual. Further, the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 (middle display area Dm2) scrolls downward in the vertical direction of the display screen at a low speed, and the third symbol of the middle display area Dm2 is displayed in a visible state by the player. .. Further, in the variable element of this "normal reach", the sub display area Ds is erased with the enlarged display of the main display area Dm (not shown).

Among the production modes, the "super reach" production mode is one of the "reach display" production modes in which the variable element of "super reach" is executed by developing from the variable element of "normal reach". In this "super reach" effect mode, while the variable element of "super reach" is being executed, the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 7A) is deleted from the display state of the variable element of "normal reach", and this "super reach" The reach-forming symbol of the third symbol, which was the cause of the "reach display", is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the display screen. Then, the background display of the main display area Dm changes from the variable element of the "normal reach", and a plurality of character symbols are displayed to perform "battle effect (for example, kickboxing)" (not shown).

In the first embodiment, it is configured to suggest the propriety of the variable production based on the result (win / loss) of the "battle production". Specifically, for example, in the above "battle effect", when the character symbol on the player side wins over the character symbol on the enemy side, it is suggested that the variable effect is "big hit display", and the player When the character symbol on the side loses to the character symbol on the enemy side, it is configured to suggest that the variation effect is "missing display".

Among the production modes, the "special reach" production mode is one of the "reach display" production modes in which the variable elements of the "special reach" are executed by developing from the variable elements of the "normal reach". In this "special reach" effect mode, during execution of the variable element of "special reach", the cockpit display area Db (FIG. 7) is changed from the display state of the variable element of "normal reach" to the variable element of "normal reach" as in the case of the variable element of "super reach". (See (a)) is deleted, and the reach-forming symbol of the third symbol, which was the cause of this "reach display", is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the display screen. Then, the background display of the main display area Dm (see FIG. 7A) changes from the variable element of "normal reach", and a plurality of characters different from the variable element of "super reach" are made to appear to "competitive effect". (For example, car racing) ”(not shown).

In the first embodiment, it is configured to suggest the propriety of the variable production based on the result (win / loss) of the "competitive production". Specifically, for example, in the above-mentioned "competition effect", when the character symbol on the player side wins over the character symbol on the enemy side, it is suggested that the variable effect becomes the "big hit display", and the player When the character symbol on the side loses to the character symbol on the enemy side, it is configured to suggest that the variation effect is "missing display".

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64a (starting winning), it is provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting port 64a (first special symbol). Among the first reserved first to fourth areas, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first reserved area. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting opening 64b (starting winning), it is provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting opening 64b (second special symbol). Of the second hold first to fourth areas, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second hold area.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is referred to according to whether or not the variation effect is correct, the current gaming state, and the number of variation effects currently being held (number of reserved balls). The stop pattern table 202d is configured to be different. That is, a plurality of types of stop pattern tables 202d are provided, and are configured to be selected according to the number of fluctuation effects during standby (number of reserved balls) and the like.

Further, in the first embodiment, when determining a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect, first, based on the hold number table 202c provided in the ROM 202, the appropriateness of the variation effect, the current gaming state, and the current gaming state. Any stop pattern table 202d corresponding to the number of variable effects (number of reserved balls) is selected. Then, a rough effect mode of the variation effect is selected based on the selected stop pattern table 202d and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. After that, a detailed fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the fluctuation effect is determined based on the selected effect mode and the value of the variation type counter CS1 described later.

The plurality of types of stop pattern tables 202d are set so that the range of random values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 in which the effect mode is selected for each stop pattern table 202d is different. A plurality of the stop pattern tables 202d are prepared in order to change the selection ratio of the effect mode of the variation effect according to the suitability of the variation effect, the game state, and the number of reserved balls. That is, (1) a big hit occurs in the fluctuation effect of the acquired third symbol, or (2) the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state", or "normal gaming state". This is because the selection ratio of the effect mode is changed according to whether or not there is (3) how many balls are reserved for the variable effect.

This is because the first reason is to change the degree of expectation of a big hit for each production mode. That is, the ratio of selecting the "non-reach" production mode, the "normal reach" production mode, the "super reach" production mode, and the "special reach" production mode depending on whether the jackpot lottery is won or the jackpot lottery is lost. By configuring so as to be different, the degree of expectation that becomes a big hit is changed for each production mode. Specifically, for example, when the jackpot lottery is won, the "super reach" production mode and the "special reach" production mode are easily selected, and when the jackpot lottery is not won, the "non-reach" production is performed. It is configured so that the mode and the "normal reach" production mode can be easily selected. With this configuration, the "super reach" production mode and the "special reach" production mode can be easily hit, and the "normal reach" production mode and the "non-reach" production mode are difficult to hit. It can be a production or a production that does not make a big hit, and the degree of expectation of a big hit can be differentiated for each production mode. Therefore, when a production that is easy to hit a big hit appears in a variable production, it is suggested to the player that a big hit is likely to occur while the production that is easy to hit is being performed, and the interest of the game is enhanced. There is.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the acquired lottery result is a big hit, it is easy to select an effect that is easy to make a big hit, and it is difficult to select an effect that is difficult to make a big hit based on the stop pattern table 202d. It is configured to select the effect mode of the variable effect. On the other hand, when the acquired lottery result is lost, the stop pattern table 202d is configured so that it is difficult to select an effect that is easy to win a big hit and it is easy to select an effect that is hard to hit a big hit. As a result, when notifying the player of the lottery result of the third symbol in the variable effect, if an effect that is easy to hit is executed, a big hit is likely to occur in the variable effect, and an effect that is difficult to hit is executed. If this is the case, it is difficult for a jackpot to occur in the variable effect, and by providing a difference in the expected value of the jackpot for each effect mode, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the execution of the variable effect.

The second reason is that the number of times of waiting for the first special symbol variation effect has reached the upper limit, and the number of times of entering the first starting port 64a or waiting for the second special symbol variation effect is the upper limit. This is to reduce as much as possible waste balls (so-called no lottery due to overflow winning) based on the entry into the second starting port 64b in the state of reaching. Specifically, the number of times of waiting for the variation effect of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to a maximum of 4 times, respectively, and the variation effect is executed for at least a certain period of time. In the gaming state in which the ball easily enters the second starting port 64b in the "variable state", the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is easily reached. In these gaming states, if a fluctuation effect with a long fluctuation time is selected, balls are frequently entered into the second start port 64b when the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is reached, and the second start port is bent. Despite entering 64b, the lottery opportunity for the second special symbol cannot be obtained. In addition, even in the "normal game state", if a variation effect having a long fluctuation time is selected while the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has been reached, the first special symbol is reserved during the execution of the variation effect. Since the number of balls is not digested, even if a ball enters the first starting port 64a during that time, the lottery opportunity for the first special symbol cannot be obtained. In such a state, the player determines that the game value cannot be obtained even if the ball is inserted into the first starting port 64a, and the fluctuation effect is digested so that the number of reserved balls can be obtained again. The ball is stopped from firing until the game is interrupted. If the game is interrupted, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 will decrease, which will affect the management of the game hall.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the gaming state in which the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (first special symbol or the second special symbol) is easily reached, or the game state is close to (or matches) the maximum number of reserved balls. The number of reserved balls is configured to select the effect mode of the variation effect based on the stop pattern table 202d in which a relatively short variation time is easily selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b when the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) has been reached. it can.

Further, the third reason is that the execution time is set to be long and the end of the variation effect is delayed, so that the state in which the variation effect is executed is maintained for a long time. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect is small (not present), a ball is newly inserted into either the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b within the fluctuation time of the variable effect being executed. If the ball is not made, the next variation effect cannot be started, and the demo screen or the like must be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the player does not perform the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 even though the ball is fired and the game is played, the player can obtain the interest related to the jackpot lottery that the player is looking for. Instead, I get excited about the game. Further, the player recognizes that the pachinko machine 10 is difficult for the ball to enter the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b because the variation effect is not performed in the third symbol display device 81. There is a risk that the pachinko machine 10 will stop playing on the pachinko machine 10 because it is determined that it is difficult to obtain the game value.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to select the effect mode of the variation effect based on the stop pattern table 202d, which makes it easy to select a relatively long variation time when the number of reserved balls for the variation effect is small. Has been done. As a result, the situation in which the variation effect is not performed in the third symbol display device 81 is unlikely to occur, and the execution state of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained for a long time.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be added by "1" in order within the range of "0 to 199", and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "199"). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) described later, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 35). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64a (starting winning), it is provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting port 64a (first special symbol). It is stored in the variation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first hold area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first hold first to fourth areas. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting opening 64b (starting winning), it is provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting opening 64b (second special symbol). Of the second hold first to fourth areas, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the variable type counter storage area 203e4 of the second hold area.

The variation type counter CS1 is used to determine a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect. That is, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is detailed by the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM 202 in the effect mode selected by the stop pattern table 202d and the stop pattern selection counter C3. Determine the variation pattern. The determination of the fluctuation pattern is specifically the determination of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 have a reach type and detailed symbols of the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the fluctuation pattern (variation time) determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. The variation mode is determined, and whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the execution mode of the advance notice effect are determined.

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a rough fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect and determines only the fluctuation time. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to control the detailed advance notice lottery or the like necessary for executing the variation effect in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, so that the processing of the MPU 201 related to the variation effect can be reduced. it can. Further, it is not necessary to prepare the command of the total variation pattern of the variation effect in the main control device 110, and the ROM capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Further, in the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the variation effect is performed by determining the detailed variation pattern in the variation effect based on the variation time (rough variation pattern) determined by the main control device 110. You can increase the degree of freedom in choosing. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 whose game state changes from moment to moment, it is possible to select or change the effect content of the variable effect at any time in response to the change, and it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the game state. it can.

Here, each fluctuation element constituting the fluctuation pattern will be described. The variable element constitutes a part of the variable effect of 1, and each variable element is combined to form the variable effect of 1. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the fluctuation elements, the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation", the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation", the fluctuation element of "pseudo-ream", the fluctuation element of "normal reach", and the fluctuation element of "super reach" Variable elements, "special reach" variable elements and "re-variable" variable elements are provided.

The variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is a variable element that scrolls and fluctuates at high speed so that the content of the third symbol cannot be clearly recognized by the player. When the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode is selected, the variable element of this "high-speed fluctuation" is performed for "3 seconds" at the beginning of the variable effect, and the variable element other than "non-reach (shortened)" ( For example, when the "non-reach (normal)") effect mode is selected, "7 seconds" is performed at the beginning of the variable effect. When the fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation" ends, the fluctuation element of the "low-speed fluctuation" described later is started (executed), or the fluctuation effect ends as it is.

The "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is started after the execution of the "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element of "7 seconds", and whether or not the third symbol is visibly scrolled to generate "reach display" is determined. It is a variable factor to show. The variable element of this "low speed fluctuation" is not executed when the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode is selected, and the effect mode other than the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode (for example, "non-reach (normally)" effect mode is not executed. ) "Production mode) is selected," 3 seconds "is performed after the variable element of" high-speed fluctuation ". That is, in the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode, after the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is performed, each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 of the main display area Dm does not pass through the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation". It is configured to stop rapidly (so-called bitter stop). When the variable element of this "slow fluctuation" ends, whether the variable element of "pseudo-ream" described later is started (executed) or the variable element of "normal reach" described later is started (executed). Or, it is configured so that the variation effect ends as it is.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode is a variation element of "high speed fluctuation" of "7 seconds" and a fluctuation element of "low speed fluctuation" of "3 seconds". The fluctuation effect is composed of the fluctuation pattern including. Further, in the "non-reach (shortening)" effect mode, the variation effect is configured by the variation pattern of only the variation elements of the "high-speed variation" of "3 seconds".

The variable element of the "pseudo-ream" is a variable element in which the start of the variable effect occurs a plurality of times (one pseudo stop) in one variable effect. Specifically, the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation" is started in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 of the third symbol display device 81 and switched to the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation", and then in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. It is a variable element in which the unit effect is performed such that the variable effect is completed and a predetermined stop result (for example, the pseudo-continuous chance eye “677”) is displayed. The variable element of this "pseudo-ream" is that the variable element of the "high-speed fluctuation" starts again from the stop result when the predetermined stop result is stopped after the variable element of the "low-speed fluctuation", as if once more. The effect is executed as if the variable effect was started.

As for the variable element of this "pseudo-ream", a predetermined stop result (so-called pseudo-ream chance) appears after the execution of the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation", and the variable element of the second "high-speed fluctuation" is executed again. After that, it is a variable element that develops into a variable element of "normal reach". That is, as for the variable element of the "pseudo-ream", a pseudo-variable stop (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo-stop") in which the pseudo-ream chance is displayed is performed once, and then a predetermined stop result is obtained in the pseudo-stop. It is a variable element that appears and starts the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" again. The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to always develop into at least a "normal reach" variable element after the end of the "pseudo-ream" variable element. The variable element of this "pseudo-ream" is performed "10 seconds" after the variable element of the "low speed fluctuation".

In the first embodiment, in the variable element of the "pseudo-ream", the number of pseudo-stops is set to 1, but the variable element of the "pseudo-ream" in which the number of pseudo-stops is performed twice or more is executed. It may be configured. Further, before the occurrence of the variable element of the "pseudo-ream", a variable element (so-called "pseudo-gase" variable element) for producing whether or not the pseudo-ream chance eye is stopped may be performed. .. In the variable element of this "pseudo-gase", an effect of whether or not a predetermined stop result appears after the execution of the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" (for example, the symbol forming the predetermined stop result is the effective line L1 (for example). (See FIG. 7A)) The effect of whether or not to stop by reciprocating on the top is performed. Hereinafter, it is referred to as "pseudo-variation"), and the above-mentioned predetermined stop result does not appear in the "pseudo-variation". It may be configured so as not to develop into a variable element of "pseudo-ream". By providing the variable element of this "pseudo-gase", after the variable element of the "pseudo-gase" is completed, it develops into the variable element of "normal reach", or "missing display" appears (for example, "687"). ”), And it is possible to give a game property as to whether the variation effect ends as it is.

The variable element of "normal reach" is a general term for the variable element of "low speed fluctuation" or the variable element of "pseudo-ream" (hereinafter, "variable element of" low speed fluctuation "or the variable element of" pseudo-ream "", and is "low speed". When the reach formation symbol is stopped and displayed in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 in (sometimes referred to as a fluctuation factor of "variation, etc."), the fluctuation showing whether or not a big hit occurs depending on the fluctuation result of the middle symbol row Z2. It is an element. This "normal reach" variable element is performed "10 seconds" after the "low speed variation, etc." variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "normal reach" is executed, the pattern of directly displaying "loss display", the pattern of directly displaying "big hit display", and the pattern of "super reach" There are a pattern that develops into a variable element, a pattern that develops into a variable element of "special reach", and a pattern that once makes a temporary "loss display" appear and then executes the variable element of "re-variation". Has been done.

The variable element of "super reach" is developed and executed when the variable element of "normal reach" does not stop the "loss display" and the fluctuation of the middle symbol column Z2 is continued, and the "battle" is executed in the main display area Dm. It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit will occur by performing "directing". This "super reach" variable element is performed "10 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "super reach" is executed, a pattern in which the "loss display" is directly displayed and a pattern in which the "big hit display" is directly displayed are temporarily provided. A pattern is prepared in which the variable element of "re-variation" is executed after the "loss display" is displayed.

The variable element of "special reach" is developed and executed when the variable element of "normal reach" does not stop the "loss display" and the fluctuation of the middle symbol column Z2 is continued, and the "competition" is performed in the main display area Dm. It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit will occur by performing "directing". This "special reach" variable element is performed "20 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of the "special reach" is executed, a pattern that directly displays the "loss display" and a pattern that directly displays the "big hit display" are temporarily provided. There is a pattern that "re-variates" after the "loss display" appears.

It is configured to develop into a "super reach" variable element or a "special reach" variable element after the execution of the "normal reach" variable element, but instead of this configuration, reach formation after the "low speed fluctuation". When the symbol stops, it may be configured so as to suddenly develop into a "super reach" variable element or a "special reach" variable element without going through the "normal reach" variable element. Further, the variable element of "special reach" may be configured to be executed after the variable element of "super reach" is executed.

The variable element of "re-variation" is a variable element that develops and is executed after the "loss display" appears once in any of the "reach display", and the "big hit display" appears. The variable element of this "re-variation" is performed "10 seconds" after any "reach display".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a pattern in which the “big hit display” appears after the execution of the fluctuation element of the “re-variation” is prepared.

In addition, the variable element of this "re-variation" is configured to occur only when the jackpot is won. That is, in the case of "loss display", the variable element of "re-variation" is not executed. This is because the variable element of "re-variation" is a variable element that changes the temporarily stopped "loss display" to one of the "big hit displays", so in the case of "loss display" that has not won the jackpot. If you go to, there will be a discrepancy in the production. Therefore, the fluctuation element of this "re-variation" is selected only in the fluctuation pattern table 202e for big hits, and is not selected in the fluctuation pattern table 202e for loss.

The random number counter C4 per normal figure is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of "0 to 99", reaches the maximum value (that is, "99"), and then returns to "0". Further, when the random number counter C4 per normal figure makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the random number counter C4 per normal figure (value = "0 to 99"), and is used for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). It is updated once and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 35).

The value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23 in the first embodiment)), and it is detected that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol gate 67. At the same timing, the timer is stored in any of the normal map holding areas 1 to 4 provided in the normal figure holding ball storage area 203j of the RAM 203. Then, the data is sequentially shifted to the normal figure holding ball execution area 203k in the order of being stored in the normal figure holding ball storage area 203j, and becomes the value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure stored in the normal figure holding ball execution area 203k. On the other hand, a hit judgment is made.

The value of the random number that hits the normal symbol is set by the random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 for each game state (for example, "1/10" in the low probability state, "9/10") in a high probability state), and the value of the counter C4 per normal figure stored in the normal figure holding ball execution area 203k is the value of the random number that is the hit set by the random number table per normal figure. If it matches, it is judged as a hit. Then, the variable display time table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is referred to according to the game state, and the variable display time of the normal symbol (for example, "3 seconds" or "0.5"). Seconds ”) are set, and after the variable display time has elapsed on the normal symbol display device 83, a symbol“ ○ ”is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (ordinary symbol). After that, the ordinary electric service control table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is referred to according to the game state, and the opening time of the rotating plate of the ordinary electric service 64c (for example, "0.5"). Seconds ”or“ 5 seconds ”) are set, and the rotating plate is rotated during the opening time, during which the ball is configured to be able to roll on the upper surface of the rotating plate.

On the other hand, if the value of the normal figure counter C4 stored in the normal figure holding ball execution area 203k does not match the value of the hit random number set by the random number table per normal figure (not shown), It is judged to be a loss. Then, the variable display time (for example, "3 seconds" or "0.5 seconds") is set by referring to the normal figure variation time table (not shown) according to the game state, and the normal symbol display device 83 is used. After the lapse of the variable display time, the symbol "x" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (normal symbol).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, variations of the winning / failing probability of the normal symbol, the variable display time of the normal symbol, and the opening time of the rotating plate of the ordinary electric service 64c are configured to be different according to each gaming state. .. Specifically, for example, in the "normal game state" which does not have the "time saving function", the probability of winning or failing the normal symbol is low, the variable display time of the normal symbol is long, and the rotating plate The opening time is set to be short. Further, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" having the "time function", the probability of winning or failing the normal symbol is high, the variable display time of the normal symbol is short, and the rotating plate is opened. The time is set to be long.

As described above, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is provided with various counters and the like, and the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is provided with various tables. In the main control device 110, the values of the counters and the like are provided. Pachinko machines such as jackpot lottery, setting of dynamic display and variation effect in special symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display result in ordinary symbol display device 83 according to each of the above-mentioned tables 202a to 202 g. Ten major processes can be performed.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer 203c shown in FIG. 9, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and inputs / outputs. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as an output (Input / Output; hereinafter abbreviated as "I / O") are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 35) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 34) when the power is turned on. The non-maskable interrupt (Non-Mascapable Interrupt; hereinafter abbreviated as "NMI") terminal of the MPU 201 is designed so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 33) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The RAM 203 further includes a first reserved ball number counter 203a, a second reserved ball number counter 203b, a first reserved ball storage area 203d, a second reserved ball storage area 203e, a reserved ball execution area 203f, a probability variation area opening timer 203g, and a probability variation. It has at least a region valid flag 203h and a probability variation transition flag 203i.

The first reserved ball count counter 203a enters the first starting port 64a (hereinafter referred to as the first ball) detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) that is periodically executed every “4 milliseconds”. Dynamic display of the first special symbol (third symbol) performed by the special symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b is sometimes referred to as a "starting prize"). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standbys) of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol performed by the display device 81 up to four times.

The first reserved ball number counter 203a is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 (S913 in FIG. 34) after the power is turned on. Then, every time the start winning prize to the first start port 64a is detected and the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the first special symbol increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (FIG. 24). S203). On the other hand, the first reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed (see S308 in FIG. 25).

Like the first reserved ball number counter 203a, the second reserved ball number counter 203b has a second start detected in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) that is periodically executed every "4 milliseconds". Dynamic display of the second special symbol performed by the special symbol display device 37 based on the start winning prize to the mouth 64b (variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81) It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) up to 4 times.

Similar to the first reserved ball number counter 203a, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (S913 in FIG. 34). Then, every time the start winning prize to the second starting port 64b is detected and the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the second special symbol increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (FIG. 24). (See S207). On the other hand, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed (see S305 in FIG. 25).

The value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (that is, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) or the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (that is, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) is the reserved ball number command. Notifies the voice lamp control device 113 (see S210 in FIG. 24). The hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the first hold ball number counter 203a or the second hold ball number counter 203b is incremented by 1. Command.

The voice lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the number of reserved balls itself for the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command. it can. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can manage the number of times the dynamic display (variation effect) of each special symbol is held without accessing the main control device 110. In addition, each time a start winning prize is detected, the main control device 110 sends a hold ball number command to the voice lamp control device 113 to dynamically display (variate) each special symbol managed by the voice lamp control device 113. Even if the number of reserved balls in the effect) deviates from the actual number of reserved balls in the dynamic display (variable effect) held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the next received hold is received. The deviation can be corrected by the ball count command.

The voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the hold ball number every time the hold ball number managed internally changes. The display control device 114 displays the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the main control device 110 transmits a hold ball number command to the voice lamp control device 113, the hold ball number counter 203a or the first hold ball number counter 203a is added by 1 in the hold ball number command. 2 Counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 9) due to the above-mentioned start winning that triggered the addition of not only the value of the reserved ball number counter 203b but also the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b. Each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the above is also included.

That is, when there is a start winning, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the main control device 110 is a hold ball. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by several commands.

In the voice lamp control device 113, the fluctuation effect based on each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 transmitted by the hold ball number command is executed. Before the command is executed, it is determined what will happen to the fluctuation effect (whether it will be a big hit, what will happen to the fluctuation time, etc.). Then, based on the judgment result based on the pre-reading, it is possible to determine the execution of various effects, and to determine the effect content and execution time (timing) of the "pending change notice".

It should be noted that the hold ball number command indicating the number of hold balls of the fluctuation effect and the command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like may be separately transmitted. As a command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like, which is different from the reserved ball number command, the reserved ball number command is generated at the timing of entering the ball into the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, and the command is described. A command similar to the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command based on the ball entry (pre-variation pattern command and pre-stop type command) may be generated and transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In this case, regarding the program for generating the pre-variation pattern command and the pre-stop type command, the program can be easily created by diverting the program of the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

As described above, the first reserved ball storage area 203d has a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired from the counter buffer 203c when the start winning prize is detected in the first starting port 64a. , A memory for storing each value of the variable type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the first starting port 64a (starting winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are calculated from the counter buffer 203c. It is acquired and stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d. In the first holding ball storage area 203d, four holdings are made so that the data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to the start winning of one of the first special symbols can be stored (held) up to four times. It has areas (first reserved first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 9).

As described above, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired from the counter buffer 203c in connection with the detection of the start winning prize in the second starting port 64b. , A memory for storing each value of the variable type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the second starting port 64b (starting winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are calculated from the counter buffer 203c. It is acquired and stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e. In the second holding ball storage area 203e, four holdings are made so that the data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to the start winning of one of the second special symbols can be stored (held) up to four times. It has areas (second reserved first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 9).

As described above, the reserved ball execution area 203f is used for the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which is starting or being executed, and the movement of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. It is a memory for storing data (each value of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referred to in processing such as setting of target display and fluctuation effect.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the special symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display Data corresponding to each start winning prize stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e described above in order to execute processing such as dynamic display of the device 81 and setting of fluctuation effect ( When the data corresponding to the start winning prize related to the second special symbol is stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e among the counters C1 to C3 and CS1), it corresponds to one start winning prize of the data. The data is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f. On the other hand, the data corresponding to the start prize related to the second special symbol is not stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the data corresponding to the start prize related to the first special symbol is stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d. If so, the data corresponding to one of the starting prizes of the data is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the dynamic display (variable effect) relating to the second special symbol is preferentially executed, and the dynamic display (variable effect) relating to the first special symbol relates to the second special symbol. It is configured to be executed on the condition that the dynamic display (variable effect) is not held. The shift in the first embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

Here, the details of the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the reserved ball execution area 203f will be described with reference to FIG. 9 again. The first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the reserved ball execution area 203f are used for a jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and the movement of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to set the target display and the variation effect.

As described above, the jackpot random number counter used for the jackpot lottery is used for the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the setting of the variation effect. A jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used for determining the effect mode of the variation effect, and a variation type counter CS1 used for determining the variation pattern are used. The first reserved ball storage area 203d stores the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball wins the first starting port 64a (starting winning). The second reserved ball storage area 203e stores the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball wins the second starting port 64b (starting winning).

The first reserved ball storage area 203d is composed of four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas). In each of the four holding areas (first holding first to fourth areas), a jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter storage area for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2 are stored. 203d2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203d4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

Further, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is composed of four reserved areas (second reserved ball storage areas 1 to 4) like the first reserved ball storage area 203d. Similar to the first hold ball storage area 203d, the four hold areas (second hold first to fourth areas) have a jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter C2. A jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 for storing the value of, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203e4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided. Has been done.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1, 203e1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2, 203e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3, 203e3, and the variation type counter storage area 203d4, 203e4 are set to 1. Although they are collectively provided in each of the reserved ball storage areas 203d and 203e, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1.

As described above, in the first reserved ball storage area 203d, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64a (starting winning) is for a maximum of four times. In that case, the data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 holding areas (1st holding 1st to 4th areas). Will be remembered. That is, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to the start winning to the first start port 64a, which is older in time, is stored, and in the first reserved first area, the first start port 64a, which is the oldest in time, is stored. The data corresponding to the start winning prize will be stored.

Further, in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 64b (starting winning) is stored up to four times. However, in that case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 holding areas (2nd holding 1st to 4th areas). To. That is, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to the start winning to the second start port 64b, which is older in time, is stored, and in the second reserved first area, the second start port 64b, which is the oldest in time, is stored. The data corresponding to the start winning prize will be stored.

On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203f is composed of only one area. Similar to the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the reserved ball execution area 203f includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter C2. A jackpot type counter storage area 203f2 for storing values, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203f4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided. There is.

When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variation effect has come, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) is stored in the second hold first area of the second hold ball storage area 203e. In this case, the data stored in the second reserved first area is shifted to the respective areas 203f1 to 203f4 of the reserved ball execution area 203f. On the other hand, in the MPU 201, when the execution start timing of the variation effect is reached, the data is not stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the first of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. When the data is stored in the hold first area, the data stored in the first hold first area is shifted to the respective areas 203f1 to 203f4 of the hold ball execution area 203f.

Then, the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f is referred to in the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 26), the jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data and the game state, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the lottery result is performed. And determine the stop type. In the special symbol display device 37, dynamic display is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

Further, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The details of the data shift will be described. When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variation effect has come, it determines whether or not the data is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the data is stored in the second reserved first area, the random number value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 in the second reserved first area is used as the jackpot random number in the reserved ball execution area 203f. Shift to the counter storage area 203f1. Similarly, the random value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 in the second hold first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 in the second hold first area is changed. The stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3 is shifted, and the random value of the variation type counter storage area 203e4 in the second hold first area is shifted to the variation type counter storage area 203f4.

Then, when the data shift to the reserved ball execution area 203f is completed, the second reserved ball first area becomes empty, so that the data is stored (held) in each area (second to fourth) of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. ) Is packed into the area (1st to 3rd) that is one smaller than the area number. In the first embodiment, in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the data is shifted only in the second reserved area (first to fourth) in which the data is stored (held).

Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the second holding ball storage area 203e will be described. For example, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b when the start determination of the fluctuation effect is made is "4", and the data is stored in all the areas (first to fourth) of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. It is assumed that it has been done. In this state, when the data in the second hold first area is shifted to the hold ball execution area 203f and the second hold first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 has data in other areas (second to fourth). Is shifted to the area (1st to 3rd) which is one smaller than the area number. That is, the data in the second reserved second area is shifted to the second reserved first area, the data in the second reserved third area is shifted to the second reserved second area, and the data in the second reserved fourth area. To the second hold third area.

Further, for example, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b when the start determination of the fluctuation effect is made is "2", the MPU 201 transfers only the data of the second reserved second area to the second reserved second area. Shifts to one area and ends the data shift. As described above, in the first embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed in the second hold area (third to fourth) in which the data is not stored (held), so that the number of data shifts is reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the second reserved area (second to fourth) may be configured to shift to an area in which the area number is one smaller. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in the second holding area (second to fourth), so that the program can be easily created.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the data is not stored in the second hold first area of the second hold ball storage area 203e when the execution start timing of the variation effect is reached, the MPU 201 then holds the first hold. It is determined whether or not data is stored in the first reserved first area of the sphere storage area 203d. As a result of the determination, if the data is stored in the first reserved first area, the random number value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first reserved first area is used as the jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 of the reserved ball execution area 203f. Shift to. Similarly, the random value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 in the first hold first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 in the first hold first area is changed. The stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3 is shifted, and the random value of the variation type counter storage area 203d4 in the first hold first area is shifted to the variation type counter storage area 203f4.

Then, when the data shift to the hold ball execution area 203f is completed, the first hold ball first area becomes empty, so that the data is stored (held) in each area (second to fourth) of the first hold ball storage area 203d. ) Is packed into the area (1st to 3rd) that is one smaller than the area number. In the first embodiment, in the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the data is shifted only in the first reserved area (first to fourth) in which the data is stored (held).

Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the first holding ball storage area 203d will be described. For example, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the fluctuation effect is made is "4", and the data is stored in all the areas (first to fourth) of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. It is assumed that it has been done. In this state, when the data in the first hold first area is shifted to the hold ball execution area 203f and the first hold first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 has data in other areas (second to fourth). Is shifted to the area (1st to 3rd) which is one smaller than the area number. That is, the data in the first reserved second area is shifted to the first reserved first area, the data in the first reserved third area is shifted to the first reserved second area, and the data in the first reserved fourth area. To the first hold third area.

Further, for example, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a at the time when the start determination of the fluctuation effect is made is "2", the MPU 201 transfers only the data of the first reserved second area to the first reserved ball number. Shifts to one area and ends the data shift. As described above, in the first embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed for the first hold area (third to fourth) in which the data is not stored (held), so that the number of data shifts is reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the first reserved area (second to fourth) may be configured to shift to an area having an area number smaller by one. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in the first holding area (second to fourth), so that the program can be easily created.

Here, the details of the normal figure holding ball storage area 203j and the normal figure holding ball execution area 203k will be described. The normal figure holding ball storage area 203j and the normal figure holding ball execution area 203k are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform a winning lottery for the normal symbol, a variable display setting of the normal symbol display device 83, and the like.

The normal figure holding ball storage area 203j is a memory for storing the counter C4 per normal figure acquired from the counter buffer 203c in connection with the detection of the passage of the ball to the normal symbol gate 67. When the MPU 201 detects that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol gate 67 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), it acquires the value of the counter C4 per normal figure from the counter buffer 203c and holds the normal symbol. It is stored in the storage area 203j. The normal figure holding ball storage area 203j has four holding areas (normal figure) so that data (value of counter C4 per normal figure) corresponding to one holding ball of a normal symbol can be stored (held) up to four times. It has reserved first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 9).

The normal figure holding ball execution area 203k is a memory for storing data (value of random number counter C4 per normal figure) to be referred to in the process of winning lottery or variable display of a normal symbol being executed or starting execution. Is.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable display of the normal symbol, the above-mentioned normal symbol holding ball is executed in order to execute processing such as a winning lottery of the normal symbol and setting of the variable display of the normal symbol display device 83. One of the data (value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure) stored in the storage area 203j is shifted to the normal figure holding ball execution area 203k. The shift in the first embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

As described above, the random number counter C4 per normal symbol used for the winning lottery of the ordinary symbol is used for setting the winning lottery of the ordinary symbol and the variable display of the ordinary symbol display device 83. The normal figure holding ball storage area 203j stores the value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball passes through the normal symbol gate 67.

Further, as described above, the data (value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure) acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal symbol gate 67 is stored in the normal figure holding ball storage area 203j up to four times. In that case, the data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 holding areas (1st to 4th areas for holding the normal drawing). That is, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to the passage of the sphere to the old normal symbol gate 67 in time is stored, and in the first area for holding the normal symbol, the oldest normal symbol gate 67 in time is stored. The data corresponding to the passage of the sphere will be stored.

On the other hand, the normal figure holding ball execution area 203k is composed of only one area. Similar to the normal figure holding ball storage area 203j, the normal figure holding ball execution area 203k is provided with a random number counter storage area (not shown) for storing the value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure. ..

When the MPU 201 determines that the execution timing of the variable display of the normal symbol has come, the data stored in the normal figure hold ball storage area 203j of the normal figure hold ball storage area 203j is transferred to the normal figure hold ball execution area 203k. shift.

Then, the data shifted to the normal figure holding ball execution area 203k is referred to in the normal figure variation processing (see S111 in FIG. 23), a winning lottery is performed based on the reference data and the game state, and the variable display is performed. Determine the content of. In the ordinary symbol display device 83, variable display is performed based on the determined content under the control of the main control device 110.

The details of the data shift will be described. When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variable display of the normal symbol has come, the random number value of the random number counter storage area (not shown) of the normal figure hold first area of the normal figure hold ball storage area 203j. Is shifted to the random number counter storage area (not shown) per normal figure in the normal figure holding ball execution area 203k.

Then, when the data shift to the normal figure reservation ball execution area 203k is completed, the normal figure reservation first area becomes empty, so that the data is stored in each area (second to fourth) of the normal figure reservation ball storage area 203j. Shift processing is performed to pack the (held) data into the areas (first to third) where the area number is one smaller. In the first embodiment, the data is shifted only in the normal map holding area (1st to 4th) in which the data is stored (held) in the normal figure holding ball storage area 203j.

Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the holding ball storage area 203j will be described. For example, when the start determination of the variable display of the normal symbol is made, the number of reserved normal symbols is 4, and the data is stored in all the areas (1st to 4th) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203j. Suppose you are. In this state, when the data in the first area for holding the normal figure is shifted to the execution area 203k for holding the normal figure and the first area for holding the normal figure becomes empty, the MPU 201 moves to another area (second to fourth). Each of the data of is shifted to the area (1st to 3rd) which is one smaller than the area number. That is, the data in the second area for holding the normal figure is shifted to the first area for holding the normal figure, the data in the third area for holding the normal figure is shifted to the second area for holding the normal figure, and the data in the fourth area for holding the normal figure is shifted. Is shifted to the third area where the data is reserved.

Further, for example, if the number of hold of the normal symbol is 2 when the start determination of the variable display of the normal symbol is made, the MPU 201 transfers only the data of the normal symbol hold 2 area to the normal symbol hold 1 area. Shift and end the data shift. As described above, in the first embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed for the normal map holding areas (third to fourth) in which the data is not stored (held), so that the number of data shifts is reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the normal drawing holding area (second to fourth) may be configured to shift to an area in which the area number is one smaller. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in the normal drawing holding area (second to fourth), so that the program can be easily created.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. The probability change area opening timer 203g provided in the RAM 203 is a timer for determining the opening period of the probability change area opening / closing plate 75a. The probability variation area opening timer 203g is set to “0” as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S913 in FIG. 34). Then, in the opening setting process of each round in the jackpot (see FIG. 29), when it is determined that the opening timing of the probability variation region 75 is determined (for example, the first round of the jackpot type “probability fluctuation A”), the probability variation region 75 is released. A predetermined value corresponding to time (eg, “7500”) is set (see S438 in FIG. 29), and the probabilistic region solenoid 75b is set on accordingly (see S439 in FIG. 29). When the probabilistic region solenoid 75b is set from off to on, the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a changes from the protruding state to the immersive state, and the probabilistic region 75 is opened.

After that, on the premise that a value is set in the probability variation area opening timer 203 g, the jackpot time executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) which is periodically executed every "4 milliseconds". The value of the probability variation region opening timer 203g is decremented by 1 each time the opening process (see FIG. 30) is executed (see S442 in FIG. 30). Then, when the value of the probability variation region opening timer 203g becomes “0”, the probability variation region solenoid 75b is set to off as the opening time of the probability variation region 75 has elapsed (see S444 in FIG. 30). When the probabilistic region solenoid 75b is set from on to off, the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a changes from the immersive state to the protruding state, and the probabilistic region 75 is closed.

The probability variation region valid flag 203h is a flag for indicating that the probability variation region 75 is effectively set in the on state. In the first embodiment, in a situation where the probability variation region effective flag 203h is set to on, when a sphere is detected by the probability variation region switch 75c, the probability variation transition flag 203i described later is set to on, and after the jackpot ends, " It is configured so that a "probability fluctuation state" occurs.

The probability variation region effective flag 203h is set to off as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, when the jackpot of the special symbol is won, whether or not it is the timing to enable the probability variation region 75 with the opening of the probability variation region 75 at each round start during the jackpot based on the jackpot type of the jackpot. When the determination is made and it is determined that the timing for enabling the probability variation region 75 is determined, the probability variation region activation flag 203h is set to ON (see S441 in FIG. 29).

Specifically, the probability variation region effective flag 203h is turned on at the start of opening the probability variation region 75 in the jackpot types “latent probability variation A”, “latent probability variation B”, “latent probability variation C”, and “probability variation A”. Is set to. Further, all rounds of the jackpot type other than the jackpot type described above, that is, the probability variation region 75 is set to off regardless of whether the probability variation region 75 is closed or the probability variation region 75 is opened. Further, when the timing for disabling the probability variation region 75 arrives while the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are open (for example, when 5 seconds have passed from the start of opening the variable winning devices 72 and 74, or when the variable winning device 72 and 74 have been opened, the variable winning device When 72 and 74 are closed or at the end of the jackpot), the probability variation region valid flag 203h is set to off (see S454 in FIG. 30).

The probability variation transition flag 203i is a flag for indicating that a “probability fluctuation state” occurs in the on state. The probability variation transition flag 203i is set to off as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, during the jackpot, when the probability variation region valid flag 203h is set to ON, the ball is detected by the probability variation region switch 75c (S446: Yes in FIG. 30), so that the probability variation transition flag 203i in the off state is turned on. (See S447 in FIG. 30). After that, in the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 32), when the "probability fluctuation state" is set by turning on the probability variation transition flag 203i, that is, when "100" is set for the value of the ST counter described later. (See S472 in FIG. 30), the probability variation transition flag 203i is set to off (see S473 in FIG. 32).

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the special symbol display device 37, the normal symbol display device 83, the normal symbol hold lamp 84, and the attacker unit 71 are connected to the input / output port 205. ..

The attacker unit 71 includes, as drive devices, a first large winning opening solenoid 72b for driving the opening and closing of the first variable winning device 72 forward with the lower side of the first opening / closing plate 72a as an axis, and a second variable winning device 74. A second large winning opening solenoid 74b that opens and closes and drives forward with the lower side of the second opening and closing plate 74a as an axis, and a probability variation region solenoid 75b for opening and closing the probability variation region opening and closing plate 75a of the probability variation region 75 are provided. ing. Then, in addition to the above-mentioned solenoids 72b, 74b, 75b, other solenoids 209 for driving other driving devices (not shown) are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is connected to the input / output port 205 via the input / output port 205. Various commands and control signals are transmitted to these.

Further, the input / output port 205 is provided with a first variable winning device 72 of the attacker unit 71 as a detection device, and is provided with a first large winning opening switch 72c for detecting a ball that has won a prize in the first variable winning device 72. The second variable winning device 74 of the attacker unit 71 is provided, and the second large winning opening switch 74c for detecting a ball won in the second variable winning device 74 and the attacker unit 71 are provided in the probability variation region 75. The probabilistic region switch 75c that detects a ball passing through the probabilistic region 75, the discharge switch 76a that detects a ball passing through the discharge passage 76 of the attacker unit 71, and the out port 66 (see FIG. 3) have flowed into the switch. An out switch 66a for detecting a sphere, another switch 208 composed of a switch group or a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected, and the MPU 201 outputs from various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal to be output and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 14 to 22, the ball detection mode in each round of each jackpot type and the opening / closing status of the first variable winning device 72 (that is, the first opening / closing drive for opening / closing the first opening / closing plate 72a). The large winning opening solenoid 72b is turned on or off), the detection status of the ball flowing into the first variable winning device 72 (that is, the first large winning opening switch 72c is turned on or off), and the opening and closing of the second variable winning device 74. The situation (that is, the on or off of the second large winning opening solenoid 74b that opens and closes the second opening / closing plate 74a) and the detection status of the ball that has flowed into the second variable winning device 74 (that is, the second large winning opening switch 74c). On or off) and the interval period (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "interval"), which is the period during which both the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are closed, and the probability variation region. The opening / closing status of the 75 (that is, the on / off of the probabilistic region solenoid 75b that drives the opening / closing plate 75a of the probabilistic region), the inflow status of the ball into the probabilistic region 75 (that is, the on / off of the probabilistic region switch 75c). The transition status to the "probability fluctuation state" (that is, the probability variation transition flag 203i is turned on or off) will be described.

Note that, in FIGS. 14 to 22, for convenience of explanation, the valid or invalid setting status of the probabilistic region 75 (that is, the probabilistic region valid flag 203h is turned on or off) is always set when the probabilistic region solenoid 75b is turned on. The case where the probability variation transition flag 203i is turned on by the detection of the sphere by the probability variation region switch 75c while the probability variation region effective flag 203h is on, that is, while the probability variation region 75 is open will be described.

First, with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15, a ball detection mode and the like in each round of the jackpot type “time saving A” will be described. FIG. 14 shows the operation timings of the first special winning opening solenoid 72b, the second winning opening solenoid 74b, and the probability variation region solenoid 75b in each round of the jackpot type “time saving A” of the first special symbol, and the first winning opening switch. It is a timing chart which schematically shows the detection timing of a sphere in 72c, the 2nd prize opening switch 74c and the probability change area switch 75c, and the setting timing of an interval and a probability change transition flag 203i. Further, FIG. 15 shows the operation timings of the first special winning opening solenoid 72b, the second winning opening solenoid 74b, and the probability variation region solenoid 75b in the first to third rounds of the jackpot type “time saving A” of the first special symbol. , The timing of the interval which is the closing period of the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74, and the ball winning the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 reaches the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a. The relationship between the time until, the detection timing of the ball in the first prize opening switch 72c, the second prize opening switch 74c, and the probability variation region switch 75c, and the setting timing of the probability variation transition flag 203i is schematically shown. It is a timing chart. Hereinafter, the detailed time will be described with reference to FIG. 15 while explaining each timing in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 14, in the jackpot type “time saving A”, a total of 5 rounds of jackpot games are executed, and at the start of each round, the opening pattern “X1” is used to win the first jackpot solenoid 72b or the second jackpot. The mouth solenoid 74b (hereinafter, the first prize-winning port solenoid 72b and the second prize-winning port solenoid 74b may be collectively referred to as "large prize-winning port solenoids 72b, 74b") is turned on, and the corresponding first The opening / closing plate 72a or the second opening / closing plate 74a (hereinafter, the first opening / closing plate 72a and the second opening / closing plate 74a may be collectively referred to as "opening / closing plates 72a, 74a") is opened. That is, in the jackpot type "time saving A", the first winning opening solenoid 72b is turned on in the odd-numbered round to open the first opening / closing plate 72a, and the second winning opening solenoid 74b is turned on in the even-numbered round to open / close the second. The plate 74a is opened. Then, in each round, a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, a maximum of "30 seconds" has elapsed from the opening (see Max t1 in FIG. 15. Max t1 <"30000 milliseconds (hereinafter, millisecond is abbreviated as" ms "). (In some cases) ".)" Or, the first major winning opening switch 72c or the second major winning opening switch 74c (hereinafter, the first major winning opening switch 72c and the second major winning opening switch 74c are collectively referred to as "large". When one of the events) of 10 balls detected by the winning opening switches 72c and 74c) is established, the large winning opening solenoids 72b and 74b are turned off and the opening / closing plates 72a and 74a are opened. It is closed and one round ends.

Further, in the jackpot type "time saving A", the opening / closing pattern of the probability variation region 75 is "A". Therefore, in the first round, the probabilistic region solenoid 75b is turned on for a moment (for example, "50 ms") as the initial operation in synchronization with the first grand prize opening solenoid 72b being turned on, and the probabilistic region solenoid 75b is normally turned on. It is configured so that it can recognize whether or not it is driven. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, even when the probabilistic region solenoid 75b is turned on for "50 ms", the opening time of the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a is extremely short, so that the probabilistic region solenoid 75b During the initial motion period, the ball is configured to be difficult to flow into the probability variation region 75 (hereinafter, the same applies to each round).

In this initial operation, if the probability variation region solenoid 75b is not driven normally, error processing such as predetermined error notification (for example, display of an error message such as "variable winning device 72, 74 drive abnormality occurrence") is executed. However, it is configured to stop the progress of the game while backing up the current game state according to the error processing. In this way, by stopping the progress of the game due to the error, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage such that the "probability fluctuation state" is not given. It should be noted that the trigger for starting the initial operation of the probabilistic region solenoid 75b is not to turn on the large winning opening solenoids 72b and 74b, but to be executed when the first count ball is detected by the large winning opening switches 72c and 74c. It may be configured as.

After the initial operation of the probabilistic region solenoid 75b, the probabilistic region solenoid 75b is temporarily turned off for a predetermined time (for example, "50 ms"), and then the probabilistic region solenoid 75b is operated for a certain period of time (in the first embodiment, "1st embodiment". 3000ms ”) is turned on (see t2 in FIG. 15, t2 =“ 3000ms ”.) The trigger for turning off the probabilistic region solenoid 75b is not after a certain period of time from the turning on of the large winning opening solenoids 72b and 74b, but the large winning opening. It may be configured to be executed when a ball at a predetermined count (for example, the third count) is detected by the switches 72c and 74c.

At this time, since the opening pattern of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 of the jackpot type “time saving A” is “X1”, in the first round in which the probability variation region 75 is open, from the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75. The ball is set to flow into the attacker unit 71 from the distant first variable winning device 72. As described above, the ball winning the first variable winning device 72 takes about 0.8 seconds (see t3 in FIG. 15; t3 =) in the passage 72d before detecting the first large winning opening (see “right front” in FIG. 15). In addition to flowing down at "800 ms"), the passage 72e (see "right rear" in FIG. 15) after the detection of the first major winning opening was performed in about 2.5 seconds (see t4 in FIG. 15, t4 = "2500 ms"). It is configured to flow down. That is, even when a ball flows in from the first variable winning device 72, it takes at least about 3.3 seconds (that is, "3300 ms") or more until the ball reaches the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a. It takes. Therefore, "3.1 seconds" (initial operation "50 ms" + closing time after initial operation "50 ms" + probability variation region 75 opening time "3000 ms" = "3100 ms" in synchronization with the on of the first winning opening solenoid 72b. ), The ball flowing in from the first variable winning device 72 cannot reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a while the probability variation region solenoid 75b is turned on. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot type "time saving A", the probability variation region 75 is opened, but the sphere cannot flow into the probability variation region 75, and the sphere is not detected by the probability variation region switch 75c. Therefore, the probability variation transition flag 203i Is not turned on and remains off (see FIGS. 14 and 15).

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "time reduction A", the second jackpot solenoid 74b is turned on for a predetermined time (see Max t1 in FIG. 15), and the second variable winning device 74 close to the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75. The ball can flow into the attacker unit 71. As described above, the ball winning the second variable winning device 74 takes about 0.3 seconds (see t5 in FIG. 15; t5 =) in the passage 74d before detecting the second large winning opening (see “left front” in FIG. 15). In addition to flowing down at "300 ms"), the passage 74e (see "left rear" in FIG. 15) after the detection of the second prize opening is in about 0.7 seconds (see t6 in FIG. 15, t6 = "700 ms"). It is configured to flow down. That is, when a ball flows in from the second variable winning device 74, it takes at least about 1.0 second (that is, t5 + t6 = "1000 ms") or more for the ball to reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a. However, it is configured so that it can reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a within about 3.0 seconds.

However, since the opening pattern of the probability variation region 75 of the jackpot type "time reduction A" is "A", the probability variation region solenoid 75b is not turned on in the second round of the jackpot type "time reduction A", and the ball moves to the probability variation region 75. It is set so that it cannot flow in. That is, although the sphere can flow in from the second variable winning device 74 close to the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75, the sphere cannot flow into the probability variation region 75 because the probability variation region 75 is not opened, and the probability variation region switch. Since the sphere is not detected by 75c, the probability variation transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off (see FIGS. 14 and 15).

Here, between the second round and the third round in the jackpot type "time saving A", the first variable winning is set as the waiting time for the ball winning in the attacker unit 71 to be discharged to the outside of the attacker unit 71. The interval in which both the device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are not opened is configured to be executed for a predetermined time (see t7 in FIG. 15, “2 seconds” in the first embodiment). That is, in the second round, the next round cannot be executed until the ball winning from the second variable winning device 74 into the attacker unit 71 can pass at least the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a. Has been done. Specifically, the time (that is, t5 + t6 <t7) for the ball that has won the second variable winning device 74 to reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a (that is, t5 + t6 = "1000 ms") or more. The time of t7) is set as the interval time.

This is because the third round is started in the situation where the ball won from the second variable winning device 74 exists in the attacker unit 71 in the second round, and the probability variation region solenoid 75b is synchronized with the start of the third round. If is turned on, the ball won from the second variable winning device 74 in the second round flows into the probability variation region 75 that is open in the third round, and an unintended "probability fluctuation state" occurs. May be possible.

Therefore, in the jackpot type "time saving A" in which the "probability fluctuation state" cannot occur, an interval is executed before the start of the middle round (that is, the third round) of the jackpot in which the probability variation region 75 can be opened, and the attacker unit. After making the sphere do not exist in 71, the round for opening the probability variation region 75 is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the unintended provision of a "probability fluctuation state". Therefore, it is possible to give the player a game value as expected in the game specifications and prevent an unexpected loss from occurring in the game field.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, at least during the period in which the interval is executed (for example, the period including the second round, the interval, and the third round), the player determines the effect mode after the jackpot ends. It is configured to perform a "character selection" effect for this purpose. By executing the "character selection" effect during the interval period, the player is made to pay attention to the "character selection" effect, and the degree of attention to the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 is relatively lowered. This makes it difficult to detect that the interval is being executed. Details of this "character selection" effect will be described later.

Then, after the end of the interval time, in the third round of the jackpot type "time saving A", the first big winning opening solenoid 72b is turned on for a predetermined time (see Max t1 in FIG. 15), and is far from the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75. The ball is set to flow into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72. As in the first round, the ball winning the first variable winning device 72 takes at least about 3.3 seconds (that is, t3 + t4 = "3300 ms") until the ball reaches the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a. It takes more than that. Therefore, "3.1 seconds" (initial operation "50 ms" + closing time after initial operation "50 ms" + probability variation region 75 opening time "3000 ms" = "3100 ms" in synchronization with the on of the first winning opening solenoid 72b. ), The ball flowing in from the first variable winning device 72 cannot reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a while the probability variation region solenoid 75b is turned on. Therefore, even in the third round of the jackpot type "time saving A", the probability variation region 75 is opened, but the sphere cannot flow into the probability variation region 75, and the sphere is not detected by the probability variation region switch 75c. 203i is not turned on and remains off (see FIGS. 14 and 15).

In the 4th and 5th rounds of the jackpot type "time saving A", the probability variation region solenoid 75b is not turned on, and the ball is set so as not to flow into the probability variation region 75. That is, no matter which variable winning device 72 or 74 the ball flows in, since the probability variation region 75 is not opened, the ball cannot flow into the probability variation region 75, and the ball is not detected by the probability variation region switch 75c. , The probability variation transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off (see FIGS. 14 and 15).

Therefore, in the jackpot type "time saving A", even when the ball flows into the attacker unit 71, the ball is placed at the arrangement position of the probability changing area opening / closing plate 75a at the timing when the probability changing area opening / closing plate 75a is opened. It is configured not to arrive. Therefore, since the sphere is not detected by the probability variation region switch 75c, the probability variation transition flag 203i remains off, and the "probability fluctuation state" cannot occur after the end of the jackpot type "time reduction A". ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, a ball detection mode and the like in each round of the jackpot type “time saving B” will be described. FIG. 16 shows the operation timings of the first special winning opening solenoid 72b, the second winning opening solenoid 74b, and the probability variation region solenoid 75b in each round of the jackpot type “time saving B” of the first special symbol, and the first winning opening switch. It is a timing chart which schematically shows the detection timing of a sphere in 72c, the 2nd prize opening switch 74c and the probability change area switch 75c, and the setting timing of an interval and a probability change transition flag 203i.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the jackpot type “time saving B”, a total of 5 rounds of jackpot games are executed, and at the start of each round, the jackpot solenoids 72b and 74b are turned on in the opening pattern “X2”. The corresponding opening / closing plates 72a and 74a are opened. That is, in the jackpot type "time saving B", the second big winning opening solenoid 74b is turned on in the odd round to open the second opening / closing plate 74a, and the first big winning opening solenoid 72b is turned on in the even round to open / close the first. The plate 72a is opened. Then, in each round, a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, either a maximum of "30 seconds" has passed since the opening or 10 balls are detected by the large winning opening switches 72c and 74c) is satisfied. In that case, the large winning opening solenoids 72b and 74b are turned off, the opening and closing plates 72a and 74a are closed, and one round is completed.

Further, in the jackpot type "time saving B", the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 is "X2". Therefore, first, in the first round of the jackpot type "time saving B", the second big winning opening solenoid 74b is turned on for a predetermined time, and the ball is attacked from the second variable winning device 74 near the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75. It can flow into 71. As described above, the ball that has won the second variable winning device 74 flows down the passage 74d before the detection of the second major winning opening in about 0.3 seconds, and passes through the passage 74e after the detection of the second major winning opening about 0. It is configured to flow down in 7 seconds. That is, when a ball flows in from the second variable winning device 74, it takes at least about 1.0 second (that is, t5 + t6 = "1000 ms") or more for the ball to reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a. However, it is configured so that it can reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a within about 3.0 seconds.

However, since the opening pattern of the probability variation region 75 of the jackpot type "time reduction B" is "B", the probability variation region solenoid 75b is not turned on in the first round of the jackpot type "time reduction B", and the ball moves to the probability variation region 75. It is set so that it cannot flow in. That is, although the sphere can flow in from the second variable winning device 74 near the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75, the sphere cannot flow into the probability variation region 75 because the probability variation region 75 is not opened, and the probability variation region switch. Since the sphere is not detected by 75c, the probability variation transition flag 203i is not turned on but remains off (see FIG. 16).

Next, between the first round and the second round in the jackpot type "time reduction B", the jackpot type "time reduction A" is set as a waiting time for the ball winning in the attacker unit 71 to be discharged to the outside of the attacker unit 71. The interval in which both the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are not opened is configured to be executed for a predetermined time. That is, in the first round, the next round cannot be executed until the ball winning from the second variable winning device 74 into the attacker unit 71 can pass at least the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a. Has been done. Specifically, the time required for the ball winning the second variable winning device 74 to reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is set as the interval time.

Next, after the end of the interval time, in the second round of the jackpot type "time saving B", the first big winning opening solenoid 72b is turned on for a predetermined time, and the ball is played from the first variable winning device 72 far from the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75. Is set to flow into the attacker unit 71. It takes at least about 3.3 seconds or more for the ball that has won the first variable winning device 72 to reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a.

Here, since the opening / closing pattern of the probability variation region 75 of the jackpot type “time saving B” is “B”, the probability variation region 75 is opened in synchronization with the opening of the first opening / closing plate 72a in the second round. Therefore, the ball flowing in from the first variable winning device 72 is said to be on while the probability variation region solenoid 75b is turned on for "3.1 seconds" in synchronization with the turning on of the first large winning opening solenoid 72b. It is not possible to reach the arrangement position of the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a. Therefore, in the second round of the jackpot type “time saving B”, the probability variation region 75 is opened, but the sphere cannot flow into the probability variation region 75, and the sphere is not detected by the probability variation region switch 75c. Therefore, the probability variation transition flag 203i Is not turned on and remains off (see FIG. 16).

Next, in the third round of the jackpot type "time reduction B", the second major winning opening solenoid 74b is turned on for a predetermined time, and a ball enters the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 near the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75. It can flow in. As described above, the ball that has won the second variable winning device 74 is configured to flow down in the passage 74d before detecting the second major winning opening and in the passage 74e after detecting the second major winning opening. That is, when a ball flows in from the second variable winning device 74, it takes at least about 1.0 second or more for the ball to reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a, but within about 3.0 seconds. Is configured to be reachable to the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a.

However, since the opening pattern of the probability variation region 75 of the jackpot type "time reduction B" is "B", the probability variation region solenoid 75b is not turned on in the third round of the jackpot type "time reduction B", and the ball moves to the probability variation region 75. It is set so that it cannot flow in. That is, although the sphere can flow in from the second variable winning device 74 near the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75, the sphere cannot flow into the probability variation region 75 because the probability variation region 75 is not opened, and the probability variation region switch. Since the sphere is not detected by 75c, the probability variation transition flag 203i is not turned on but remains off (see FIG. 16).

Here, in the third round of the jackpot type "time saving B", the probability variation region solenoid 75b is not turned on, so in the third round, no matter how the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are opened, the probability variation region 75 is reached. The ball cannot flow in. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide an interval between the second round and the third round, and immediately after the first variable winning device 72 in the second round is closed, the second variable winning device in the third round does not pass through the interval. 74 is released. With such a configuration, the time required for the jackpot can be shortened, and the game value can be quickly added to the player.

On the other hand, between the 3rd round and the 4th round in the jackpot type "time saving B", the first variable winning device is used as a waiting time for the ball winning in the attacker unit 71 to be discharged to the outside of the attacker unit 71. An interval in which both the 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are not opened is configured to be executed for a predetermined time. In addition, this interval time is equivalent to the interval time of the jackpot type "time reduction A".

Next, after the end of the interval time, in the fourth round of the jackpot type "time saving B", the first big winning opening solenoid 72b is turned on for a predetermined time, and the ball is played from the first variable winning device 72 far from the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75. Is set to flow into the attacker unit 71. As in the second round, it takes at least about 3.3 seconds or more for the ball winning the first variable winning device 72 to reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a. Therefore, the ball flowing in from the first variable winning device 72 is said to be on while the probability variation region solenoid 75b is turned on for "3.1 seconds" in synchronization with the turning on of the first large winning opening solenoid 72b. It is not possible to reach the arrangement position of the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a. Therefore, even in the fourth round of the jackpot type "time saving B", the probability variation region 75 is opened, but the sphere cannot flow into the probability variation region 75, and the sphere is not detected by the probability variation region switch 75c. The 203i is not turned on and remains off (see FIG. 16).

In the fifth round of the jackpot type "time saving B", the probability variation region solenoid 75b is not turned on, and the ball is set so as not to flow into the probability variation region 75. That is, no matter which variable winning device 72 or 74 the ball flows in, since the probability variation region 75 is not opened, the ball cannot flow into the probability variation region 75, and the ball is not detected by the probability variation region switch 75c. , The probabilistic transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off (see FIG. 16).

Therefore, in the jackpot type "time saving B", even when the ball flows into the attacker unit 71, the ball is placed at the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a at the timing when the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is opened. It is configured not to arrive. Therefore, as with the jackpot type "time reduction A", since the ball is not detected by the probability variation region switch 75c, the probability variation transition flag 203i remains off, and the "probability fluctuation state" changes after the jackpot type "time reduction B" ends. It is configured so that it cannot occur.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18, a sphere detection mode and the like in each round of the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation A” will be described. FIG. 17 shows the operation timings of the first big winning opening solenoid 72b, the second big winning opening solenoid 74b, and the probability variation region solenoid 75b in each round of the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation A” of the first special symbol, and the first big winning prize. It is a timing chart which schematically shows the detection timing of the ball in the mouth switch 72c, the 2nd prize opening switch 74c and the probability change area switch 75c, and the setting timing of an interval and a probability change transition flag 203i. Further, FIG. 18 shows the operation of the first special winning opening solenoid 72b, the second winning opening solenoid 74b, and the probability variation region solenoid 75b in the first to third rounds of the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation A” of the first special symbol. The timing, the timing of the interval which is the closing period of the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74, and the ball winning the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 up to the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a. The relationship between the time required to reach the ball, the ball detection timing of the first prize opening switch 72c, the second prize opening switch 74c, and the probability variation region switch 75c, and the setting timing of the probability variation transition flag 203i is schematically shown. It is a timing chart shown in. Hereinafter, the detailed time will be described with reference to FIG. 18 while explaining each timing in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 17, in the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation A”, a jackpot game of a total of 5 rounds is executed, and at the start of each round, the jackpot solenoids 72b and 74b are turned on in the opening pattern “X1”. The corresponding opening / closing plates 72a and 74a are opened. That is, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", the first big winning opening solenoid 72b is turned on in the odd round, the first opening / closing plate 72a is opened, and the second big winning opening solenoid 74b is turned on in the even round. 2 The opening / closing plate 74a is opened. Then, in each round, as in the case of the jackpot type "time reduction A", a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, a maximum of "30 seconds" has elapsed from the opening (see Max t1 in FIG. 18; Max t1 <"30000 ms"). Or, when one of the events of 10 balls detected by the big winning opening switches 72c and 74c) is established, the big winning opening solenoids 72b and 74b are turned off and the opening / closing plates 72a and 74a are closed. One round ends.

Further, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 is "X1". Therefore, first, in the first round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", the first special winning opening solenoid 72b is turned on for a predetermined time, and the ball is released from the first variable winning device 72 far from the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75. It can flow into the attacker unit 71.

As described above, the ball that has won the first variable winning device 72 flows down the passage 72d before the detection of the first large winning opening in about 0.8 seconds (see t3 in FIG. 18), and detects the first large winning opening. It is configured to flow down the rear passage 72e in about 2.5 seconds (see t4 in FIG. 18). That is, when a ball flows in from the first variable winning device 72, it takes at least about 3.3 seconds (that is, t3 + t4 = "3300 ms") or more for the ball to reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a. .. At this time, since the opening / closing pattern of the probability variation region 75 of the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation A” is “B”, the probability variation region 75 is not opened in the first round of the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation A”. Therefore, since the sphere cannot flow into the probability variation region 75 and the sphere is not detected by the probability variation region switch 75c, the probability variation transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off (see FIGS. 17 and 18).

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", the second jackpot solenoid 74b is turned on for a predetermined time (see Max t1 in FIG. 18), and the second variable winning is close to the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75. A ball can flow into the attacker unit 71 from the device 74. As described above, the ball winning the second variable winning device 74 takes about 0.3 seconds (see t5 in FIG. 18; t5 =) in the passage 74d before detecting the second large winning opening (see “left front” in FIG. 18). In addition to flowing down at "300 ms"), the passage 74e (see "left rear" in FIG. 18) after the detection of the second winning opening is performed in about 0.7 seconds (see t6 in FIG. 18, t6 = "700 ms"). It is configured to flow down. That is, when a ball flows in from the second variable winning device 74, it takes at least about 1.0 second (that is, t5 + t6 = "1000 ms") or more for the ball to reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a. However, it is configured so that it can reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a within about 3.0 seconds.

Here, in the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation A”, the opening / closing pattern of the probability variation region 75 is “B”. Then, in the second round, the probabilistic region solenoid 75b performs the initial operation in synchronization with the second large winning opening solenoid 74b being turned on, and then the probabilistic region solenoid 75b performs a fixed time (in the first embodiment, " "3000 ms") is turned on (see t2 in FIG. 18, t2 = "3000 ms"). Therefore, "3.1 seconds" (initial operation "50 ms" + closing time after initial operation "50 ms" + probability variation region 75 opening time "3000 ms" = "3100 ms" in synchronization with the on of the second prize opening solenoid 74b. ), The ball flowing in from the second variable winning device 74 can reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a while the probability variation region solenoid 75b is turned on (t5 + t6 <t2). Therefore, in the second round of the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation A”, the ball that has flowed into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 may flow into the probability variation region 75 while the probability variation region 75 is open. , The probability variation region switch 75c is detected, and the probability variation transition flag 203i is set to ON with the detection (see FIGS. 17 and 18).

Further, no interval time is set between the first round and the second round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A". Therefore, in the first round, immediately after the first variable winning device 72 is closed, the second variable winning device 74 in the second round is opened, and the probability variation region 75 is also opened with the opening. .. That is, in the first round, the winning ball (for example, the 10th count) that has achieved the closing condition of the first variable winning device 72 remains in the attacker unit 71, and the probability variation region 75 in the second round is opened. Is done. Therefore, the winning ball won in the first round can flow into the probability variation region 75 opened in the second round.

In this way, in the case of the jackpot type that can give the "probability fluctuation state", by not setting the interval time before the start of the round that opens the probability variation area 75, the attacker in the round before the round that opens the probability variation area 75. It is possible to flow the winning ball into the unit 71 into the probability variation region 75. As a result, in the jackpot type to which the "probability fluctuation state" can be given, the sphere can be more reliably flowed into the probability variation region 75, and the "probability fluctuation state" can be accurately generated.

Next, between the second round and the third round in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are both at the same timing as the jackpot type "time reduction A". The non-opening interval is configured to execute a predetermined time (see t7 in FIG. 18, “2 seconds” in the first embodiment). That is, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are opened and closed in the same manner as the variable winning devices 72 and 74 in the jackpot type "time saving A". As a result, the jackpot type cannot be determined only by the opening / closing patterns of the variable winning devices 72 and 74, and it is difficult (impossible) for the player to recognize which jackpot type is won, and which gaming state is used. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a playability that makes the player guess whether or not the game is being played in.

Next, after the lapse of the interval period, in the third round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", the first jackpot solenoid 72b is turned on for a predetermined time, and the first variable winning device 72 far from the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75. The ball can flow into the attacker unit 71. As described above, the ball that has won the first variable winning device 72 flows down the passage 72d before the detection of the first large winning opening in about 0.8 seconds (see t3 in FIG. 18), and detects the first large winning opening. It is configured to flow down the rear passage 72e in about 2.5 seconds (see t4 in FIG. 18). That is, when a ball flows in from the first variable winning device 72, it takes at least about 3.3 seconds (that is, t3 + t4 = "3300 ms") or more for the ball to reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a. .. At this time, in the third round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", since the probability variation region 75 is not opened, the sphere cannot flow into the probability variation region 75, and the sphere is not detected by the probability variation region switch 75c. It is configured (see FIGS. 17 and 18).

Next, in the fourth round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", the second jackpot solenoid 74b is turned on for a predetermined time, and the ball is attacked by the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 near the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75. Can flow in. As in the second round, the ball winning the second variable winning device 74 takes at least about 1.0 second (that is, t5 + t6 = "1000 ms") until the ball reaches the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a. Although the above is required, it is configured to be able to reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a within about 3.0 seconds.

Here, in the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation A”, the opening / closing pattern of the probability variation region 75 is “B”. Then, in the fourth round, as in the second round, the probabilistic region solenoid 75b performs the initial operation in synchronization with the second large winning opening solenoid 74b being turned on, and then the probabilistic region solenoid 75b performs a fixed time (the second). In one embodiment, "3000 ms") is turned on. Therefore, "3.1 seconds" (initial operation "50 ms" + closing time after initial operation "50 ms" + probability variation region 75 opening time "3000 ms" = "3100 ms" in synchronization with the on of the second prize opening solenoid 74b. ), The ball flowing in from the second variable winning device 74 can reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a while the probability variation region solenoid 75b is turned on (t5 + t6 <t2). Therefore, even in the fourth round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", the ball flowing into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 during the opening of the probability variation region 75 is the probability variation as in the second round. It is configured so that it can flow into the region 75 and be detected by the probability variation region switch 75c. Therefore, when the probability variation transition flag 203i is not turned on in the second round, the probability variation transition flag 203i can be set to on with the detection of the sphere by the probability variation region switch 75c in the fourth round (see FIG. 17).

In the fifth round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", the probability variation region solenoid 75b is not turned on, and the ball is set so as not to flow into the probability variation region 75. That is, no matter which variable winning device 72 or 74 the ball flows in, since the probability variation region 75 is not opened, the ball cannot flow into the probability variation region 75, and the ball is not detected by the probability variation region switch 75c. (See FIG. 17).

Therefore, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", the probability variation region 75 is opened in the second round and the fourth round, respectively, and the ball flowing in from the second variable winning device 74 (first variable winning device 72) is further released. Since the probability variation region 75 is configured to be able to flow into the probability variation region 75 while the probability variation region 75 is open, the probability variation transition flag 203i can be set to ON in each round. Then, at the end of the jackpot, the "probability fluctuation state" is set with reference to the probability variation transition flag 203i.

In addition, when the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A" that generates a "probability fluctuation state" is won after the jackpot ends, the probability variation region 75 is reached in a plurality of rounds (that is, the second and fourth rounds) in the jackpot. The ball is configured to allow inflow. Therefore, in the previous round (that is, the second round) in which the probability variation region 75 is open, the ball cannot be passed to the probability variation region 75 due to some reason (for example, insufficient launch ball). However, the situation can be resolved later by the round (that is, the fourth round), and the ball can be passed through the probability variation region 75 in the subsequent round. Therefore, there is a case where a sudden trouble (for example, a game abnormality such as a launch abnormality, a player's poor physical condition, etc.) causes an obstacle to pass the ball to the probability change area 75 opened in one round. However, by providing the possibility of passing the ball through the probability variation region 75 that is open in other rounds, it is possible to realize a comfortable game without causing a disadvantage to the player due to an unexpected situation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19, a sphere detection mode and the like in each round of the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation B” will be described. FIG. 19 shows the operation timings of the first big winning opening solenoid 72b, the second big winning opening solenoid 74b, and the probability variation region solenoid 75b in each round of the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation B” of the first special symbol, and the first big winning prize. It is a timing chart which schematically shows the detection timing of the ball in the mouth switch 72c, the 2nd prize opening switch 74c and the probability change area switch 75c, and the setting timing of an interval and a probability change transition flag 203i.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation B”, a total of 5 rounds of jackpot games are executed, and at the start of each round, the jackpot solenoids 72b and 74b are turned on in the opening pattern “X2”. The corresponding opening / closing plates 72a and 74a are opened. That is, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B", the second winning opening solenoid 74b is turned on in the odd-numbered round to open the second opening / closing plate 74a, and the first winning opening solenoid 72b is turned on in the even-numbered round. 1 The opening / closing plate 72a is opened. Then, in each round, as in the case of the jackpot type "time saving A", 10 balls are detected by a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, a maximum of "30 seconds" has passed since the opening, or the jackpot switches 72c and 74c are used. , One of the events) is established, the large winning opening solenoids 72b and 74b are turned off, the opening and closing plates 72a and 74a are closed, and one round is completed.

Further, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B", the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 is "Y1". Therefore, first, in the first round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B", the second jackpot solenoid 74b is turned on for a predetermined time, and the ball is ejected from the second variable winning device 74 near the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75. It can flow into the attacker unit 71. As described above, the ball that has won the second variable winning device 74 flows down the passage 74d before the detection of the second major winning opening in about 0.3 seconds, and passes through the passage 74e after the detection of the second major winning opening about 0. It is configured to flow down in 7 seconds. That is, when a ball flows in from the second variable winning device 74, it takes at least about 1.0 second or more for the ball to reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a, but within about 3.0 seconds. Is configured to be reachable to the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a.

Here, in the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation B”, the opening / closing pattern of the probability variation region 75 is “A”. Then, in the first round, the probabilistic region solenoid 75b performs the initial operation in synchronization with the second large winning opening solenoid 74b being turned on, and then the probabilistic region solenoid 75b performs a fixed time (in the first embodiment, " 3000ms ") is turned on. Therefore, "3.1 seconds" (initial operation "50 ms" + closing time after initial operation "50 ms" + probability variation region 75 opening time "3000 ms" = "3100 ms" in synchronization with the on of the second prize opening solenoid 74b. ), The ball flowing in from the second variable winning device 74 can reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a while the probability variation region solenoid 75b is turned on. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B", the ball that has flowed into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 may flow into the probability variation region 75 while the probability variation region 75 is open. , The probability variation region switch 75c is detected, and the probability variation transition flag 203i is set to ON with the detection (see FIG. 19).

Next, between the first round and the second round in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B", both the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are performed at the same timing as the jackpot type "time saving B". The non-opening interval is configured to run for a predetermined time. That is, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B", the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are opened and closed in the same manner as the opening and closing modes of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 in the jackpot type "time saving B". As a result, the jackpot type cannot be determined only by the opening / closing patterns of the variable winning devices 72 and 74, and it is difficult (impossible) for the player to recognize which jackpot type is won, and which gaming state is used. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a playability that makes the player guess whether or not the game is being played in.

Next, after the lapse of the interval period, in the second round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B", the first special winning opening solenoid 72b is turned on for a predetermined time, and the first variable winning device 72 far from the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75. The ball can flow into the attacker unit 71. As described above, the ball that has won the first variable winning device 72 flows down the passage 72d before the detection of the first large winning opening in about 0.8 seconds, and flows down the passage 72e after detecting the first large winning opening in about 2. It is configured to flow down in 5 seconds. That is, when a ball flows in from the first variable winning device 72, it takes at least about 3.3 seconds or more for the ball to reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a. At this time, in the second round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B", since the probability variation region 75 is not opened, the sphere cannot flow into the probability variation region 75, and the sphere is not detected by the probability variation region switch 75c. It is configured (see FIG. 19).

Next, in the third round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", the second jackpot solenoid 74b is turned on for a predetermined time, and the ball is attacked by the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 near the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75. Can flow in. As in the first round, it takes at least about 1.0 second or more for the ball winning the second variable winning device 74 to reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a, but about 3.0. It is configured to be able to reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a within seconds.

Here, in the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation B”, the opening / closing pattern of the probability variation region 75 is “A”. Then, in the third round, as in the first round, the probabilistic region solenoid 75b performs the initial operation in synchronization with the second large winning opening solenoid 74b being turned on, and then the probabilistic region solenoid 75b performs a fixed time (first In one embodiment, "3000 ms") is turned on. Therefore, "3.1 seconds" (initial operation "50 ms" + closing time after initial operation "50 ms" + probability variation region 75 opening time "3000 ms" = "3100 ms" in synchronization with the on of the second prize opening solenoid 74b. ), The ball flowing in from the second variable winning device 74 can reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a while the probability variation region solenoid 75b is turned on. Therefore, in the third round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B", the ball flowing into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 during the opening of the probability variation region 75 is the probability variation as in the first round. It is configured so that it can flow into the region 75 and be detected by the probability variation region switch 75c. Therefore, when the probabilistic transition flag 203i is not turned on in the first round, the probabilistic transition flag 203i can be set to be turned on when the sphere is detected by the probability variation region switch 75c in the third round (see FIG. 19).

Further, no interval time is set between the second round and the third round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B". Therefore, in the second round, immediately after the first variable winning device 72 is closed, the second variable winning device 74 in the third round is opened, and the probability variation region 75 is also opened with the opening. .. That is, in the second round, the winning ball (for example, the 10th count) that has achieved the closing condition of the first variable winning device 72 remains in the attacker unit 71, and the probability variation region 75 in the third round. Opening is done. Therefore, the winning ball won in the second round can flow into the probability variation region 75 opened in the third round.

Next, between the third and fourth rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B", the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are both at the same timing as the jackpot type "time saving B". The non-opening interval is configured to run for a predetermined time. That is, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B", the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are opened and closed in the same manner as the opening and closing modes of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 in the jackpot type "time saving B".

In the 4th and 5th rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B", the probabilistic region solenoid 75b is not turned on, and the ball is set so as not to flow into the probabilistic region 75. That is, no matter which of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 the ball flows in, since the probability variation region 75 is not opened, the ball cannot flow into the probability variation region 75, and the ball is not detected by the probability variation region switch 75c. (See FIG. 19).

Therefore, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B", the probability variation region 75 is opened in each of the first round and the third round, and the ball flowing in from the second variable winning device 74 (first variable winning device 72) is further released. Since the probability variation region 75 is configured to be able to flow into the probability variation region 75 while the probability variation region 75 is open, the probability variation transition flag 203i can be set to ON in each round. Then, at the end of the jackpot, the "probability fluctuation state" is set with reference to the probability variation transition flag 203i.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, a sphere detection mode and the like in each round of the jackpot type “probability variation A” will be described. FIG. 20 shows the operation timings of the first special winning opening solenoid 72b, the second winning opening solenoid 74b, and the probability variation region solenoid 75b in each round of the jackpot type “probability fluctuation A” of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is a timing chart which schematically shows the detection timing of the ball in the 1st grand prize opening switch 72c, the 2nd grand prize opening switch 74c and the probability variation region switch 75c, and the setting timing of an interval and a probability variation transition flag 203i.

As shown in FIG. 20, in the jackpot type “probability fluctuation A”, a total of 10 rounds of jackpot games are executed, and at the start of each round, the jackpot solenoids 72b and 74b are turned on in the opening pattern “Y1”. , The corresponding opening / closing plates 72a, 74a are opened. That is, in the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", the second big winning opening solenoid 74b is turned on in the odd round, the second opening / closing plate 74a is opened, and the first big winning opening solenoid 72b is turned on in the even round. The opening / closing plate 72a is opened. Then, in each round, as in the case of the jackpot type "time saving A", 10 balls are detected by a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, a maximum of "30 seconds" has passed since the opening, or the jackpot switches 72c and 74c are used. , One of the events) is established, the large winning opening solenoids 72b and 74b are turned off, the opening and closing plates 72a and 74a are closed, and one round is completed.

Further, in the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 is "Y1". Therefore, first, in the first round of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", the second jackpot solenoid 74b is turned on for a predetermined time, and the ball is attacked from the second variable winning device 74 near the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75. It can flow into the unit 71. As described above, the ball that has won the second variable winning device 74 flows down the passage 74d before the detection of the second major winning opening in about 0.3 seconds, and passes through the passage 74e after the detection of the second major winning opening about 0. It is configured to flow down in 7 seconds. That is, when a ball flows in from the second variable winning device 74, it takes at least about 1.0 second or more for the ball to reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a, but within about 3.0 seconds. Is configured to be reachable to the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a.

Here, in the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", the opening / closing pattern of the probability variation region 75 is "C". Then, in the first round, the probabilistic region solenoid 75b performs the initial operation in synchronization with the second large winning opening solenoid 74b being turned on, and then the probabilistic region solenoid 75b performs a fixed time (in the first embodiment, " 3000ms ") is turned on. Therefore, "3.1 seconds" (initial operation "50 ms" + closing time after initial operation "50 ms" + probability variation region 75 opening time "3000 ms" = "3100 ms" in synchronization with the on of the second prize opening solenoid 74b. ), The ball flowing in from the second variable winning device 74 can reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a while the probability variation region solenoid 75b is turned on. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", the ball that has flowed into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 may flow into the probability variation region 75 while the probability variation region 75 is open. It is detected by the probability variation region switch 75c, and the probability variation transition flag 203i is set to on with the detection (see FIG. 20).

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", the first jackpot solenoid 72b is turned on for a predetermined time, and the ball is inside the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72 far from the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75. Can flow into. As described above, the ball that has won the first variable winning device 72 flows down the passage 72d before the detection of the first large winning opening in about 0.8 seconds, and flows down the passage 72e after detecting the first large winning opening in about 2. It is configured to flow down in 5 seconds. That is, when a ball flows in from the first variable winning device 72, it takes at least about 3.3 seconds or more for the ball to reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a. At this time, in the second round of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", since the probability variation region 75 is not opened, the sphere cannot flow into the probability variation region 75, and the sphere is not detected by the probability variation region switch 75c. (See FIG. 20).

Next, in the third round of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", the second jackpot solenoid 74b is turned on for a predetermined time, and a ball is placed in the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 near the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75. Can flow into. As in the first round, it takes at least about 1.0 second or more for the ball winning the second variable winning device 74 to reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a, but about 3.0. It is configured to be able to reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a within seconds.

Here, in the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", the opening / closing pattern of the probability variation region 75 is "C". Then, in the third round, as in the first round, the probabilistic region solenoid 75b performs the initial operation in synchronization with the second large winning opening solenoid 74b being turned on, and then the probabilistic region solenoid 75b performs a fixed time (first In one embodiment, "3000 ms") is turned on. Therefore, "3.1 seconds" (initial operation "50 ms" + closing time after initial operation "50 ms" + probability variation region 75 opening time "3000 ms" = "3100 ms" in synchronization with the on of the second prize opening solenoid 74b. ), The ball flowing in from the second variable winning device 74 can reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a while the probability variation region solenoid 75b is turned on. Therefore, in the third round of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", as in the first round, the ball flowing into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 while the probability variation region 75 is open is the probability variation region. It is configured so that it can flow into the 75 and be detected by the probability variation region switch 75c. Therefore, when the probabilistic transition flag 203i is not turned on in the first round, the probabilistic transition flag 203i can be set on with the detection of the sphere by the probability variation region switch 75c in the third round (see FIG. 20).

Further, no interval time is set between the second round and the third round of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A" (similar to all rounds of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A"). Therefore, in the second round, immediately after the first variable winning device 72 is closed, the second variable winning device 74 in the third round is opened, and the probability variation region 75 is also opened with the opening. .. That is, in the second round, the winning ball (for example, the 10th count) that has achieved the closing condition of the first variable winning device 72 remains in the attacker unit 71, and the probability variation region 75 in the third round. Opening is done. Therefore, the winning ball won in the second round can flow into the probability variation region 75 opened in the third round.

Next, in the 4th to 8th rounds and the 10th round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B", the probability variation region solenoid 75b is not turned on, and the ball is set so as not to flow into the probability variation region 75. There is. That is, no matter which variable winning device 72 or 74 the ball flows in, since the probability variation region 75 is not opened, the ball cannot flow into the probability variation region 75, and the ball is not detected by the probability variation region switch 75c. (See FIG. 20).

On the other hand, in the ninth round of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", the second jackpot solenoid 74b is turned on for a predetermined time, and the ball is inside the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 near the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75. Can flow into. As in the first and third rounds, it takes at least about 1.0 second or more for the ball winning the second variable winning device 74 to reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a. It is configured so that it can reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a within about 3.0 seconds.

Here, in the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", the opening / closing pattern of the probability variation region 75 is "C". Then, in the 9th round, as in the 1st and 3rd rounds, the probabilistic region solenoid 75b performs the initial operation in synchronization with the second grand prize opening solenoid 74b being turned on, and then the probabilistic region solenoid 75b moves. It is turned on for a certain period of time (“3000 ms” in the first embodiment). Therefore, "3.1 seconds" (initial operation "50 ms" + closing time after initial operation "50 ms" + probability variation region 75 opening time "3000 ms" = "3100 ms" in synchronization with the on of the second prize opening solenoid 74b. ), The ball flowing in from the second variable winning device 74 can reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a while the probability variation region solenoid 75b is turned on. Therefore, even in the 9th round of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", as in the 1st and 3rd rounds, the ball that has flowed into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 while the probability variation region 75 is open. , It is configured so that it can flow into the probability variation region 75 and can be detected by the probability variation region switch 75c. Therefore, when the probability variation transition flag 203i is not turned on in the first and third rounds, the probability variation transition flag 203i can be set to be turned on when the sphere is detected by the probability variation region switch 75c in the ninth round (FIG. FIG. 20).

Therefore, in the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", the probability variation region 75 is opened in the first round, the third round, and the ninth round, respectively, and further flows in from the second variable winning device 74 (first variable winning device 72). Since the ball is configured to be able to flow into the probability variation region 75 while the probability variation region 75 is open, the probability variation transition flag 203i can be set to ON in more rounds such as the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation A”. Then, at the end of the jackpot, the "probability fluctuation state" is set with reference to the probability variation transition flag 203i. With this configuration, in the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", it is possible to more reliably make it easier for the sphere to flow into the probability variation region 75, and it is possible to accurately generate the "probability fluctuation state".

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, a ball detection mode and the like in each round of the jackpot type “time saving C” will be described. FIG. 21 shows the operation timings of the first special winning opening solenoid 72b, the second winning opening solenoid 74b, and the probability variation region solenoid 75b in each round of the jackpot type “time saving C” of the second special symbol, and the first winning opening switch. It is a timing chart which schematically shows the detection timing of a sphere in 72c, the 2nd prize opening switch 74c and the probability change area switch 75c, and the setting timing of an interval and a probability change transition flag 203i.

As shown in FIG. 21, in the jackpot type “time saving C”, a total of 10 rounds of jackpot games are executed, and at the start of each round, the jackpot solenoids 72b and 74b are turned on in the opening pattern “Y2”. The corresponding opening / closing plates 72a and 74a are opened. That is, in the jackpot type "time saving C", the first winning opening solenoid 72b is turned on in the odd-numbered round to open the first opening / closing plate 72a, and the second winning opening solenoid 74b is turned on in the even-numbered round to open / close the second. The plate 74a is opened. Then, in each round, a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, either a maximum of "30 seconds" has passed since the opening or 10 balls are detected by the large winning opening switches 72c and 74c) is satisfied. In that case, the large winning opening solenoids 72b and 74b are turned off, the opening and closing plates 72a and 74a are closed, and one round is completed.

Further, in the jackpot type "time saving C", the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 is "Y2". Therefore, first, in the first round of the jackpot type "time saving C", the first grand prize opening solenoid 72b is turned on for a predetermined time, and the ball is attacked from the first variable winning device 72 far from the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75. It can flow into 71. It takes at least about 3.3 seconds or more for the ball that has won the first variable winning device 72 to reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a.

Here, since the opening / closing pattern of the probability variation region 75 of the jackpot type “time saving C” is “A”, the probability variation region 75 is opened in synchronization with the opening of the first opening / closing plate 72a in the first round. Therefore, the ball flowing in from the first variable winning device 72 is said to be on while the probability variation region solenoid 75b is turned on for "3.1 seconds" in synchronization with the turning on of the first large winning opening solenoid 72b. It is not possible to reach the arrangement position of the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot type "time saving C", the probability variation region 75 is opened, but the sphere cannot flow into the probability variation region 75, and the sphere is not detected by the probability variation region switch 75c. Therefore, the probability variation transition flag 203i Is not turned on and remains off (see FIG. 21).

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "time reduction C", the second major winning opening solenoid 74b is turned on for a predetermined time, and a ball enters the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 near the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75. It can flow in. As described above, the ball that has won the second variable winning device 74 is configured to flow down in the passage 74d before detecting the second major winning opening and in the passage 74e after detecting the second major winning opening. That is, when a ball flows in from the second variable winning device 74, it takes at least about 1.0 second or more for the ball to reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a, but within about 3.0 seconds. Is configured to be reachable to the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a.

However, since the opening pattern of the probability variation region 75 of the jackpot type "time reduction C" is "A", the probability variation region solenoid 75b is not turned on in the second round of the jackpot type "time reduction C", and the ball moves to the probability variation region 75. It is set so that it cannot flow in. That is, although the sphere can flow in from the second variable winning device 74 near the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75, the sphere cannot flow into the probability variation region 75 because the probability variation region 75 is not opened, and the probability variation region switch. Since the sphere is not detected by 75c, the probability variation transition flag 203i is not turned on but remains off (see FIG. 21).

Next, between the second round and the third round in the jackpot type "time reduction C", the jackpot type "time reduction A" is set as the waiting time for the ball winning in the attacker unit 71 to be discharged to the outside of the attacker unit 71. , Etc., the interval in which both the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are not opened is configured to be executed for a predetermined time. That is, in the second round, the next round cannot be executed until the ball winning from the second variable winning device 74 into the attacker unit 71 can pass at least the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a. Has been done. Specifically, the time required for the ball winning the second variable winning device 74 to reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is set as the interval time.

Next, after the end of the interval time, in the third round of the jackpot type "time saving C", the first big winning opening solenoid 72b is turned on for a predetermined time, and the ball is played from the first variable winning device 72 far from the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75. Is set to flow into the attacker unit 71. It takes at least about 3.3 seconds or more for the ball that has won the first variable winning device 72 to reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a.

Here, since the opening / closing pattern of the probability variation region 75 of the jackpot type “time saving C” is “A”, the probability variation region 75 is opened in synchronization with the opening of the first opening / closing plate 72a in the third round. Therefore, the ball flowing in from the first variable winning device 72 is said to be on while the probability variation region solenoid 75b is turned on for "3.1 seconds" in synchronization with the turning on of the first large winning opening solenoid 72b. It is not possible to reach the arrangement position of the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a. Therefore, in the third round of the jackpot type "time saving C", the probability variation region 75 is opened, but the sphere cannot flow into the probability variation region 75, and the sphere is not detected by the probability variation region switch 75c. Therefore, the probability variation transition flag 203i Is not turned on and remains off (see FIG. 21).

In the 4th to 10th rounds of the jackpot type "time saving C", the probability variation region solenoid 75b is not turned on, and the ball is set so as not to flow into the probability variation region 75. That is, no matter which variable winning device 72 or 74 the ball flows in, since the probability variation region 75 is not opened, the ball cannot flow into the probability variation region 75, and the ball is not detected by the probability variation region switch 75c. , The probability variation transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off (see FIG. 21).

Therefore, in the jackpot type "time saving C", even when the ball flows into the attacker unit 71, the ball is placed at the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a at the timing when the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is opened. It is configured not to arrive. Therefore, as with the jackpot types "time reduction A" and "time reduction B", since the ball is not detected by the probability variation region switch 75c, the probability variation transition flag 203i remains off, and after the jackpot type "time reduction B" ends It is configured so that a "probability fluctuation state" cannot occur.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, a sphere detection mode and the like in each round of the jackpot type “latent probability variation C” will be described. FIG. 22 shows the operation timings of the first big winning opening solenoid 72b, the second big winning opening solenoid 74b, and the probability variation region solenoid 75b in each round of the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation C” of the second special symbol, and the first big winning prize. It is a timing chart which schematically shows the detection timing of the ball in the mouth switch 72c, the 2nd prize opening switch 74c and the probability change area switch 75c, and the setting timing of an interval and a probability change transition flag 203i.

As shown in FIG. 22, in the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation C”, a total of 10 rounds of jackpot games are executed, and at the start of each round, the jackpot solenoids 72b and 74b are turned on in the opening pattern “Y2”. The corresponding opening / closing plates 72a and 74a are opened. That is, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C", the first winning opening solenoid 72b is turned on in the odd-numbered round to open the first opening / closing plate 72a, and the second winning opening solenoid 74b is turned on in the even-numbered round. 2 The opening / closing plate 74a is opened. Then, in each round, as in the case of the jackpot type "time saving C", 10 balls are detected by a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, a maximum of "30 seconds" has passed since the opening, or the jackpot switches 72c and 74c are used. , One of the events) is established, the large winning opening solenoids 72b and 74b are turned off, the opening and closing plates 72a and 74a are closed, and one round is completed.

Further, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C", the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 is "Y2". Therefore, first, in the first round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", the first special winning opening solenoid 72b is turned on for a predetermined time, and the ball is released from the first variable winning device 72 far from the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75. It can flow into the attacker unit 71.

As described above, the ball that has won the first variable winning device 72 flows down the passage 72d before the detection of the first large winning opening in about 0.8 seconds, and flows down the passage 72e after detecting the first large winning opening in about 2. It is configured to flow down in 5 seconds. That is, when a ball flows in from the first variable winning device 72, it takes at least about 3.3 seconds or more for the ball to reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a. At this time, since the opening / closing pattern of the probability variation region 75 of the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation C” is “B”, the probability variation region 75 is not opened in the first round of the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation C”. Therefore, since the sphere cannot flow into the probability variation region 75 and the sphere is not detected by the probability variation region switch 75c, the probability variation transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off (see FIG. 22).

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C", the second jackpot solenoid 74b is turned on for a predetermined time, and the ball is attacked by the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 near the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75. Can flow in. As described above, the ball that has won the second variable winning device 74 flows down the passage 74d before the detection of the second major winning opening in about 0.3 seconds, and passes through the passage 74e after the detection of the second major winning opening about 0. It is configured to flow down in 7 seconds. That is, when a ball flows in from the second variable winning device 74, it takes at least about 1.0 second or more for the ball to reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a, but within about 3.0 seconds. Is configured to be reachable to the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a.

Here, in the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation C”, the opening / closing pattern of the probability variation region 75 is “B”. Then, in the second round, the probabilistic region solenoid 75b performs the initial operation in synchronization with the second large winning opening solenoid 74b being turned on, and then the probabilistic region solenoid 75b performs a fixed time (in the first embodiment, " 3000ms ") is turned on. Therefore, "3.1 seconds" (initial operation "50 ms" + closing time after initial operation "50 ms" + probability variation region 75 opening time "3000 ms" = "3100 ms" in synchronization with the on of the second prize opening solenoid 74b. ), The ball flowing in from the second variable winning device 74 can reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a while the probability variation region solenoid 75b is turned on. Therefore, in the second round of the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation C”, the ball that has flowed into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 may flow into the probability variation region 75 while the probability variation region 75 is open. , The probability variation region switch 75c is detected, and the probability variation transition flag 203i is set to ON with the detection (see FIG. 22).

Further, no interval time is set between the first and second rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C" as in the first and second rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A". .. Therefore, in the first round, immediately after the first variable winning device 72 is closed, the second variable winning device 74 in the second round is opened, and the probability variation region 75 is also opened with the opening. .. That is, in the first round, the winning ball (for example, the 10th count) that has achieved the closing condition of the first variable winning device 72 remains in the attacker unit 71, and the probability variation region 75 in the second round is opened. Is done. Therefore, the winning ball won in the first round can flow into the probability variation region 75 opened in the second round.

Next, between the second round and the third round in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C", the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are both at the same timing as the jackpot type "time saving C". The non-opening interval is configured to execute a predetermined time (“2 seconds” in the first embodiment). That is, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C", the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are opened and closed in the same manner as the opening and closing modes of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 in the jackpot type "time saving C". As a result, the jackpot type cannot be determined only by the opening / closing patterns of the variable winning devices 72 and 74, and it is difficult (impossible) for the player to recognize which jackpot type is won, and which gaming state is used. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a playability that makes the player guess whether or not the game is being played in.

Next, after the lapse of the interval period, in the third round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C", the first jackpot solenoid 72b is turned on for a predetermined time, and the first variable winning device 72 far from the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75. The ball can flow into the attacker unit 71. As described above, the ball that has won the first variable winning device 72 flows down the passage 72d before the detection of the first large winning opening in about 0.8 seconds, and flows down the passage 72e after detecting the first large winning opening in about 2. It is configured to flow down in 5 seconds. That is, when a ball flows in from the first variable winning device 72, it takes at least about 3.3 seconds or more for the ball to reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a. At this time, in the third round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C", since the probability variation region 75 is not opened, the sphere cannot flow into the probability variation region 75, and the sphere is not detected by the probability variation region switch 75c. It is configured (see FIG. 22).

Next, in the fourth round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C", the second jackpot solenoid 74b is turned on for a predetermined time, and the ball is attacked by the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 near the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75. Can flow in. As in the second round, it takes at least about 1.0 second or more for the ball that has won the second variable winning device 74 to reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a, but about 3.0. It is configured to be able to reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a within seconds.

Here, in the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation C”, the opening / closing pattern of the probability variation region 75 is “B”. Then, in the fourth round, as in the second round, the probabilistic region solenoid 75b performs the initial operation in synchronization with the second large winning opening solenoid 74b being turned on, and then the probabilistic region solenoid 75b performs a fixed time (the second). In one embodiment, "3000 ms") is turned on. Therefore, "3.1 seconds" (initial operation "50 ms" + closing time after initial operation "50 ms" + probability variation region 75 opening time "3000 ms" = "3100 ms" in synchronization with the on of the second prize opening solenoid 74b. ), The ball flowing in from the second variable winning device 74 can reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a while the probability variation region solenoid 75b is turned on. Therefore, in the fourth round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C", as in the second round, the ball flowing into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 during the opening of the probability variation region 75 is the probability variation. It is configured so that it can flow into the region 75 and be detected by the probability variation region switch 75c. Therefore, when the probability variation transition flag 203i is not turned on in the second round, the probability variation transition flag 203i can be set to on with the detection of the sphere by the probability variation region switch 75c in the fourth round (see FIG. 22).

In the 5th to 10th rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C", the probability variation region solenoid 75b is not turned on, and the ball is set so as not to flow into the probability variation region 75. That is, no matter which variable winning device 72 or 74 the ball flows in, since the probability variation region 75 is not opened, the ball cannot flow into the probability variation region 75, and the ball is not detected by the probability variation region switch 75c. (See FIG. 22).

Therefore, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C", the probability variation region 75 is opened in each of the second and fourth rounds, and the ball flowing in from the second variable winning device 74 (first variable winning device 72) is further released. Since the probability variation region 75 is configured to be able to flow into the probability variation region 75 while the probability variation region 75 is open, the probability variation transition flag 203i can be set to ON in each round. Then, at the end of the jackpot, the "probability fluctuation state" is set with reference to the probability variation transition flag 203i.

In addition, when the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C" that generates a "probability fluctuation state" is won after the jackpot ends, the probability variation region 75 is reached in a plurality of rounds (that is, the second and fourth rounds) in the jackpot. The ball is configured to allow inflow. Therefore, in the previous round (that is, the second round) in which the probability variation region 75 is open, the ball cannot be passed to the probability variation region 75 due to some reason (for example, insufficient launch ball). However, the situation can be resolved later by the round (that is, the fourth round), and the ball can be passed through the probability variation region 75 in the subsequent round. Therefore, there is a case where a sudden trouble (for example, a game abnormality such as a launch abnormality, a player's poor physical condition, etc.) causes an obstacle to pass the ball to the probability change area 75 opened in one round. However, by providing the possibility of passing the ball through the probability variation region 75 that is open in other rounds, it is possible to realize a comfortable game without causing a disadvantage to the player due to an unexpected situation.

In this way, the jackpot types (that is, the jackpot types "time saving A" and "latent probability fluctuation A", the jackpot types "time saving B" and "latent probability fluctuation B", and the jackpot type "time saving C" have the same opening and closing patterns. ”And“ latent probability fluctuation C ”), respectively, so that the jackpot type cannot be determined only by the opening / closing patterns of the variable winning devices 72 and 74, and it is difficult for the player to recognize which jackpot type is won ( It is possible to improve the interest of the game by configuring (impossible) and creating a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played after the jackpot.

On the other hand, the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A" that notifies that it is in the "probability fluctuation state" opens and closes the variable winning devices 72 and 74 with a unique opening / closing pattern (that is, "Y1") different from other jackpot types. Control. Therefore, the player can recognize that the "probability fluctuation state" is given by recognizing the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning devices 72 and 74.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Similar to the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 33) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, a prize ball detection switch 217 for detecting the paid out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. The prize ball detection switch 217 is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball. is there. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, a variable effect, and continuous operation. It controls the setting of the display mode of the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 such as the advance notice effect and the "character selection" effect.

The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. In the first embodiment, the command is configured to be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 in only one direction, and the command cannot be transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the main control device 110. ing. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured so that commands can be transmitted and received to each other.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be changed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the rear image of the "super reach" effect mode and the selected character in the "character selection" effect, and to the display control device 114. The third symbol display device 81 is instructed to display the display based on the pressing of the frame button 22.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 2). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminals of the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 33). The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process.

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 23 to 35. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process (see FIG. 34) that is started when the power is turned on, a main process (see FIG. 35) that is executed after the start-up process, and a periodic (first embodiment). Then, there are a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) that is activated in a “4 ms” cycle) and an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 33) that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Here, for convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) and the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 33) are first described, and then the start-up process (see FIG. 34) and the main process (see FIG. 35) are described. To explain.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process that is repeatedly executed every "4 milliseconds". When the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt processing and the main processing, commands to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, etc. are generated based on various processes, and temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. .. In the external output process of S101, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side.

For example, the hold ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 24) described later is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, confirmation command, etc. set in the special figure fluctuation processing (see FIG. 25) and the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 26), which is one of the special figure fluctuation processing, are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Send. In addition, a ball launch signal set when launching a ball in the launch control process of S112, which will be described later, is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then the jackpot process for executing the process at the time of the jackpot based on the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed (S102). S103). The details of this jackpot process (S103) will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

Next, the ordinary electric service control process for executing the drive control process for the rotating plate of the ordinary electric service 64c is executed (S104). Briefly, on the condition that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol gate 67, the normal symbol display device 83 performs variable display of the normal symbol, and as a result of the variable display of the normal symbol, the winning symbol of the normal symbol (for example, When the "○" symbol) appears and becomes a hit state, the rotating plate of the ordinary electric service 64c is driven to open for a predetermined time.

Next, the reading process of various winning switches is executed (S105). That is, the states of the first special winning opening switch 72c, the second special winning opening switch 74c, the probability variation area switch 75c, and various switches 208 connected to the main control device 110 are read, and the state of the switch 208 is determined. And save the detection information (winning detection information). Further, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 based on the prize detection information is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process executed next.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S106). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (“899” in the first embodiment), it is cleared to “0”. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (“99” in the first embodiment), it is cleared to “0” and the second initial value is cleared. The updated value of the random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203.

Further, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the normal figure per random number counter C4 are updated (S107). Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the random number counter C4 per normal figure are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (first implementation). In the form, when it reaches "899", "99", "99", "199", "99"), respectively, it is cleared to "0". When the jackpot random number counter C1 or the random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is used as the jackpot random number counter C1 or the random number per normal figure. It is read as the initial value of the counter C4, and the initial value is set in the jackpot random number counter C1 or the random number counter C4 per normal figure. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203.

Next, the start winning process associated with winning the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b is executed (S108), and then the hit / fail and variable display of the normal symbol as the ball passes through the normal symbol gate 67. The gate passing process for determining the contents of the above is executed (S109). The details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24.

After the gate passage process (S109) is executed, the process for dynamically displaying the special symbol by the special symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81 based on the process content of the start winning process (S108) is performed. The special figure variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol is executed (S110). The details of the special figure variation processing (S110) will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

Next, a normal symbol variation process is executed (S111), which executes a process for variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display device 83 based on the processing content of the gate passage process (S109). In the normal figure variation processing (S111), the lottery probability of the ordinary symbol is performed with either a high probability (for example, 9/10) or a low probability (1/10) according to the value of the time reduction counter described later.

After executing the normal figure variation processing (S111), the firing control processing is executed (S112), and other processing to be executed periodically is executed (S113) to end the timer interrupt processing. The launch control process (S112) is provided on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining whether to turn on / off the firing of a ball. Then, when the ball launch is on, the information of the ball launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 in order to transmit the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112. As a result, the ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

Next, the start winning process (S108), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S108). The start winning process is performed on the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b (hereinafter, the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b may be collectively referred to as "start ports 64a, 64b"). If there is a prize, the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage corresponding to the starting ports 64a and 64b that have won the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is stored. The process of storing (holding) in the area 203e is executed. In addition, a process for transmitting the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be held together with the number of held balls to the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

In this start winning process (S108), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first starting opening 64a (S201). Here, based on the output signal of the special figure 1 ball entry switch (not shown) for detecting the entry (winning) into the first start port 64a, which was read in the switch reading process (see S105 in FIG. 23). , The entry into the first starting port 64a is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 23).

When it is determined that the ball has won the first starting port 64a (there was a starting prize) (S201: Yes), then the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (the first held in the main control device 110). 1 It is determined whether or not the number of balls on hold for operation (N1) of the dynamic display (variation effect) of the special symbol is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the first embodiment) (S202). Then, even if there is a prize in the first starting port 64a, if the number of balls on hold for operation is not N1 <4 (S202: No), this starting winning process (S108) is terminated and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). Return to.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls N1 <4 (S202: Yes), the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (number of pending balls N1) is added by 1 (S203). Then, since it is a prize to the first starting port 64a corresponding to the first special symbol this time, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination of each random number values C1 to C3 and CS1 (S204), and processing is performed. To S209.

In the process of S201, when it is determined that the ball has not won the first starting port 64a (S201: No), then it is determined whether or not the ball has won the second starting port 64b (starting winning). (S205). Here, as in the case of the first start port 64a, the special figure 2 entry port switch (shown) that detects the entry (winning) into the second start opening 64b read in the switch reading process (see S105 in FIG. 23). Based on the output signal of (1), the ball entering the second starting port 64b is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 23).

When it is determined that the ball has won the second starting port 64b (there was a starting prize) (S205: Yes), then the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the second held in the main control device 110). 2 It is determined whether or not the operation holding ball number N2 of the dynamic display (variation effect) of the special symbol is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the first embodiment) (S206). Then, if there is no winning in the second starting port 64b (S205: No), or even if there is a winning in the second starting port 64b, the number of pending balls N2 <4 (S206: No), this The start winning process (S108) is finished, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls N2 <4 (S206: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b (number of reserved balls N2) is added by 1 (S207). Then, since the prize is won in the second starting port 64b corresponding to the second special symbol this time, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination of each random number values C1 to C3 and CS1 (S208) and processed. To S209.

In the processing of S209, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is read from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 9) and set as the storage destination in S204 or S208. Of the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the first reserved ball storage area 203e provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e, or the second reserved ball storage area 203d, the first reserved ball storage area 203d When specified as the storage destination, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3, and the variation type counter in the area corresponding to the value indicated by the first reserved ball counter 203a. Each is held (stored) in the storage area 203d4 (S209). When the second reserved ball storage area 203e is designated as the storage destination, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 and the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 in the area corresponding to the value indicated by the second reserved ball counter 203b are stopped. It is held (stored) in the pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 and the variation type counter storage area 203e4, respectively (S209).

Specifically, for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination in the processing of S204 based on the winning of the first starting port 64a, and the number of first reserved balls after addition by the processing of S203. If the value of the counter 203a is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in each storage area of the first holding first area. If the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a after addition is "2", the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a after addition is "3" in each storage area of the first reserved second area. If there is, counters C1 to C3 are stored in each storage area of the first reserved third area, and if the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a after addition is "4", counters C1 to C3 are stored in each storage area of the first reserved fourth area. , The value of CS1 is reserved.

Further, for example, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination in the processing of S208 based on the winning of the second starting ball 64b, and the second reserved ball number counter 203b after the addition by the processing of S207 If the value is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the second reserved first area. If the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after addition is "2", the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after addition is "3" in each storage area of the second reserved second area. If there is, counters C1 to C3 are placed in each storage area of the second hold third area, and if the value of the second hold ball counter 203b after addition is "4", each storage area of the second hold fourth area , The value of CS1 is reserved.

Next, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of operating reserved balls N1 or the number of operating reserved balls N2) after the addition by the processing of S203 or S207, and the first by the processing of S209. Voice the hold ball number command including each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored (held) in the hold ball storage area 203d or the second hold ball storage area 203e. In order to transmit to the lamp control device 113, the hold ball number command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S210). As a result, the hold ball number command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S101 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) to be executed next. When the processing of S210 is completed, the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23).

As the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the hold ball number command in the processing of S210, the values themselves read from the counter buffer 203c in the processing of S209 may be used, or the first hold in the processing of S209. The value stored (held) in the ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e may be read out and used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, a special figure variation process (S110), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this special figure variation processing (S110). This special symbol variation processing (S110) controls the dynamic display in the special symbol display device 37 and the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In this special figure variation processing (S110), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit (S301). The jackpot includes the middle of the jackpot game displayed by the third symbol display device 81 and the special symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot, and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is in progress (S301: Yes), the special figure variation process (S110) is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

If it is not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is dynamically displaying (S302), and the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is dynamically displaying. If not (S302: No), then it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 is stopped (S303). As a result, if a predetermined time has not elapsed after the dynamic display is stopped (S303: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). As a result, the stop symbol in the dynamic display (variation effect) is displayed on the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol. ..

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S303, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display is stopped (S303: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball count counter 203b (the second special reserved in the main control device 110). It is determined whether or not the operation-holding ball number N2) of the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the symbol is larger than "0" (S304). As a result, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operating reserved ball number N2) is not "0" (S304: Yes), it is the execution start timing of the dynamic display (variation effect) regarding the second special symbol. First, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operating reserved ball number N2) is subtracted by 1 (S305). This is because the variable start processing (S310), which will be described later, starts the execution of one of the reserved dynamic displays (variable effects) related to the second special symbol (variable effects). This is because the number of reserved balls related to the special symbol is reduced by one.

Next, the data stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e is shifted (S306). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the second hold first to fourth areas of the second hold ball storage area 203e toward the hold ball execution area 203f, and is the second hold second. 1 area → Hold ball execution area 203f, 2nd hold 2nd area → 2nd hold 1st area, 2nd hold 3rd area → 2nd hold 2nd area, 2nd hold 4th area → 2nd hold 3rd area The data in each area is shifted, and so on.

On the other hand, in the process of S304, when it is determined that the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operating reserved ball number N2) is "0" (S304: No), then the first reserved ball number counter 203a It is determined whether or not the value of (the number of operation-holding balls N1 of the dynamic display (variation effect) regarding the first special symbol held in the main control device 110) is larger than "0" (S307). As a result, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operating reserved ball number N1) is not "0" (S307: Yes), it is the execution start timing of the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the first special symbol. First, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operating reserved ball number N1) is subtracted by 1 (S308). This is because the variable start process (S310), which will be described later, starts the execution of the dynamic display (variable effect) of one of the reserved dynamic displays (variable effect) related to the first special symbol. This is because the number is reduced by one.

Next, the data stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted (S309). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first hold first to fourth areas of the first hold ball storage area 203d toward the hold ball execution area 203f, and is the first hold first. 1 area → Hold ball execution area 203f, 1st hold 2nd area → 1st hold 1st area, 1st hold 3rd area → 1st hold 2nd area, 1st hold 4th area → 1st hold 3rd area The data in each area is shifted, and so on.

After the data shift processing of S306 or S309, the fluctuation start processing for the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the values of various counters stored in the hold ball execution area 203f by the data shift processing. Then, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). The fluctuation start processing (S310) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S307, when it is determined that the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operating reserved ball number N1) is "0" (S307: No), a demonstration effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81. It is determined whether or not the state is in the state, that is, whether or not the demonstration is in progress (S311). In this determination process, after transmitting a demo command to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operation holding ball number N1 or operation). It is determined that the demonstration is in progress until it is determined that any value of the number of reserved balls N2) is larger than "0".

If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S311: No), a demo command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S312), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). On the other hand, if it is determined that the demo is in progress (S311: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) as it is. The demo command set in the process of S312 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 23). It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the demo command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display demo command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 demos to the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the display demo command. Control to display the effect.

Here, the demo command is set when, as described above, there is no reserved ball when a predetermined time elapses after the fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, if the fluctuation effect is not started even after a lapse of a predetermined time after the fluctuation is stopped, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined in the process of S311 that the demo is not in progress (S311: No), a process of determining whether or not a second predetermined time longer than the predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped is further performed. The demo command may be set by executing the process of S312 when the second predetermined time has elapsed after the execution and the fluctuation stop. As a result, when there is no reserved ball after the fluctuation is stopped, the player can be shown the stopped symbol of the stopped fluctuation effect for a relatively long time without starting the demonstration effect immediately.

In the process of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is being dynamically displayed (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the dynamic display time (variation time) has elapsed (S313). ). The display time during dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this dynamic display time. If (variation time) has not elapsed (S313: No), the display of the special symbol display device 37 is updated (S314), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

In the first embodiment, in the second LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, for example, the display mode of the second LED group 37b is set from the start of the dynamic display until the fluctuation time elapses.

On the other hand, if the dynamic display time (variation time) of the dynamic display in the special symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S313: Yes), the special symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol. (S315). The stop symbol is preset by the fluctuation start process (S310) described later with reference to FIG. 26. In the fluctuation start processing, whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is determined according to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f by the processing of S306 or S309, and if it is a jackpot, the value of the jackpot type counter C2. Therefore, the number of rounds at the time of the big hit and the gaming state that can occur after the big hit are determined.

When the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S315, the stop symbol of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed with the display of the second LED group 37b in the special symbol display device 37. In order to synchronize and display the confirmation, a confirmation command is set (S316), and the process shifts to S317. The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect being executed by the third symbol display device 81. Upon receiving this confirmation command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display confirmation command to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 is configured to stop the variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and display the stopped symbol in a finalized manner by receiving the display confirmation command.

In the process of S317, in order to determine whether or not it is in the “probability fluctuation state”, it is determined whether or not the value of the ST counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is larger than “0” (S317). This ST counter is set to "100" when the "probability fluctuation state" is started by setting the probability variation transition flag 203i to ON in the jackpot end processing (see S415 in FIG. 27) in the jackpot processing described later. Is configured to be set (see S472 in FIG. 32).

In the processing of S317, if the value of the ST counter is not "0" (S317: Yes), it is a "probability fluctuation state", and the dynamic display (variation effect) of any of the special symbols has been completed once. The value of the ST counter is subtracted by 1 (S318), and the process shifts to S319. Here, when the value of the ST counter becomes "0" by the processing of S318, the game state is changed from the "probability fluctuation state" to the "normal game state", and the voice lamp control device 113 and the like are used. A game state command indicating that the game state changes (the "probability fluctuation state" ends, the "normal game state" occurs, the "probability fluctuation state" changes to the "normal game state", etc.) is transmitted. On the other hand, in the processing of S317, if the value of the ST counter is "0" (S317: No), it means that the game is in the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state", so the processing of S318 is skipped and the processing is performed in S319. Move to.

In the process of S319, in order to determine whether or not the game state has the "time saving function" added, whether or not the value of the time saving counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is larger than "0" is determined. Determine (S319). This time saving counter is set to "100" when the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", "time saving C" or "latent probability fluctuation C" is determined in the jackpot end processing (see S415 in FIG. 27) in the jackpot processing described later. (See S475 in FIG. 32), and when it is determined that the jackpot type is "time reduction A", "time reduction B", "latent probability fluctuation A", or "latent probability fluctuation B", "50" is set. (See S476 in FIG. 32).

In the process of S319, if the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (S319: Yes), it is a game state in which the "time reduction function" is added, and the dynamic display (variation effect) of any special symbol is displayed. Since it has finished once, the value of the time reduction counter is subtracted by 1 (S320), the special figure variation process (S110) is finished, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). Here, when the value of the time reduction counter becomes "0" by the processing of S320, the game state is changed from the "time reduction state" or "probability change state with time reduction" to "normal game state" or "probability change state without time reduction". The game state changes for the voice lamp control device 113 and the like (the "time reduction state" ends, the "normal game state" occurs, and the "time reduction with probability change state" changes to the "time reduction without probability change state". Etc.) Send a game status command indicating that. On the other hand, in the processing of S319, if the value of the time saving counter is "0" (S319: No), the "time saving function" is not added, so the processing of S320 is skipped and this special figure variation processing (S110). ) Is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

The game state command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed next in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) S101. The game state command is a voice lamp control device. It is transmitted to 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the game status command, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display game status command based on the game status command and transmits the display game status command to the display control device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, a variation start process (S310), which is a process of the special figure variation process (S110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing (S310). In this fluctuation start processing (S310), a big hit or a loss lottery (big hit lottery) is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f according to the game state, and the special symbol display device 37 and the third 3. The dynamic pattern (variation pattern and stop type) of the dynamic display and the variation effect performed by the symbol display device 81 is determined.

In the fluctuation start processing (S310), first, in order to determine the gaming state, it is determined whether or not the value of the ST counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is larger than "0" (S321). As a result of the determination, if the value of the ST counter is "0" (S321: No), the gaming state is the "normal gaming state" or the "time shortened state", and the jackpot probability of the special symbol is the low probability state. , The jackpot random number table 202a for the low probability state is set (S322), and the process shifts to S324. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the ST counter is larger than "0" (S323: Yes), the gaming state is "probability fluctuation state" (that is, "probability change state with time reduction" and "probability change without time reduction". Since the jackpot probability of the special symbol is the high probability state, the jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability state is set (S323), and the process is shifted to S324.

In the process of S324, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 10) set in S322 or S323. The jackpot lottery (win / fail determination) process is performed (S324).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, whether or not it is a jackpot is determined based on the relationship between the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the gaming state (mode) at that time. As described above, in the jackpot random number table 202a, when the possible gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal low probability state (“normal gaming state” or “time reduction state”), “7,307” , 582 ”is defined as a jackpot random number value. In addition, when the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in a high probability state (“probability fluctuation state”), “28,122,298,390,486,567,656,750,866” is a big hit. It is defined as a random value.

In the process of S324, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is compared with the jackpot random number value defined in these jackpot random number tables 202a, and when they match, the jackpot is hit. It is determined that. When it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot as a result of the processing of S324 (S324: Yes), the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot for special figure 1 corresponding to the first special symbol. The display mode at the time of jackpot is set based on the type table 202b1 (see FIG. 11A) or the jackpot type table 202b2 for special figure 2 (see FIG. 11B) corresponding to the second special symbol (S325). ).

In this process, according to the jackpot type table 202b, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, that is, the “probability fluctuation state” after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds. "Probability fluctuation A" corresponding to "10R probability variation jackpot" that shifts to, or "latent probability fluctuation C" that corresponds to "10R latent probability variation jackpot" that shifts to "probability fluctuation state" after the maximum number of rounds is 10 rounds. Or, the maximum number of rounds shifts to the "time reduction state" after a jackpot of 10 rounds. "Time reduction C" corresponding to the "10R time reduction jackpot", or the maximum number of rounds shifts to the "probability fluctuation state" after a jackpot of 5 rounds. "Hidden probability fluctuation A" or "latent probability fluctuation B" corresponding to "5R latent probability variation jackpot", or "5R time saving jackpot" corresponding to "time shortened state" after the maximum number of rounds is 5 rounds. Whether it is "time saving A" or "time saving B" is determined. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode at the time of jackpot in the special symbol display device 37 (display mode of the second LED group 37b) is set.

Specifically, when the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is the data shifted from the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f. And the jackpot type table 202b1 for special figure 1 (see FIG. 11A), the jackpot type is determined. Further, when the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is the data shifted from the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the special feature. The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type table 202b2 for FIG. 2 (see FIG. 11B).

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S326), and the process proceeds to S329. Specifically, a rough production mode is selected based on the jackpot type (display mode) determined in S325 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, and the rough production mode is selected. The dynamic time (variation time) of the specific dynamic display (variation effect) is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the rough effect modes. In the determination of the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot, first, the stop pattern table 202d to be used is selected according to the jackpot type (display mode).

Specifically, when "probability variation A" corresponding to "10R probability variation jackpot" is set as the jackpot type in the processing of S325, the stop pattern table 202d provided for "probability variation A" (for example, probability). In the stop pattern table for variation A), the effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the hold ball execution area 203f is selected. Further, when the "latent probability variation C" corresponding to the "10R latent probability variation jackpot" is set as the jackpot type, the stop pattern table 202d provided for the "latent probability variation C" (for example, for the latent probability variation C). In the stop pattern table), the effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the hold ball execution area 203f is selected. Further, when "time saving C" corresponding to "10R time saving jackpot" is set as the jackpot type, it is held in the stop pattern table 202d (for example, the stopping pattern table for time saving C) provided for "time saving C". The effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the ball execution area 203f is selected. Further, when "latent probability fluctuation A" or "latent probability fluctuation B" corresponding to "5R latent probability variation jackpot" is set as the jackpot type, a stop pattern table provided for "latent probability variation A / B" is provided. In 202d (for example, the stop pattern table for latent probability fluctuations A and B), the effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the hold ball execution area 203f is selected. When "time reduction A" or "time reduction B" corresponding to "5R time reduction jackpot" is set as the jackpot type, the stop pattern table 202d provided for "time reduction A / B" (for example, time reduction A / B) is set. In the stop pattern table for B), the effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the hold ball execution area 203f is selected.

Then, in the group of the variation pattern table 202e provided for each effect mode set in the process of S326, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. .. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance. It should be noted that the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern may be different between the "probability variation state", that is, the "probability variation state with time reduction" and the "probability variation state without time reduction". Further, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern may be the same in the “probability change state without time reduction” and the “time reduction state”.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit is not a big hit in the process of S324 (S324: No), the display mode at the time of loss is set (S327). In the process of S327, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the hold ball execution area 203f and the first hold ball number counter. Based on the value of 203a or (and) the second reserved ball number counter 203b and the current gaming state, as the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode and a "non-reach" effect mode are used. One of the "(normal)" effect mode, the "normal reach" effect mode, the "super reach" effect mode, and the "special reach" effect mode is set.

In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is stopped corresponding to each effect mode depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a “probability fluctuation state”, a “time shortening state”, or a “normal gaming state”. The stop pattern table 202d is set so that the range of values of the pattern selection counter C3 is different.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined (S328), and the process proceeds to S329. In the process of S328, the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 determine the fluctuation time until the stop display is performed with the lost symbol. Specifically, in the group of the fluctuation pattern table 202e provided for each display mode (effect mode) at the time of loss determined in the processing of S327, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f. Select the variation pattern associated with. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance. It should be noted that the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern may be different between the "probability variation state", that is, the "probability variation state with time reduction" and the "probability variation state without time reduction". Further, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern may be the same in the “probability change state without time reduction” and the “time reduction state”.

In this way, the effect mode and fluctuation pattern setting process at the time of big hit and the effect mode and variation pattern setting process at the time of loss are determined and determined by the same determination program using the same random number values C3 and CS1. Therefore, the program can be standardized and the development man-hours at the time of development can be reduced.

In the process of S329, the variation that notifies the display control device 114 of the variation time according to the variation pattern via the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the processes of S326 and S328. Set the pattern command (S329). Specifically, for example, a jackpot lottery is won, the jackpot is "probability fluctuation A" corresponding to "10R probability variation jackpot", and a fluctuation pattern of "super reach" of "25 seconds" is selected. If so, a fluctuation pattern command indicating a jackpot, "probability fluctuation A", and "25 seconds" "super reach" is set. In addition, if the jackpot lottery is lost and a fluctuation pattern of "super reach" of "25 seconds" is selected, a fluctuation pattern command indicating loss and "super reach" of "25 seconds" is set. .. In this way, even if the variation effect has the same variation time, by setting the variation pattern command together with the propriety of the variation effect and the content of the rough variation pattern, the voice lamp control device 113 can perform the effect mode including the result. It is possible to grasp the content and the fluctuation time of the above, and to determine the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect in detail based on the information.

Further, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S325 or S327 via the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S330), and the special figure variation processing (see FIG. 25). ) Return. Specifically, for example, if a jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is "probability fluctuation A" which is "10R probability variation jackpot", a specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "7" symbol, etc.) ) Is not specified, and a stop type command indicating that it is "probability fluctuation A" is set. Further, if the jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is "latent probability fluctuation A" which is "5R latent probability variation jackpot", the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "3" symbol, etc.) is specified. Instead, set a stop type command that indicates "latent probability fluctuation A".

On the other hand, if the jackpot is not won and the "super reach" production mode is selected, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "787") is not specified, and the "super reach" effect mode is not specified. Set a stop type command indicating that it is a "super reach" effect mode. Further, if the jackpot is not won and the "normal reach" production mode is selected, the "normal reach" at the time of loss is not specified without specifying the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "737"). "Set a stop type command indicating that it is an effect mode. Further, if the jackpot is not won and the "non-reach" effect mode is selected, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "258") is not specified, and the "non-reach" effect mode is not specified. Set a stop type command indicating that it is a "non-reach" effect mode.

In this way, by setting a rough stop type based on the success or failure of the variation effect in the stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) grasps the stop type based on the success or failure and makes them. For details, the stop result of the fluctuation effect can be determined based on the information of.

These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are executed in the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23) to be executed next. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command or the stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display fluctuation pattern command or a display type command based on the fluctuation pattern command or the stop type command, and transmits the fluctuation pattern command or the display type command to the display control device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, a jackpot process (S103), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the jackpot process (S103).

As described above, in the jackpot processing (S103), when a jackpot of a special symbol occurs, the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 that opens each round according to the type of jackpot. In order to set the number of times of opening (the number of rounds), the large winning opening opening / closing table 202f (see FIG. 12) is set, and the opening time of the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 is set. Further, based on the jackpot type, the probability variation area opening / closing table 202g (see FIG. 13) is set in order to set the probability variation region 75 to be opened for each round. In this jackpot process, a probability variation area valid table (not shown) for setting the validity or invalidity of the probability variation region 75 in each round (round elapsed time) may be set.

Further, in the jackpot process (S103), the jackpot opening / closing control process (see FIG. 28) for opening or closing the variable winning devices 72 and 74 is executed in the jackpot state. That is, whether one of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 is opened for each round of the jackpot state and the maximum opening time of each variable winning device 72 or 74 (“30 seconds” in the first embodiment) has elapsed. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the specified number of balls (10 in the first embodiment) has been won in each of the variable winning devices 72 and 74, or the closing condition is determined. Then, when any of these closing conditions is satisfied, the open variable winning devices 72 and 74 are closed. The control regarding the opening and the control regarding the closing of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

Further, in the large winning opening opening / closing process, a process for opening or closing the probability variation region 75 is executed based on the set probability variation region opening / closing table 202g (see FIG. 13). That is, the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a of the probability variation region 75 is driven and controlled according to the set probability variation region opening / closing table 202g for each round of the jackpot state.

In this jackpot process (S103), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (S401). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is not hit (S401: No), then it is determined whether or not the dynamic display (variation effect) of the special symbol is completed (S402).

As a result of the determination in S402, if the dynamic display (variation effect) of the special symbol is not completed (S402: No), this jackpot process (S103) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). On the other hand, if the dynamic display (variable effect) of the special symbol is completed (S402: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won in the dynamic display (variable effect) (S403).

As a result of the determination in S403, if it is determined that the jackpot has not been won in the dynamic display (variation effect) (S403: No), the jackpot process (S103) is terminated and the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23). See). On the other hand, if it is determined in the dynamic display (variable effect) that the jackpot has been won (S403: Yes), in order to execute the control regarding the winning jackpot, first, is the number of rounds of the winning jackpot 10R? Whether or not, that is, "probability fluctuation A" corresponding to "10R probability variation jackpot", "latent probability variation C" corresponding to "10R latent probability variation jackpot", or "time reduction C" corresponding to "10R time reduction jackpot" It is determined whether or not the player has won (S404).

As a result of the determination in S404, if the number of rounds of the winning jackpot is 10R (S404: Yes), "10" is set in the round counter in order to perform the opening control of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 10 times in this jackpot. (S405), the process shifts to S407. On the other hand, when the number of rounds of the winning jackpot is not 10R, that is, "latent probability fluctuation A" or "latent probability fluctuation B" corresponding to "5R latent probability variation jackpot", or "time saving" corresponding to "5R time saving jackpot" If "A" or "Time saving B" is won (S404: No), set "5" to the round counter to control the opening of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 five times in this jackpot (S406). ), The process shifts to S407. The MPU 201 confirms the value of the round counter, and when the value is set in the round counter (that is, "1" or more), the value of the round counter is controlled while the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are opened. Is subtracted by 1. Then, when the value of the round counter becomes "0", the jackpot being executed is terminated.

In the process of S407, in order to transmit the opening command to the voice lamp control device 113, the opening command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S407). Next, the opening time of the jackpot (for example, "10 seconds") is set (S408), and the process shifts to S409. The opening command set in the process of S407 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S101 of FIG. 23) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

Upon receiving the opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice indicating that the jackpot has started, controls the lamp, and transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 controls to display the opening effect (for example, notification of the total number of rounds) on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the display opening command.

In the processing of S409, the big winning opening opening / closing table 202f (see FIG. 12) is set according to the type of big hit (big hit type) (see S409), and the processing shifts to S410. Specifically, if the jackpot type is "time reduction A" and "latent probability fluctuation A", the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 is set to "X1", and the jackpot type "time reduction B" and "latent probability fluctuation" are set. If it is "B", the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 is set to "X2", and if it is the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 is set to "Y1". , If the jackpot type is "time saving C" and "latent probability fluctuation C", the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 is set to "Y2".

Next, in the processing of S410, the probability variation area opening / closing table 202g (see FIG. 13) is set according to the type of jackpot (big hit type) (S410), and the processing shifts to S411. Specifically, if the jackpot types are "time reduction A", "time reduction C" and "latent probability fluctuation B", the opening / closing pattern of the probability variation region 75 is set to "A", and the jackpot types "time reduction B" and "latent probability" are set. If it is "variation A" and "latent probability variation C", the opening / closing pattern of the probability variation area 75 is set to "B", and if it is the jackpot type "probability variation A", the opening / closing pattern of the probability variation area 75 is set to "C". ..

In the process of S411, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type in this jackpot is "probability fluctuation A" (S411). As a result of the determination, if it is determined to be "probability fluctuation A" (S411: Yes), a probability variation notification command is set to notify the player that the "probability fluctuation state" is present (S412). , The jackpot process (S103) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

The probability change notification command set in the process of S412 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 23). , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the probability change notification command, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to execute the "probability change notification effect mode" in order to notify the player that it is in the "probability fluctuation state".

On the other hand, in the processing of S411, when it is determined that the "probability fluctuation A" is not performed (S411: No), the game state is not clearly notified, so the processing of S412 is skipped so as not to set the probability change notification command. , This jackpot process (S103) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

In the pachinko machine of the first embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 does not receive the above-mentioned probability change notification command and the running jackpot ends, the "time saving notification effect mode" is executed without exception after the jackpot. It is configured so that the player cannot (cannot) recognize whether the player is in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state".

In the process of S401, if it is determined that a big hit has already been made (S401: Yes), the large winning opening opening / closing control process (S413) for executing the opening / closing control of the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74. To execute.

Here, with reference to FIG. 28, a big winning opening opening / closing control process (S413), which is one process of the big hit process (S103) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the large winning opening opening / closing control process (S413). As described above, in this big winning opening opening / closing control process (S413), the opening / closing control of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 is performed based on the number of times the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are opened set in the big hit process (S103). The opening / closing control of the probability variation region 75 and each process based on the passage of the ball to the variable winning devices 72, 74 or the probability variation region 75 are executed. In the large winning opening opening / closing control process (S413), the valid setting process or the invalid setting process of the probability variation region 75 may be performed.

In this big winning opening opening / closing control process (S413), first, it is determined whether or not the opening time at the time of this big hit or the interval time between each round (for example, "1 second") has elapsed (S421). .. As a result of the determination, if the opening time or the interval time has not elapsed (S421: No), the opening conditions of any of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 have not yet been satisfied, so the processing of S422 is skipped and the processing is performed. Move to S423. On the other hand, if the opening time or the interval time has elapsed (S421: Yes), the opening condition of any of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 is satisfied, so the opening setting process of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 is performed (S422). ), The process shifts to S423.

Here, the open setting process (S422) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the open setting process (S422). As described above, in this opening setting process (S422), various setting processes for opening the variable winning devices 72 and 74 and the probability variation region 75 are executed.

In this opening setting process (S422), first, it is determined whether or not the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are open timing (S431). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the opening timing of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 is not (S4311: No), the processing of S432-S437 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S438, while the variable winning device 72, When it is determined that the opening timing of 74 is (S4311: Yes), it is determined which of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 is the opening timing (S432). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that it is the opening timing of the first variable winning device 72 (S432: "first variable winning device"), the first opening / closing plate 72a of the first variable winning device 72 is opened. The first variable winning device open setting is performed (S433), and the process shifts to S435. By performing this first variable winning device opening setting process, the first large winning opening solenoid 72b is driven to open the first opening / closing plate 72a, and the ball can flow into the first variable winning device 72.

On the other hand, in the process of S432, when it is determined that the opening timing of the second variable winning device 74 is (S432: "second variable winning device"), the second opening / closing plate 74a of the second variable winning device 74 is opened. The second variable winning device open setting is performed (S434), and the process shifts to S435. By performing this second variable winning device opening setting process, the second large winning opening solenoid 74b is driven to open the second opening / closing plate 74a, and the ball can flow into the second variable winning device 74.

Next, in the process of S435, in order to count the balls that have won the open variable winning devices 72 and 74, "10" is set in the winning counter (S435), and the process shifts to S436. In the first embodiment, the value of the winning counter is configured to be deducted by 1 each time a ball enters the open variable winning devices 72 and 74, and the MPU 201 has one of the variable winning devices. When a predetermined opening time elapses after opening the devices 72 and 74, or when the value of the winning counter becomes "0", the open variable winning devices 72 and 74 are closed. It is configured.

Next, in the process of S436, the maximum opening time (for example, "30 seconds") of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 is set (S436), and the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are being opened with respect to the voice lamp control device 113. A release command indicating that the above is set (S437), and the process shifts to S438. The release command set in the process of S437 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 23). It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the release command, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice indicating that the round has started, controls the lamp, and transmits the display release command to the display control device 114. , Based on the reception of the display release command, the third symbol display device 81 is controlled to display the round effect (for example, notification of the number of rounds, suggestion of the open variable winning devices 72, 74, etc.). ..

Next, in the processing of S438, it is determined whether or not the opening timing of the probability variation region 75 is set in the round based on the probability variation region opening / closing table 202g set according to the jackpot type in the jackpot processing (see FIG. 27) (S438). ). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the opening timing of the probability variation region 75 is not (for example, the second round of the jackpot type "time saving A") (S438: No), the processing of S439 to S443 is skipped and this opening setting is performed. The process (S422) is completed, and the process returns to the large winning opening opening / closing control process (see FIG. 28). On the other hand, in the processing of S438, if the opening timing of the probabilistic region 75 (for example, at the start of the first round in the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A") (S438: Yes), the probabilistic region for counting the opening time of the probabilistic region 75 is counted. The value of the release timer 203g is set to "7500" (S439), and the process shifts to S440.

In the processing of S439, the value of the probability variation region opening timer 203g corresponds to "7500" corresponding to the opening time of the probability variation region 75 "3 seconds" (that is, 7500 x 4ms (timer interrupt processing execution interval) = 30000ms). Is set, and the value of the probability variation region opening timer 203g is subtracted by "1" each time the passage determination process (see FIG. 30) to be executed later is executed (see S458 in FIG. 30). When the value of the probability variation region opening timer 203g is larger than "0", the open state of the probability variation region 75 is maintained, while the value of the probability variation region opening timer 203g becomes "0". Control is performed to close the probabilistic region 75 that is open.

Next, in the process of S440, the probability variation region solenoid 75b is turned on (S440), and the process shifts to S441. The probabilistic region solenoid 75b turned on here is maintained in the on state until the value of the probabilistic region opening timer 203g becomes "0", and when the value of the probabilistic region opening timer 203g becomes "0", it starts from the on state. It can be switched to the off state (see S460 in FIG. 30).

Next, in the process of S441, a probability change area open command indicating that the probability change area 75 has been opened is set for the voice lamp control device 113 (S441), and the process shifts to S442. The probability change area release command set in the process of S441 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 23) to be executed next. Then, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the probability change area open command, the voice lamp control device 113 indicates that the probability change area 75 has been released when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the “character selection” effect is not executed). Output, lamp control, etc., and a probability change area open notification indicating that the probability change area 75 is open (for example, "Aim for V!" Or "V is open", the rest of which the probability change area 75 is open Control is performed so that (display or voice output) is executed (time notification, etc.).

Next, in the process of S442, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to enable the probability variation region 75 (S442). In the first embodiment, the opening timing and the effective timing of the probability variation region 75 are configured to be synchronized. As a result of the determination in S442, when it is determined that it is the timing to enable the probability variation region 75 (S442: Yes), that is, when it is determined that it is the opening start timing of the probability variation region 75, the probability variation region activation flag 203h Is set to on (S443), the opening setting process (S422) is terminated, and the process returns to the large winning opening opening / closing control process (see FIG. 28). On the other hand, in the processing of S442, if it is determined that it is not the timing to enable the probability variation region 75 (S442: No), the processing of S443 is skipped, the open setting processing (S422) is terminated, and a big prize is won. Return to the mouth opening / closing control process (see FIG. 28).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 28. In the process of S423, it is determined whether or not a ball has flowed into (winning or passing) into each of the variable winning devices 72, 74, the probability variation region 75, or the discharge passage 76, and each process is executed based on the determination result. The discrimination process (S423) is performed, and the process shifts to S424.

Here, the passage determination process (S423) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 30. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the passage determination process (S423). As described above, in this passage determination process (S423), the balls are detected by the switches 72c, 74c, 75c, 76a provided in the variable winning devices 72, 74, the probability variation region 75, or the discharge passage 76, and the balls flow in (winning). Or, it is detected whether or not it has passed, and each process is executed based on the detection result.

In this passage determination process (S423), first, it is determined whether or not the first large winning opening switch 72c is turned on (S451). This determination is performed not only in the state where the first variable winning device 72 is open, but also in the state where the first variable winning device 72 is closed. With this configuration, the first variable winning device 72 is closed before the ball that has flowed in while the first variable winning device 72 is open is detected by the first large winning opening switch 72c. Even in the case, it is possible to pay out the prize ball based on the ball. Therefore, by validly determining the balls that have flowed in while the first variable winning device 72 is open and giving the game value, how many balls can flow into the first variable winning device 72 and increase the game value. It is possible to create a game of acquisition and improve the interest of the game.

In the process of S451, if the first big winning opening switch 72c is turned on (S451: Yes), the first means that the ball is detected by the first big winning opening switch 72c for the voice lamp control device 113. The large winning opening winning command is set (S452), and the process shifts to S455. The first large winning opening winning command set in the processing of S452 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed next. The external output processing of the timer interrupt processing (see S101 in FIG. 23). ), The sound is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the first grand prize opening winning command, it outputs a voice indicating that the ball has won the first variable winning device 72, controls the lamp, and the like, and obtains a winning ball based on the winning. Control is performed so that the notification of the number is executed (display or voice output).

On the other hand, in the process of S451, if the first big winning opening switch 72c is not turned on (S451: No), then it is determined whether or not the second big winning opening switch 74c is turned on (S453). This determination is performed not only in the state where the second variable winning device 74 is open but also in the state where the second variable winning device 74 is closed, as in the case of the first large winning opening switch 72c. With this configuration, the second variable winning device 74 is closed before the ball that has flowed in while the second variable winning device 74 is open is detected by the second large winning opening switch 74c. Even in the case, it is possible to pay out the prize ball based on the ball. Therefore, by validly determining the balls that have flowed in while the second variable winning device 74 is open and giving the game value, how many balls can flow into the second variable winning device 74 and increase the game value. It is possible to create a game of acquisition and improve the interest of the game.

In the process of S453, if the second special winning opening switch 74c is turned on (S453: Yes), the second large winning opening switch 74c indicates that the ball has been detected by the voice lamp control device 113. The large winning opening winning command is set (S454), and the process shifts to S455. The second large winning opening winning command set in the processing of S454 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed next. The external output processing of the timer interrupt processing (see S101 in FIG. 23). ), The sound is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the second grand prize opening winning command, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice indicating that the ball has won the second variable winning device 74, controls the lamp, and the like, and obtains a winning ball based on the winning. Control is performed so that the notification of the number is executed (display or voice output).

Next, in the process of S455, it is an allowable time that the ball can be detected by the probability variation region switch 75c after the ball flows into the attacker unit 71 (that is, the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74). The measurement of the residence (possible) time is started (S455), and then the process shifts to S456.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a ball is detected by the first big winning opening switch 72c or the second big winning opening switch 74c, it may be a predetermined residence allowable time (for example, the first big winning opening switch 72c). The ball can flow into the arrangement position of the probability variation region switch 75c within 10 seconds, or 5 seconds for the second large winning opening switch 74c). In other words, the probabilistic region switch in a state where the residence allowable time is not set based on the detection of the ball of the first prize opening switch 72c or the second prize opening switch 74c (that is, after the residence allowable time or more has elapsed). When 75c is turned on, there is a possibility that the probability change area switch 75c is turned on due to fraudulent activity or abnormality. Therefore, in the process of S455, the residence allowable time of the ball that has flowed into the attacker unit 71 based on the detection of the ball by the first special winning opening switch 72c or the second special winning opening switch 74c is set in the attacker unit 71. By configuring the "probability fluctuation state" to be set based only on the detection of the probability variation region switch 75c within the residence allowable time, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the "probability fluctuation state" due to fraudulent activity or abnormality.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a ball is detected by the first big winning opening switch 72c or the second big winning opening switch 74c, the ball is moved to the arrangement position of the discharge switch 76a within the above allowable residence time. Is configured to allow inflow. In other words, the discharge switch 76a is in a state where the residence permissible time is not set based on the detection of the ball of the first grand prize opening switch 72c or the second grand prize opening switch 74c (that is, after the residence permissible time has elapsed). Is turned on, or if the discharge switch 76a does not detect the ball within the residence permissible time set based on the detection of the ball of the first big winning opening switch 72c or the second big winning opening switch 74c, the attacker unit. There is a possibility that the ball is clogged in 71. Therefore, in the process of S455, the residence allowable time of the ball flowing into the attacker unit 71 in the attacker unit 71 is set based on the detection of the ball by the first special winning opening switch 72c or the second special winning opening switch 74c. When a ball is not detected by the discharge switch 76a within the allowable residence time, it is configured to indicate that a winning abnormality such as a ball clogging has occurred in the attacker unit 71. With this configuration, it is possible to detect an abnormal state such as ball clogging in the attacker unit 71 at an early stage.

Next, in the process of S456, 15 prize balls are given to the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 based on the passage of the balls to the first prize opening switch 72c or the second prize opening switch 74c. A 15 prize ball command indicating payout is set (S456), and the process shifts to S457. The 15 prize ball commands set in the process of S456 are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and are in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 23) to be executed next. Then, it is transmitted to the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113.

Upon receiving the 15 prize ball commands, the payout control device 111 drives the payout unit 93 (see FIG. 2) to perform payout control for paying out 15 prize balls.

Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the 15 prize ball command, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice indicating that the 15 prize balls have been paid out, controls the lamp, and the like, and also outputs the sound to the third symbol display device 81. A prize ball number command for adding the total number of prize balls acquired by the player is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the prize ball number command from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 executes display control for adding the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number command to the value of the integrated prize ball number display.

Next, in the process of S457, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation region opening timer 203g is larger than "0" (S457). If the value of the probability variation region opening timer 203g is larger than "0" (S457: Yes), the probability variation region 75 is open, so opening / closing control regarding the probability variation region 75 is performed in S458 to S460, and the process shifts to S461. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation region opening timer 203g is “0” (S457: No), the processing of S458 to S460 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S461.

As for the opening / closing control of the probability variation region 75 of S458 to S460, assuming that the value of the probability variation region opening timer 203g is larger than "0", the value of the probability variation region opening timer 203g is subtracted by "1" (S458), and then It is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation region opening timer 203g subtracted by “1” in S458 is still larger than “0” (S459). As a result of the determination, if the value of the probabilistic region opening timer 203g is not larger than "0" (S459: No), that is, when the value of the probabilistic region opening timer 203g is "0", the probabilistic region 75 is closed. When it is determined that the timing has arrived, the probability variation region solenoid 75b is set to off (S460), and the process shifts to S461. On the other hand, in the process of S459, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation region opening timer 203g is larger than "0" (S459: Yes), the closing timing of the probability variation region 75 has not yet arrived, so S460. Process is skipped and the process is transferred to S461.

Next, in the process of S461, it is determined whether or not the probability variation region switch 75c is turned on (S461). As a result of the determination, if the probability variation region switch 75c is turned on (S461: Yes), the sphere has flowed into the probability variation region 75, and then it is determined whether or not the residence allowable time set in S455 has elapsed. Determine (S462). As a result of the determination, if it is not within the allowable residence time (S462: No), that is, if the allowable residence time has elapsed, the ball of the probability variation region switch 75c exceeding the allowable residence time is detected, and an abnormal prize is won. Therefore, the process is shifted to S468. On the other hand, in the process of S462, if it is within the allowable residence time (S462: Yes), the detection of the normal probability change region switch 75c while the attacker unit 71 is open, so the process is shifted to S463.

Next, in the process of S463, it is determined whether or not the probability variation region valid flag 203h is set to ON (S463). As a result of the determination, if the probabilistic region valid flag 203h is set to ON (S463: Yes), it means that the ball has flowed into the probabilistic region 75 in the situation where the probabilistic region 75 is effectively set. In order to generate the "probability fluctuation state" after the end of, the probability variation transition flag 203i is set to ON (S464), and the process is shifted to S465. On the other hand, in the processing of S463, if the probabilistic region valid flag 203h is not set to ON (S463: No), the ball flows into the probabilistic region 75 in a situation where the probabilistic region 75 is not effectively set. , The process of S464 is skipped, and the process is shifted to S465.

If the probability variation region switch 75c is not turned on (S461: No) in the processing in S461, the probability variation region switch 75c has not detected the sphere and the sphere has not flowed into the probability variation region 75. The process of S464 is skipped and the process is transferred to S465.

Next, in the process of S465, it is determined whether or not the discharge switch 76a is turned on (S465). As a result of the determination, if the discharge switch 76a is not turned on (S465: No), the processes of S466 to S468 are skipped, the pass determination process (S423) is terminated, and the process is controlled to open / close the large winning opening in FIG. 28. The process proceeds to S424 of the process (S413). On the other hand, if the discharge switch 76a is turned on (S465: Yes), it means that the ball has passed through the discharge passage 76. Therefore, the discharge detection command indicating the passage of the ball in the discharge passage 76 to the voice lamp control device 113. Is set (S466), and the process shifts to S467. The discharge detection command set in the process of S466 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 23). It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Upon receiving the discharge detection command, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice indicating that the ball flowing into the attacker unit 71 has been discharged to the outside of the attacker unit 71, controls the lamp, and the like.

Next, in the process of S467, it is determined whether or not it is within the residence allowable time set based on the detection of the ball by the first prize opening switch 72c or the second prize opening switch 74c (S467), and within the residence allowable time. It is determined whether or not the ball is detected by the discharge switch 76a in (S467). As a result of the determination, if it is within the allowable residence time (S467: Yes), the ball is detected by the normal discharge switch 76a. Therefore, the process of S468 is skipped, the pass determination process (S423) is terminated, and the process is performed. To S424 of the large winning opening opening / closing control process of FIG. 28. On the other hand, when the permissible residence time has elapsed (S467: No), the detection of the sphere by the discharge switch 76a after the permissible residence time has elapsed is an abnormal winning, so the process is shifted to S468.

In the processing of S468, based on the detection of the ball by the probability change region switch 75c or the discharge switch 76a after the residence allowable time has elapsed, the winning abnormality indicating that the attacker unit 71 has performed a fraudulent act or a winning abnormality such as a ball clogging has occurred. A command is set (S468), the passage determination process (S423) is terminated, and the process shifts to S424 of the large winning opening opening / closing control process of FIG. 28.

The winning abnormality command set in the process of S468 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 23). It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Upon receiving the winning abnormality command, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice indicating that an abnormal state such as fraudulent activity or ball clogging has occurred in the attacker unit 71, or controls the lamp. With such a configuration, it is possible to detect a winning abnormality such as a fraudulent act against the attacker unit 71 or a ball jam at an early stage.

In the passage determination process (S423), the permissible residence time is counted, and when the permissible residence time elapses, a winning abnormality command indicating that a winning abnormality such as a ball clogging has occurred in the attacker unit 71 is issued. It may be configured to output.

Returning to FIG. 28, the description will be continued. In the process of S424, it is determined whether or not any of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 is open (S424). If it is determined as a result of the determination that none of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 is open (S424: No), the process of S425 is skipped and the large winning opening opening / closing control process (S413) is terminated. , Shift to S414 of the jackpot process (see FIG. 27). On the other hand, when it is determined that any of the variable winning devices 72, 74 is open (S424: Yes), the process of determining whether or not the closing condition of the open variable winning devices 72, 74 is satisfied is performed. , The closing condition discrimination process (S424) for closing the variable winning devices 72 and 74 based on the discrimination process is performed.

Here, the closing condition determination process (S424) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the closing condition determination process (S424). As described above, in this closing condition determination process (S424), it is determined whether or not the closing condition of any of the open variable winning devices 72 and 74 is satisfied, and the opening is being performed based on the determination result. The closing process of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 is executed.

In this closing condition determination process (S424), first, it is determined whether or not one opening time of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 set in the above-mentioned opening time setting process (see S436 in FIG. 29) has elapsed. (S471). In the process of S471, if the opening time of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 has elapsed (S471: Yes), the closing condition of the opened variable winning devices 72 and 74 is satisfied, and the variable winning device in the round is satisfied. Since it is the closing timing of 72 and 74, the value of the winning counter is cleared to "0" (S472), and the process shifts to S478 in order to close the variable winning devices 72 and 74. The closing process of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 from S478 will be described later. On the other hand, in the processing of S471, if the opening time of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 has not elapsed (S471: No), then the ball wins the variable winning devices 72 and 74 being opened, and any of them It is determined whether or not the large winning opening switches 72c and 74c are turned on (S473).

In the process of S473, if any of the large winning opening switches 72c and 74c is turned on (S473: Yes), the ball has won a prize in any of the variable winning devices 72 and 74, so the value of the winning counter is set. After subtracting 1 (S474), it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter obtained by subtracting 1 is greater than "0" (S475). If the value of the winning counter is not greater than "0" (S475: No), that is, if the value of the winning counter is "0" or less, 10 balls are won in the open variable winning devices 72 and 74. Since the closing conditions of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are satisfied, the process shifts to S478 in order to close the open variable winning devices 72 and 74. In the first embodiment, it is configured to control the awarding of prize balls based on the detection of the large winning opening switches 72c and 74c in the passage determination process (see FIG. 30), but the process of S473. The prize ball may be given or the like based on the detection of each of the large winning opening switches 72c and 74c.

On the other hand, in the process of S473, if any of the large winning opening switches 72c and 74c is not turned on (S473: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the timing to invalidate the probability variation region 75 (S476). In the first embodiment, the probability variation region 75 is configured to be valid or invalid in synchronization with the opening and closing of the probability variation region 75, and the timing for disabling the probability variation region 75, that is, the probability variation region 75 is closed. If it is determined that the timing has been set (S476: Yes), the probability variation region valid flag 203h is set to off (S477), the closing condition determination process (S424) is terminated, and the process is changed to the large winning opening opening / closing control process (S427). (See FIG. 28).

If it is determined in S476 that it is not the timing to invalidate the probability variation region 75 (including the state in which the probability variation region 75 is invalid in the first place) (S476: No), the processing of S477 is not performed and this closing condition determination processing is performed. (S424) is finished, and the process returns to the large winning opening opening / closing control process (see FIG. 28). Further, in the processing of S475, when it is determined that the value of the winning counter is larger than "0" (S475: Yes), the closing conditions of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 being opened are not satisfied. In order to continue opening the variable winning devices 72 and 74, the closing condition determination process (S424) is terminated, and the process returns to the large winning opening opening / closing control process (see FIG. 28).

In the closing process of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 from S478, first, the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are set to be closed (S478), the large winning opening solenoids 72b and 74b are turned off, and the opening / closing plates 72a and 74a are closed. .. Next, a closing command indicating that the variable winning devices 72 and 74 have been closed is set for the voice lamp control device 113 (S479), and the process shifts to S480. The closing command set in the process of S479 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 23) to be executed next. Then, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Upon receiving the closing command, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice indicating that one round has been completed, controls the lamp, and transmits the display closing command to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 ends the round effect (for example, round number notification) being executed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the display closing command, and when the jackpot continues, the interval time Depending on the presence or absence of, control is performed so that the display is switched to the interval effect (that is, the "character selection" effect described later, etc.), or the round effect indicating the start of the next round is performed, and when the big hit ends, the big hit Controls to terminate.

Next, in the processing of S480, since one round in the jackpot was digested, the value of the round counter was subtracted by 1 (S480), and it was determined whether or not the value of the round counter subtracted by 1 was larger than "0". (S481). When the value of the round counter is larger than "0" (S481: Yes), the number of rounds in the jackpot (the number of remaining open times of the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74) remains. Therefore, it is determined whether or not there is an interval time (for example, "2 seconds") until the next first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 is opened (S482). As a result of the determination, if there is an interval time (S482: Yes), a predetermined interval time (“2 seconds” in the first embodiment) is set (S483), and then the voice lamp control device 113 is set. An interval command is set to indicate that both the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are closed (S484), the closing condition determination process (S424) is terminated, and the large winning opening opening / closing control process (see FIG. 28) is performed. Return. The interval command set in the process of S484 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 23) to be executed next. Then, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Upon receiving the interval command, the voice lamp control device 113 recognizes that both the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are closed, and if it is the first interval command in the jackpot, it relates to the "character selection" effect. Along with performing control and the like, a display character selection effect command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to switch to the "character selection" effect and display the display based on the reception of the display character selection effect command.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the opening patterns (opening timings) of the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are configured to be different for each jackpot type, and each jackpot type is configured. The opening pattern (opening timing) of the probability variation region 75 is configured to be different. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can recognize the opening pattern of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 and the opening pattern of the probability variation region 75 by recognizing the jackpot type, and as a result, the interval time can be calculated. Although it is possible, the voice lamp control device 113 has an opening pattern of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 and an opening pattern of the probability variation area 75 for each jackpot type based only on the command of the jackpot type transmitted from the main control device 110. In addition, if control such as production is performed while discriminating the interval time, the processing becomes complicated and the control load increases. Therefore, the release command indicating that the variable winning devices 72 and 74 have been released from the main control device 110, the probability changing area opening command indicating that the probability variation area 75 has been released, and the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are all included. The control load on the voice lamp control device 113 is reduced by receiving an interval command indicating that the command is closed and configuring the control so as to perform each control based on each command based on the timing at which each command is received. At the same time, it is possible to perform an appropriate effect according to the timing of each event.

On the other hand, in the process of S482, if it is determined that there is no interval time (S482: No), the processes of S483 and S484 are skipped, the closing condition determination process (S424) is terminated, and the opening / closing control of the large winning opening is controlled. Return to the process (see FIG. 28).

In the processing of S481, when the value of the round counter is not larger than "0" (S481: No), that is, when the value of the round counter is "0" or less, the variable winning device 72 in this jackpot, Since all the opening operations of 74 have been completed, in order to end the jackpot state, the closing condition determination process (S424) is terminated, and the jackpot process (see FIG. 27) S414 is performed.

Returning to FIG. 27, the description will be continued. After executing the process of the large winning opening opening control process (S413), it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is larger than "0" (S414). In the closing condition determination process (see FIG. 31) of the large winning opening opening / closing control process described above, the value of the round counter is subtracted as the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are closed (FIG. 31). (Refer to S480), if the value of the round counter is larger than "0" (S414: Yes), in order to continuously execute the jackpot, the processing of S415 is skipped and this jackpot processing (S103) is performed. It ends and returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

On the other hand, if the value of the round counter is not greater than "0", that is, if the value of the round counter is "0" or less (S414: No), the jackpot end condition is satisfied, and the jackpot is determined. In order to end it, the jackpot end process is executed (S415), the jackpot process (S103) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

Here, with reference to FIG. 32, the jackpot end processing (S415), which is one of the jackpot processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end processing (S415). As described above, in this jackpot end processing (S415), the jackpot end setting control such as the setting of the ending time (for example, "5 seconds"), the inflow of the ball into the probability variation region 75 during the jackpot, and the jackpot type are used. It executes the setting control of the game state after the big hit based on.

In this jackpot end process (S415), first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation transition flag 203i is turned on (S491). As a result of the determination, if the probability variation transition flag 203i is turned on (S491: Yes), it indicates that the ball has passed through the probability variation region 75 that is effectively set during this jackpot. Therefore, since the transition condition to the "probability fluctuation state" is satisfied at this stage, the game state at the end of the jackpot is changed to the "probability fluctuation state" until the dynamic display (variation effect) of the special symbol is executed 100 times. In order to set the value to "100", the value of the ST counter is set to "100" (S492), the probability variation transition flag 203i is set to off (S493), and the process is shifted to S494.

On the other hand, in the processing of S491, if the probability variation transition flag 203i is not turned on (S491: No), the sphere did not pass through the probability variation region 75 that was effectively set during this jackpot, so that the "probability fluctuation state" is entered. Since the transition condition of S492 is not satisfied, the processing of S492 and S493 is skipped and the processing is transferred to S494.

In the process of S494, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type this time is "probability variation A", "latent probability variation C", or "time saving C" (S494). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the jackpot type this time is either "probability fluctuation A", "latent probability fluctuation C", or "time saving C" (S494: Yes), the gaming state after the jackpot ends is determined. , In order to add the "time saving function" until the dynamic display (variation effect) of the special symbol is executed 100 times, "100" is set to the value of the time saving counter (S495), and the processing is shifted to S497.

On the other hand, in the processing of S494, when it is determined that the current jackpot type is not "probability fluctuation A", "latent probability fluctuation C", or "time reduction C" (S494: No), that is, the current jackpot type is "time reduction". When it is determined that the game is "A", "time saving B", "latent probability fluctuation A" or "latent probability fluctuation B", the dynamic display (variation effect) of the special symbol indicates the game state after the jackpot ends. In order to add the "time saving function" until the time is executed, "50" is set in the value of the time saving counter (S496), and the processing is shifted to S497.

Next, in the process of S497, an ending command indicating the start of the jackpot ending effect is set for the voice lamp control device 113 (S497). Then, the jackpot end setting process for setting the ending time and the like is performed (S498), the jackpot end process (S415) is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot process (see FIG. 27). The ending command set in the process of S497 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 23) to be executed next. Then, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice indicating that the jackpot ends, controls the lamp, and transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 sends the display control device 114. Based on the reception of the display ending command, control is performed so that the ending effect (for example, suggestion of the game state after the end of the big hit) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the open / close control of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 is performed in each process in the jackpot process (see FIG. 27), and the open / close control of the probability change area 75 is executed, and the probability change area 75 that is effectively set is executed. When the ball passes through the ball, a "probability fluctuation state" is generated after the jackpot ends. With this configuration, a variable winning device capable of flowing a ball into the probability variation region 75 at the timing when the probability variation region 75 is opened and whether or not the probability variation region 75 is opened in each round. It is possible to create a playability of whether or not 72, 74 (that is, the second variable winning device 74) is opened, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the NMI interrupt process executed in the main control device 110 when a power failure or the like occurs will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like.

By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The MPU 201 in which the power failure signal SG1 is input to the NMI terminal interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, and stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power failure occurrence information (S801). ), Ends the NMI interrupt process.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as voice lamp control device 113, payout control device 111, etc.) to become operable, weight processing (“1 second” in the first embodiment). ) Is executed (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S911. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is shifted to S911 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S911 even in such a case.

As will be described in S926 of FIG. 35, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S911, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S911). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S912, S913) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 initialization process (S912, S913) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S912, S913) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S912, S913), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to “0” (S912), and then the initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S913). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Then, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of shutting off the drive power is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, interrupts are permitted (S910). Then, the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 35) described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the counter update process and the power off process are roughly classified.

In the main process, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S921). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S921: No), the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S922, S923).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S922). Specifically, when the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and the counter value reaches the maximum value (“899”, “99” in the first embodiment). , Clear to "0". Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S107 (see FIG. 23) (S923), and the process shifts to the process of S921.

Here, while this main process is being executed, the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 23 is started and executed at predetermined time intervals (“4 milliseconds” in the first embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed depending on the state of the game. For example, during the jackpot, execution is performed to control the opening and closing of the variable winning devices 72 and 74, and if the ball passes through the normal symbol gate 67, the display control regarding the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display device 83 is performed. Is done. Further, in the jackpot lottery executed when the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 is started, the number of jackpot random numbers to be compared with the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 differs depending on whether it is in the high probability state or the low probability state. Come on. Therefore, the time required to execute one timer interrupt process changes according to the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant and changes according to the state of the game at that time.

The above-mentioned processes S922 and S923, which are one process of the main process, are executed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. That is, since the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is repeatedly executed using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number are used. The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the initial value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random. In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, the jackpot random number counter C1 and the normal number per random number counter C4 that use these as the initial values for updating can be updated. It can have randomness.

Further, in the processing of S921, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S921: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 33 is executed, the process at the time of power cutoff after S924 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S924), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S925). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S926), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S927), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S921 is executed at the timing when one cycle of the processes of S922 and S923, which is performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), ends. As a result, in the main process of the main control device 110, various settings by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) are completed, and at the timing when the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are updated, the power failure occurrence information is completed. Is confirmed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut-off state, the process can be started from the process of S921 after the start-up process (see FIG. 34) is completed. That is, the process can be started from the process of S921 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process.

Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S901) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S921 can be started. As a result, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

In the first embodiment, the process to be executed periodically is executed by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), and in the main process (see FIG. 35), each counter is set to the remaining time of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). The case of executing the update of CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 has been described, but a part or all of the processing executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23) is predetermined in the main processing (see FIG. 35). It may be configured to run every hour (eg, "4 milliseconds"). For example, the prize ball counting signal, the payout abnormality signal reading process (S102), the jackpot process (S103), and the ordinary electric service control process (S104) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) in the first embodiment. And a part or all of the switch reading process (S105), start winning process (S108), gate passing process (S109), special figure variation process (S110), normal figure variation process (S111), and launch control process (S112). , It may be configured to be executed every "4 milliseconds" in the main process (see FIG. 35) instead of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

In this case, a step is provided in the main process (see FIG. 35) to determine whether or not a predetermined time (“4 milliseconds”) has elapsed, and only when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, it is executed every predetermined time. The processing to be performed may be executed, and the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 may be updated regardless of whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is updated during the remaining time of the process to be executed at predetermined time intervals, but the process to be executed at predetermined time intervals is executed according to the state of the game. Since the time required for the operation changes, the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 can be randomly updated even in such a configuration.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process (see FIG. 36) that is started when the power is turned on and a main process (see FIG. 37) that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1115 (see FIG. 37) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 37, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1115. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1115 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S1115 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), the process proceeds to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data corruption of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1115 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1003: No), and the process proceeds to S1008.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1002: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S1115, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to "0".

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

In the process of S1008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1008). The power off flag is turned on when the power off process of S1116 is executed (see S1115 of FIG. 37). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1116 is executed, the process of S1008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the operation is started after the power failure of S1116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S1011) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power supply is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of S1008 is performed via the processes of S1004 to S1006. This is a case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), S1009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1010, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1011), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1009 is that when the processing of S1008 is reached via the processing of S1004 to S1006, the processing of S1004 has already cleared all the storage areas of the RAM 223. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of

Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this main process.

When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not "1 millisecond" or more has elapsed since the previous process of S1101 was executed (S1101), and if "1 millisecond" or more has not elapsed (S1101). S1101: No), the process proceeds to S1110 without performing the processes of S1102 to S1109. In the processing of S1101, it is not necessary to process S1102 to S1109 in a short cycle (within "1 millisecond") to determine whether or not "1 millisecond" has elapsed, whereas S1110 This is because it is preferable to execute the variation effect processing and the command determination processing of S1111 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S1110 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

In the process of S1101, if it is determined that "1 millisecond" or more has passed since the process of S1101 was executed last time (S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1102. When the process of S1101 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 36, the process proceeds to the process of S1102 as it is.

In the process of S1102, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1103 to S1112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S1107 described later (S1103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1104). .. The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, "30 seconds") when the power is turned on, and the notification is a voice output device 226 or a lamp display device. It is done by 227. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1105 without being notified by the power on notification process.

Next, in the process of S1105, the jackpot effect process for executing the effect related to the jackpot set by the command determination process of S1111 described later is performed (S1105), and the process proceeds to the process of S1106.

Next, in the process of S1106, the frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1106). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, during the valid period of the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the effect, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed is monitored, and the input is monitored during the valid period. This is a process for setting the effect corresponding to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1106) is completed, the lamp editing process is then executed (S1107), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1108). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1108, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1109), and the process proceeds to the process of S1110. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1107 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, and the sound editing / output process of S1108 is also synchronized with the time required for the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81. Runs in time.

In the process of S1110, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect process is a process for starting the variation effect based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110. To execute. Then, after the variation effect processing, a command determination process for performing processing according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1111), and the process proceeds to the process of S1112. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38.

In S1112, a counter update process for updating various counters provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (S1112). For example, the counter that determines the detailed fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect is updated in this counter update process. The counter is updated by adding 1 in order within a predetermined range (“0 to 99” in this embodiment), reaching the maximum value (“99”), and then returning to “0”.

When the processing of S1112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1113 (S1113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1115), and the power-off process is executed (S1116). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1117), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1113 (S1113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1114: No), the process returns to the process of S1101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1114: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for the repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1111). This command determination process (S1111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 37) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is received from the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 as described above. Judge the command that was executed.

In the command determination process (S1111), first, it is determined whether or not a command from the main control device 110 is received in the command storage area provided in the RAM 223 (S1201). As a result of the determination, if a command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S1201: No), this command determination process (S1111) is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 37).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1201, if a command is received from the main control device 110 (S1201: Yes), the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and the main control device It is determined whether or not the probability change notification command has been received from 110 (S1202). Then, when it is determined that the probability change notification command has been received (S1202: Yes), the “probability change notification effect mode” is set in order to notify the player that the player is in the “probability fluctuation state” (S1203).

Here, the "probability change notification effect mode" is a third symbol display device that indicates a notification mode (for example, character display of "SUPER LUCKY!") In which a "probability fluctuation state" occurs after the jackpot if it is a jackpot. If it is displayed on 81 and a fluctuation effect is being produced, the occurrence of a "probability fluctuation state" can be displayed in character display on the third symbol display device 81, or the background color of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed to normal. By changing to a different background color (for example, from blue to red), the player is made to recognize that the player is in the "probability fluctuation state". After that, the command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 37).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the voice lamp control device 113 does not receive the probability change notification command at the end of the jackpot, the “time reduction notification effect” indicating the “time reduction state” is shown as the effect after the jackpot ends. It is configured to carry out all aspects. That is, even if the jackpot is a jackpot with the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", "latent probability fluctuation B", or "latent probability fluctuation C", the player is not notified that the jackpot is in the "probability fluctuation state", and the jackpot An effect equivalent to the type "time saving A", "time saving B" or "time saving C" is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1202, if the probability change notification command is not received from the main control device 110 (S1202: No), then it is determined whether or not the interval command is received from the main control device 110 (S1204). As a result of the determination, if an interval command is received from the main control device 110 (S1204: Yes), in order to confirm whether or not to execute the "character selection" effect in this interval time, the effect mode after the jackpot ends is set. It is determined whether or not the character (for example, character A, character B, character C, character D or character E) that is a factor to determine is not set in the jackpot (in other words, whether or not it has already been selected) ( S1205).

As a result of the determination, if the "character selection" effect has not yet been executed in the jackpot and the character that is a factor for determining the effect mode after the jackpot ends is not set (S1205: Yes), the game A "character selection" effect for causing a person to select a character is set (for example, generation and transmission of a display character selection effect command to the display control device 114) (S1206).

Even if the interval command is not received, when it is recognized that both the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are closed, that is, when the release command is not received immediately after receiving the close command, the interval is set. It may be configured to perform the "character selection" effect by determining that time has occurred. Further, the "character selection" effect may be executed again based on the reception of the second interval command in the jackpot of 1, or an effect different from the "character selection" effect (for example, a selected character appears). It may be configured to play a player-participation type mini-game, a detailed movie production about the selected character, or the like).

Here, with reference to FIG. 39, the “character selection” effect executed during the interval period will be described. FIG. 39 is a schematic diagram showing the transition of the “character selection” effect, and FIG. 39 (a) shows a character in which “character A” is selected in the third symbol display device 81 during the interval period of the jackpot state. It is a figure exemplifying the "character selection" effect in which the selection screen appears, and in FIG. 39 (b), the selection target is changed from the state of FIG. 39 (a) and "character B" is selected. It is a figure exemplifying the "character selection" effect that the character selection screen appeared.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the jackpot (big hit type other than the jackpot type “probability fluctuation A”; the same applies hereinafter), at the start of the first interval time in the jackpot, the third symbol display device 81 is used. The sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are erased, and the "character selection" effect is executed in the entire display area of the third symbol display device 81. In this "character" effect, music of five characters ("character A", "character B", "character C", "character D", and "character E") is configured to be selectable.

Then, in this "character selection" effect, a plurality of character icons 81a corresponding to the selectable characters are displayed in a superimposed and identifiable manner, and the character icon 81a displayed on the foremost side is the currently selected character. For example, in the state of FIG. 39 (a), the character A icon 81a1 is displayed in the foreground side and is highlighted (for example, the character is enlarged). There is. Then, the character B icon 81a2, the character C icon 81a3, the character D icon 81a4, and the character are in a state where the character A icon 81a1 and a part thereof are overlapped on the rear side of the character A icon 81a1 and their contents can be identified. The E icons are displayed in the order of 81a5.

In addition to the character icon 81a, a frame button icon 81b imitating the frame button 22 and an arrow icon indicating the changing direction of the character icon 81a (see the upper left of the figure) are displayed on the character selection screen in the "character selection" effect. It is configured to be displayed.

The frame button icon 81b is a display object corresponding to the frame button 22, and is displayed in a manner imitating the shape of the frame button 22 at the lower right of the character selection screen. By displaying the frame button icon 81b on the character selection screen of the "character selection" effect, it is configured to suggest to the player that the pressing operation corresponding to the frame button 22 is effective.

The arrow icon is a display object indicating the direction in which the character icon 81a is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, and is displayed in the vicinity (left side) of the frame button icon 81b. This arrow icon is displayed so as to point from the depth direction of the screen to the front side direction, and in the pachinko machine 10, when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player, the arrow icon is displayed. The display position of the character icon 81a is changed.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 39A, in the "character selection" effect, the character A icon 81a1 is displayed on the foremost side, and the character B icon 81a2 is displayed on the rear side in this order from the front side. The character C icon 81a3, the character D icon 81a4, and the character E icon 81a5 are displayed. In this state, when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player, the character A icon 81a1 displayed on the foremost side is moved to the rearmost position, and the character B displayed second from the front side is displayed. The icon 81a2 is moved and displayed on the front side, the character C icon 81a3 displayed third from the front is moved and displayed second from the front, and the character D icon 81a4 displayed fourth from the front is moved from the front. The character E icon 81a5, which has been moved and displayed third and displayed fifth from the front (that is, the rearmost side), is moved and displayed fourth from the front (see FIG. 39 (b)).

That is, when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player during the "character selection" effect, the second and subsequent character icons 81a from the front are moved and displayed one step forward from the depth direction. , The character icon 81a displayed on the foreground side is configured to be moved and displayed on the rearmost side. With this configuration, the player can change the character in the "character selection" effect.

Then, during the execution time of the preset "character selection" effect, that is, a predetermined time (for example, "10 seconds") including the time from the start to the end of the interval period and at least the middle of the next round. During that time, the "character selection" effect is executed, and it is determined that the character corresponding to the character icon 81a displayed on the foremost side has been selected at the timing when the predetermined period has elapsed. That is, after the lapse of a predetermined period, if the character A icon 81a1 is displayed on the front side, the character A is selected, and if the character B icon 81a2 is displayed on the front side, the character B is selected and the character. If the C icon 81a3 is displayed on the front side, the character C is selected, if the character D icon 81a4 is displayed on the front side, the character D is selected, and the character E icon 81a5 is on the front side. If it is displayed, the character E is selected.

Each character selected by this "character selection" effect is configured so that the effect mode after the end of the big hit is different. Specifically, for example, when the character A is selected, the effect related to the character A is executed, and the effect directly suggests that the character A is in the “time shortened state” or the “latent probability fluctuation state”. The first direct suggestion effect (for example, "maybe" time saving "!" Or "it seems to be" hidden "!") That includes various expressions is the first ratio in the first interval (for example, every 20 variable effects). It is executed with (for example, 1/10 probability). Further, when the character B is selected, the effect related to the character B is executed, and an indirect expression is included as a suggestion effect of the "time reduction state" or the "latent probability fluctuation state". 1 Indirect suggestion effect (for example, "time is short" or "something is lurking") is longer than the first interval. Second interval (for example, every 50 variable effects) is higher than the first rate. For example, it is executed with a probability of 1/3). Further, when the character C is selected, the effect related to the character C is executed, and more than the first indirect suggestion effect as a suggestion effect of being in the "time shortened state" or the "latent probability fluctuation state". The second indirect suggestion effect (for example, "It's time" or "Lie down!") Performed in abstract expression is always executed at the third ratio (for example, 1/20 probability) lower than the first ratio. Will be done. When the character D is selected, the effect related to the character D is executed, and the "time reduction state" ends as a suggestion effect of the "time reduction state" or the "latent probability fluctuation state". At the timing of the number of fluctuations when doing, that is, 100 times after the end of the jackpot, the second direct suggestion effect including a more direct expression than the first direct suggestion effect (for example, "It was a short time" or "Don't stop yet!" ] Etc.) is always executed. Further, when the character E is selected, the effect related to the character E is executed, and the player presses the frame button 22 once for each variable effect to obtain the third ratio. The above-mentioned second indirect suggestion effect is executed with the same probability (that is, the probability of 1/20). In the suggestion effect, the suggestion content is the exact opposite of the actual game state (for example, the suggestion related to the "latent probability fluctuation state" despite the "time reduction state". Te! ”, Etc.) are executed at a rate lower than the execution rate of each suggestion effect.

In this way, in the interval period executed before the start of the round in which the probability variation region 75 is opened, the jackpot ends by the player at least during the period in which the interval is executed (for example, the period including the interval and the third round). It is configured to execute a "character selection" effect for determining a later effect mode. By executing the "character selection" effect during the interval period, the player is made to pay attention to the "character selection" effect, and the degree of attention to the opening mode of the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 is relatively high. At the same time, the degree of attention to the open mode of the probability variation region 75 can be reduced. That is, by executing the "character selection" effect that the player can easily pay attention to during the interval period, it is difficult for the player to recognize the inflow result of the ball into the open probability variation region 75. With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the ball has passed through the probability variation region 75, and it is possible to determine which game state the game state is after the jackpot is completed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a playability that makes the player guess. Further, even in the "time shortened state" or the "normal gaming state", the player is made to guess that it may be the "probability fluctuation state" (internally) contrary to the production mode, and the game is continuously executed. As a result, the operating rate of the pachinko machine can be improved.

In addition, when a jackpot is won, the player can select a character that is a factor in determining the production mode after the jackpot, so that the production mode (character) that suits the player's taste in the production after the jackpot can be selected. Can be executed. In addition, it is possible to select an effect that suggests the content of the game state to be executed by the player's own will, and it is possible to provide a player-participation-type effect with abundant variations. Therefore, in a situation where the player who is a big hit feels pleasure, it is possible to give a further interest and improve the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 38, the description will be continued. After setting the "character selection" effect in S1206, the command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 37). Further, in the process of S1205, if the "character selection" effect is not set in the jackpot, that is, if the "character selection" effect has already been executed during the jackpot (S1205: No), S1206 The process is skipped, the command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 37).

When the interval command is not output, that is, in the case of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", even if the interval command is not received, the "character selection" effect is produced in a predetermined round (for example, the 10th round which is the final round). May be configured to be executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1204, if the interval command is not received from the main controller 110 (S1204: No), then it is determined whether or not the release command is received from the main controller 110 (S1207). As a result of the determination, if the release command is received from the main control device 110 (S1207: Yes), it is the start time of any round in the jackpot, so the number of rounds for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The display (for example, generation and transmission of a display round number command to the display control device 114) is set (S1208). After the setting of the number of rounds display (S1208), the command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 37).

On the other hand, in the process of S1207, if the command received from the main control device 110 is not an open command (S1207: No), then it is determined whether or not a winning error command is received from the main control device 110 (S1209). .. As a result of the determination, if the winning abnormality command is received from the main control device 110 (S1209: Yes), the player and the player indicate that the winning abnormality (cheating, ball jamming, etc.) has occurred in the attacker unit 71. The attacker unit winning abnormality notification shown to the hall personnel is set (S1210), this command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 37). In this attacker unit winning abnormality notification, as described above, an abnormality is generated in the attacker unit 71, the output of voice indicating that an abnormal state such as fraudulent activity or ball clogging has occurred, the lamp control, and the third symbol display device 81. Perform time production etc. With such a configuration, it is possible to detect a winning abnormality such as a fraudulent act against the attacker unit 71 or a ball jam at an early stage.

On the other hand, in the process of S1209, if the winning abnormality command is not received from the main control device 110 (S1209: No), then it is determined whether or not the probability variation area release command is received from the main control device 110 (S1211). ). As a result of the determination, if the probability variation area opening command is received from the main control device 110 (S1211: Yes), first, in order to determine whether or not the probability variation area opening notification can be executed, the "character selection" effect is performed. It is determined whether or not the command is being executed (S1212). In the first embodiment, when the "character selection" effect is executed, the degree of attention to the opening mode of the probability change area 75 is lowered, so that the probability change area contradicts the positioning of the "character selection" effect. It is configured not to execute the release notification. Therefore, in the process of S1212, if it is determined that the "character selection" effect is being executed (S1212: Yes), the process of S1213 is skipped, the probability change area opening notification is not performed, and this command determination process (S1212: Yes). S1111) is finished, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 37).

On the other hand, in the process of S1212, if the "character selection" effect is not executed (S1212: No), the probability variation area opening notification can be executed. Therefore, the probability variation area opening notification is set (S1213). The command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 37). In this probabilistic region opening notification, the character display "Aim for V!" Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate that the probabilistic region 75 is open, and the voice output control of the "Aim for V!" I do. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize the opening of the probability variation region 75 that can acquire the "probability fluctuation state" and prompt the player to launch the ball.

On the other hand, in the process of S1211, if the probability variation area release command is not received from the main control device 110 (S1211: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S1214), and this command determination process (S1111) is executed. ), And the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 36).

Here, with reference to FIG. 40, the probability variation area release notification executed during the jackpot state will be described. FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram showing whether or not the probability variation area opening notification is executed, and FIG. 40A illustrates a state in which the probability variation area opening notification is not executed in the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot state. FIG. 40 (b) is a diagram illustrating a state in which the probability variation region opening notification is executed in the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot, the number of rounds indicating the progress of the jackpot (that is, the number of rounds) and the total number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot are shown. A display of the number of winning prize balls, a display of a launch mode suggestion indicating a mode of launching a ball that can win a prize in the variable winning devices 72 and 74, and a display suggestion of opening as a probability variation region opening notification indicating that the probability variation region 75 is open. Is configured to be displayable.

In the example shown in FIG. 40 (a), "Round 1" as the number of rounds is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and the total is displayed in the lower left portion of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. "0080 shots" is displayed as the number of winning prize balls, and "right-handed" as a launch mode suggestion display and an arrow display pointing to the right side of the screen are displayed in the upper right portion of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. There is. In addition, in FIG. 40A, the opening suggestion display as the probability change area opening notification is not displayed.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 40 (b), as in FIG. 40 (a), "Round 2" as the number of rounds is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and the third symbol is displayed. "0150 shots" as the total number of prize balls won is displayed in the lower left part of the display area of the device 81, and "right-handed" as the launch mode suggestion display and the screen in the upper right part of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. An arrow display pointing to the right side is displayed, and an arrow display pointing to the lower right direction of the screen corresponding to the opening suggestion display "Aim for V!" As a probability change area opening notification and the arrangement position of the attacker unit 71 is displayed. Has been done. In addition, it is configured to control the output of the voice of "Aim for V!" In accordance with the appearance of "Aim for V!" Which is an opening suggestion display. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize the opening of the probability variation region 75 that can acquire the "probability fluctuation state" and prompt the player to launch the ball.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the ball winning from the second variable winning device 74 is in the arrangement position of the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a while the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a is open. The ball won from the first variable winning device 72 is arranged so that the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a is open while the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a is open. Since it cannot reach the position, it is configured to be undetectable by the probability change area switch 75c. With this configuration, the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are alternately opened during one jackpot, so that the interval period of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 for dividing the round can be set. While reducing the time required for the jackpot of 1 to quickly give the player a game value, the variable winning devices 72 and 74 of the 2 share the probability variation region 75, and the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are shared. It is not necessary to provide the probability variation region 75 and the discharge passage 76 for each, the number of parts of the attacker unit 71 can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the opening / closing control of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 is performed in each processing in the jackpot processing (see FIG. 27), and the opening / closing control of the probability variation region 75 is executed. When the sphere passes through the probabilistic variation region 75 that is effectively set, a "probability fluctuation state" is generated after the jackpot ends. With this configuration, a variable winning device capable of flowing a ball into the probability variation region 75 at the timing when the probability variation region 75 is opened and whether or not the probability variation region 75 is opened in each round. It is possible to create a playability of whether or not 72, 74 (that is, the second variable winning device 74) is opened, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the jackpot types having the same opening / closing pattern (that is, the jackpot types “time saving A” and “latent probability fluctuation A”, the jackpot types “time saving B” and “latent probability fluctuation” B ”and jackpot types“ time saving C ”and“ latent probability fluctuation C ”) are provided, respectively, so that the jackpot type cannot be determined only by the opening / closing patterns of the variable winning devices 72 and 74, and any jackpot is given to the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by making it difficult (impossible) to recognize whether the player has won the type and creating a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable winning devices 72 and 74 that are opened in each round are set in each jackpot type, and the probability variation region 75 is opened or closed corresponding to the round. To set. Then, the jackpot type cannot be determined only by the opening patterns of the variable winning devices 72 and 74, so that it is difficult (impossible) for the player to recognize which jackpot type is won, and in which game state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a playability that makes the player guess whether the game is being played.

Further, in the first embodiment, when a jackpot type that generates a "probability fluctuation state" is won after the jackpot ends, the second variable winning device 74 is a round in which the probability variation region 75 is opened in a plurality of rounds in the jackpot. Is configured to be open. Therefore, even if the ball cannot be passed through the probability variation region 75 in any one round in which the probability variation region 75 is open, the probability variation region 75 is opened again in the other round. Therefore, it is possible to pass the sphere through the probability variation region 75. Therefore, due to a sudden trouble (for example, a game abnormality such as a launch abnormality, a player's poor physical condition, etc.), there is a problem in passing the ball to the probability change area 75 in one round in which the probability change area 75 is opened. Even in such a case, by opening the probability variation region 75 again in another round and providing the possibility of passing the ball through the probability variation region 75, the player is comfortable without suffering a disadvantage due to an unexpected situation. The game can be realized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the jackpot, when the ball passes in the situation where the probability variation region 75 is effectively set, the "probability fluctuation state" is given (generated) after the jackpot ends. It is configured so that the "probability fluctuation state" is not given (generated) even if the sphere passes through the probability variation region 75 which is set to invalid.

Conventionally, when a probability-changing region through which a ball can pass is provided in the attacker unit 71 that is opened at the time of a big hit, the probability-changing region is controlled to open and close by an opening / closing lever or the like, and the ball flowing into the attacker unit 71 passes through the probability-changing region. There is a pachinko machine that generates (give) a "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot ends.

In such a pachinko machine, when a jackpot occurs, the jackpot symbol corresponding to, for example, a "time reduction state" or a "normal gaming state" is not notified to the player whether or not a "probability fluctuation state" occurs. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the like, a "latent probability variation effect mode (that is, a" time saving notification effect mode "or a" normal notification effect mode ". The same shall apply hereinafter)" is performed, and the player is in a "probability fluctuation state". ", But an effect as if a" time reduction state "or a" normal game state "is generated. Then, during the jackpot, the opening / closing lever is controlled to open / close at a predetermined timing based on the jackpot type.

Specifically, for example, in the case of a jackpot type that generates a "probability fluctuation state", the jackpot is controlled by opening and closing the opening / closing lever so that the ball flowing into the attacker unit 71 passes through the probability variation region. It is configured to generate a "probability fluctuation state" after the end. On the other hand, in the case of the jackpot type that does not generate the "probability fluctuation state", the opening / closing lever is controlled to open / close so that the ball flowing into the attacker unit 71 does not pass through the probability variation region, and the "probability fluctuation" is performed after the jackpot ends. It is configured to generate a "time reduction state" or a "normal game state" without generating a "state".

With this configuration, it is difficult (impossible) for the player to recognize whether the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is the "probability fluctuation state", the "time shortening state", or the "normal gaming state". , It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played. Further, even in the "time shortened state" or the "normal gaming state", the player is made to guess that it may be the "probability fluctuation state" (internally) contrary to the production mode, and the game is continuously executed. As a result, the operating rate of the pachinko machine can be improved.

However, since the pachinko machine is configured to generate a "probability fluctuation state" when the sphere passes through the probability variation region even when the "latent probability variation effect mode" is executed, the inside of the attacker unit 71 The player keeps paying attention to whether or not the ball passes through the probabilistic region, and when the player visually recognizes that the ball has passed through the probabilistic region, the player indicates that a "probability fluctuation state" occurs. It will be recognized by, and the expected playability will collapse. In addition, if the player continuously executes the "latent probability change effect mode" after the player recognizes the occurrence of the "probability fluctuation state", the player cannot be given the interest of the game, but rather the game. On the other hand, there is a risk of awakening.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the valid state or the invalid state of the probabilistic region 75 provided in the attacker unit 71 is configured to be switchable, and the probabilistic region is configured for each round of the jackpot according to the jackpot type. The drive control is performed so as to open the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a provided in the probability variation region 75, and the valid or invalid setting of the probability variation region 75 is controlled to be switched (internally) in a state in which the player cannot recognize it. Then, when the sphere passes through the probability variation region 75 that is effectively set during the jackpot, a “probability fluctuation state” is generated after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, even if the sphere passes through the probability variation region 75 which is set to be invalid, the "probability fluctuation state" is not generated after the jackpot ends.

That is, for example, when the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is opened and the sphere can flow into the probability variation region 75, when the probability variation region 75 is effectively set, the sphere presses the probability variation region 75 (probability variation region switch 75c). When it passes, it is configured to generate a "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, when the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is opened and the ball can flow into the probability variation region 75 and the probability variation region 75 is set to be invalid, the sphere passes through the probability variation region 75 (probability variation region switch 75c). However, it is configured so that the "probability fluctuation state" does not occur after the jackpot ends.

With this configuration, even if the sphere passes through the probability variation region 75, if the probability variation region 75 is not effectively set internally, the “probability fluctuation state” does not occur after the jackpot ends, so the probability variation region Even when the player visually recognizes the passage of the ball to 75, it can be configured so that the occurrence of the "probability fluctuation state" is not confirmed after the end of the jackpot. With this configuration, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, even when the "latent probability variation effect mode" is being executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, even if a sphere irregularly flows into the probabilistic region 75 in a situation where the "probability fluctuation state" is not assumed to be given, the probabilistic region 75 is intentionally set to be invalid. It is possible to prevent the game value from being given.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the jackpot types having the same opening / closing pattern (that is, the jackpot types “time saving A” and “latent probability fluctuation A”, the jackpot types “time saving B” and “latent probability fluctuation” "B" and the jackpot types "time saving C" and "latent probability fluctuation C") are provided, respectively, so that the jackpot type cannot be determined only by the opening / closing patterns of the variable winning devices 72 and 74, and any jackpot type can be given to the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by making it difficult (impossible) to recognize whether or not the player has won the game, and creating a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played after the jackpot. it can. On the other hand, the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A" that notifies that it is in the "probability fluctuation state" opens and closes the variable winning devices 72 and 74 with a unique opening / closing pattern (that is, "Y1") different from other jackpot types. Control. Therefore, the player can recognize that the "probability fluctuation state" is given by recognizing the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning devices 72 and 74.

Further, in the jackpot type "time saving A" in which the "probability fluctuation state" cannot occur, an interval is executed before the start of the middle round (that is, the third round) of the jackpot in which the probability variation region 75 can be opened, and the attacker unit. After making the sphere do not exist in 71, the round for opening the probability variation region 75 is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the unintended provision of a "probability fluctuation state". Therefore, it is possible to give the player a game value as expected in the game specifications and prevent an unexpected loss from occurring in the game field.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, at least the period during which the interval is executed (for example, the interval and the third round) in the interval period executed before the start of the round in which the probability variation region 75 is opened During the period), the player is configured to perform a "character selection" effect for determining the effect mode after the jackpot is completed. By executing the "character selection" effect during the interval period, the player is made to pay attention to the "character selection" effect, and the degree of attention to the opening mode of the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 is relatively high. At the same time, the degree of attention to the open mode of the probability variation region 75 can be reduced. That is, by executing the "character selection" effect that the player can easily pay attention to during the interval period, it is difficult for the player to recognize the inflow result of the ball into the open probability variation region 75. With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the ball has passed through the probability variation region 75, and it is possible to determine which game state the game state is after the jackpot is completed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a playability that makes the player guess. Further, even in the "time shortened state" or the "normal gaming state", the player is made to guess that it may be the "probability fluctuation state" (internally) contrary to the production mode, and the game is continuously executed. As a result, the operating rate of the pachinko machine can be improved.

Furthermore, when a jackpot is won, the player can select a character that is a factor in determining the production mode after the jackpot, so that the production mode (character) that suits the player's taste in the production after the jackpot can be selected. Can be executed. In addition, it is possible to select an effect that suggests the content of the game state to be executed by the player's own will, and it is possible to provide a player-participation-type effect with abundant variations. Therefore, in a situation where the player who is a big hit feels pleasure, it is possible to give a further interest and improve the interest of the game.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 41. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the game board so that a part of the first variable winning device 72 (that is, the right side of the front view) and a part of the second variable winning device 74 (that is, the left side of the front view) overlap in the vertical direction. It is arranged with respect to 13, and is arranged so as not to overlap in the vertical direction except for a part thereof.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which the vertical width is larger than the horizontal width of the entire pachinko machine 10 and the design constraint on the left and right width is larger than the design constraint on the vertical width. Therefore, when the laterally arranged area of the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 becomes large, the predetermined area in the game area of the game board 13 is divided into the first variable winning device 72 and the first variable winning device 72. 2 The variable winning device 74 may occupy the device, which may reduce the degree of freedom in designing other game parts.

Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is attached to a game island for installation in a game hall, there are restrictions on the design dimensions in the depth direction so as not to come into contact with the equipment of the game island. Therefore, it becomes necessary to design each part while limiting the depth dimension, and the same restrictions occur on the first variable winning device 72, the second variable winning device 74, and the attacker unit 71 having the probability variation region 75. If the depth dimension of the attacker unit 71 becomes large, it may cause a factor that lowers the degree of freedom in designing other game parts.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the width dimension of the attacker unit 71 is made equal to the width dimension of the first variable winning device 72, and the width dimension of the second variable winning device 74 is set to the width dimension of the first variable winning device 72. The probability variation region 75 is also configured to fit within the width dimension of the first variable winning device 72, while keeping the size within the width dimension of. Further, the passages 72d and 72e from the first variable winning device 72, the passages 74d and 74e from the second variable winning device 74, and the probability variation region 75 and the discharge passage 76 are placed within the width dimension of the attacker unit 71. While arranging so as to fit, the depth dimensions of the above passages 72d, 72e, 74d, 74e, the probability variation region 75, and the discharge passage 76 are also about one ball from the surface of the game board 13 toward the back of the pachinko machine 10. It is configured to be. With this configuration, the width dimension and depth dimension of the attacker unit 71 are reduced, the degree of freedom in designing other game parts is improved, and the probability variation region 75 is provided for the variable winning devices 72 and 74 of 2. The effect of the first embodiment is exhibited by the provision.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

The details of the attacker unit 71 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a diagram schematically showing the attacker unit 71 of the second embodiment, and FIG. 41 (a) shows the first variable winning device 72, the second variable winning device 74, and the probability variation region of the second embodiment. It is a front enlarged view schematically showing the front view of the attacker unit 71 provided with 75, and FIG. 41 (b) schematically shows the side view of the attacker unit 71 from the direction A of FIG. 41 (a). It is an enlarged view of the right side surface.

As shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), the attacker unit 71 of the second embodiment mainly includes the first variable winning device 72, the second variable winning device 74, the probability variation region 75, and the discharge passage 76. The width dimension of the first variable winning device 72 is set to a size and position within the width dimension of the second variable winning device 74, the probability variation region 75, and the discharge passage 76.

Further, the attacker unit 71 is configured so that all parts (excluding each solenoid 72b and the like) that guide the ball are contained within a depth range of about one ball from the board surface of the game board 13.

Further, as in the first embodiment, the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are configured so that the balls fired in the so-called right-handed game can flow in, and fired in the so-called left-handed game. The ball is configured so that it cannot flow in.

Here, in the attacker unit 71 of the second embodiment, the ball that has flowed down from the right side to the left side of the first variable winning device 72 by the right-handed game is the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 72. It is configured so that it can flow down evenly within the width of. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, the guiding means such as the left nail group 77 and the right nail group 78 that guide the ball to the portion where the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 overlap in the vertical direction is provided. It becomes unnecessary, and it is not necessary to arrange the guiding means such as the left side nail group 77 and the right side nail group 78, and the area on the upper side of the front view of the attacker unit 71 can be effectively utilized (the degree of freedom in design is improved).

When the first opening / closing plate 72a is open, the first large winning opening detection front passage 72d allows the ball that has flowed into the first variable winning device 72 to be first large due to the bottom that is gently inclined to the right side in the front view. It is configured to guide toward the winning opening switch 72c. While the first opening / closing plate 72a is open, the ball launched by the right-handed game flows down evenly from above the front view of the attacker unit 71, and then collides with the first opening / closing plate 72a and is the first. It flows into the passage 72d before the detection of the big winning opening. Then, the ball rolls on the bottom of the passage 72d before detecting the first special winning opening to the right side in the front view, reaches the first winning opening switch 72c, and is detected by the first winning opening switch 72c. Will be done. It should be noted that the time required to reach the first grand prize opening switch 72c from the passage 72d before detecting the first grand winning opening is about 0.4 seconds on average.

The first large winning opening detection post-detection passage 72e is a passage for guiding the ball detected by the first large winning opening switch 72c to the probability variation region 75 side provided in the attacker unit 71. Unlike the first embodiment, the passage 72e after detecting the first large winning opening is not provided with a deceleration rib 72f for reducing the flow speed of the ball flowing down in the passage. Therefore, it is configured that it takes about 1.6 seconds to reach the probability variation region 75 from the most upstream side of the passage 72e after detecting the first winning opening.

That is, the ball that has flowed into the first variable winning device 72 of the second embodiment has at least about a time of flowing down the passage 72d before detecting the first large winning opening before reaching the probability variation region 75 in the attacker unit 71. It is configured to take a total of about 2.0 seconds, which is 0.4 seconds and about 1.6 seconds for flowing down the passage 72e after detecting the first winning opening. As a result, for example, even if a ball flows into the first variable winning device 72 immediately after the first opening / closing plate 72a is opened, it takes at least about 2.0 seconds for the ball to reach the probability variation region 75. Therefore, if the opening time of the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a of the probabilistic region 75 is not opened for about 2.0 seconds or more from the opening start of the first opening / closing plate 72a, the ball does not flow into the probabilistic region 75. ing.

Therefore, when the first opening / closing plate 72a of the first variable winning device 72 is opened, for example, the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is closed within about 2.0 seconds from the opening of the first opening / closing plate 72a. In that case, even if the ball wins in the first variable winning device 72, the ball cannot flow into the probability variation region 75.

The second variable winning device 74 mainly includes a second opening / closing plate 74a having a horizontally long rectangular shape covering the passage 74d before detecting the second large winning opening and having a width dimension shorter than the width dimension of the first variable winning device 72. A prize was won in the second large winning opening solenoid 74b (see FIG. 8) for driving the opening and closing of the second opening / closing plate 74a on the front side with the lower side of the second opening / closing plate 74a as an axis, and in the second variable winning device 74. The second big winning opening switch 74c that detects the ball, the second big winning opening detection passage 74d through which the ball before being detected by the second big winning opening switch 74c flows down, and the second big winning opening switch 74c. There is provided a passage 74e after the detection of the second big winning opening where the ball after being detected flows down. Then, the passage 74e after detecting the second large winning opening is configured to join the passage 72e after detecting the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 72 at the merging portion 73.

In the passage 74d before detecting the second large winning opening, when the second opening / closing plate 74a is open, the ball flowing into the second variable winning device 74 is brought into the second large winning opening by the bottom gently inclined to the right side in the front view. It is configured to guide toward the winning opening switch 74c. While the second opening / closing plate 74a is open, the ball launched by the right-handed game flows down evenly from above the front view of the attacker unit 71, and then collides with the second opening / closing plate 74a and is second. It flows into the passage 74d before the detection of the big winning opening. Then, the ball rolls on the bottom of the passage 74d before detecting the second major winning opening to the right side in the front view, reaches the second major winning opening switch 74c, and is detected by the second major winning opening switch 74c. Will be done. It should be noted that the time required to reach the second prize opening switch 74c from the passage 74d before detecting the second prize opening is about 0.3 seconds on average because the width of the second opening / closing plate 74a is shorter than that of the first opening / closing plate 72a. It is configured to require.

The second large winning opening detection post-detection passage 74e is a passage for guiding the ball detected by the second large winning opening switch 74c to the probability variation region 75 side provided in the attacker unit 71. The passage 74e after detecting the second prize opening is shorter than the passage 72e after detecting the first prize opening (for example, one-third the length of the passage 72e after detecting the first prize opening). It is configured. Therefore, it is configured that it takes about 0.7 seconds to reach the probability variation region 75 from the most upstream side of the passage 74e after the detection of the second special winning opening.

That is, it takes at least about 0.3 seconds for the ball flowing into the second variable winning device 74 to flow down the passage 74d before detecting the second major winning opening before reaching the probability variation region 75 in the attacker unit 71. , It is configured to take a total of about 1.0 second, which is about 0.7 seconds for flowing down the passage 74e after detecting the second major winning opening. As a result, for example, when a ball flows into the second variable winning device 74 immediately after the second opening / closing plate 74a is opened, it takes at least about 1.0 second for the ball to reach the probability variation region 75. Therefore, if the opening time of the probability changing region opening / closing plate 75a of the probability changing region 75 is not opened for about 1.0 second or more from the opening start of the second opening / closing plate 74a, the ball does not flow into the probability changing region 75. On the other hand, when the second opening / closing plate 74a is opened for about 2 seconds from the start of opening, if one ball is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, a maximum of about three balls are fired. It is configured so that it can flow into the probability variation region 75.

Therefore, when the second opening / closing plate 74a of the second variable winning device 74 is opened, for example, the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is opened for at least about 2.0 seconds from the opening of the second opening / closing plate 74a. When there is, the ball that has won the second variable winning device 74 can flow into the probability variation region 75.

It should be noted that a deceleration rib as in the first embodiment is provided in the passage of the passage 72e after the detection of the first large winning opening, and the time from the detection by the first large winning opening switch 72c to the flow down to the probability variation region 75 is set. It may be configured to be delayed.

The width dimension and arrangement of the entire probability variation region 75 and the width dimension and arrangement of the discharge passage 76 are configured to be within the width dimension of the first variable winning device 72.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the width dimension of the attacker unit 71 is made equal to the width dimension of the first variable winning device 72, and the width dimension of the second variable winning device 74 is the second. The size of the probability variation region 75 is set to fit within the width dimension of the first variable winning device 72, and the probability variation region 75 is also set to fit within the width dimension of the first variable winning device 72. Further, the passages 72d and 72e from the first variable winning device 72, the passages 74d and 74e from the second variable winning device 74, and the probability variation region 75 and the discharge passage 76 are placed within the width dimension of the attacker unit 71. While arranging so as to fit, the depth dimensions of the above passages 72d, 72e, 74d, 74e, the probability variation region 75, and the discharge passage 76 are also about one ball from the surface of the game board 13 toward the back of the pachinko machine 10. It is configured to be. With this configuration, the width dimension and depth dimension of the attacker unit 71 are reduced, the degree of freedom in designing other game parts is improved, and the probability variation region 75 is provided for the variable winning devices 72 and 74 of 2. The effect of the first embodiment is exhibited by the provision.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment has the same effect as the first embodiment.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 42. In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the probability variation region 75 and the discharge passage 76 in the attacker unit 71 are arranged at positions in the lateral direction in the front view.

Here, when the ball flowing into the attacker unit 71 is visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, the probability variation region 75 and the discharge passage 76 are arranged in parallel in the lateral direction in the front view. Therefore, by visually following the ball that has flowed down into the attacker unit 71 from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, it is determined whether the ball has flowed into the probability variation region 75 or the discharge passage 76. It is configured to be possible (easy to do).

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, a discharge passage 76 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 in the probability variation region 75, and both the probability variation region 75 and the discharge passage 76 are both light-transmitting transparent resins (for example, It is composed of polycarbonate or acrylic). Further, the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is also made of a light-transmitting transparent resin (for example, polycarbonate or acrylic). That is, the probability variation region 75 and the discharge passage 76 are configured to overlap in the front-rear direction (depth direction) of the pachinko machine 10. In general, it is more difficult for human vision to recognize the difference in the depth image than the difference in the plane image, so that the probability variation region 75 and the discharge passage 76 are arranged in a plane (horizontal direction in front view). When the discharge passage 76 is arranged in the front-rear direction of the front view, the player who visually recognizes the probability variation region 75 and the discharge passage 76 recognizes whether or not the pachinko machine 10 has flowed into the probability variation region 75 or the discharge passage 76. It can be difficult. In particular, by forming the probabilistic region 75 (including the members related to the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a and the probabilistic region solenoid 75b) and the discharge passage 76 with transparent members, the ball can flow into the probabilistic region 75 or the discharge passage 76. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the ball is flowing into the space. Therefore, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to distinguish whether the ball that has flowed into the attacker unit 71 has flowed into the probability variation region 75 or the discharge passage 76, and the “probability” that can occur when the ball has passed through the probability variation region 75. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether or not the "variable state" is given. As a result, even when the "latent probability variation effect mode" is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether the player is in the "probability fluctuation state", the "time reduction state", or the "normal game state". By making it possible, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment and the second embodiment. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first embodiment and the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

The details of the attacker unit 71 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a diagram schematically showing the attacker unit 71 of the third embodiment, and FIG. 42 (a) shows the first variable winning device 72, the second variable winning device 74, and the probability variation region of the third embodiment. It is a front enlarged view schematically showing the front view of the attacker unit 71 provided with the 75, and FIG. 42 (b) schematically shows the side view of the attacker unit 71 from the B direction of FIG. 42 (a). It is an enlarged view of the right side surface.

As shown in FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b), the attacker unit 71 of the third embodiment mainly includes the first variable winning device 72, the second variable winning device 74, the probability variation region 75, and the discharge passage 76. The width dimension of the first variable winning device 72 is set to a size and position within the width dimension of the second variable winning device 74, the probability variation region 75, and the discharge passage 76.

Further, the probability variation region 75 and the discharge passage 76 are configured to overlap with each other in the front view depth direction of the pachinko machine 10. That is, the attacker unit 71 is configured so that all the parts that guide the balls (excluding each solenoid 72b and the like) are contained within a depth range of about two balls from the board surface of the game board 13.

Further, as in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are configured so that a ball launched in a so-called right-handed game can flow into the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74. The ball fired in the left-handed game is configured so that it cannot flow in.

Here, in the attacker unit 71 of the third embodiment, at least the probability variation region 75 and the discharge passage 76 are both made of a light-transmitting transparent resin material, and the ball flowing down the probability variation region 75 or the discharge passage 76 is a pachinko machine. It is configured to be recognizable from the front side of the machine 10. Further, the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a covering the probability variation region 75 covers the passage flowing down to the probability variation region switch 75c in the closed state (initial state), and its upper surface is inclined toward the discharge passage 76, so that the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a It is configured to guide the ball colliding with the discharge passage 76 by rolling the upper surface of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a toward the discharge passage 76. On the other hand, the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a covers the passage flowing down to the discharge passage 76 in the open state (driving state), and opens the passage flowing down to the probability variation region switch 75c to enter the attacker unit 71 from the confluence portion 73. The flowing ball is flowed down to the probability variation region switch 75c side.

In this case, both the probability variation region 75 and the discharge passage 76 are formed of a light-transmitting transparent resin, and the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is also formed of a light-transmissive transparent resin. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp which of the probabilistic region 75 or the discharge passage 76 is opened (closed) by the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the probabilistic region 75 and the discharge passage are configured. By superimposing 76 and 76 in the depth direction of the pachinko machine 10, it is determined whether the ball flowing down in the attacker unit 71 is flowing down the probability variation region 75 or the discharge passage 76. It is difficult to grasp from the front side. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to distinguish whether the ball that has flowed into the attacker unit 71 has flowed into the probability variation region 75 or the discharge passage 76, and has passed through the probability variation region 75. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether or not a "probability fluctuation state" that can occur due to is given. As a result, even when the "latent probability variation effect mode" is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether the player is in the "probability fluctuation state", the "time reduction state", or the "normal game state". By making it possible, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The discharge passage 76 may be arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the probability variation region 75 may be arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, in the normal state, the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is immersed in the probability variation region 75a to cover the probability variation region 75 so that the sphere does not flow down to the probability variation region 75 and the sphere flows down only to the discharge passage 76. However, only when it is desired to allow the ball to flow into the probabilistic region 75, the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a is projected, the discharge passage 76 is covered by the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a, and the ball flowing down in the attacker unit 71 is made to flow down into the probabilistic region. It is configured so that the ball can flow down to the probability variation region 75 by colliding with the opening / closing plate 75a.

In addition, the ball flowing down the passage 72e after detecting the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 72 and the passage 74e after detecting the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 74 is made invisible or difficult to see. May be configured to be subjected to predetermined coating or hard-to-see processing (for example, texture processing or knurling processing). With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to determine which of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 the spheres that can be seen at the confluence 73 of the attacker unit 71 have flowed in.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the discharge passage 76 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 in the probability variation region 75, and both the probability variation region 75 and the discharge passage 76 are transparent with light transmission. It is composed of resin. Further, the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is also made of a light-transmitting transparent resin. That is, the probability variation region 75 and the discharge passage 76 are configured to overlap in the front-rear direction (depth direction) of the pachinko machine 10. In general, it is more difficult for human vision to recognize the difference in the depth image than the difference in the plane image, so that the probability variation region 75 and the discharge passage 76 are arranged in a plane (horizontal direction in front view). When the discharge passage 76 is arranged in the front-rear direction of the front view, the player who visually recognizes the probability variation region 75 and the discharge passage 76 recognizes whether or not the pachinko machine 10 has flowed into the probability variation region 75 or the discharge passage 76. It can be difficult. In particular, by forming the probabilistic region 75 (including the members related to the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a and the probabilistic region solenoid 75b) and the discharge passage 76 with transparent members, the ball can flow into the probabilistic region 75 or the discharge passage 76. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the ball is flowing into the space. Therefore, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to distinguish whether the ball that has flowed into the attacker unit 71 has flowed into the probability variation region 75 or the discharge passage 76, and the “probability” that can occur when the ball has passed through the probability variation region 75. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether or not the "variable state" is given. As a result, even when the "latent probability variation effect mode" is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether the player is in the "probability fluctuation state", the "time reduction state", or the "normal game state". By making it possible, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment has the same effect as the first embodiment or the second embodiment.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 43. In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the probability variation region 75 is provided on the downstream side of the confluence portion 73, which is the confluence point between the ball flowing into the first variable winning device 72 and the ball flowing into the second variable winning device 74. At the timing when the ball flows down the downstream side of the confluence portion 73, the ball can flow into the probability variation region 75 depending on whether or not the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is open.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the passage directly below the passage 72e after detecting the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 72 and the passage after detecting the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 74. The probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is arranged so as to straddle the area directly below 74e. Then, immediately after the ball flows down the passage 72e after detecting the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 72, or immediately after the ball flows down the passage 74e after detecting the second big winning opening of the second variable winning device 74. When the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is open, the ball is configured to flow into the passage in which the probability variation region switch 75c is arranged. On the other hand, immediately after the ball flows down the passage 72e after detecting the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 72, or immediately after the ball flows down the passage 74e after detecting the second big winning opening of the second variable winning device 74. When the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a is closed, a ball rolls on the upper surface of the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a toward the discharge passage 76 and flows into the discharge passage 76. With this configuration, the passage 72e after detecting the first major winning opening of the first variable winning device 72, the passage 74e after detecting the second major winning opening of the second variable winning device 74, the probability variation region 75, and the discharge passage 76. While reducing the passage length and reducing the overall dimensions (particularly the vertical dimensions) of the attacker unit 71 to improve the degree of freedom in designing other game parts, the probability changes with respect to the two variable winning devices 72 and 74. The effect of the first to third embodiments is obtained by providing the region 75.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first to third embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to third embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

The details of the attacker unit 71 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a front enlarged view schematically showing a front view of the attacker unit 71 including the first variable winning device 72, the second variable winning device 74, and the probability variation region 75 of the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 43, the attacker unit 71 of the fourth embodiment is mainly composed of a first variable winning device 72, a second variable winning device 74, a probability variation region 75, and a discharge passage 76, and is composed of a first variable winning device 72. The width dimension of the second variable winning device 74, the probability variation region 75, and the discharge passage 76 is set in a size and a position within the width dimension of the device 72.

Further, the position where the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a covering the probability variation region 75 straddles at least directly below the passage width of the passage 72e after the detection of the first prize opening and the passage width of the passage 74e after the detection of the second prize opening. It is continuously arranged in (range). Therefore, when the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is open, the ball that has flowed into the first variable winning device 72 can flow into the probability variation region 75 immediately after flowing down the passage 72e after detecting the first large winning opening. , The ball that has flowed into the second variable winning device 74 is configured to be able to flow into the probability variation region 75 immediately after flowing down the passage 74e after detecting the second large winning opening.

That is, the arrangement position of the probability variation region is arranged at least at a position straddling the passage width of the passage 72e after detecting the first winning opening and the passage width of the passage 74e after detecting the second winning opening. Probability change area By keeping the arrangement position of the opening / closing plate 75a within the range directly below the vertical direction between the passage width of the passage 72e after detecting the first prize opening and the passage width of the passage 74e after detecting the second prize opening, the probability change area The arrangement position of the 75 and the discharge passage 76 can be made compact. With such a configuration, the horizontal dimension and the vertical dimension of the entire attacker unit 71 are reduced, the degree of freedom in designing other game parts is improved, and the probability variation region 75 with respect to the two variable winning devices 72 and 74. The effect of the first to third embodiments is obtained by providing the above.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment has the same effect as the first to third embodiments.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 44. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the ball flows into the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 by rotating the rotary first opening / closing plate 72a or the second opening / closing plate 74a. It is configured to be possible.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the first opening / closing plate 72a and the second opening / closing plate 74a are provided, and at the time of a big hit, the first opening / closing plate 72a or the second opening / closing plate 72a or the second opening / closing plate is in a protruding state as an initial state. By immersing either one of the opening / closing plates 74a, the ball can flow into the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74. Further, a front deceleration rib 79a on which a ball rolling on the upper surface of the first opening / closing plate 72a can collide is provided, and a time during which the ball rolling on the upper surface of the first opening / closing plate 72a exists on the first opening / closing plate 72a. Is configured to be long. Further, a rear speed reduction rib 79b is provided so that a ball rolling on the upper surface of the second opening / closing plate 74a can collide, and a time during which the ball rolling on the upper surface of the second opening / closing plate 74a exists on the second opening / closing plate 74a. Is configured to be long. Then, the second variable winning device 74 is configured so that only a ball that has crossed the first opening / closing plate 72a of the first variable winning device 72 can win a prize.

With this configuration, when the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are alternately opened and closed, the first variable winning device 72 is closed and the second variable winning device 74 is immediately opened. Even in some cases, in order for the ball to win the second variable winning device 74, it takes time to cross the first opening / closing plate 72a of the first variable winning device 72. It can be delayed. Therefore, for example, when it takes a predetermined time for the ball winning the first variable winning device 72 to reach the probability variation region 75, the probability variation region 75 is opened after the predetermined time has elapsed from the opening of the second variable winning device 74. With such a configuration, the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 can be continuously opened without any interval time. Therefore, since any of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 is apparently open, it is possible to quickly give the player the game value while suppressing the extension of the game by eliminating the interval time. Can be recognized.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first to fourth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to fourth embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

The details of the attacker unit 71 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is an enlarged front view schematically showing a front view of the attacker unit 71 provided with the first variable winning device 72, the second variable winning device 74, the probability variation region 75, and the discharge passage 76 according to the fifth embodiment. ..

As shown in FIG. 44, the attacker unit 71 of the fifth embodiment is mainly composed of a first variable winning device 72, a second variable winning device 74, a probability variation region 75, and a discharge passage 76, and is composed of a first variable winning device 72. The second variable winning device 74 is arranged on the left side (downstream side) of the device 72 when viewed from the front.

Further, as in the first embodiment and the like, the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are launched in a so-called right-handed game and are formed in the upper right portion of the attacker unit 71 from the right side in the front view. A ball that rolls along the inclination of the rolling portion 71a is configured to be able to flow in from the right side of the attacker unit 71, while a ball launched in a so-called left-handed game is configured to be unable to flow in.

The first variable winning device 72 of the fifth embodiment mainly has a plate-shaped first opening / closing plate 72a that covers the passage 72d before detecting the first major winning opening, and a first opening / closing plate 72a for driving the appearance of the first opening / closing plate 72a. 1 big winning opening solenoid 72b (see FIG. 8), a first big winning opening switch 72c for detecting a winning ball in the first variable winning device 72, and before being detected by the first big winning opening switch 72c. A passage 72d before detecting the first big winning opening where the ball flows down and a passage 72e after detecting the first big winning opening where the ball flows down after being detected by the first big winning opening switch 72c are provided. Then, the passage 72e after detecting the first major winning opening is configured to merge with the passage 74e after detecting the second major winning opening of the second variable winning device 74, which will be described later, at the merging portion 73.

The first opening / closing plate 72a is configured so that a ball can roll on the upper surface thereof, and when a big hit is made in a special symbol, the first opening / closing plate 72a is driven and controlled to be in a protruding state or an immersed state alternately with the second opening / closing plate 74a of the second variable winning device 74 described later. It is configured to be. Then, when the first opening / closing plate 72a is in the protruding state (that is, the closed state), the upper surface of the first opening / closing plate 72a is rolled to the left along the inclination, and the first opening / closing plate 72a is in the protruding state. When the ball is rolled to the left end of the first opening / closing plate 72a while maintaining the above, the ball can be guided to the second opening / closing plate 74a side of the second variable winning device 74 described later.

On the other hand, when the first opening / closing plate 72a is in the immersive state (that is, the open state), the ball launched by the right-handed game rolls from the right side of the front view of the attacker unit 71, and is inside the first variable winning device 72. Inflow to. Further, when the first opening / closing plate 72a is immersed (opened) while the ball launched by the right-handed game is rolling on the upper surface of the first opening / closing plate 72a, the first opening / closing plate 72a Balls rolling on the upper surface of the above flow into the first variable winning device 72 at a time.

Here, on the left side of the upper part of the front view of the first opening / closing plate 72a, a front deceleration rib 79a for reducing the rolling (flowing) speed of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the first opening / closing plate 72a is provided. The front deceleration rib 79a is arranged so that the back ribs provided on the back side of the front view and the plurality of front ribs provided on the front side of the front view are arranged at alternating and even distances. Is configured to meander and flow down while repeatedly colliding with each rib when the ball rolls on the upper surface of the first opening / closing plate 72a. Therefore, it takes about 2.0 seconds to reach the leftmost end of the first opening / closing plate 72a from the rightmost end.

When the first opening / closing plate 72a is open, the first large winning opening detection front passage 72d allows the ball that has flowed into the first variable winning device 72 to be first large due to the bottom that is gently inclined to the right side in the front view. It is configured to guide toward the winning opening switch 72c. While the first opening / closing plate 72a is displaced from the protruding state to the immersive state, that is, while the first variable winning device 72 is open, the ball launched by the right-handed game is in front of the attacker unit 71. When the first opening / closing plate 72a is in the closed state (protruding state) after rolling from the right side of the view, the upper surface of the first opening / closing plate 72a is rolled to the downstream side (second variable winning device 74). Flow down to the side). On the other hand, when the first opening / closing plate 72a is in the open state (immersive state), it flows into the passage 72d before detecting the first large winning opening. Then, the ball rolls the bottom of the first large winning opening detection passage 72d to the left side in front view due to the inflowing momentum, and then the bottom of the first large winning opening detection passage 72d is fronted by the weight of the ball. It rolls to the right side of the view, reaches the first big winning opening switch 72c, and is detected by the first big winning opening switch 72c. That is, the first large winning opening detection front passage 72d guides the ball that has flowed into the first variable winning device 72 in a direction that is once separated from the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75. The width (height) of the first opening / closing plate 72a and the bottom of the passage 72d before detecting the first winning opening is configured to be separated by about two balls, and the first opening / closing plate 72a tries to protrude. In addition, the ball does not easily block the protrusion of the first opening / closing plate 72a.

Here, the ball launched by the right-handed game rolls from the upper right rolling portion 71a of the first variable winning device 72 to the left side in the front view, and the first opening / closing plate 72a of the first variable winning device 72 is opened. If so, it flows into the first variable winning device 72. The ball that has flowed into the first variable winning device 72 rolls in the passage 72d before detecting the first large winning opening in the left direction in the front view while maintaining the momentum of flowing down in the left direction in the front view. Then, the momentum of the ball that has rolled to the left is canceled by the downward-sloping inclination of the passage 72d before the detection of the first large winning opening, and the rightward direction in front view along the downward-sloping inclination of the passage 72d before the detection of the first large winning opening. Flow down to. Therefore, the time to reach the first prize opening switch 72c from the leftmost end of the front view of the passage 72d before detecting the first prize opening is by climbing the inclination of the passage 72d before detecting the first prize opening to the left side of the front view. Since it stays a little, it is configured to take about 1.0 second.

The first large winning opening detection post-detection passage 72e is a passage for guiding the ball detected by the first large winning opening switch 72c to the probability variation region 75 side provided in the attacker unit 71. The passage 72e after detecting the first prize opening is configured to have a longer passage length (for example, five times) than the passage 74e after detecting the second prize opening, which will be described later. Therefore, it is configured that it takes about 1.5 seconds to reach the probability variation region 75 from the most upstream side of the passage 72e after detecting the first winning opening.

That is, it takes at least 1.0 second for the ball flowing into the first variable winning device 72 to flow down the passage 72d before detecting the first major winning opening before reaching the probability variation region 75 in the attacker unit 71. , It is configured to take a total of about 2.5 seconds, which is about 1.5 seconds for flowing down the passage 72e after detecting the first prize opening. As a result, for example, even if a sphere flows into the first variable winning device 72 immediately after the first opening / closing plate 72a is opened (immersed), at least about 2.5 before the sphere reaches the probability variation region 75. Since it takes seconds, if the opening time of the probability changing region opening / closing plate 75a of the probability changing region 75 is not opened for about 2.5 seconds or more from the opening start of the first opening / closing plate 72a, the ball does not flow into the probability changing region 75. It is configured in.

Therefore, when the first opening / closing plate 72a of the first variable winning device 72 is opened (immersed), for example, the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is within about 2.5 seconds from the opening of the first opening / closing plate 72a. When is closed, the ball cannot flow into the probability variation region 75 even if the ball wins in the first variable winning device 72.

The deceleration rib 72f (see FIG. 4) as in the first embodiment is not provided in the passage 72e after detecting the first large winning opening of the fifth embodiment. As a result, the configuration in the passage 72e after the detection of the first large winning opening can be simplified to reduce the design man-hours, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging in the passage 72e after the detection of the first large winning opening. it can.

Further, the ball that has flowed into the first variable winning device 72 is detected by the first large winning opening switch 72c, and then within the first predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), regardless of whether the ball has flowed into the probability variation region 75. , It is configured so that it can be detected by the discharge switch 76a provided in the discharge passage 76. In other words, the ball detected by the first grand prize opening switch 72c is configured to be detected by the discharge switch 76a within the first predetermined period. With this configuration, if the ball detected by the first large winning opening switch 72c is not detected by the discharge switch 76a within the first predetermined period, some kind of fraudulent activity or winning abnormality such as ball clogging will occur. It is possible to detect the possibility that it is.

The second variable winning device 74 of the fifth embodiment mainly includes a second opening / closing plate 74a that covers the passage 74d before detecting the second major winning opening, and a second grand prize for driving the second opening / closing plate 74a. The mouth solenoid 74b (see FIG. 8), the second large winning opening switch 74c for detecting the winning ball in the second variable winning device 74, and the ball before being detected by the second large winning opening switch 74c flow down. A passage 74d before detecting the second major winning opening and a passage 74e after detecting the second major winning opening where the ball flows down after being detected by the second major winning opening switch 74c are provided. Then, the passage 74e after detecting the second large winning opening is configured to join the passage 72e after detecting the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 72 at the merging portion 73.

Similar to the first opening / closing plate 72a, the second opening / closing plate 74a is launched by a right-handed game, and a ball that has rolled on the upper right rolling portion 71a of the attacker unit 71 and the upper surface of the first opening / closing plate 72a rolls on the upper surface. It is configured to be movable, and is configured to be driven and controlled in a protruding state or an immersive state alternately with the first opening / closing plate 72a of the first variable winning device 72 at the time of a big hit in a special symbol. Then, when the second opening / closing plate 74a is in the protruding state (that is, the closed state), the upper surface of the second opening / closing plate 74a is rolled to the left along the inclination, and the second opening / closing plate 74a is in the protruding state. When the ball is rolled to the left end of the second opening / closing plate 74a while maintaining the above, the ball can be guided to the center side of the game board 13 (direction in which the starting port unit 64 is arranged). There is.

On the other hand, when the second opening / closing plate 74a is in the immersive state (that is, the open state), the ball launched by the right-handed game rolls from the upper right rolling portion 71a of the attacker unit 71 to the left side in the front view, and further. After rolling on the upper surface of the first opening / closing plate 72a of the first variable winning device 72, it flows into the second variable winning device 74. Further, when the second opening / closing plate 74a is immersed (opened) while the ball launched by the right-handed game is rolling on the upper surface of the second opening / closing plate 74a, the second opening / closing plate 74a Balls rolling on the upper surface of the above flow into the second variable winning device 74 at a time.

Here, on the upper left side of the front view of the second opening / closing plate 74a, a back-side deceleration rib 79b for reducing the rolling (flowing) speed of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the second opening / closing plate 74a is provided. Similar to the front deceleration rib 79a, the back deceleration rib 79b has a distance between the back rib provided on the back side of the front view and a plurality of front ribs provided on the front side of the front view alternately and evenly. When the ball rolls on the upper surface of the second opening / closing plate 74a, the ball repeatedly collides with each rib to meander and flow down while decelerating. Therefore, it takes about 2.0 seconds to reach the second opening / closing plate 74a from the rightmost end to the leftmost end. That is, it is configured to take about 4.0 seconds to roll from the rightmost end to the leftmost end of the attacker unit 71.

The passage 74d before detecting the second large winning opening is a bottom portion in which the ball flowing into the second variable winning device 74 is gently inclined downward to the left in the front view when the second opening / closing plate 74a is immersed (opened). It is configured to guide to the second prize opening switch 74c. That is, while the second variable winning device 74 is closed (protruding), the ball launched by the right-handed game rolls from the right side of the front view of the attacker unit 71, and then the first opening and closing that is closed. After rolling the upper surface of the plate 72a, the upper surface of the second opening / closing plate 74a is rolled and flows down to the downstream side (starting port unit 64 side). On the other hand, when the second opening / closing plate 74a is in the open state (immersive state), it flows into the passage 74d before detecting the second large winning opening. Then, the ball rolls further to the left side of the front view at the bottom of the passage 74d before detecting the second special winning opening due to the inflowing momentum, reaches the second major winning opening switch 74c, and reaches the second major winning opening switch 74c. Detected by the mouth switch 74c.

Here, the ball that has rolled from the right side of the front view of the second variable winning device 74 (that is, the upper surface of the first opening / closing plate 72a) keeps the momentum of flowing down to the left side of the front view, and the second big prize is won. The passage 74d before mouth detection is rolled to the left side in the front view. Then, while the momentum of the ball that has rolled to the left is amplified by the downward slope of the passage 74d before the detection of the second prize opening, the front view is along the downward slope of the passage 74d before the detection of the second prize opening. It flows down to the left. Therefore, the time required to reach the second large winning opening switch 74c from the rightmost front view of the passage 74d before detecting the second large winning opening is accelerated by the inclination of the passage 74d before detecting the second large winning opening. It is configured to take about 0.3 seconds.

The second large winning opening detection passage 74e is a passage for guiding the ball detected by the second large winning opening switch 74c to the probability variation region 75 side provided in the attacker unit 71, and the second passage. The probability variation region 75 is arranged directly below the passage 74e after the detection of the large winning opening. The passage 74e after detecting the second prize opening is shorter than the passage 72e after detecting the first prize opening (for example, 1/5 of the length of the passage 72e after detecting the first prize opening). .. Therefore, it is configured so that it takes about 0.3 seconds to reach the probability variation region 75 from the most upstream side of the passage 74e after detecting the second special winning opening.

That is, it takes at least about 0.3 seconds for the ball flowing into the second variable winning device 74 to flow down the passage 74d before the detection of the second major winning opening before reaching the probability variation region 75 in the attacker unit 71. , It is configured to take a total of about 0.6 seconds, which is about 0.3 seconds for flowing down the passage 74e after detecting the second major winning opening. As a result, for example, when a ball flows into the second variable winning device 74 immediately after the second opening / closing plate 74a is opened, the ball reaches the probability variation region 75 in at least about 0.6 seconds. Therefore, if the opening time of the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a of the probabilistic region 75 is not opened for about 0.6 seconds or more from the opening start of the second opening / closing plate 74a, the ball should not flow into the probabilistic region 75. On the other hand, when the second opening / closing plate 74a is opened for about 3 seconds from the start of opening, if one ball is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, a maximum of about four balls are fired. It is configured so that it can flow into the probability variation region 75.

Therefore, when the second opening / closing plate 74a of the second variable winning device 74 is opened, for example, the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is opened for at least about 3.0 seconds from the opening of the second opening / closing plate 74a. When there is, the ball that has won the second variable winning device 74 can flow into the probability variation region 75.

Further, the ball flowing into the second variable winning device 74 enters the probability variation region 75 within a second predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) shorter than the first predetermined period after being detected by the second large winning opening switch 74c. It is configured so that it can be detected by the discharge switch 76a provided in the discharge passage 76 regardless of the inflow of the water. In other words, the ball detected by the second special winning opening switch 74c is configured to be detected by the discharge switch 76a within the second predetermined period. With this configuration, if the ball detected by the second major winning opening switch 74c is not detected by the discharge switch 76a within the second predetermined period, some kind of fraudulent activity or winning abnormality such as ball clogging will occur. It is possible to detect the possibility that it is.

The probabilistic region 75 is located directly below the confluence 73 between the passage 72e after detecting the first winning opening and the passage 74e after detecting the second winning opening, and is mainly the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a and the probabilistic region opening / closing plate. It is composed of a probabilistic region solenoid 75b (see FIG. 8) capable of opening and closing the 75a, and a probabilistic region switch 75c.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the first opening / closing plate 72a and the second opening / closing plate 74a are provided, and the first opening / closing plate is in a protruding state as an initial state at the time of a big hit. By immersing either the 72a or the second opening / closing plate 74a, the ball can flow into the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74. Further, a front deceleration rib 79a on which a ball rolling on the upper surface of the first opening / closing plate 72a can collide is provided, and a time during which the ball rolling on the upper surface of the first opening / closing plate 72a exists on the first opening / closing plate 72a. Is configured to be long. Further, a rear speed reduction rib 79b is provided so that a ball rolling on the upper surface of the second opening / closing plate 74a can collide, and a time during which the ball rolling on the upper surface of the second opening / closing plate 74a exists on the second opening / closing plate 74a. Is configured to be long. Then, the second variable winning device 74 is configured so that only a ball that has crossed the first opening / closing plate 72a of the first variable winning device 72 can win a prize. With this configuration, when the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are alternately opened and closed, the first variable winning device 72 is closed and the second variable winning device 74 is immediately opened. Even in some cases, in order for the ball to win the second variable winning device 74, it takes time to cross the first opening / closing plate 72a of the first variable winning device 72. It can be delayed. Therefore, for example, when it takes a predetermined time for the ball winning the first variable winning device 72 to reach the probability variation region 75, the probability variation region 75 is opened after the predetermined time has elapsed from the opening of the second variable winning device 74. With such a configuration, the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 can be continuously opened without any interval time. Therefore, since any of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 is apparently open, it is possible to quickly give the player the game value while suppressing the extension of the game by eliminating the interval time. Can be recognized.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment has the same effect as the first to fourth embodiments.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the number of prize balls based on the winning of the first variable winning device 72 and the number of winning balls based on the winning of the second variable winning device 74 are both 15 pieces. It is set. Further, in all jackpot types, the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are configured to be alternately opened.

In this case, when the number of rounds for each jackpot type is the same, the game value given to the player becomes the same, the variation of the game value giving becomes monotonous, and the player may be awakened to the game.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the number of prize balls based on the prize in the first variable prize device 72 is set to 10, and the number of prize balls based on the prize in the second variable prize device 74. Is set to 15, and the game value given to each of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 is configured to be different. Further, in the case of a big hit, only the first variable winning device 72 is opened, the big hit type in which only the second variable winning device 74 is opened, and the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74. It is configured to provide a jackpot type that is open together. With this configuration, even if the number of rounds is the same for the jackpot type, the time required for the jackpot (big hit digestion time) is the same (almost the same) because the variable winning devices 72 and 74 that are released are different. Even if there is, the game value given can be clearly different. That is, even in the same 5-round jackpot, the jackpot type in which only the first variable winning device 72 is opened, the jackpot type in which only the second variable winning device 74 is opened, or the first variable winning device 72 and the first The game value that can be given to the player can be different depending on the jackpot type in which both the variable winning device 74 and the variable winning device 74 are opened (alternately), even if the jackpot digestion time is the same (almost the same). With this configuration, it is possible to make the time efficiency of the game value to be given different, to enrich the variation of the game, and to improve the interest of the game.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machines 10 in the first to fifth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to fifth embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 45, the number of prize balls of the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 45 shows the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 that can be opened in each jackpot type of the sixth embodiment, and one winning per winning in the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74. It is a figure for demonstrating the number of prize balls. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the first variable winning device 72 is referred to as "upper", and the second variable winning device 74 arranged below the game board 13 from the first variable winning device 72 is referred to as "lower". In some cases.

As shown in FIG. 45, the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment is configured so that the variations of the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74, which are opened for each jackpot type, are different. Specifically, in the case of the jackpot type "time saving A" and the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", only the first variable winning device 72 is opened for 5 rounds, and the jackpot type "time saving B" and the jackpot type " In the case of "latent probability fluctuation B", only the second variable winning device 74 is opened for 5 rounds, and in the case of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", the jackpot type "time saving C" and the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C". The first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are alternately opened.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, when a ball wins in the first variable winning device 72, 10 prize balls are paid out for each winning, and when a ball wins in the second variable winning device 74. Is configured so that 15 prize balls are paid out for each prize. Therefore, in the case of a jackpot of the same number of rounds, the jackpot type in which the second variable winning device is opened has a greater game value given to the player than the jackpot type in which the first variable winning device 72 is opened. It is composed.

More specifically, in the jackpot type "time reduction A" or the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", only the first variable winning device 72 is opened for 5 rounds, so 10 pieces x 10 balls x 5 rounds = 500. The prize ball will be paid out. In addition, in the jackpot type "time reduction B" or the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B", only the second variable winning device 74 is opened for 5 rounds, so 15 pieces x 10 balls x 5 rounds = 750 prizes. The ball is paid out. Further, in the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", jackpot type "time saving C" or jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C", the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are alternately opened for 10 rounds. Then, since each of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 is opened for 5 rounds, (10 pieces × 10 balls × 5 rounds) + (15 pieces × 10 pieces × 5 rounds) = 1250 prize balls are paid out.

With this configuration, even if the number of rounds is the same for the jackpot type, the time required for the jackpot (big hit digestion time) is the same (almost the same) because the variable winning devices 72 and 74 that are released are different. Even if there is, the game value given can be clearly different. With this configuration, it is possible to make the time efficiency of the game value to be given different, to enrich the variation of the game, and to improve the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the opening / closing patterns of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 for each jackpot type in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 46 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the large winning opening opening / closing table 202f of the sixth embodiment. The big winning opening opening / closing table 202f shown in FIG. 46 shows the variable winning devices 72 and 74 that are opened in each round for each big hit type in each special symbol, and the front view of the attacker unit 71 for each round. When the first variable winning device 72 arranged on the right side is opened, it is expressed as "upper", and when the second variable winning device 74 arranged on the left side of the front view of the attacker unit 71 is opened, "up" is expressed. It is expressed as "below". In the sixth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when one of the variable winning devices 72, 74 (for example, the first variable winning device 72) is open, the other variable winning device 74, 72 (for example, the first variable winning device 72) is open. For example, the second variable winning device 74) is configured to be closed, and only one of the variable winning devices 72, 74 is opened, and the two variable winning devices 72, 74 are not opened at the same time. It is configured as follows.

As shown in FIG. 46, the opening / closing patterns “upper only” of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 corresponding to the jackpot types “time saving A” and “latent probability fluctuation A”, which are jackpots for a maximum of 5 rounds of the first special symbol, are , In all rounds, only the "upper", that is, the first variable winning device 72, which has 10 prize balls per winning, is opened, and the balls from the first variable winning device 72 into the attacker unit 71. The second variable winning device 74 is closed, and the ball cannot flow into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74.

That is, in the opening / closing pattern "upper only", the ball can flow into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72 in the first to fifth rounds of the jackpot. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, when a ball flows into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72 far from the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75, the jackpot type (probability fluctuation state) that cannot generate the "probability fluctuation state" ( That is, in the jackpot type "time saving A"), the probability variation region 75 is closed (including the case where it is not opened at all) before the ball flowing in from the first variable winning device 72 reaches the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75. On the other hand, in the jackpot type that can generate a "probability fluctuation state" (that is, the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A"), the ball flowing in from the first variable winning device 72 reaches the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75. It is configured to open the probability variation region 75 until it is obtained.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46, the opening / closing patterns "bottom only" of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 corresponding to the jackpot types "time reduction B" and "latent probability fluctuation B", which are jackpots for a maximum of 5 rounds of the first special symbol. In all rounds, only the "lower", that is, the second variable winning device 74 in which the number of prize balls per winning is 15 is opened, and the second variable winning device 74 is inside the attacker unit 71. The ball can flow into the attacker unit 71, and the first variable winning device 72 is closed, so that the ball cannot flow into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72.

That is, in the opening / closing pattern "lower only", the ball can flow into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 in the first to fifth rounds of the jackpot. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, when a ball flows into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 near the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75, the jackpot type (probability fluctuation state) that cannot generate the "probability fluctuation state" ( That is, in the jackpot type “time saving B”), the probability variation region 75 is closed (including the case where it is not opened at all) before the ball flowing in from the second variable winning device 74 reaches the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75. On the other hand, in the jackpot type that can generate a "probability fluctuation state" (that is, the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B"), the ball flowing in from the second variable winning device 74 reaches the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75. It is configured to open the probability variation region 75 until it is obtained.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46, the opening / closing patterns "upper and lower alternating" of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 corresponding to the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A" which is a jackpot of a maximum of 10 rounds of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Is "above" in odd rounds (ie, 1 round, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, 7 rounds and 9 rounds), that is, the first variable winning device 72 is opened and the attacker unit from the first variable winning device 72. The ball can flow into the attacker unit 71, and the second variable winning device 74 is closed, so that the ball cannot flow into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74.

Further, the opening / closing pattern "upper and lower alternating" is "lower" in even rounds (that is, 2 rounds, 4 rounds, 6 rounds, 8 rounds and 10 rounds), that is, the second variable winning device 74 is opened and the first 2 It is said that the ball can flow into the attacker unit 71 from the variable winning device 74, the first variable winning device 72 is closed, and the ball cannot flow into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72. It has become.

That is, in the opening / closing pattern "alternate up and down", the ball can flow into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72 in the first round of the jackpot, and from the second variable winning device 74 in the next round (that is, the second round). Balls can flow into the attacker unit 71, and then alternately from the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 into the attacker unit 71 for each round until the end of the jackpot (that is, the end of the 10th round). The ball can flow into the ball. Therefore, the number of open rounds of the first variable winning device 72 is "5", and the number of open rounds of the second variable winning device 74 is "5".

The jackpot type "probability fluctuation A" of the sixth embodiment has flowed into the attacker unit 71 in the first, third, and ninth rounds in which the probability variation region 75 is opened, as in the first embodiment. The second variable winning device 74, which takes a short time for the ball to reach the probability variation region 75, is open. Therefore, in the first round, the third round, and the ninth round of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", when the probability variation region 75 is opened, the ball winning the second variable winning device 74 is placed at the probability variation region 75 arrangement position. The probability variation region 75 is maintained in the open state at the timing of reaching the probability variation region 75, and the ball can flow into the probability variation region 75. Therefore, the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A" is configured so that a "probability fluctuation state" can occur after the jackpot ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46, the opening / closing patterns " In the odd rounds (ie, 1 round, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, 7 rounds and 9 rounds), "lower and upper alternating" means "lower", that is, the second variable winning device 74 is opened and the second variable winning device The ball can flow into the attacker unit 71 from 74, and the first variable winning device 72 is closed, so that the ball cannot flow into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72.

Further, in the opening / closing pattern "lower and upper alternating", in even rounds (that is, 2 rounds, 4 rounds, 6 rounds, 8 rounds and 10 rounds), the "upper", that is, the first variable winning device 72 is opened. The ball can flow into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72, the second variable winning device 74 is closed, and the ball cannot flow into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74. It has become.

That is, in the opening / closing pattern "lower and upper alternating", the ball can flow into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 in the first round of the jackpot, and the first variable winning device 72 in the next round (that is, the second round). The ball can flow into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 to the attacker unit 71 alternately for each round until the end of the jackpot (that is, the end of the 10th round). The ball can flow into the inside. Therefore, the number of open rounds of the first variable winning device 72 is "5", and the number of open rounds of the second variable winning device 74 is "5".

Here, in the jackpot type "time reduction B", the second variable winning device 74 has a short probability variation region (for example, about 1.0 second) until the ball flowing into the attacker unit 71 reaches the probability variation region 75. The 75 is set to open in the closed rounds 1, 3, and 5.

On the other hand, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C", in the second and fourth rounds in which the probability variation region 75 is opened, the time required for the ball flowing into the attacker unit 71 to reach the probability variation region 75 is short. The variable winning device 74 is open. Therefore, in the second and fourth rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C", when the probability variation region 75 is opened, the ball winning the second variable winning device 74 reaches the probability variation region 75 arrangement position. At the timing, the probability variation region 75 is maintained in the open state, and the ball can flow into the probability variation region 75. Therefore, the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C" is configured so that a "probability fluctuation state" can occur after the jackpot ends.

In the jackpot type "probability variation A", "time saving C" or "latent probability variation C" of the sixth embodiment, the number of times the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are opened in the jackpot is different. It may be configured as. Specifically, for example, in the jackpot type "time saving C", the first variable winning device 72 is opened three times and the second variable winning device 74 is opened seven times, for a total of 10 rounds. In the jackpot type "probability variation A", the first variable winning device 72 may be opened eight times and the second variable winning device 74 may be opened twice for a total of 10 rounds. With this configuration, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game value given to the player and improve the interest of the game.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the number of prize balls based on the prize in the first variable prize device 72 is set to 10, and the prize is won in the second variable prize device 74. The number of prize balls based on the above is set to 15, and the game value given to each of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 is set to be different. Further, in the case of a big hit, only the first variable winning device 72 is opened, the big hit type in which only the second variable winning device 74 is opened, and the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74. It is configured to provide a jackpot type that is open together. With this configuration, even if the number of rounds is the same for the jackpot type, the time required for the jackpot (big hit digestion time) is the same (almost the same) because the variable winning devices 72 and 74 that are released are different. Even if there is, the game value given can be clearly different. That is, even in the same 5-round jackpot, the jackpot type in which only the first variable winning device 72 is opened, the jackpot type in which only the second variable winning device 74 is opened, or the first variable winning device 72 and the first The game value that can be given to the player can be different depending on the jackpot type in which both the variable winning device 74 and the variable winning device 74 are opened (alternately), even if the jackpot digestion time is the same (almost the same). With this configuration, it is possible to make the time efficiency of the game value to be given different, to enrich the variation of the game, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment has the same effect as the first to fifth embodiments.

<7th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 47. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the first opening / closing plate 72a and the second opening / closing plate 74a are provided, and the first opening / closing plate 72a or the second opening / closing plate 74a which is in a protruding state as an initial state at the time of a big hit. By immersing either one, the ball can flow into the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74. Then, the ball is configured to flow into the probability variation region 75 or the discharge passage 76 arranged on the downstream side (lower side and left side in front view) of the second variable winning device 74 arranged on the downstream side.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, as in the fifth embodiment, the first opening / closing plate 72a and the second opening / closing plate 74a of the infestation type are provided, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a protruding state as an initial state at the time of a big hit. By immersing either one of the opening / closing plate 72a or the second opening / closing plate 74a, the ball can flow into the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74. On the other hand, the probability variation region 75 and the discharge passage 76 are arranged on the lower side and the right side of the first variable winning device 72 when viewed from the front, so that the balls flowing into the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 can flow in. .. That is, the ball that has flowed into the first variable winning device 72 can reach the probability variation region 75 or the discharge passage 76 after a predetermined time has elapsed relatively early, while the ball that has flowed into the second variable winning device is the above-mentioned predetermined. It is configured to reach the probabilistic region 75 or the discharge passage 76 after a lapse of time longer than the time. Further, in order for the ball to flow into the second variable winning device 74, after the first opening / closing plate 72a of the first variable winning device 72 is closed, the upper surface of the first opening / closing plate 72a is viewed from the right side to the left side in the front view. It is configured so that it is necessary to roll completely.

With this configuration, the time until the ball flowing into the first variable winning device 72 reaches the probability variation region 75 or the discharge passage 76 and the ball flowing into the second variable winning device 74 are the probability variation region 75 or discharge. It is possible to increase the time difference from the time required to reach the passage 76. As a result, for example, a jackpot type in which the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are alternately opened and a "probability fluctuation state" cannot occur after the jackpot type (for example, the jackpot type "time reduction"). In the case of winning "A"), when the probability variation region 75 is opened when the second variable winning device 74 is opened, (the time is shortened) even if an interval time is not provided before the opening of the second variable winning device 74. Even), it is possible to secure a sufficient time for the ball to reach the arrangement position of the open probability variation region 75, and until the ball flowing in from the second variable winning device 74 reaches the probability variation region 75. By closing the probability variation region 75, it is possible to give a "probability fluctuation state" according to the jackpot type. Therefore, it is possible to quickly add the game value without setting an interval time during the jackpot (setting it short).

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machines 10 in the first to sixth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to sixth embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

The details of the attacker unit 71 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is an enlarged front view schematically showing a front view of the attacker unit 71 provided with the first variable winning device 72, the second variable winning device 74, the probability variation region 75, and the discharge passage 76 according to the seventh embodiment. .. As shown in FIG. 47, the attacker unit 71 of the seventh embodiment is mainly composed of a first variable winning device 72, a second variable winning device 74, a probability variation region 75, and a discharge passage 76, and is composed of a first variable winning device 72. The second variable winning device 74 is arranged on the left side of the device 72 when viewed from the front.

Further, as in the first embodiment and the like, the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are launched in a so-called right-handed game and are formed in the upper right portion of the attacker unit 71 from the right side in the front view. A ball that rolls along the inclination of the rolling portion 71a is configured to be able to flow in from the right side of the attacker unit 71, while a ball launched in a so-called left-handed game is configured to be unable to flow in.

In the passage 72e after detecting the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 72 of the seventh embodiment, the ball detected by the first large winning opening switch 72c is transferred to the first large winning opening switch 72c in the attacker unit 71. It is a passage for guiding to the probability variation region 75 side provided directly below. The passage 72e after detecting the first winning opening is configured to have a shorter passage length (for example, 1/5) than the passage 74e after detecting the second winning opening, which will be described later. Therefore, it is configured that it takes about 0.3 seconds to reach the probability variation region 75 from the most upstream side of the passage 72e after the detection of the first winning opening.

That is, it takes at least 1.0 second for the ball flowing into the first variable winning device 72 to flow down the passage 72d before detecting the first major winning opening before reaching the probability variation region 75 in the attacker unit 71. , It is configured to take a total of about 1.3 seconds, which is about 0.3 seconds for flowing down the passage 72e after detecting the first prize opening. As a result, for example, even if a ball flows into the first variable winning device 72 immediately after the first opening / closing plate 72a is opened (immersed), at least about 1.3 by the time the ball reaches the probability variation region 75. Since it takes seconds, if the opening time of the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a of the probabilistic region 75 is not opened for about 1.3 seconds or more from the opening start of the first opening / closing plate 72a, the ball does not flow into the probabilistic region 75. It is configured in.

In addition, by letting the inflow pattern of the balls winning into the first variable winning device 72 flow in from a position where the balls flow down (fall) from directly above the first large winning opening switch 72c, the passage 72d before the detection of the first large winning opening is made. It may be configured to shorten the residence time in. That is, the ball fired in the right-handed game is dropped from the position directly above the first large winning opening switch 72c of the attacker unit 71 toward the first opening / closing plate 72a, and then flows into the first variable winning device 72. The ball can be immediately detected by the first grand prize opening switch 72c. With this configuration, the ball that has flowed into the first variable winning device 72 can reach the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75 at an early stage.

Further, the ball that has flowed into the first variable winning device 72 is detected by the first large winning opening switch 72c, and then within the first predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), regardless of whether the ball has flowed into the probability variation region 75. , It is configured so that it can be detected by the discharge switch 76a provided in the discharge passage 76 arranged on the right side of the front view of the probability variation region 75. In other words, the ball detected by the first grand prize opening switch 72c is configured to be detected by the discharge switch 76a within the first predetermined period. With this configuration, if the ball detected by the first large winning opening switch 72c is not detected by the discharge switch 76a within the first predetermined period, some kind of fraudulent activity or winning abnormality such as ball clogging will occur. It is possible to detect the possibility that it is.

The second large winning opening detection post-detection passage 74e of the second variable winning device 74 of the seventh embodiment moves the ball detected by the second large winning opening switch 74c to the probability variation region 75 side provided in the attacker unit 71. The passage 74e after detecting the second major winning opening is configured to have a longer passage length (for example, five times) than the passage 72e after detecting the first major winning opening described above. Therefore, it is configured that it takes about 1.5 seconds to reach the probability variation region 75 from the most upstream side of the passage 74e after the detection of the second special winning opening.

That is, it takes at least about 0.3 seconds for the ball flowing into the second variable winning device 72 to flow down the passage 74d before detecting the second large winning opening before reaching the probability variation region 75 in the attacker unit 71. , It is configured to take a total of about 2.5 seconds, which is about 1.5 seconds for flowing down the passage 74e after detecting the second major winning opening. Further, by the time the ball reaches the arrangement position of the second variable winning device 74, the first opening / closing plate 72a of the first variable winning device 72 is closed, and the upper surface of the first opening / closing plate 72a is moved from the rightmost end to the farthest. It is configured so that it can flow in after rolling to the left end in about 2.0 seconds. As a result, for example, even if the second opening / closing plate 74a of the second variable winning device 74 is opened immediately after the first opening / closing plate 72a is closed (protruded), the ball launched in the right-handed game remains in the probability variation region 75. Since it takes at least about 4.5 seconds to reach, the opening time of the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a of the probabilistic region 75 is about 4.5 from the opening start of the second opening / closing plate 74a (closing of the first opening / closing plate 72a). It is configured so that the ball does not flow into the probability variation region 75 when it is not opened for more than a second.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the probability variation region 75 and the discharge passage 76 are arranged on the lower side and the right side of the first variable winning device 72 in front view, and the first variable winning device 72 and the first variable winning device 72 are arranged. 2 The ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 74 can flow in. That is, the ball that has flowed into the first variable winning device 72 can reach the probability variation region 75 or the discharge passage 76 after a predetermined time has elapsed relatively early, while the ball that has flowed into the second variable winning device is the above-mentioned predetermined. It is configured to reach the probabilistic region 75 or the discharge passage 76 after a lapse of time longer than the time. Further, in order for the ball to flow into the second variable winning device 74, after the first opening / closing plate 72a of the first variable winning device 72 is closed, the upper surface of the first opening / closing plate 72a is viewed from the right side to the left side in the front view. It is configured so that it is necessary to roll completely. With this configuration, the time until the ball flowing into the first variable winning device 72 reaches the probability variation region 75 or the discharge passage 76 and the ball flowing into the second variable winning device 74 are the probability variation region 75 or discharge. It is possible to increase the time difference from the time required to reach the passage 76. As a result, for example, a jackpot type in which the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are alternately opened and a "probability fluctuation state" cannot occur after the jackpot type (for example, the jackpot type "time reduction"). In the case of winning "A"), when the probability variation region 75 is opened when the second variable winning device 74 is opened, (the time is shortened) even if an interval time is not provided before the opening of the second variable winning device 74. Even), it is possible to secure a sufficient time for the ball to reach the arrangement position of the open probability variation region 75, and until the ball flowing in from the second variable winning device 74 reaches the probability variation region 75. By closing the probability variation region 75, it is possible to give a "probability fluctuation state" according to the jackpot type. Therefore, it is possible to quickly add the game value without setting an interval time during the jackpot (setting it short).

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment has the same effect as the first to sixth embodiments.

<8th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 48. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, an attacker unit 71 having a first variable winning device 72 and a second variable winning device 74 is provided on the right side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80 on the game board 13, and is a so-called right-handed game. Only the launched ball can win the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74, and the ball launched in the so-called left-handed game wins the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74. It is configured so that it cannot be done.

On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, among the attacker units 71, the first variable winning device 72 is arranged at a position where the ball fired in the so-called left-handed game can win, and the second variable winning device 74 is arranged. It is arranged at a position where a ball fired in a so-called right-handed game can win a prize. Then, a probability variation region 75 and a discharge passage 76 are provided in the attacker unit 71, and a ball that has flowed into the first variable winning device 72 in the left-handed game and a ball that has flowed into the second variable winning device 74 in the right-handed game. However, both are configured to be able to flow into the probability variation region 75 or the discharge passage 76. With this configuration, the variable winning devices 72 and 74 that can win a prize according to the firing mode of the ball are made different to enrich the variation of the game, and the ball wins in the attacker unit 71 in a different firing mode. Even in such a case, the number of parts of the attacker unit 71 can be reduced by sharing the probability variation region 75 and the discharge passage 76.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first to seventh embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to seventh embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 48, the arrangement position of the attacker unit 71 having the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 will be described with respect to the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 48 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 48, in the attacker unit 71 of the eighth embodiment, the first variable winning device 72 is arranged so as to be located below the front view of the starting port unit 64, and is fired in a left-handed game. While the ball can win a prize, the ball launched in the right-handed game is configured to be non-winning (difficult). Therefore, in a predetermined round in the jackpot type or the jackpot type in which the first variable winning device 72 is opened, the player plays a left-handed game to create a game property in which the first variable winning device 72 wins a ball. ..

The ball that has flowed into the first variable winning opening device 72 flows down the passage 72d before detecting the first large winning opening, is detected by the first large winning opening switch 72c, and then flows down the passage 72e after detecting the first large winning opening. Therefore, it is configured so that it can flow down to the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75. Then, the sphere is detected by the probability variation region switch 75c when the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a of the probability variation region 75 is open, or when the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a of the probability variation region 75 is closed. Instead of flowing into the probability variation region 75, it flows down into the discharge passage 76, is detected by the discharge switch 76a, is detected by the out switch 66a (see FIG. 8), and is then discharged to the outside of the game board 13. ..

Next, in the attacker unit 71 of the eighth embodiment, the second variable winning device 74 is arranged so as to be located on the lower right side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80 (the lower side of the front view of the normal symbol gate 67). The ball fired in the right-handed game can win a prize, while the ball fired in the left-handed game cannot win (difficult). Therefore, in a predetermined round in the jackpot type or the jackpot type in which the second variable winning device 74 is opened, the player plays a right-handed game, and the game property in which the ball wins the second variable winning device 74 is created. ..

The ball that has flowed into the second variable winning opening device 74 flows down the passage 74d before detecting the second major winning opening, is detected by the second major winning opening switch 74c, and then flows down the passage 74e after detecting the second major winning opening. Therefore, it is configured so that it can flow down to the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75. Then, the sphere is detected by the probability variation region switch 75c when the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a of the probability variation region 75 is open, or when the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a of the probability variation region 75 is closed. Instead of flowing into the probability variation region 75, it flows down into the discharge passage 76, is detected by the discharge switch 76a, is detected by the out switch 66a (see FIG. 8), and is then discharged to the outside of the game board 13. ..

With this configuration, in a predetermined round in the jackpot type or the jackpot type, the launch mode of the ball can be changed in order for the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 to be opened to win the ball. , A wide variety of games can be made to improve the interest of games. In particular, when the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are alternately opened and closed in one jackpot, the player is fired according to the opening and closing first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74. It is possible to change the mode and suppress the monotony of the game.

Further, by opening and closing the probability variation region 75 according to the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 to be opened, the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are made to win a ball at any timing of any firing mode. Depending on whether or not the ball can flow into the probability variation region 75, it is possible to create a playability. Specifically, for example, when the jackpot type in which the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are alternately opened and closed is won, the probability variation region 75 is only when the second variable winning device 74 is opened. Is open so that the ball can flow into the probability variation region 75, and further, the probability variation region 75 is opened after the second variable winning device 74 is opened, but the probability variation region 75 is relatively open. If the right-handed game is not performed from the state in which the second variable winning device 74 is closed after finishing in a short period of time, the opening time of the probability variation region 75 is set so that it is difficult for the ball to flow into the probability variation region 75. Set (for example, 2 seconds). That is, when a left-handed game is performed to cause the first variable winning device 72 to win a ball and the left-handed game is switched to the right-handed game at the timing when the first variable winning device 72 is closed, the probability variation area 75 It is set so that it is difficult (not in time) to let the ball flow into the second variable winning device 74 at the timing when is open. With this configuration, the player alternately performs the left-handed game and the right-handed game in the jackpot type to ensure that the ball is placed in the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74. Either win a prize to gain game value, or play only a right-handed game, give up winning the first variable winning device 72, and let the ball pass through the probability variation area 75 based on the winning to the second variable winning device 74. It is possible to select whether to obtain a "probability fluctuation state". As a result, it is possible to create a game property in which the player can select the game value to be given to the player even if the jackpot type is the same, and to improve the interest of the game by enriching the variation of the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment has the same effect as the first to seventh embodiments.

<9th embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 49. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, in the probabilistic region 75 in the attacker unit 71, a probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a is arranged in order to make the inflow of balls into the probabilistic region switch 75c variable, and the probabilistic region solenoid 75b is provided. (See FIG. 8) drives the opening / closing plate 75a of the probabilistic region opening / closing. Then, when the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is immersed (opened), the ball flows into the probability variation region 75, while when the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is projected (closed), the ball is pushed into the probability variation region 75. The ball is made to flow into the discharge passage 76 without flowing into the discharge passage 76. With this configuration, it is configured to change whether or not the sphere flowing into the attacker unit 71 is detected by the probability variation region switch 75c.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the first discharge passage 79a into which the ball flowing into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72 can flow in, and the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74. A second discharge passage 79b through which the ball flowing into the inside can flow is provided, and the first discharge passage 79a and the second discharge passage 79b are provided between the first discharge passage 79a and the second discharge passage 79b. A probability variation region 75 is arranged at a portion located on the downstream side. Further, a first discharge opening / closing plate 79a1 capable of opening / closing the first discharge passage 79a is provided, and a second discharge opening / closing plate 79b1 capable of opening / closing the second discharge passage 79b is provided. Further, the probability variation region 75 is configured to be always open without covering the upstream side of the probability variation region switch 75c. Further, the first discharge passage 79a, the second discharge passage 79b, and the probability variation region 75 are configured to merge on the upstream side of the discharge switch 76a provided in the discharge passage 76. When the first discharge opening / closing plate 79a1 is opened (immersed), a ball flowing into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72 flows down to the first discharge passage 79a and is provided in the discharge passage 76. When the first discharge opening / closing plate 79a1 is closed (protruding) while being detected by the discharge switch 76a, the ball flowing into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72 is the first discharge opening / closing plate 79a1. It rolls on the upper surface of the surface and flows into the probabilistic region 75 arranged on the downstream side thereof, is detected by the probabilistic region switch 75c, and then is detected by the discharge switch 76a of the discharge passage 76. Further, when the second discharge opening / closing plate 79b1 is opened (immersed), a ball flowing into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 flows down to the second discharge passage 79b and is provided in the discharge passage 76. When the second discharge opening / closing plate 79b1 is closed (protruding) while being detected by the discharged discharge switch 76a, the ball flowing into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 is the second discharge opening / closing plate 79b1. It rolls on the upper surface of the surface and flows into the probabilistic region 75 arranged on the downstream side thereof, is detected by the probabilistic region switch 75c, and then is detected by the discharge switch 76a of the discharge passage 76.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first to eighth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to eighth embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

The details of the attacker unit 71 of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 shows the front surface of the attacker unit 71 including the first variable winning device 72, the second variable winning device 74, the probability variation region 75, the first discharge passage 79a, the second discharge passage 79b, and the discharge passage 76 according to the ninth embodiment. It is a front enlarged view which represented the view typically.

As shown in FIG. 49, the attacker unit of the ninth embodiment mainly includes the first variable winning device 72, the second variable winning device 74, the probability variation region 75, the first discharge passage 79a, the second discharge passage 79b, and the discharge. It is composed of a passage 76, and the second variable winning device 74 is arranged on the left side (downstream side) of the front view of the first variable winning device 72.

The first discharge passage 79a is provided in the passage 72e after detecting the first winning opening, and is mainly composed of a first discharge opening / closing plate 79a1 and a first discharge opening / closing solenoid (not shown).

The first discharge opening / closing plate 79a1 is a retractable opening / closing plate that is arranged at a position visible to the player from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 and covers the upstream side of the first discharge passage 79a, and is provided by the first discharge opening / closing solenoid. It is configured to be openable and closable.

When the first discharge opening / closing plate 79a1 is in the open state (immersive state), the upstream side (upper side) of the first discharge passage 79a is opened to the first variable winning device 72. The inflowing ball is guided to the first discharge passage 79a and then to the discharge passage 76. On the other hand, the first discharge opening / closing plate 79a1 is arranged so as to be flush with the bottom surface (rolling surface of the sphere) of the passage in the attacker unit 71 in the closed state (protruding state), and the first variable winning prize is obtained. The sphere that has flowed into the device 72 is guided to the probability variation region 75. The ball guided to the probability variation region 75 is discharged to the outside of the attacker unit 71 (on the back side of the game board 13) after passing through the discharge passage 76.

The second discharge passage 79b is provided in the passage 74e after detecting the second winning opening, and is mainly composed of a second discharge opening / closing plate 79b1 and a second discharge opening / closing solenoid (not shown).

The second discharge opening / closing plate 79b1 is a retractable opening / closing plate that is arranged at a position visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the player and covers the upstream side of the second discharge passage 79b, and is provided by the second discharge opening / closing solenoid. It is configured to be openable and closable.

When the second discharge opening / closing plate 79b1 is in the open state (immersive state), the upstream side (upper side) of the second discharge passage 79b is opened in the second discharge opening / closing plate 79b1 to the second variable winning device 74. The inflowing ball is guided to the second discharge passage 79b and then to the discharge passage 76. On the other hand, the second discharge opening / closing plate 79b1 is arranged so as to be flush with the bottom surface (rolling surface of the sphere) of the passage in the attacker unit 71 in the closed state (protruding state), and the second variable winning prize is obtained. The sphere that has flowed into the device 74 is guided to the probability variation region 75. The ball guided to the probability variation region 75 is discharged to the outside of the attacker unit 71 (on the back side of the game board 13) after passing through the discharge passage 76.

Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the variable winning devices 72 and 74 that are opened in each round are set in each jackpot type, and the first discharge passage 79a or the second discharge is performed corresponding to the round. Set the opening or closing of the passage 79b. Then, the ball can flow into the probability variation region 75 according to the relationship between the variable winning devices 72 and 74 that are opened and closed and the first discharge passage 79a or the second discharge passage 79b that is in the closed state (protruding state). , The jackpot type cannot be determined only by the opening patterns of the first variable winning devices 72 and 74, and it is difficult (impossible) for the player to recognize which jackpot type is won, and which game state is used. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a playability that makes the player guess whether or not the game is being played in.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment has the same effect as the first to eighth embodiments.

<10th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 50. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the attacker unit 71 of 1 is provided with the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74, and the downstream side where the balls flowing into the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are merged. A probabilistic region 75 and a discharge passage 76 are provided in the probabilistic region 75 so that any ball flowing in from any of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 can flow into the probabilistic region 75.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are each composed of different members, while the ball flowing in from the first variable winning device 72 flows down. The flow path to be used and the flow path through which the ball flowing in from the second variable winning device 74 flows down are merged at the merging portion 73, and the probability variation region 75 and the discharge passage 76 are located on the downstream side of the merging portion 73. To do. With this configuration, it is not necessary to share the probability variation region 75 in the variable winning devices 72 and 74 separately configured, and to provide the probability variation region 75 and the discharge passage 76 for each variable winning device 72 and 74. The number of parts of the attacker unit 71 can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first to ninth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to ninth embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

The first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a schematic front view of an enlarged right side portion of the game board 13 in which the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 of the tenth embodiment and the probability variation region 75 and the discharge passage 76 are arranged. FIG. 50 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view shown, in which FIG. 50 (a) shows a right-handed ball when both the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 in the tenth embodiment are in the closed state. FIG. 50 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right side portion of the game board 13 for explaining the behavior, in which the first variable winning device 72 in the tenth embodiment is in the open state and the second variable winning device 72 is in an open state. FIG. 50 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right side portion of the game board 13 for explaining the behavior of the ball played right-handed when the device 74 is in the closed state, and FIG. 50 (c) is the first embodiment in the tenth embodiment. Schematic cross-sectional view of the right side portion of the game board 13 for explaining the behavior of a right-handed ball when the variable winning device 72 is in the closed state and the second variable winning device 74 is in the open state. Is.

As shown in FIGS. 50A to 50C, in the tenth embodiment, on the right side of the front view of the game board 13, all or almost all of the balls launched in the right-handed game can flow down the right flow path. 87 is formed. A first variable winning device 72 having a first opening / closing plate 72a is formed (arranged) below the left side of the right flow path 87 in a front view. Further, a second variable winning device 74 having a second right opening / closing plate 74a1 and a second left opening / closing plate 74a2 is formed (arranged) on the upper right side of the right side flow path 87 in front view (and upper left side in front view). There is.

The first variable winning device 72 of the tenth embodiment is formed in the lower part of the left side wall of the right side flow path 87, and mainly covers the space in which the first large winning opening detection front passage 72d is formed in an upright state and lower part. A first opening / closing plate 72a rotatably configured around the axis, and a first opening / closing plate 72a for opening / closing (standing or tilting) driving the first opening / closing plate 72a on the left side of the front view with the lower portion of the first opening / closing plate 72a as an axis. 1 big winning opening solenoid (not shown), 1st big winning opening switch 72c for detecting a winning ball in the 1st variable winning opening device 72, and a ball before being detected by the 1st big winning opening switch 72c. The passage 72d before the detection of the first large winning opening and the passage 72e after the detection of the first large winning opening where the ball flows down after being detected by the first large winning opening switch 72c are provided. Then, the passage 72e after detecting the first major winning opening is configured to merge with the passage 74e after detecting the second major winning opening of the second variable winning device 74, which will be described later, at the merging portion 73.

Here, the ball that has flowed into the first variable winning device 72 has a time of at least about 0.3 seconds to flow down the passage 72d before detecting the first large winning opening before reaching the probability variation region 75 in the attacker unit 71. It is configured to take a total of about 2.8 seconds, which is about 2.5 seconds for flowing down the passage 72e after detecting the first winning opening. As a result, for example, even if a ball flows into the first variable winning device 72 immediately after the first opening / closing plate 72a is opened, it takes at least about 2.8 seconds for the ball to reach the probability variation region 75. Therefore, if the opening time of the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a of the probabilistic region 75 is not opened for about 2.8 seconds or more from the opening start of the first opening / closing plate 72a, the ball does not flow into the probabilistic region 75. ing.

Therefore, when the first opening / closing plate 72a of the first variable winning device 72 is opened, for example, the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is closed within about 2.8 seconds from the opening of the first opening / closing plate 72a. In that case, even if the ball wins in the first variable winning device 72, the ball cannot flow into the probability variation region 75.

The second variable winning device 74 of the tenth embodiment is formed in the upper part of the right side wall and the upper part of the left side of the right flow path 87, and mainly stands up in the space where the passage 74d before detecting the second major winning opening is formed. The second right opening / closing plate 74a1 which is covered in a state and is configured to be rotatable around the lower part, and the lower part which is arranged in the upper part of the left side surface of the right side flow path 87 and synchronizes with the second right opening / closing plate 74a1. The second right side opening / closing plate 74a2 rotatably configured as an axis, and the second right side on the right side in the front view or the left side in the front view with the lower portions of the second right opening / closing plate 74a1 and the second left opening / closing plate 74a2 as axes. A second large winning opening solenoid (not shown) for opening / closing (standing or tilting) the opening / closing plate 74a1 and the second left opening / closing plate 74a2, and a second variable winning device 74 for detecting a winning ball. The large winning opening switch 74c, the passage 74d before the second large winning opening detection where the ball before being detected by the second large winning opening switch 74c flows down, and the ball after being detected by the second large winning opening switch 74c. There is a passage 74e after detecting the second large winning opening where the vehicle flows down. Then, the passage 74e after detecting the second major winning opening is configured to merge with the passage 72e after detecting the first major winning opening of the first variable winning device 72 described above at the merging portion 73.

Here, when the ball can flow into the second variable winning device 74, the second right opening / closing plate 74a1 formed on the right side wall of the right flow path 87 tilts to the left side in the front view with the lower portion as the axis, and the right side. The second left opening / closing plate 74a2 formed on the left side wall of the flow path 87 tilts to the right in the front view with the lower portion as the axis. At this time, the second right opening / closing plate 74a1 and the second left opening / closing plate 74a2 are rotationally driven by the second large winning opening solenoid of 1 (not shown), but the amount of rotation differs depending on each cam (not shown). It is configured as follows. Specifically, the amount of rotation of the second left opening / closing plate 74a2 is configured to tilt about 110 degrees to the right from the standing state, and the amount of rotation of the second right opening / closing plate 74a1 is about 70 degrees to the left from the standing state. It is configured to lean. Then, the sphere flowing down from the right flow path inlet 88 of the right flow path 87 first collides with the inclined surface of the second left opening / closing plate 74a2, and the inclined surface of the second left opening / closing plate 74a2 is faced along the inclination. It is configured to roll to the right side of the view, then roll the inclined surface of the second right opening / closing plate 74a1 to the right side of the front view, and flow into the second variable winning device 74. In this way, the second left opening / closing plate 74a2 and the second right opening / closing plate 74a1 are configured to block most of the right flow path 87, and the ball flowing down the right flow path 87 is a second variable winning device 74. It is possible to efficiently make the ball flowing down the right flow path 87 win the second variable winning device 74. Since the second right opening / closing plate 74a1 and the second left opening / closing plate 74a2 of the second variable winning device 74 are arranged on the upstream side of the first opening / closing plate 72a of the first variable winning device 72, tentatively, the first Even when the opening / closing plate 72a and the second right opening / closing plate 74a1 and the second left opening / closing plate 74a2 are both open, the ball is configured to flow into the second variable winning device 74 located on the upstream side. Has been done.

Here, the time for the ball flowing into the second variable winning device 74 to flow down the passage 74d before detecting the second major winning opening is at least about 0.3 seconds before reaching the probability variation region 75 in the attacker unit 71. It is configured to take a total of about 0.8 seconds, that is, about 0.5 seconds for flowing down the passage 72e after detecting the first prize opening. As a result, for example, even if a ball flows into the first variable winning device 72 immediately after the second right opening / closing plate 74a1 and the second left opening / closing plate 74a2 are opened (tilted), the ball reaches the probability variation region 75. Since it takes at least about 0.8 seconds to do so, the opening time of the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a of the probabilistic region 75 is about 0.8 seconds or more from the opening of the second right opening / closing plate 74a1 and the second left opening / closing plate 74a2. If not, the ball is configured so as not to flow into the probability variation region 75.

Therefore, when the second right opening / closing plate 74a1 and the second left opening / closing plate 74a2 of the second variable winning device 74 are opened, for example, at least from the opening of the second right opening / closing plate 74a1 and the second left opening / closing plate 74a2. If the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is closed within about 0.8 seconds, the ball cannot flow into the probability variation region 75 even if the ball wins in the second variable winning device 74. It has become.

The probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a of the tenth embodiment is arranged so that its upper surface is flush with the bottom surface (rolling surface of the sphere) of the passage in the attacker unit 71 in the closed state (protruding state). The ball that has flowed into the 1 variable winning device 72 or the 2nd variable winning device 74 is guided to the discharge passage 76. The ball guided to the discharge passage 76 is guided to the discharge passage 76, which will be described later, and is detected by the discharge switch 76a, and then discharged to the outside of the attacker unit 71 (on the back side of the game board 13).

On the other hand, when the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is in the open state (immersive state), the upstream side (upper side) of the probability variation region switch 75c is opened and flows into the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74. After guiding the ball to the passage where the probability variation region switch 75c is arranged, it is guided to the discharge passage 76.

Here, as shown in FIG. 50A, when both the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are closed, the ball launched in the right-handed game is the right flow path inlet. Since the first opening / closing plate 72a of the first variable winning device 72 or the second left opening / closing plate 74a2 of the second variable winning device 74 does not exist in the flow direction from 88 into the right flow path 87, it is on the downstream side. It is configured to flow down to the provided right flow path discharge port 89. The ball that has flowed down to the right channel discharge port 89 is configured to flow down to the out port 66 (see FIG. 3) of the game board 13.

Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), when the second variable winning device 74 is closed and the first variable winning device 72 is open, the ball launched in the right-handed game is on the right side. The first opening / closing plate 72a of the first variable winning device 72 is tilted and exists in the flow direction from the flow path inlet 88 into the right side flow path 87, so that the inclined surface of the first opening / closing plate 72a is present. It is configured to collide with and flow into the first variable winning device 72 along the inclined surface.

Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (c), when the first variable winning device 72 is closed and the second variable winning device 74 is open, the ball launched in the right-handed game is on the right side. The second left side opening / closing plate 74a2 of the second variable winning device 74 is tilted and exists in the flow direction from the flow path inlet 88 into the right side flow path 87, and the second left opening / closing plate 74a2 and the second left opening / closing plate 74a2 are present. Since the second right opening / closing plate 74a1 is tilted so as to bridge the space between the passages 74d before detecting the two major winning openings, it collides with the inclined surface of the second left opening / closing plate 74a2 and opens / closes the second left side. It is configured to flow into the second variable winning device 74 along the inclined surface of the plate 74a2 and the second right opening / closing plate 74a1.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are composed of different members, while the pachinko machine 10 flows in from the first variable winning device 72. The flow path through which the ball flows down and the flow path through which the ball flowing in from the second variable winning device 74 flows down are merged at the confluence portion 73, and the probability variation region 75 and the discharge passage 76 are located on the downstream side of the confluence portion 73. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, it is not necessary to share the probability variation region 75 in the variable winning devices 72 and 74 separately configured, and to provide the probability variation region 75 and the discharge passage 76 for each variable winning device 72 and 74. The number of parts of the attacker unit 71 can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Can be easily inferred. For example, the numerical values given in each of the above embodiments are examples, and it is naturally possible to adopt other numerical values.

In addition, it is naturally possible to combine and configure each configuration of each of the above embodiments with respect to any of the configurations of the following modifications. Further, it is naturally possible to combine each configuration of the other one or a plurality of modifications with respect to the configuration of any of the modifications shown below. In these cases, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Modification 1: Continuously open the same variable winning devices 72 and 74>
In the first embodiment, the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are alternately opened in each round at the time of a big hit. Instead of this, one of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 may be continuously opened, and then the other variable winning device 74 and 72 may be opened. With this configuration, the variation of the opening and closing patterns of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 is enriched according to the jackpot type, and it is difficult (impossible) for the player to recognize which jackpot type is won. However, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a game property that allows the player to guess which game state the game is playing in. In particular, in the eighth embodiment, the opening pattern of the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 is first variable with an irregular opening pattern (having no regularity such as alternating opening or opening of only one side). By opening the winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74, the first variable winning device 72 that can win only in the left-handed game is opened, or the second variable winning device 74 that can win only in the right-handed game is opened. A game of guessing whether to open is created, and a game of adjusting the firing mode in which the open variable winning devices 72 and 74 can be won is created, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Modification example 2: Make the open round and effective round of the probability variation region 75 different>
In the above embodiment, when the probability variation region 75 is opened, the probability variation region 75 is always set to be effective. Instead of this, a case where the probability variation region 75 is invalid even when the probability variation region 75 is opened, or a case where the probability variation region 75 is valid even when the probability variation region 75 is not opened is provided. It may be configured as follows. By configuring in this way, the variation between the open pattern and the effective pattern of the probability variation area 75 is enriched according to the jackpot type, and it is difficult or impossible for the player to recognize which jackpot type is won. However, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a game property that allows the player to guess which game state the game is playing in. In particular, when the probability variation region 75 is opened in synchronization with the opening of the variable winning devices 72 and 74, the discharge time until the remaining balls flowing in from the variable winning devices 72 and 74 that are not opened at that time are discharged. By setting the probability variation region 75 to be invalid and setting the probability variation region 75 to be valid after the lapse of the discharge time, the interval time becomes unnecessary and the game value can be quickly added.

<Modification example 3: Predetermined notification by passing a ball when the probability variation region 75 is invalid>
In the above embodiment, when the probability variation region 75 is disabled and a sphere is detected by the probability variation region switch 75c, the probability variation transition flag 203i is not turned on and no other processing is executed. Instead of this, when the probability variation region 75 is invalid, when a sphere is detected by the probability variation region switch 75c, a predetermined effect may be executed. Specifically, for example, an additional effect that changes the content of the effect being executed, a game status of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, a jackpot probability, a game state, a look-ahead effect for a pending fluctuation effect, a set value, etc.). It may be configured to execute a suggestion effect suggesting that the pachinko machine 10 has an abnormality, or an abnormality notification effect indicating that some abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. With such a configuration, it is possible to give some meaning to the passage of the ball to the probability variation region 75 when it is invalid, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game or accurately notify the game situation.

<Modification 4: Open the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a at the timing when the probability variation region 75 can flow into the probability variation region 75 even when winning from the first variable winning device 72 far from the probability variation region 75>
In the first embodiment, only the balls won from the second variable winning device 74 arranged at a position close to the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75 can flow into the probability variation region 75, while the arrangement of the probability variation region 75. The opening pattern of the probability variation region 75 was set so that the ball winning from the first variable winning apparatus 72 arranged at a position far from the installation position could not flow into the probability variation region 75. Instead of this, the opening pattern of the probability variation region 75 is set so that the ball won from the first variable winning device 72 arranged at a position far from the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75 can also flow into the probability variation region 75. It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of winning patterns in the probability variation region 75 and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 5: Discharge passage 76 is arranged on the upstream side of the probability variation region 75, and an opening / closing plate is placed in the discharge passage 76>
In the above embodiment, the probability variation region 75 is arranged on the upstream side of the discharge passage 76 of the attacker unit 71, and a ball that has not flowed into the probability variation region 75 in a state where the probability variation region 75 is closed by the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is discharged through the discharge passage. It was configured to flow into 76. Instead of this, when the discharge passage 76 is arranged on the upstream side of the probability variation region 75, the discharge passage opening / closing plate for blocking the inflow to the discharge passage 76 arranged on the upstream side is provided, and the "probability fluctuation state" is not given. When it is desired to open the discharge passage 76 in a non-driving state and give a "probability fluctuation state", that is, when it is desired to allow a ball to flow into the probability variation region 75, the discharge passage opening / closing plate is driven. By closing the discharge passage 76, the ball may flow into the probability variation region 75.

<Modification example 6: Sudden probability, small hit>
In each of the above embodiments, in the lottery of each special symbol, any one of "10R probability variation jackpot", "10R latent probability variation jackpot", "5R latent probability variation jackpot", "10R time reduction jackpot", and "5R time reduction jackpot" is It was configured to be granted. On the other hand, a jackpot different from the above jackpot (for example, a so-called "sudden probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot)") or a "small hit" different from the jackpot may be drawn. With this configuration, when a big hit or a small hit is won, the game value given to the player is different, so that the game is varied and various game characteristics are realized, which is a hobby of the game. It can be improved.

In particular, when a "small hit" is provided in a special symbol lottery, when the small hit is won, the opening / closing mode of the variable winning devices 72, 74, etc. similar to or similar to the big hit to which the "latent probability fluctuation state" is given ( That is, in the case of "5R latent probability variation jackpot", the player can perform the opening / closing operation of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 five times in the same manner as the "5R latent probability variation jackpot"). It is difficult to distinguish between the "normal game state" and the "latent probability fluctuation state". With such a configuration, a game property for guessing which game state is created is created, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The "small hit" is a lottery result in which the variable winning devices 72, 74 and the like are opened and closed, but unlike the "10R probability variation jackpot" and the "5R latent probability variation jackpot", the transition of the gaming state is not executed. ..

<Modification example 7: Latent probability change suggestion effect>
In the above embodiment, it is configured to notify the player only in the "probability change notification effect mode" that the "probability fluctuation state" is given. Instead of this, it may be configured to suggest that the "probability fluctuation state" is given or that it is given to the player by a special effect. As a special effect, for example, in the third symbol display device 81, a special character that is more likely to be selected in a situation where a "probability fluctuation state" is given and difficult to be selected when a "probability fluctuation state" is not given is selected. It is easy to output when it appears at a predetermined timing (for example, during a big hit, at the end of a big hit, or during a fluctuation effect), or when it passes through a probabilistic region 75 that is set to be valid, and a probabilistic region that is set to invalid. When it passes through 75, it executes an effect such as a special sound effect that is difficult to be output. With such a configuration, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification example 8: Suggests when the probability variation region 75 starts to open or is effective>
In the above embodiment, no suggestion is made to the player regarding the timing at which the probability variation region 75 is opened and the timing at which the probability variation region 75 is effectively set during the jackpot. Instead of this, it may be configured to suggest to the player the timing at which the probability variation region 75 is opened or the timing at which the probability variation region 75 is effectively set. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the chances of the ball flowing into the open or validly set probability variation region 75, and to facilitate the granting of the right to the "probability fluctuation state" to the player. it can.

<Modification example 9: The probability variation region 75 is opened or enabled according to the count number of the large winning opening switches 72c and 74c>
In the above embodiment, the probability variation region 75 is configured to be open and effectively set so as to synchronize with the opening trigger of any of the variable winning devices 72 and 74. Instead of opening the variable winning devices 72 and 74, the probability variation region 75 may be opened and / or effectively set according to the count number of the large winning opening switches 72c and 74c. Specifically, for example, at the third count in one round, that is, when the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are opened once, a predetermined first number less than the maximum winning number by the large winning opening switches 72c and 74c. When the (for example, the third) ball is detected, the probability variation region 75 is opened and / and effectively set, and the second number is less than the maximum winning number and the first number or more is set by the large winning opening switches 72c and 74c. When a number (for example, the eighth) of spheres is detected, the probability variation region 75 is configured to be closed and / and disabled. With this configuration, even if the variable winning devices 72 and 74 of 2 are continuously opened without interruption and the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are opened so that there is no interval time, the timing is not intended. It is possible to suppress the inflow of the ball into the probability variation region 75. That is, when the probability variation region 75 is opened in synchronization with the opening of the variable winning devices 72 and 74, the remaining spheres that have flowed in from the variable winning devices 72 and 74 that have not been opened flow into the released probability variation region 75. The interval time is set to prevent it, but with the above configuration, it is possible that the remaining balls that have flowed in from the variable winning devices 72 and 74 that have not been opened will flow into the open probability variation region 75. In addition to being able to prevent, when one of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 is closed, the other variable winning device 74 and 72 can be opened early (immediately), eliminating the need for interval time and quickly adding game value. Can be realized. Further, in this case, the ball that has flowed in based on the opening of the other variable winning devices 74 and 72 other than the desired variable winning devices 72 and 74 that want to win the ball in the probability changing area 75 flows into the probability changing area 75. Since this can be performed based on the number of detected large winning opening switches 72c and 74c, the passage 72d or / after the first large winning opening detection of the first variable winning device 72 and the passage 72e after the detection of the first large winning opening, or / And, even when the passage distance of the passage 74d or / and the passage 74e after the detection of the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 74 is shortened, the unintended probability change region 75 is entered. The inflow of balls can be suppressed. As a result, the size of the entire attacker unit 71 can be reduced, and the degree of freedom in designing the game board 13 with respect to other parts can be improved by the reduction.

<Modification example 10: Consists of a drive device that constantly drives the probability variation region 75>
In the above embodiment, the probabilistic region switch 75c that can generate a "probability fluctuation state" when the ball passes (wins) is covered with the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 75a, and opens and closes in conjunction with the opening of the variable winning devices 72 and 74. As a result, the probability variation region 75 was formed. On the other hand, a probability variation region 75 is provided in a drive device that constantly drives constantly (for example, a rotary body having a constant drive of an opening / closing plate covering the probability variation region 75 or a rotating body having a plurality of entry ports including the probability variation region 75). It may be configured so that a "probability fluctuation state" can occur when a sphere flows into the probability variation region 75.

<Modification example 11: Probability variation region 75 is composed of non-driven Kroon>
In the above embodiment, the probability variation region switch 75c that can generate a "probability fluctuation state" when the ball passes (wins) is covered with the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a that electrically drives, and the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are opened. The probability variation region 75 was formed by opening and closing in conjunction with each other. On the other hand, a plurality of entry ports including the probability variation region 75 are formed in a circular rolling means (so-called Kroon) on which the ball can roll on the upper surface, and the ball is placed in the entry port corresponding to the probability variation region 75. It may be configured so that a "probability fluctuation state" can occur when the ball enters the ball.

<Modification 12: The passage in the attacker unit 71 is formed in a y shape>
In the above embodiment, the flow direction of the ball flowing in from the first variable winning device 72 and the flowing direction of the ball flowing in from the second variable winning device 74 flow down in the same direction (for example, on the left side in the front view). The passage 72e after the detection of the first prize opening and the passage 74e after the detection of the second prize opening were configured. Instead of this, the flow direction of the ball flowing in from the first variable winning device 72 and the flowing direction of the ball flowing in from the second variable winning device 74 are different, that is, inflow from, for example, the first variable winning device 72. A passage 72e is formed after detecting the first large winning opening so that the flowing direction of the ball flowing down to the left side of the front view is formed, and the flowing direction of the ball flowing in from the second variable winning device 74 flows down to the right side of the front view. After detecting the two major winning openings, the passage 74e is formed. Then, the passage 72e after detecting the first winning opening and the passage 74e after detecting the second winning opening are merged at the confluence, and the passages 72e and 74e are communicated so as to form a so-called y-shape. Then, the probability variation region 75 and the discharge passage 76 are arranged on the downstream side of the confluence portion. With this configuration, the degree of freedom in designing the attacker unit 71 as a whole can be improved.

In particular, in the attacker unit 71 of the fifth embodiment, the passage 72e after detecting the first large winning opening is formed so that the flow direction of the ball flowing in from the first variable winning device 72 is on the left side in the front view, and the second variable winning is won. The passage 74e is formed after detecting the second large winning opening so that the flow direction of the ball flowing in from the device 74 is on the right side in the front view. Then, the passage 72e after the detection of the first prize opening and the passage 74e after the detection of the second prize opening are located closer to the first prize opening switch 72c than the second prize opening switch 74c, that is, the second prize opening. The first major winning opening is merged at a point where the passage length of the passage 72e after detection is shorter than the passage length of the passage 74e after detection, and the probability variation region 75 and the discharge passage 76 are arranged on the downstream side of the merge point. Therefore, the ball flowing in from the first variable winning device 72 reaches the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75 relatively early, while the ball that can flow in from the second variable winning device 74 first reaches the first variable winning device. After rolling over the upper surface of the first opening / closing plate 72a of 72, the ball flows into the second variable winning device 74, and then the passage 74e after detecting the second large winning opening, which is longer than the passage 72e after detecting the first large winning opening, is passed. After passing through, it reaches the arrangement position of the probability variation region 75. With this configuration, the time until the ball flowing into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 reaches the probability variation region 75, and the ball flowing into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72. Increases the time difference from the time it takes for the player to reach the probability variation area 75, enriches the opening patterns of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 and the probability variation area 75 as to whether or not the probability variation area 75 can be achieved, and enriches the variation of the game. be able to.

<Modification example 13: Loop type>
In each of the above embodiments, as the "probability fluctuation state", the "probability fluctuation state" is maintained until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot reaches a predetermined number of times, while the "probability fluctuation state" is maintained after the end of the predetermined number of times. It consisted of so-called ST type game specifications that ended. On the other hand, after the end of the big hit, a so-called loop type game specification that maintains the "probability fluctuation state" until the next big hit occurs may be configured. By applying the configuration of the present invention to the so-called loop type pachinko machine in which the next big hit is guaranteed, it is possible to improve the playability of whether or not the ball passes through the probability variation region 75.

<Modification example 14: Probability variation region of 2 or more>
In the above embodiment, the probability variation region 75 of 1 is provided in the attacker unit 71 so that the ball winning in the attacker unit 71 from any of the variable winning devices 72, 74 during the jackpot can flow into the probability variation region 75. It was composed. Instead of this, two or more probabilistic regions may be provided in the attacker unit 71 so that the ball winning the attacker unit 71 flows into any one probabilistic region. With this configuration, the variation of the inflow pattern of the probability variation region 75 is enriched, and it is difficult (impossible) for the player to recognize which jackpot type is won, and the game is played in which game state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a playability that makes the player guess whether or not the game is being performed.

<Modification 15: Other effects at interval time>
In the above embodiment, the "character selection" effect is executed at the interval time during the jackpot. Instead of this, it may be configured to execute a special effect such as a mini game or a display of a rare image. With this configuration, the player is focused on the special effect, the degree of attention to the opening mode of the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 is relatively reduced, and the probability variation region 75 is opened. The degree of attention to the aspect can also be reduced. That is, by executing a special effect that the player can easily pay attention to during the interval period, it is difficult for the player to recognize the inflow result of the ball into the open probability variation region 75. As a result, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the ball has passed through the probability variation region 75, and the player is made to guess in which game state the game state after the end of the jackpot is playing. It is possible to create playability and improve the interest of the game. Further, even in the "time shortened state" or the "normal gaming state", the player is made to guess that it may be the "probability fluctuation state" (internally) contrary to the production mode, and the game is continuously executed. As a result, the operating rate of the pachinko machine can be improved.

<Modification 16: Pseudo interval>
In the first embodiment, the interval time may occur before the start of the round in which the probability variation region 75 is opened. Alternatively, the interval time may be configured to occur even before the start of the round in which the probability variation region 75 cannot be opened. With this configuration, the probability variation region 75 is not necessarily opened by executing the interval time, so that it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the ball has passed through the probability variation region 75, and after the jackpot ends. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played.

<Modification example 17: 1 round, 1 variable winning device 72, 74 is opened and closed multiple times>
In the above embodiment, in one round during the jackpot, one of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 is opened once, and the opened variable winning devices 72 and 74 are closed, so that one round ends. It was configured to do. Alternatively, the opening and closing of any of the variable winning devices 72, 74 may be performed multiple times in one round of the jackpot. With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to recognize the number of rounds being executed, and even if the number of rounds that the probability variation region 75 opens is recognized, the number of rounds being executed is recognized. Due to the difficulty, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the probability variation area 75 is opened and the ball can pass through, and the game state after the jackpot is determined is which game state the player is playing. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a game that makes people guess.

<Modification example 18: Jackpot type in which the probability variation area 75 is not opened>
In the above embodiment, the probability variation region 75 is always opened in any round regardless of the jackpot type. Instead of this, a jackpot type in which the probability variation region 75 is not opened at all may be provided.

<Modification 19: Electric chew type attacker>
In the above embodiment, since the first opening / closing plate 72a and the second opening / closing plate 74a are normally closed, the ball does not win in the attacker unit 71, and the first opening / closing plate 72a or the second opening / closing plate is based on the jackpot. When the ball is won in the attacker unit 71 by opening 74a, a probability variation region 75 is provided in the attacker unit 71, and when the ball passes through the probability variation region 75, a "probability fluctuation state" is given. Was. On the other hand, the attacker unit 71 is composed of at least one variable winning device 72, 74, which is a so-called electric chew type, in which the ball is easy to win when rotating and the ball is harder to win when not rotating than when rotating. The probability variation region 75 may be provided inside the unit 71. In the normal state (that is, "normal game state" or the like), the probability variation region 75 is closed or disabled so that the ball does not pass through the validly set probability variation region 75. As a result, even if the ball can win a prize at normal times, it is possible not to give the "probability fluctuation state".

<Modification example 20: Variable winning devices 72 and 74 and probability variation region are separate>
In the above embodiment, the attacker unit 71 is configured by integrally uniting the first variable winning device 72, the second variable winning device 74, and the probability variation region 75. On the other hand, the probability variation region 75 may be arranged in a mechanism on the back side of the game board 13 which is separate from the variable winning devices 72 and 74 (for example, a collecting path plate for collecting winning balls). .. With this configuration, the degree of freedom in designing the variable winning devices 72, 74 and the probability variation region 75 can be improved. The spheres that have flowed into the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are configured to be reachable to the portion where the probability variation region 75, which is arranged separately, is arranged.

<Modification 21: Probability variation areas 75 and discharge passages 76 are arranged on the left and right sides of the front view of the depth passage, and are distributed by a distribution plate>
In the above embodiment, the probability variation region 75 and the discharge passage 76 are arranged in the left-right direction in the front view or the depth front-rear direction, and the ball flowing into the inside of the attacker unit 71 is distributed to either path by the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a. It was composed of. On the other hand, a depth passage for allowing the ball to flow down in the depth direction in the front view is provided in the attacker unit 71, and a drive-type distribution plate is provided on the back side of the depth passage. Then, the probability variation region 75 and the discharge passage 76 are arranged on the left side and the right side of the front view of the distribution plate, respectively (for example, the probability variation region 75 on the left side of the front view and the discharge passage 76 on the right side of the front view of the distribution plate (depth passage). ), And the ball that has flowed into the attacker unit 71 may be configured to flow into the probability variation region 75 or the discharge passage 76 depending on the driving mode of the distribution plate.

<Modification 22: Deceleration rib in the passage of the second variable winning device 74 near the probability variation region 75>
In the first embodiment, a deceleration rib 72f for reducing the flow speed of the ball is provided in the passage 72e after detecting the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 72 arranged at a position far from the probability variation region 75. On the other hand, a ball such as a deceleration rib flows down into the passage 74e after detecting the second major winning opening (passage 74d before detecting the second major winning opening) of the second variable winning device 74 arranged at a position close to the probability variation region 75. The time it takes for the winning ball from the first variable winning device 72 to reach the probability variation region 75 and the time it takes for the winning ball from the second variable winning device 74 to reach the probability variation region 75 without providing a means for reducing the speed. It was configured to cause a time lag with time. On the other hand, a deceleration rib for reducing the flow speed of the ball is provided in the passage 74e after detecting the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device arranged at a position close to the probability changing region 75, while the probability changing region 75 A means for decelerating the flow speed of a ball such as a deceleration rib in the passage 72e after detecting the first major winning opening (passage 72d before detecting the first major winning opening) of the first variable winning device 72 arranged at a position far from There is a time difference between the time it takes for the ball winning from the first variable winning device 72 to reach the probability variation region 75 and the time it takes for the ball winning from the second variable winning device 74 to reach the probability variation region. It may be configured to be absent or less. With this configuration, even if any of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 is opened and the ball flows into the attacker unit 71, the time required to reach the probability variation region 75 is equalized (approximate). Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control regarding the opening pattern of the probability variation region 75.

<Modification example 23: V jackpot>
In the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the "probability fluctuation state" depending on whether or not the game ball enters the probability variation region 75 during the big hit game. On the other hand, instead of the probability variation region 75, a V winning opening is provided, and a game value different from the "probability fluctuation state" depending on whether or not a ball enters the V winning opening, for example, a ball to the V winning opening. It may be configured to generate a big hit by winning a prize.

<Modification 24: Opening time / Ending time>
In the above embodiment, the interval time is set as a period during which both the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are not open during the jackpot state. Instead of this, the opening time or the ending time at the time of the big hit may be set as the period during which both the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are not opened during the big hit state.

<Modification 25: One is a dash attacker and the other is a rotary attacker>
In the first embodiment, the variable winning devices 72 and 74 of 2 are both configured as a rotary opening / closing type in which the opening / closing plate rotates. On the other hand, one of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 is configured by a rotary opening and closing type, while the other variable winning device 74 and 72 is composed of a haunting type opening and closing plate in which the opening and closing plate appears and disappears on the board surface of the game board 13. You may.

<Modification 26: Based on having one attacker win a ball, the probabilistic region is physically opened by the ball, and the ball flowing in from the other attacker can flow into the opened probabilistic region>
In the above embodiment, the probability-changing region opening / closing plate 75a can be opened / closed by the probability-changing region solenoid 75b (appearance drive). Instead, the probabilistic region 75 in the attacker unit 71 is covered with an on-off valve that allows the ball to flow into the probabilistic region 75 in the open state without allowing the ball to flow into the probabilistic region 75 in the closed state, and the on-off valve is covered with the on-off valve. It may be configured so that it can be opened and closed by its own weight. Specifically, for example, the on-off valve is determined by the weight of the ball that has flowed into one of the variable winning devices 72, 74 (for example, the first variable winning device 72 on the upstream side or the second variable winning device 74 on the downstream side). A load is applied to the portion to rotate the on-off valve to open the probability variation region 75. Then, while the on-off valve rotates and the probability variation region 75 is opened, the other variable winning devices 74, 72 (for example, the second variable winning device 74 on the downstream side or the first variable winning device on the upstream side). The "probability fluctuation state" is configured to occur by allowing the sphere to flow into the 72) and the sphere into the open probability variation region 75. With this configuration, it is possible to create a game property that can give a game value by flowing balls into the variable winning devices 72 and 74, respectively, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 27: Attacker for small hits>
In the above embodiment, the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are configured to be opened when a big hit is won. Instead of this, in addition to the big hit lottery, a small hit lottery is performed at the same time, and when the big hit is won, one or both of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are configured to be openable, and when the small hit is won. , Either one of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 may be configured to be openable. Further, one of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 may be configured to be opened only when a small hit is won. Then, the probability variation region 75 can be opened when any of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 is opened. With this configuration, even if you win a small hit other than a big hit, you can win a ball in the probability variation area 75 and acquire the game value, so you can enrich the variety of games and enjoy the game. It can be improved.

<Modification 28: The voice lamp control device recognizes the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device only by the jackpot type>
In the above embodiment, from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, not only the jackpot type but also the opening timing and closing timing of the variable winning devices 72 and 74, the opening timing and closing timing of the probability variation region 75, and By outputting a command capable of determining the occurrence timing of the interval time and receiving the command, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the opening / closing timing of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 and the probability variation area 75, and executes various controls. It was configured to do. Instead, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the opening / closing timing of the variable winning devices 72, 74 and / and the probability change area 75 based on the command related to the jackpot type transmitted from the main control device 110, and opens the probability change area. It may be configured to execute various controls such as notification. With this configuration, the number of commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced, so that the control load on the main control device 110 and / or the voice lamp control device 113 is reduced. It becomes possible to do.

<Modification 29: Jackpot type that does not notify the probability change area opening>
In the first embodiment, when the probability variation area 75 is opened in a state where the "character selection" effect is not executed, the probability variation area opening notification is performed regardless of the jackpot type. Instead of this, the probability variation area opening notification is executed only when the probability variation region 75 in the jackpot type "probability variation A" is opened, and the other jackpot types "time reduction A", "time reduction B", "time reduction C", and "latent probability fluctuation" are executed. When the probability variation region 75 is opened in "A", "latent probability variation B", and "latent probability variation C", the probability variation region opening notification may not be executed. In the first embodiment, in the jackpot types "time saving A", "time saving B" and "time saving C" in which the "probability fluctuation state" cannot occur after the jackpot ends, the probability variation region 75 is opened, but at the opening timing. It is configured so that the ball does not flow into the probability variation region 75. Therefore, when the probability variation region opening notification is performed in association with the opening of the probability variation region 75 in the jackpot types "time reduction A", "time reduction B", and "time reduction C", the probability variation region opening notification is performed while the probability variation region opening notification is performed. A player who recognizes that the ball does not flow into the 75 may be awakened to the game. Further, in the first embodiment, the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", "latent probability fluctuation B" and "latent probability fluctuation C" indicates that the gaming state after the jackpot ends is the "probability fluctuation state". It is structured so as not to explicitly suggest it. Therefore, when the probability variation region opening notification is performed with the opening of the probability variation region 75 in the jackpot types “latent probability variation A”, “latent probability variation B”, and “latent probability variation C”, the probability variation region opening notification is being executed. The player who recognizes that the ball has flowed into the probability variation region 75 recognizes that a "probability fluctuation state" will occur after the jackpot ends, and it is unclear whether or not the "probability fluctuation state" is given. By doing so, the playability of estimating the game state is impaired. Therefore, when the probability variation region 75 in the jackpot types "time reduction A", "time reduction B", "time reduction C", "latent probability fluctuation A", "latent probability fluctuation B", and "latent probability fluctuation C" is opened, the probability variation region opening notification is given. By configuring so as not to execute the above, it is possible to suppress the awakening of the game and maintain the set playability to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification example 30: Shift the probability change area opening notification>
In the first embodiment, the probability variation region opening notification is executed so as to be synchronized with the timing at which the probability variation region 75 is opened. Instead of this, the timing may be shifted before or after the timing at which the probability variation region 75 is opened to execute a predetermined effect (probability variation region opening notification). With such a configuration, it is possible to create a game property in which it is estimated whether or not the probability variation region 75 is open at the time (before and after) execution of a predetermined effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification example 31: Variation of variable winning device or opening pattern of probability variation area according to jackpot type>
In the above (sixth) embodiment, one of the variable winning devices 72, 74 in the jackpot type of 5 rounds (that is, "time saving A", "time saving B", "latent probability fluctuation A" or "latent probability fluctuation B"). Although it is configured to open only, both variable winning devices 72 and 74 are configured to be opened (alternately, according to a predetermined rule, or irregularly) in the jackpot type of the 5 rounds. May be good. Also, in the 10 round jackpot type (that is, "probability fluctuation A", "time saving C" or "latent probability fluctuation C"), both variable winning devices 72 and 74 are used together (alternately, according to a predetermined rule, or not. Although it is configured to be open (according to the rules), it may be configured to open only one of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 in the jackpot type of the 10 rounds. With this configuration, even if the number of rounds is the same for the jackpot type, the time required for the jackpot (big hit digestion time) is the same (almost the same) because the variable winning devices 72 and 74 that are released are different. Even if there is, the game value given can be clearly different. As a result, it is possible to make the time efficiency of the game value to be given different, to enrich the variation of the game, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 gives a display instruction to the display control device 114. A command may be transmitted directly from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 may be connected to the display control device 114, and a command for instructing the output of each voice and the lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device 114 to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced and the cost increase of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, the variation effect that becomes a big hit during the variation effect of the third symbol (special symbol) that is suspended and executed when the ball enters the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b (starting prize) is executed. Explained the case where "holding change notice" is given in the execution symbol and the pending symbol. On the other hand, whether or not there is a hit (stop at the symbol "○") in the variable display of the normal symbol that is suspended and executed when the ball passes through the normal symbol gate 67 (starting prize). Whether or not there is a big hit fluctuation effect during the variation effect of the third symbol by using the normal symbol hold lamp 84, the third symbol display device 81, etc., or instead, the player is asked. It may be notified. As a result, the player can grasp whether or not there is a winning variable display in the variable display of the pending normal symbol or in the variable display of the running and pending ordinary symbols. Therefore, it can be inferred whether or not the normal symbol is a hit before the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. Some game machines have improved playability depending on the presence or absence of hits of ordinary symbols, and are particularly effective in such game machines.

In the above embodiment, the case where the demonstration effect is to stop and display the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. , The third symbol consisting of the main symbol with a number or the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variation effect may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, the case where the "hold change notice", which is one form of the continuous notice effect, is executed on the third symbol display device 81 on which the variation effect is performed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the pachinko machine A fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81 is provided in the machine 10, and the fourth symbol is displayed on the fourth symbol display device together with the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81. (Hereinafter, "continuous notice effect" including "hold change notice") is executed, which is different from "hold change notice" or "hold change notice" and is executed over a plurality of variable effects. You may. In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an accessory different from each movable accessory that operates according to various effects, and the accessory is operated in a predetermined mode together with the variable effect to execute a continuous advance notice effect. May be good. Further, the continuous advance notice effect may be executed by outputting the sound for the continuous advance notice effect from the audio output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 under the control of the voice lamp control device 113, or the illumination unit of the pachinko machine 10 may be executed. The continuous advance notice effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

As a result, every time the third symbol display device 81 (and the special symbol display device 37) performs the variation effect (dynamic display), the symbol is continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or the accessory is predetermined. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation of a big hit by operating in this mode, outputting a sound from the sound output device 226, or lighting or blinking the illumination units 29 to 33. Further, the player usually keeps an eye on the third symbol display device 81 on which the variation effect is performed and continues the game, but displays the symbols by the fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81. , The operation of the accessory, the voice output from the voice output device 226, or the lighting / blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 causes the continuous advance notice effect, so that the player is given an unusual effect. It can be easily recognized. In addition, continuous notice production can be easily continuously performed by simple control such as symbol display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of accessories, voice output from the voice output device 226, or lighting / blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33. It is possible to make a notice production.

Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by the voice output from the voice output device 226 or the lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33, the continuous notice effect is controlled by the voice lamp control device 113, so that the start winning prize is obtained. The pachinko machine 10 continuously performs the winning / failing determination and the lottery process at the start of the fluctuation in the main control device 110, causes the voice lamp control device 113 to perform the continuous advance notice effect, and causes the display control device 114 to perform the fluctuation effect. When performing the advance notice effect, each control device can share each process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, so that the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be suppressed to a low level.

It should be noted that the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect on the third symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect on the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the accessory in a predetermined mode, and the sound from the voice output device 226. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by combining at least two or more of the output and the lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 and controlling each of them in conjunction with each other. As a result, a wider variety of continuous notice effects can be executed. Further, a method of executing the continuous advance notice effect (display by the third symbol display device 81, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the accessory, voice output from the voice output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33). Or, by changing the combination of them), the game state ("10R probability variation jackpot", "10R latency probability variation jackpot", "10R time reduction jackpot", "5R latency probability variation jackpot", "5R time reduction" after the end of the continuous advance notice production A plurality of continuous notice effect modes selected according to "big hit" and "missing" may be prepared.

In the above embodiment, when the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b is won (starting prize), the main control device 110 adds "1" to the number of reserved balls to be added to the voice lamp control device 113. The case where each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c in connection with the start winning is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 with respect to the hold ball number command to be notified to is described. The type of the counter included in the hold ball number command may be a part of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include the values of other counters. Further, when the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired in connection with the start winning, the information indicating the value of each of these counters is included in the hold ball number command and notified. Instead, the voice lamp control device 113 may be notified of these values by including information indicating the values of each counter in a command other than the reserved ball count command. As another command, it may be a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, or another information such as a fluctuation pattern command or a stop symbol command may be voiced. The value of each counter acquired in connection with the start winning may be added to the command for notifying the lamp control device 113. As another command, when the value of each counter acquired in connection with the start winning is notified to the voice lamp control device 113, the value of each counter to be notified is changed to the variable effect corresponding to any number of holdings. Information indicating whether this is the case may be included. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 includes the hold information included in the command in any of the hold information first to fourth areas corresponding to the hold count based on the information regarding the hold count included in the command. The value of the counter can be stored.

In the above embodiment, the winning of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b and the passage of the normal symbol gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is The number of times is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls for the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b is set by a number or a region divided into four in a part of the third symbol display device 81. It may be displayed in a mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) different by the number of reserved balls, and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the special symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is provided by the light emitting member. May be configured to notify.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variation effect which is the variation display of the third symbol is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a horizontal direction or an L-shape. Further, the variation display of the symbol is not limited to the variation effect of the symbol, and for example, an effect performed by displaying one or a plurality of characters together with the symbol or by displaying various movements or changes separately from the symbol. Display etc. are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above embodiments, when the variation effect is executed, the case where the high-speed variation in which all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player cannot see is displayed has been described. Instead, all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed as a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed. May be good.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.
<Group A: Double attacker shares 1 probability variation area>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched toward a game area provided on a game board, and a flow direction provided in the game area and capable of changing the flow direction of the game ball. A predetermined game value is given based on the game ball entering one of the plurality of entrances where the changing means are arranged, and a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the winning of a specific entrance. , When a player wins an advantageous state such as winning in a lottery, a game ball can be entered into the ball entry means, and a predetermined game value is given to the player (for example, a patent). Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264).

However, in the above-mentioned game machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of Group A have been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

A launching means for launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
A first ball entry means (for example, a first start port 64a) into which a game ball launched by the launch means can enter.
An information acquisition means (for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d) for acquiring predetermined information due to a game ball entering the first ball entry means, and
A determination means (for example, a jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A second ball entry means (for example, a first variable winning device 72) and a second ball entry means (for example, a first variable winning device 72) in which a flow direction changing means (for example, a first opening / closing plate 72a or a second opening / closing plate 74a) capable of changing the flow direction of a game ball is arranged. 3 ball winning means (for example, 2nd variable winning device 74) and
When a game ball enters the first ball entry means, a first game value giving means for giving a predetermined first game value to the player (for example, a prize ball based on detection of the ball by the first start port switch (for example, a prize ball 3)) and
When a game ball enters the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means, a second game value imparting means (for example, a first prize opening) that imparts a second game value different from the first game value. In a game machine equipped with a prize ball (15 pieces) based on the detection of a ball by the switch 72c or the second large winning opening switch 74c.
A first region (for example, a probability variation region 75) through which a game ball flowing in from the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means can pass, and
It is provided with a game information output means (for example, execution of a V winning notification effect in the third symbol display device 81) capable of outputting information related to the game based on the inflow of the game ball into the first region. The featured game machine A0.

According to the game machine A0, a game ball is launched by the launching means, and the game ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the first ball entry means, and the game ball enters the first entry means. Predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means due to the ball. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. In addition, a second ball entry means and a third ball entry means are provided, respectively, in which the flow direction changing means capable of changing the flow direction of the game ball are arranged. Then, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the player is given a predetermined first game value by the first game value giving means, and the game is given to the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means. When the ball enters, a second game value different from the first game value is given by the second game value giving means. Here, a first region through which a game ball flowing in from the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means can pass is provided. Then, based on the inflow of the game ball into the first region, the game information output means can output information about the game. As a result, the game balls can flow into the first region from at least two entry means, and it is not necessary to provide the first region for each entry means, so that the number of parts related to the game machine can be reduced. , There is an effect that the information about the game can be output based on the output of the game ball in the first area, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine A0
When the game ball passes through the first region, a third game value giving means (for example, a probability variation transition flag 203i) that can give a third game value different from the first game value and the second game value is provided. A game machine A1 characterized by being equipped.

According to the game machine A1, in addition to the effect of the game machine A0, the following effects are played. That is, when the game ball passes through the first area, a third game value different from the first game value and the second game value can be given by the third game value giving means. As a result, the game balls can flow into the first region from at least two entry means, and it is not necessary to provide the first region for each entry means, so that the number of parts related to the game machine can be reduced. , The second game value is given based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means, and when the game ball passes through the first area, the third game value is added to the second game value. Game value can also be added. As a result, there is an effect that the game property of whether or not the game ball that has entered the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means is allowed to flow into the first region can be created, and the interest of the game can be improved. ..

In the game machine A0 or A1
The second ball entry means
As the flow direction changing means, a first variable means (for example, a first opening / closing plate 72a) that can change between a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a state in which the game ball can enter is provided.
The third ball entry means
As the flow direction changing means, a second variable means (for example, a second opening / closing plate 74a) that can change between a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a state in which the game ball can enter is provided.
By using the determination result by the determination means, the first variable means or the second variable means is changed from a state in which the game ball is difficult or impossible to enter to a state in which the game ball can enter. (For example, a jackpot state), an advantageous state means (for example, a jackpot process (S103)),
A first region switching means (for example, a probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a) for switching whether or not to enable the game ball to flow into the first region.
By using the determination result of the determination means, a timing setting means (for example, a probability variation region opening / closing table 202g) for setting the timing at which the first region becomes inflowable by the first region switching means is provided. A game machine A2 characterized by being present.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A0 or A1, the following effects are played. That is, the second ball entry means is provided with a first variable means that can change between a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a state in which the game ball can enter, as a means for changing the flow direction. The entry means is provided with a second variable means that can change between a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a state in which the game ball can enter, as a means for changing the flow direction. By using the determination result by the determination means, the advantageous state means changes the first variable means or the second variable means from a state in which the game ball is difficult or impossible to enter to a state in which the game ball can enter. It is considered to be in an advantageous state. Here, the first region switching means switches whether or not the game ball can flow into the first region. Then, by using the determination result of the determination means by the timing setting means, the timing at which the first region becomes inflowable is set by the first region switching means. As a result, the game balls can flow into the first region from each of the two entry means, and it is not necessary to provide the first region for each entry means. Therefore, while reducing the number of parts related to the game machine, It has the effect of creating a playability of whether or not the game ball flows into the first region during the advantageous state, and improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine A2
The advantageous state means
In the advantageous state of 1, the game ball can enter either the first variable means or the second variable means until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a maximum of 30 seconds or 10 winnings). A plurality of advantageous period execution means (for example, a round counter) that executes the advantageous period (for example, one round) a plurality of times.
By using the determination result of the determination means, the state setting means for setting the first variable means or the second variable means (for example, opening / closing the large winning opening) so that the game ball can enter every advantageous period. A game machine A3 characterized by having a table 202f).

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A2, the following effects are played. That is, the game ball can enter either the first variable means or the second variable means in one advantageous state by the plurality of advantageous period execution means provided in the advantageous state means until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The advantageous period of the state is executed multiple times. Further, the state setting means also provided in the advantageous state means sets the first variable means or the second variable means in which the game ball can enter every advantageous period by using the determination result of the determination means. To. As a result, in one advantageous state, the first variable means or the second variable means in which the game ball can enter can be changed for each advantageous period, and the variation of the game is enriched and the interest of the game is enhanced. It has the effect of being able to improve.

In the game machine A3
The state setting means
It is provided with an alternating state means (for example, winning the jackpot type "probability variation A") that allows the game ball to enter the first variable means and the second variable means alternately for each advantageous period. A game machine A4 characterized by this.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3, the following effects are played. That is, the alternating state means provided in the state setting means allows the game ball to enter alternately between the first variable means and the second variable means for each advantageous period. As a result, in the advantageous state of 1, a case where the game ball enters the second ball entry means by the first variable means and a case where the game ball enters the third ball entry means by the second variable means are provided. By making the approach pattern of the game ball into the ball entry means different, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine A4
The alternating state means
When the first variable means or the second variable means in which the game ball can enter is made difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter, the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter. The second variable means or the first variable means within a predetermined period (for example, no interval time) that allows the game ball to enter within a predetermined period (for example, 0.001 seconds to 1 second). ), A game machine A5 characterized by being provided with.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A4, the following effects are played. That is, when the first variable means or the second variable means in which the game ball can enter becomes difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter, the state means within a predetermined period provided in the alternating state means. As a result, the second variable means or the first variable means, which was difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter, is brought into a state where the game ball can enter within a predetermined period. As a result, both the first variable means and the second variable means are in a state where the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter, that is, the game ball cannot enter either the second entry means or the third entry means. The condition can be reduced. As a result, the number of times that the game ball can enter the first variable means and the second variable means defined in the advantageous state of 1 can be quickly performed, so that the time required for the advantageous state of 1 can be shortened. At the same time, it has the effect of being able to quickly add game value to the player.

In any of the game machines A0 to A5
The second game value adding means is
When a game ball enters the second entry means, a predetermined value giving means (for example, the first large winning opening switch 72c) that gives a predetermined predetermined value (for example, 10 prize balls) to the player is used.
When a game ball enters the third entry means, the specific value giving means (for example, the second large winning opening switch 74c) is given to the player a specific value (for example, 15 prize balls) different from the predetermined value. ), And a game machine A6 characterized by being provided with.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects played by the game machines A0 to A5, the following effects are played. That is, when a game ball enters the second ball entry means, a predetermined value is given to the player by the predetermined value giving means provided in the second game value giving means. Further, when a game ball enters the third ball entry means, a specific value different from a predetermined value is given to the player by the specific value giving means provided in the second game value giving means. As a result, by making the game value given to the player different for each entry means into which the game ball enters, it is possible to create a game property of which entry means the game ball enters, and to create variations in the game. It has the effect of enriching the game and improving the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines A0 to A6
A first guiding means (for example, a passage 72d before detecting the first winning opening and a passage 72e after detecting the first winning opening) for guiding the game ball that has entered the second entering means toward the first region side.
A second guiding means (for example, a passage 74d before detecting the second major winning opening and a passage 74e after detecting the second major winning opening) for guiding the game ball that has entered the third entering means toward the first region side.
A confluence portion (for example, a confluence portion 73) at which the first guide means and the second guide means merge is provided.
The first region is
A game machine A7 characterized in that it is arranged on the downstream side of the confluence portion.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects played by the game machines A0 to A6, the following effects are played. That is, the first guiding means guides the game ball that has entered the second entry means to the first region side, and the second guiding means guides the game ball that has entered the third entry means to the first region side. Will be done. Further, at the merging portion, the first guiding means and the second guiding means are merged. Then, the first region is arranged on the downstream side of the confluence portion. As a result, each game ball that has entered each ball entry means can enter the first region of 1 arranged on the downstream side of the confluence portion of each guide means. As a result, it is not necessary to provide a first area for each ball entry means, so that while reducing the number of parts related to the game machine, it is possible to create a game property of whether or not the game ball flows into the first area. It has the effect of improving the interest.

In any of the game machines A0 to A7
At least, a game board (for example, a game board 13) on which the second ball entry means and the third ball entry means are arranged,
A game ball guide that guides the game ball to a predetermined position where the game ball can enter either the first variable means or the second variable means, which is arranged on the game board and is in a state where the game ball can enter. The gaming machine A8 comprising means (eg, left side nail group 77 and right side nail group 78).

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects played by the game machines A0 to A7, the following effects are played. That is, at least the second ball entry means and the third ball entry means are arranged on the game board. In addition, the game ball guiding means provided on the game board guides the game ball to a position where the game ball can enter either the first variable means or the second variable means in which the game ball can enter. To. As a result, by guiding the game ball to a predetermined position on the game board by the game ball guiding means, the game ball can be made to enter the first variable means or the second variable means in which the game ball can enter. Therefore, since the game ball can be entered into the two entry means by the same method of launching the game ball, the game method in the advantageous state can be simplified even when a plurality of entry means are arranged. This has the effect of providing the player with an easy-to-understand game and improving the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines A3 to A8
The first area switching means
In the advantageous state of 1, a plurality of inflowable state means for making the first region into the inflowable state in two or more advantageous periods (for example, 1 round, 3 rounds and 9 rounds of the jackpot type “probability fluctuation A”). A9, a game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects played by the game machines A3 to A8, the following effects are played. That is, the plurality of inflowable state means provided in the first region switching means brings the first region into the inflowable state in one advantageous state and in two or more advantageous periods. As a result, even if the game ball cannot flow into the first region in any one advantageous period in which the first region is in the inflowable state, the first region is again in the other advantageous period. By making the region inflowable, it is possible to allow the game ball to flow into the first region. Therefore, due to a sudden trouble (for example, a game abnormality such as a launch abnormality, a player's poor physical condition, etc.), the game ball is made to flow into the first region during one advantageous period in which the first region can flow into the first region. Even if a problem occurs, the player will not be able to flow due to an unforeseen situation by making the first region inflowable again in another advantageous period and providing the possibility of inflowing the game ball into the first region. There is an effect that a comfortable game can be realized without suffering a profit and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines A1 to A9
By using the determination result by the determination means, a recognizable mode (for example, "probability fluctuation state") in which the player can recognize that the third game value is imparted by the third game value imparting means can be obtained. A recognizable mode execution means to be executed (for example, a dedicated background of the "probability fluctuation state" in the third symbol display device 81) and
By using the determination result by the determination means, it is difficult or impossible for the player to recognize that the third game value is given by the third game value imparting means (for example, "latent probability variation". A game characterized in that it includes means for executing a difficult-to-recognize mode (for example, a common background between a “latent probability fluctuation state” and a “time reduction state” in the third symbol display device 81) for executing a “state”). Machine A10.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effects played by the game machines A1 to A9, the following effects are played. That is, the recognizable mode executing means executes a recognizable mode that can make the player recognize that the third game value is given by the third game value giving means by using the determination result of the determination means. .. In addition, it is difficult for the player to recognize or cannot recognize that the third game value is given by the third game value giving means by using the determination result of the determination means by the recognition difficulty mode execution means. Will be executed. As a result, the player can recognize that the third game value can be given by the inflow of the game ball into the first region if the recognizable mode is executed, while the player can recognize that the difficult recognition mode is executed. The player becomes difficult or impossible to recognize. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess which game value is given, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Group B: Opening pattern of the probability variation area that wins from each variable winning device>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched toward a game area provided on a game board, and a flow direction provided in the game area and capable of changing the flow direction of the game ball. A predetermined game value is given based on the game ball entering one of the plurality of entrances where the changing means are arranged, and a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the winning of a specific entrance. , When a player wins an advantageous state such as winning in a lottery, a game ball can be entered into the ball entry means, and a predetermined game value is given to the player (for example, a patent). Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264).

However, in the above-mentioned game machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Group B was made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

A launching means for launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
A first ball entry means (for example, a first start port 64a) into which a game ball launched by the launch means can enter.
An information acquisition means (for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d) for acquiring predetermined information due to a game ball entering the first ball entry means, and
A determination means (for example, a jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A second ball entry means (for example, a first variable winning device 72) and a second ball entry means (for example, a first variable winning device 72) in which a flow direction changing means (for example, a first opening / closing plate 72a or a second opening / closing plate 74a) capable of changing the flow direction of a game ball is arranged. 3 ball winning means (for example, 2nd variable winning device 74) and
When a game ball enters the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means, a game value giving means for giving a predetermined game value to the player (for example, the first large winning opening switch 72c or the second large). In a game machine equipped with a winning opening switch 74c)
A first region (for example, a probability variation region 75) through which a game ball flowing in from the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means can pass is provided.
The third ball entry means
It is arranged closer to the first region than the arrangement position of the second ball entry means.
At least the inflowable means (for example, the second and fourth rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", or the jackpot type) that allows the game ball that has entered from the third entry means to flow into the first region. The gaming machine B0, which comprises the first and third rounds of "latent probability fluctuation B").

According to the game machine B0, the game ball is launched by the launching means, the game ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the ball entry means, and the game ball enters the ball entry means. As a result, predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. In addition, a second ball entry means and a third ball entry means are provided, respectively, in which the flow direction changing means capable of changing the flow direction of the game ball are arranged. When a game ball enters the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means, a predetermined game value is given to the player by the game value giving means. Here, a first region through which a game ball flowing in from the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means can pass is provided. Further, the third ball entry means is arranged closer to the first region than the arrangement position of the second ball entry means. Further, the inflowable means is configured so that at least the game balls that have entered from the third entry means can flow into the first region. As a result, the game balls can flow into the first region from each of the two entry means, and it is not necessary to provide the first region for each entry means. Therefore, while reducing the number of parts related to the game machine, The game ball is made to enter the third ball entry means arranged near the first area from the second ball entry means, and the game property of whether or not the game ball is made to enter the first area is created, and the game is played. It has the effect of improving the interest.

In the game machine B0
By using the determination result by the determination means, an advantageous state means (for example, a jackpot process) for making an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot state) in which a game ball can enter the second entry means or the third entry means. (S103)) and
A first region switching means (for example, a probability variable region opening / closing plate 75a) for switching between an inflowable state in which a game ball can flow into the first region and a difficult inflow state in which a game ball cannot flow into the first region. When,
When the game ball flows into the first region made available by the first region switching means, a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state can be generated after the end of the advantageous state. The gaming machine B1 comprising means (for example, a probability variation transition flag 203i).

According to the game machine B1, in addition to the effect of the game machine B0, the following effects are played. That is, by using the determination result by the determination means, the advantageous state means that the game ball can enter the second entry means or the third entry means. Here, the first region switching means switches between an inflowable state in which the game ball can flow into the first region, and a difficult inflow state in which the game ball can flow into the first region. Then, when the game ball flows into the first region made available by the first region switching means, the second advantageous state generating means generates a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state after the end of the advantageous state. Can be done. As a result, the game balls can flow into the special area from each of the two variable ball entry means, and it is not necessary to provide a special area for each variable ball entry means. Therefore, while reducing the number of parts related to the game machine, Whether or not a second advantageous state occurs by allowing a game ball that has entered from the second variable ball entry means arranged closer to the special area than the first variable entry means to enter the special area, that is, the second variable There is an effect that it is possible to create a game property of whether or not a special area can flow in when the ball entry means is in the second state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine B1
The inflowable means
The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that the first region is brought into the inflowable state at the timing when the gaming ball entered from the third entering means reaches the first region.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B1, the following effects are played. That is, the inflowable means sets the first region in the inflowable state at the timing when the game ball entered from the third entry means reaches the first region. As a result, whether or not a game ball that has entered from the third ball-entry means arranged closer to the first region than the second ball-entry means is allowed to enter the first region to generate a second advantageous state, that is, The effect that when the third ball entry means is in a state where the game ball can enter, the game property of whether or not the first area is in the inflow state can be created, and the interest of the game can be improved. There is.

In any of the game machines B0 to B2
A first guiding means (for example, a passage 72d before detecting the first winning opening and a passage 72e after detecting the first winning opening) for guiding the game ball that has entered the second entering means toward the first region side.
A second guiding means (for example, a passage 74d before detecting the second major winning opening and a passage 74e after detecting the second major winning opening) for guiding the game ball that has entered the third entering means toward the first region side.
The first guiding means is
It is configured so that a predetermined first time (for example, 2.5 seconds) is required from the entry of the game ball into the second entry means to the arrival at the first region.
The second guiding means is
It is configured so that it takes a second time (for example, 0.7 seconds) shorter than the first time from the entry of the game ball into the third entry means to the arrival at the first region.
The inflowable means
The first time difficult means for making the first region into the inflow difficult state by the time when the first time elapses from the state in which the game ball can enter the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means. (For example, the opening time of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is within 2.5 seconds).
The second time inflow means (2 time inflow means) that keeps the first region in the inflowable state from the time when the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means becomes a state in which the game ball can enter until the second time elapses. For example, the gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the opening time of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a is 0.7 seconds or more).

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects played by the game machines B0 to B2, the following effects are played. That is, the first guiding means guides the game ball that has entered the second entry means to the first region side, and the second guiding means guides the game ball that has entered the third entry means to the first region side. Will be done. Further, it takes a predetermined first time from the time the game ball enters the second ball entry means to reach the first region by the first guide means, and the second guide means causes the third ball entry means. It takes a second time, which is shorter than the first time, from the entry of the game ball to the arrival at the first area. Here, from the first time difficult means provided in the inflowable means, the first time elapses from the state in which the game ball can enter the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means. The area is in a difficult inflow state. On the other hand, the second time inflow means keeps the first region inflowable until the second time elapses from the state in which the game ball can enter the second or third entry means. As a result, the first region is in a difficult state of inflow during the first time when the game ball entered from the second entry means reaches the first region, while the game ball entered from the third entry means enters the first region. Since the first region is in the inflowable state in the second time of arrival, whether or not the game ball entered from the third entry means enters the first region to generate the second advantageous state, that is, the second 3 The effect is that when the ball entry means is in a state where the game ball can enter, the game property of whether or not the first area is in the inflow state can be created, and the interest of the game can be improved. is there.

In any of the game machines B0 to B3
The inflowable means
The game machine B4 is provided with a second inflowable means (for example, the configuration of the modified example 4) that allows the game ball that has entered from the second ball entry means to flow into the first region.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects played by the game machines B0 to B3, the following effects are played. That is, the second inflowable means provided in the inflowable means allows the game ball that has entered from the second inflow means to flow into the first region. As a result, the game balls can flow into the first region from each of the two entry means, and it is not necessary to provide the first region for each entry means. Therefore, while reducing the number of parts related to the game machine, Since a game ball that has entered from the second ball entry means disposed farther from the third entry means can also enter the first area, when the game ball enters any of the entry means. However, there is an effect that it is possible to create a playability of whether or not a game ball flows into the first area and improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine B4
The second inflowable means is
The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the first region is brought into the inflowable state at the timing when the gaming ball entered from the second entering means reaches the first region.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B4, the following effects are played. That is, the second inflowable means sets the first region into an inflowable state at the timing when the game ball entered from the second entry means reaches the first region. As a result, whether or not to allow the game ball that has entered from the second ball entry means arranged farther from the third entry means to enter the first region, that is, the second entry means is in the gaming state. There is an effect that it is possible to create a playability of whether or not the first region is in an inflowable state even when the player is in an inflowable state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines B1 to B5
The first area switching means
It is difficult for the game ball to enter the first region due to the fact that the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means has changed from a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or inaccessible to a state in which the game ball can enter. The gaming machine B6 characterized by switching from the state to the inflowable state.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects played by the game machines B1 to B5, the following effects are played. That is, due to the fact that the first area switching means makes it possible for the game ball to enter from the state where the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter. One area is switched from the difficult inflow state to the inflowable state. As a result, does the second advantageous state occur by causing the game ball to flow into the first region where the game ball of the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means can flow in due to the state in which the game ball can flow in? It has the effect of creating a playability of whether or not it is possible and improving the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines B1 to B5
The second ball entry means
A first detection means (for example, a first large winning opening switch 72c) capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the second entry means is provided.
The third ball entry means
A second detection means (for example, a second large winning opening switch 74c) capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the third entry means is provided.
The first area switching means
The gaming machine B7 is characterized in that the first region is switched from the difficult inflow state to the inflowable state due to the detection of the game ball by the first detection means or the second detection means.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects played by the game machines B1 to B5, the following effects are played. That is, the game ball that has entered the second ball entry means can be detected by the first detection means provided in the second ball entry means. Further, the game ball that has entered the third ball entry means can be detected by the second detection means provided in the third ball entry means. Then, the first region is switched from the difficult inflow state to the inflowable state due to the detection of the game ball by the first detection means or the second detection means by the first region switching means. As a result, whether or not the second advantageous state is generated by causing the game ball to flow into the first region where the game ball has become available due to the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means. It has the effect of creating the playability and improving the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines B0 to B7
At least, a game board (for example, a game board 13) on which the second ball entry means and the third ball entry means are arranged,
A game in which the game ball is guided to a predetermined position where the game ball can enter any of the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means, which is arranged on the game board and is in a state where the game ball can enter. The gaming machine B8 comprising ball guiding means (for example, left side nail group 77 and right side nail group 78).

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects played by the game machines B0 to B7, the following effects are played. That is, at least the second ball entry means and the third ball entry means are arranged on the game board. In addition, the game ball is placed at a position where the game ball can enter either the second entry means or the third entry means in which the game ball can enter by the game ball guide means arranged on the game board. You will be guided. As a result, by guiding the game ball to a predetermined position on the game board by the game ball guiding means, the game ball can be made to enter the second or third ball entering means in which the game ball can enter. it can. Therefore, since the game ball can be entered into the two entry means by the same method of launching the game ball, the game method in the advantageous state can be simplified even when a plurality of entry means are arranged. This has the effect of providing the player with an easy-to-understand game and improving the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines B1 to B8
The advantageous state means
In the advantageous state of 1, the game ball can enter either the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a maximum of 30 seconds or 10 winnings). A plurality of advantageous period execution means (for example, a round counter), which executes a state advantageous period (for example, one round) a plurality of times, is provided.
The first area switching means
In the advantageous state of 1, a plurality of inflowable state means for making the first region into the inflowable state in two or more advantageous periods (for example, 1 round, 3 rounds and 9 rounds of the jackpot type “probability fluctuation A”). A game machine B9 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effects played by the game machines B1 to B8, the following effects are played. That is, the game ball enters either the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means in one advantageous state by the plurality of advantageous period execution means provided in the advantageous state means until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The advantageous period in which it is possible is executed multiple times. Then, the plurality of inflowable state means provided in the first region switching means makes the first region inflowable state in one advantageous state and in two or more advantageous periods. As a result, even if the game ball cannot flow into the first region in any one advantageous period in which the first region is in the inflowable state, the first region is again in the other advantageous period. By making the region inflowable, it is possible to allow the game ball to flow into the first region. Therefore, due to a sudden trouble (for example, a game abnormality such as a launch abnormality, a player's poor physical condition, etc.), the game ball is made to flow into the first region during one advantageous period in which the first region can flow into the first region. Even if a problem occurs, the player will not be able to flow due to an unforeseen situation by making the first region inflowable again in another advantageous period and providing the possibility of inflowing the game ball into the first region. There is an effect that a comfortable game can be realized without suffering a profit and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines B1 to B9
By using the determination result by the determination means, a recognizable mode (for example, "probability fluctuation state") in which the player can recognize that the second advantageous state is generated by the second advantageous state generating means is executed. Recognizable mode execution means (for example, a dedicated background of the "probability fluctuation state" in the third symbol display device 81) and
By using the determination result by the determination means, it is difficult for the player to recognize or cannot recognize that the second advantageous state is generated by the second advantageous state generating means (for example, "latent probability fluctuation state"). ”) Is a difficult-to-recognize mode executing means (for example, a common background between the“ latent probability fluctuation state ”and the“ time reduction state ”in the third symbol display device 81). B10.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effects played by the game machines B1 to B9, the following effects are played. That is, the recognizable mode executing means executes a recognizable mode that can make the player recognize that the third game value is given by the third game value giving means by using the determination result of the determination means. .. In addition, it is difficult for the player to recognize or cannot recognize that the third game value is given by the third game value giving means by using the determination result of the determination means by the recognition difficulty mode execution means. Will be executed. As a result, the player can recognize that the third game value can be given by the inflow of the game ball into the first region if the recognizable mode is executed, while the player can recognize that the difficult recognition mode is executed. The player becomes difficult or impossible to recognize. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess which game value is given, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Group C: Player operation production during interval time>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched toward a game area provided on a game board, and a flow direction provided in the game area and capable of changing the flow direction of the game ball. A predetermined game value is given based on the game ball entering one of the plurality of entrances where the changing means are arranged, and a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the winning of a specific entrance. , When a player wins an advantageous state such as winning in a lottery, a game ball can be entered into the ball entry means, and a predetermined game value is given to the player (for example, a patent). Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264).

However, in the above-mentioned game machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of Group C have been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

A launching means for launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
A first ball entry means (for example, a first start port 64a) into which a game ball launched by the launch means can enter.
An information acquisition means (for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d) for acquiring predetermined information due to a game ball entering the first ball entry means, and
A determination means (for example, a jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A second ball entry means (for example, a first variable winning device 72) and a second ball entry means (for example, a first variable winning device 72) in which a flow direction changing means (for example, a first opening / closing plate 72a or a second opening / closing plate 74a) capable of changing the flow direction of a game ball is arranged. 3 ball winning means (for example, 2nd variable winning device 74) and
When a game ball enters the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means, the first game value imparting means (for example, the first grand prize opening switch 72c) that imparts a predetermined first game value to the player. Or in a game machine equipped with a second major winning opening switch 74c).
A first region (for example, a probability variation region 75) through which a game ball flowing in from the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means can pass, and
A special period executing means capable of executing a special period (for example, an interval period) in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter both the second entering means and the third entering means
When the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means is in a state where the game ball can enter, the game ball can flow into the first region or the game ball enters the first region. A first region switching means (for example, a probabilistic region switching plate 75a) for switching between a difficult inflow state and a difficult inflow state, and
A second game value-imparting means that imparts a second game value different from the first game value to the player when the game ball flows into the first area that has been made inflowable by the first area switching means. For example, the probability variation transition flag 203i) is provided.
The special period execution means
It is characterized in that the special period can be executed for a period equal to or longer than the flow time required for the game ball entered from the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means to reach the first region. Game machine C0.

According to the game machine C0, a game ball is launched by the launching means, and the game ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the first ball entry means, and the game ball enters the first entry means. Predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means due to the ball. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. In addition, a second ball entry means and a third ball entry means are provided in which flow direction changing means capable of changing the flow direction of the game ball are arranged, respectively, and the game ball is placed in the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means. When entering, the first game value giving means gives the player a predetermined first game value, and the first area through which the game ball flowing in from the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means can pass is Provided. Here, the special period execution means is configured to enable execution of a special period in which both the second ball entry means and the third ball entry means are in a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter. Then, when the second or third entry means is in a state in which the game ball can enter by the first area switching means, the inflow possible state in which the game ball can flow into the first region or the first It is possible to switch between a difficult inflow state where the game ball cannot flow into the area or a difficult inflow state where the game ball cannot flow into the area. Further, when the game ball flows into the first area made available by the first area switching means, the player is given a second game value different from the first game value by the second game value giving means. To. Here, the special period execution means is configured so that the special period can be executed for the flow time required for the game ball entered from the second entry means or the third entry means to reach the first region. As a result, for example, in the case where the second game value cannot be imparted, the game ball entered from the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means enters the first region before the first area becomes inflowable. By providing a special period for the flow time required to reach the ball, the second or third ball entry means can enter the first region when the game ball can enter. , It is possible to prevent the game ball remaining in the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means from flowing into the first region. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the unintended addition of the second game value, give the player the game value as expected in the game specifications, prevent unexpected loss from occurring in the game hall, and improve the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to.

In the game machine C0
By using the determination result by the determination means, it is advantageous to change the second entry means or the third entry means from a state in which the game ball is difficult or impossible to enter to a state in which the game ball can enter. Advantageous state means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) for making a state (for example, a jackpot state),
In the advantageous state of 1, the game ball can enter either the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a maximum of 30 seconds or 10 winnings). A plurality of advantageous period execution means (for example, a round counter) for executing the advantageous period (for example, one round) in a state a plurality of times is provided.
The special period execution means
The gaming machine C1 characterized in that the special period is executed before the start of the advantageous period in which the first area is brought into the inflowable state by the first area switching means.

According to the game machine C1, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C0, the following effects are played. That is, by using the determination result by the determination means, the game ball can enter the second entry means or the third entry means from the state where the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter by the advantageous state means. It is considered to be an advantageous state that changes to. Then, by the plurality of advantageous period execution means provided in the advantageous state means, the game ball enters either the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means in one advantageous state until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The advantageous period in which it is possible is executed multiple times. Then, the special period execution means executes the special period before the start of the advantageous period for making the first region inflowable by the first region switching means. As a result, for example, in the case where the second game value cannot be imparted, the game ball entered from the second entry means or the third entry means before the start of the advantageous period in which the first region becomes inflowable. By executing a special period for more than the flow time required to reach the first region, the second or third entry means becomes inflowable when the game ball becomes accessible. It is possible to prevent the game balls remaining in the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means from flowing into the first region with respect to one region. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the unintended addition of the second game value, give the player the game value as expected in the game specifications, prevent unexpected loss from occurring in the game hall, and improve the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to.

In the game machine C1
A display means (for example, a third symbol display device 81) capable of executing an advantageous state effect suggesting to the player that the advantageous state is present, and
A special effect executing means (for example, a voice lamp control device 113) capable of executing a special effect (for example, a “character selection” effect) different from the advantageous state effect by the display means during at least the execution of the special period. A game machine C2 characterized by being equipped.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C1, the following effects are played. That is, the display means is configured to be able to execute an advantageous state effect that suggests to the player that the player is in an advantageous state. Then, at least during the execution of the special period, the special effect executing means enables the display means to execute a special effect different from the advantageous state effect. As a result, a special effect different from the advantageous state effect is executed by the display means, so that the player can pay attention to the special effect, and the game ball enters both the second and third ball entry means. Attention to the fact that a special period, which is difficult or inaccessible, is being carried out can be relatively diminished. Therefore, even when a special period in which the game value is not given to the player is executed, there is an effect that the player can be provided with a comfortable game and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine C2
An operating means (for example, a frame button 22) that can be operated by the player is provided.
The special effect execution means is
As the special effect, the game machine C3 is characterized in that an operation reminder effect (for example, a "character selection" effect) for urging the player to operate the operation means is executed.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C2, the following effects are played. That is, the operation means is configured to be operable by the player, and the special effect execution means executes an operation reminder effect as a special effect to encourage the player to operate the operation means. That is, in the special period executed before the start of the advantageous period in which the special area is in the inflowable state, the operation reminder effect for which the player is prompted to operate the operating means is executed at least while the special period is being executed. It is configured to be. As a result, by executing the operation reminder effect during the special period in which the player is not given the game value, the player is made to pay more attention to the operation reminder effect than when the advantageous state effect is simply executed. 2 The ball entry means and the third ball entry means reduce the degree of attention to the special period in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter, and also the degree of attention to the inflow mode of the game ball into the first region. Can be lowered. That is, by executing the operation reminder effect that the player can easily pay attention to during the special period, it is difficult for the player to recognize the result of the inflow of the game ball into the first region. With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the game ball has flowed into the first region, and the player is informed whether or not the game ball has flowed into the first area during the advantageous state. It has the effect of creating a playability that makes people guess and improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine C3
The operation reminder effect is
The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the content of the effect in the game after the end of the advantageous state can be determined.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine C3, the following effects are played. That is, the operation reminder effect makes it possible to determine the content of the effect after the end of the advantageous state. As a result, the player can determine the content of the game related to the game after the end of the advantageous state by the player's own will, and by performing the effect during the execution of the special period, the player is made to pay more attention to the operation reminder effect, and relatively. The second and third means of entering the ball reduce the degree of attention to the special period in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter, and the degree of attention to the mode of inflow of the game ball into the first region. Can also be reduced. That is, by executing the operation reminder effect that the player can easily pay attention to during the special period, it is difficult for the player to recognize the result of the inflow of the game ball into the first region. With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the game ball has flowed into the first region, and the player is informed whether or not the game ball has flowed into the first area during the advantageous state. It has the effect of creating a playability that makes people guess and improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine C4
The display means
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect that can suggest the content of the game to the player (for example, suggestion of whether or not the player is in a “latent probability fluctuation state”).
The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that the execution mode of the suggestion effect is different based on the effect content determined by the operation reminder effect.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C4, the following effects are played. That is, the suggestion effect execution means provided in the display means enables the suggestion effect that can suggest the content of the game to the player. Then, the execution mode of the suggestion effect is configured to be different based on the effect content determined by the operation reminder effect. As a result, the player can decide the production content that affects the suggestion of the content of the game by the player's own will, and by performing the production during the execution of the special period, the player is made to pay more attention to the operation reminder effect, and the relative In addition, the second and third means of entering the ball reduce the degree of attention to the special period in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter, and pay attention to the mode of inflow of the game ball into the first region. The degree can also be reduced. That is, by executing the operation reminder effect that the player can easily pay attention to during the special period, it is difficult for the player to recognize the result of the inflow of the game ball into the first region. With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the game ball has flowed into the first region, and the player is informed whether or not the game ball has flowed into the first area during the advantageous state. It has the effect of creating a playability that makes people guess and improving the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines C0 to C5
A first guiding means (for example, a passage 72d before detecting the first winning opening and a passage 72e after detecting the first winning opening) for guiding the game ball that has entered the second entering means toward the first region side.
A second guiding means (for example, a passage 74d before detecting the second major winning opening and a passage 74e after detecting the second major winning opening) for guiding the game ball that has entered the third entering means toward the first region side.
The first guiding means is
It is configured so that a predetermined first time (for example, 2.5 seconds) is required from the entry of the game ball into the second entry means to the arrival at the first region.
The second guiding means is
It is configured so that it takes a second time (for example, 0.7 seconds) shorter than the first time from the entry of the game ball into the third entry means to the arrival at the first region.
The special period
The gaming machine C6, characterized in that it is performed for at least the second hour or more.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effects played by the game machines C0 to C5, the following effects are played. That is, the first guiding means guides the game ball that has entered the second entry means to the first region side, and the second guiding means guides the game ball that has entered the third entry means to the first region side. Will be done. Further, it takes a predetermined first time from the time the game ball enters the second ball entry means to reach the first region by the first guide means, and the second guide means causes the third ball entry means. It takes a second time, which is shorter than the first time, from the entry of the game ball to the arrival at the first area. Here, a special period is held for at least a second hour or more. As a result, for example, in the case where the second game value cannot be imparted, the game ball entered from the third entry means, which takes a short time to reach the first region before the first region becomes inflowable. By executing a special period in which the player reaches the first area, the second ball entering means can enter the first area when the game ball can enter the first area from the third ball entering means. It is possible to prevent the game balls that have flowed in and remain from flowing into the first region. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the unintended addition of the second game value, give the player the game value as expected in the game specifications, prevent unexpected loss from occurring in the game hall, and improve the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the game machines C0 to C6
A game board (for example, a game board 13) on which the second ball entry means and the third ball entry means are arranged, and
A game in which the game ball is guided to a predetermined position where the game ball can enter any of the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means, which is arranged on the game board and is in a state where the game ball can enter. The gaming machine C7 comprising ball guiding means (for example, left side nail group 77 and right side nail group 78).

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effects played by the game machines C0 to C6, the following effects are played. That is, the second ball entry means and the third ball entry means are arranged on the game board. In addition, the game ball is placed at a position where the game ball can enter either the second entry means or the third entry means in which the game ball can enter by the game ball guide means arranged on the game board. You will be guided. As a result, by guiding the game ball to a predetermined position on the game board by the game ball guiding means, the game ball can be made to enter the second or third ball entering means in which the game ball can enter. it can. Therefore, since the game ball can be entered into the two entry means by the same method of launching the game ball, the game method in the advantageous state can be simplified even when a plurality of entry means are arranged. This has the effect of providing the player with an easy-to-understand game and improving the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines C1 to C7
The first area switching means
In the advantageous state of 1, a plurality of inflowable state means for making the first region into the inflowable state in two or more advantageous periods (for example, 1 round, 3 rounds and 9 rounds of the jackpot type “probability fluctuation A”). A game machine C8 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects played by the game machines C1 to C7, the following effects are played. That is, the plurality of inflowable state means provided in the first region switching means brings the first region into the inflowable state in one advantageous state and in two or more advantageous periods. As a result, even if the game ball cannot flow into the first region in any one advantageous period in which the first region is in the inflowable state, the first region is again in the other advantageous period. By making the region inflowable, it is possible to allow the game ball to flow into the first region. Therefore, due to a sudden trouble (for example, a game abnormality such as a launch abnormality, a player's poor physical condition, etc.), the game ball is made to flow into the first region during one advantageous period in which the first region can flow into the first region. Even if a problem occurs, the player will not be able to flow due to an unforeseen situation by making the first region inflowable again in another advantageous period and providing the possibility of inflowing the game ball into the first region. There is an effect that a comfortable game can be realized without suffering a profit and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines C0 to C8
By using the determination result by the determination means, a recognizable mode (for example, "probability fluctuation state") in which the player can recognize that the second game value is imparted by the second game value imparting means can be determined. A recognizable mode execution means to be executed (for example, a dedicated background of the "probability fluctuation state" in the third symbol display device 81) and
By using the determination result by the determination means, it is difficult or impossible for the player to recognize that the second game value is given by the second game value imparting means (for example, "latent probability variation". A game characterized in that it includes means for executing a difficult-to-recognize mode (for example, a common background between a “latent probability fluctuation state” and a “time reduction state” in the third symbol display device 81) for executing a “state”). Machine C9.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effects played by the game machines C0 to C8, the following effects are played. That is, the recognizable mode executing means executes a recognizable mode that can make the player recognize that the second game value is given by the second game value giving means by using the determination result of the determination means. .. In addition, it is difficult for the player to recognize or cannot recognize that the second game value is given by the second game value giving means by using the determination result of the determination means by the recognition difficulty mode execution means. Will be executed. As a result, the second game value that can be given by the inflow of the game ball into the first region can be recognized by the player if the recognizable mode is executed, while the player can recognize the second game value that can be given by the game ball flowing into the first region. Is difficult or impossible to recognize. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess which game value is given, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Include other variable winning devices and probability variation area within the width of the variable winning device of Group D: 1>

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched toward a game area provided on a game board, and a flow direction provided in the game area and capable of changing the flow direction of the game ball. A predetermined game value is given based on the game ball entering one of the plurality of entrances where the changing means are arranged, and a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the winning of a specific entrance. , When a player wins an advantageous state such as winning in a lottery, a game ball can be entered into the ball entry means, and a predetermined game value is given to the player (for example, a patent). Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264).

However, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a configuration in which the vertical width is larger than the horizontal width of the entire gaming machine, and the design constraint on the left and right width is larger than the design constraint on the vertical width. Therefore, when the parts extending in the lateral direction are arranged, the predetermined area in the game area of the game board is occupied by the above parts, and the degree of freedom in designing other game parts may be lowered.

The invention of Group D has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine that can contribute to an improvement in the degree of freedom in designing game parts.

A launching means for launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
A first ball entry means (for example, a first start port 64a) into which a game ball launched by the launch means can enter.
An information acquisition means (for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d) for acquiring predetermined information due to a game ball entering the first ball entry means, and
A determination means (for example, a jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A second ball entry means (for example, a first variable winning device 72) and a second ball entry means (for example, a first variable winning device 72) in which a flow direction changing means (for example, a first opening / closing plate 72a or a second opening / closing plate 74a) capable of changing the flow direction of a game ball is arranged. 3 ball winning means (for example, 2nd variable winning device 74) and
When a game ball enters the first ball entry means, a first game value giving means for giving a predetermined first game value to the player (for example, a prize ball based on detection of the ball by the first start port switch (for example, a prize ball 3)) and
When a game ball enters the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means, a second game value imparting means (for example, a first prize opening) that imparts a second game value different from the first game value. In a game machine equipped with a prize ball (15 pieces) based on the detection of a ball by the switch 72c or the second large winning opening switch 74c.
A first region (for example, a probability variation region 75) through which a game ball flowing in from the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means can pass, and
When the game ball passes through the first region, a third game value giving means (for example, a probability variation transition flag 203i) that can give a third game value different from the first game value and the second game value, and With
The gaming machine D0 is characterized in that the third ball entry means and the front view lateral dimension of the first region are each formed within the range of the front view lateral dimension of the second ball entry means.

According to the game machine D0, a game ball is launched by the launching means, the game ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the first ball entry means, and the game ball enters the first entry means. Predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means due to the ball. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. In addition, a second ball entry means and a third ball entry means are provided, respectively, in which the flow direction changing means capable of changing the flow direction of the game ball are arranged. Then, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the player is given a predetermined first game value by the first game value giving means, and the game is given to the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means. When the ball enters, a second game value different from the first game value is given by the second game value giving means. Here, a first region through which a game ball flowing in from the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means can pass is provided. Further, when the game ball passes through the first area, a third game value different from the first game value and the second game value can be given by the third game value giving means. Then, the third ball entry means and the front view lateral dimension of the first region are formed in a size within the range of the front view lateral dimension of the second ball entry means. That is, a front view of the second ball entry means and the third ball entry means that give the second game value, and the first area that can give the third game value different from the second game value (first game value). The lateral dimension is configured to be within the range of the front view lateral dimension of the second ball entry means. As a result, the dimensions of the second ball-entry means, the third ball-entry means, and the first area in the front-view lateral direction, which can give the player a predetermined game value, can be measured laterally to the front of the second ball-entry means at the maximum. By keeping it within the range of the dimensions, it is possible to reduce the occupied area of the front view lateral dimension of each of the second ball entering means, the third ball entering means and the first area, and contribute to the improvement of the degree of freedom in designing the game machine. There is an effect.

In the game machine D0
A first guiding means (for example, a passage 72d before detecting the first winning opening and a passage 72e after detecting the first winning opening) for guiding the game ball that has entered the second entering means toward the first region side.
A second guiding means (for example, a passage 74d before detecting the second major winning opening and a passage 74e after detecting the second major winning opening) for guiding the game ball that has entered the third entering means toward the first region side.
A confluence portion (for example, a confluence portion 73) where the first guide means and the second guide means merge,
A discharge means (for example, a discharge passage 76) for discharging a game ball that has entered the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means to the outside of the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means is provided. ,
It is characterized in that the third ball entry means, the first region, and the front view lateral dimension of the discharge means are formed within the range of the front view horizontal dimension of the second ball entry means. Game machine D1.

According to the game machine D1, in addition to the effect of the game machine D0, the following effects are played. That is, the first guiding means guides the game ball that has entered the second entry means to the first region side, and the second guiding means guides the game ball that has entered the third entry means to the first region side. Will be done. Further, at the merging portion, the first guide means and the second guide means are merged, and the game ball that has entered the second entry means or the third entry means by the discharge means is the second entry means or the second entry means. 3 It is discharged to the outside of the ball entry means. Here, the third ball entry means, the first region, and the discharge means are formed to have a size within the range of the front view lateral dimension of the second ball entry means. That is, the second ball entry means and the third ball entry means that give the second game value, the first area that can give the third game value different from the second game value, and the second ball entry means or the second ball entry means or the first. (3) The front view lateral dimension with the discharging means for discharging the game ball that has entered the ball entering means is configured to be within the range of the front view lateral dimension of the second ball entering means. As a result, the second ball entry means, the third ball entry means and the first area that can give the player a predetermined game value, and the game ball that has entered the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means are discharged. By keeping the front view lateral dimension of the series of mechanisms up to this point within the range of the front view lateral dimension of the second ball entry means at the maximum, the second ball entry means, the third ball entry means, and the first region In addition, there is an effect that the occupied area of each front view lateral dimension of the discharging means can be reduced, which can contribute to the improvement of the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine.

In the game machine D1
The front view depth dimension of the first guide means, the second guide means, the first region, and the discharge means shall be within the range of one or more diameters of the game ball and less than two diameters. A game machine D2 characterized in that it is formed.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D0 or D1, the following effects are played. That is, the front view depth dimension of the first guide means, the second guide means, the first region, and the discharge means is formed to a size within a range of one or more diameters and less than two diameters of the game ball. To. As a result, the front view lateral dimensions of the first guide means, the second guide means, the first region, and the discharge means are kept within the range of the front view lateral dimensions of the second ball entry means, and the ball enters the second ball entry means. The front view depth dimension of the first guide means for guiding the game ball to the first area, the second guide means for guiding the game ball entering the third ball entry means to the first area, the first area, and the discharge means for the game. Formed to a size of one or more spheres and less than two in diameter, front view of each of the second entry means, the third entry means, the first region, and the discharge means. It has the effect of reducing (minimizing) the occupied area of the horizontal dimension and the front view depth dimension, and contributing to the improvement of the degree of freedom in designing the game machine.

In any of the game machines D0 to D2
A game board (for example, a game board 13) on which the second ball entry means and the third ball entry means are arranged is provided.
The second ball entry means
In the game board, the game machine D3 is arranged on the upstream side of the third ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines D0 to D2, the following effects are played. That is, the second ball entry means and the third ball entry means are arranged on the game board, and the second ball entry means is arranged on the game board on the upstream side of the third ball entry means. As a result, the second ball-entry means located on the most upstream side in the lateral direction of the front view with respect to the second ball-entry means, the third ball-entry means, and the first region, which can give the player a predetermined game value. In an arrangement in which a game ball can enter any of the second entry means, the third entry means, and the first area by keeping within the range of the lateral dimension of the front view, the second entry means, the third. There is an effect that the occupied area of the front view lateral dimension of each of the ball entry means and the first area can be reduced, which can contribute to the improvement of the degree of freedom in designing the game machine.

In any of the game machines D1 to D3
The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that the first region and the discharging means are arranged so as to overlap each other in the front view depth direction.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects played by the game machines D1 to D3, the following effects are played. That is, the first region and the discharging means are arranged so as to overlap each other in the front view depth direction. As a result, the front view lateral dimension of either the first region or the discharge means is reduced, so that the front view lateral dimensions of the second ball entry means, the third ball entry means, the first region, and the discharge means are reduced. The dimensions can be further reduced. Therefore, it is possible to make the occupied area of the second ball entry means, the third ball entry means and the first area, and the discharge means each the front view lateral dimension smaller, and contribute to the improvement of the design freedom of the game machine. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the game machine D4
The gaming machine D5, characterized in that the first region and the discharging means are formed of a light-transmitting material (for example, polycarbonate).

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D4, the following effects are played. That is, the first region and the discharging means are regulated by a light transmitting material. As a result, when the first region and the discharging means are overlapped in the front view depth direction, the player visually recognizes whether the game ball has flowed into the first region or the discharging means from the front side of the game machine. Can be difficult to recognize. As a result, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the third game value given based on the passage of the game ball through the first area is generated after the end of the advantageous state, and the third game value is given. It has the effect of creating playability that allows the player to guess whether or not it will be played, and improving the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines D0 to D5
A first region switching means (for example, a probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a) for switching whether or not to enable the game ball to flow into the first region is provided.
The gaming machine D6, wherein the first region switching means is formed of a light-transmitting material (for example, polycarbonate).

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects played by the game machines D0 to D5, the following effects are played. That is, the first region switching means switches whether or not the game ball can flow into the first region in an inflowable state, and the first region switching means is formed of a light-transmitting material. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether the first region switching means is in the inflow enable state or the inflow difficult state. As a result, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the third game value given based on the passage of the game ball through the first area is generated after the end of the advantageous state, and the third game value is given. It has the effect of creating playability that allows the player to guess whether or not it will be played, and improving the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines D1 to D6
The first region is
The gaming machine D7, which is arranged on the downstream side of the confluence portion.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effects played by the game machines D1 to D6, the following effects are played. That is, the first region is arranged on the downstream side of the confluence. As a result, each game ball that has entered each ball entry means can enter the first region of 1 arranged on the downstream side of the confluence portion of each guide means. As a result, it is not necessary to provide a first area for each ball entry means, so that the third game value is given by the game ball flowing into the first area during the advantageous state while reducing the number of parts related to the game machine. It has the effect of creating a playability of whether or not it is played, and improving the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines D3 to D7
A game in which the game ball is guided to a predetermined position where the game ball can enter any of the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means, which is arranged on the game board and is in a state where the game ball can enter. The gaming machine D8 comprising ball guiding means (for example, left side nail group 77 and right side nail group 78).

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effects played by the game machines D3 to D7, the following effects are played. That is, the game ball is placed at a position where the game ball can enter either the second entry means or the third entry means in which the game ball can enter by the game ball guide means arranged on the game board. You will be guided. As a result, by guiding the game ball to a predetermined position on the game board by the game ball guiding means, the game ball can be made to enter the second or third ball entering means in which the game ball can enter. it can. Therefore, since the game ball can be entered into the two entry means by the same method of launching the game ball, the game method in the advantageous state can be simplified even when a plurality of entry means are arranged. This has the effect of providing the player with an easy-to-understand game and improving the interest of the game.

<Group E: Switch the probability variation area of the double attacker between valid and invalid>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched toward a game area provided on a game board, and a flow direction provided in the game area and capable of changing the flow direction of the game ball. A predetermined game value is given based on the game ball entering one of the plurality of entrances where the changing means are arranged, and a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the winning of a specific entrance. , When a player wins an advantageous state such as winning in a lottery, a game ball can be entered into the ball entry means, and a predetermined game value is given to the player (for example, a patent). Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264).

However, in the above-mentioned game machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of group E has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

A launching means for launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
A first ball entry means (for example, a first start port 64a) into which a game ball launched by the launch means can enter.
An information acquisition means (for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d) for acquiring predetermined information due to a game ball entering the first ball entry means, and
A determination means (for example, a jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A second ball entry means (for example, a first variable winning device 72) and a second ball entry means (for example, a first variable winning device 72) in which a flow direction changing means (for example, a first opening / closing plate 72a or a second opening / closing plate 74a) capable of changing the flow direction of a game ball is arranged. 3 ball winning means (for example, 2nd variable winning device 74) and
When a game ball enters the first ball entry means, a first game value giving means for giving a predetermined first game value to the player (for example, a prize ball based on detection of the ball by the first start port switch (for example, a prize ball 3)) and
When a game ball enters the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means, a second game value imparting means (for example, a first prize opening) that imparts a second game value different from the first game value. In a game machine equipped with a prize ball (15 pieces) based on the detection of a ball by the switch 72c or the second large winning opening switch 74c.
A first region (for example, a probability variation region 75) through which a game ball flowing in from the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means can pass, and
An effective switching means for switching whether or not to enable the first region (for example, the probability variation region effective flag 203h) and
A third game value imparting means that imparts a third game value different from the first game value and the second game value when the game ball flows into the first region that is effectively set by the effective switching means. (For example, the probabilistic transition flag 203i), and the gaming machine E0.

According to the game machine E0, a game ball is launched by the launching means, and the game ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the first ball entry means, and the game ball enters the first entry means. Predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means due to the ball. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. In addition, a second ball entry means and a third ball entry means are provided, respectively, in which the flow direction changing means capable of changing the flow direction of the game ball are arranged. Then, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the player is given a predetermined first game value by the first game value giving means, and the game is given to the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means. When the ball enters, a second game value different from the first game value is given by the second game value giving means. Here, a first region through which a game ball flowing in from the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means can pass is provided. Then, when the effective switching means switches whether or not the first area is effectively set, and the game ball flows into the first area effectively set by the effective switching means by the third game value giving means. Is given a third game value different from the first game value and the second game value. As a result, the third game value can be given only when the first area is effectively set, so that the third game value can be accurately given and the interest of the game can be improved. is there.

In the game machine E0
The game machine E1 is characterized in that when a game ball flows into the first region which is not effectively set (disabled) by the valid switching means, the third game value is not given.

According to the game machine E1, in addition to the effect of the game machine E0, the following effects are played. That is, when the game ball flows into the first region that is not effectively set by the effective switching means, the third game value is not given. As a result, even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the first area, it is possible to create a situation in which the third game value cannot be given. That is, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the third game value is given only by passing the game ball in the first area. As a result, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the third game value is given, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine E0 or E1
The effective switching means is
The gaming machine E2 is provided with an effective timing determining means (for example, a jackpot type counter C2) for determining a timing for effectively setting the first region by using the determination result of the determining means. ..

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine E0 or E1, the following effects are played. That is, the effective timing determining means determines the timing at which the first region is effectively set by using the determination result of the determining means. As a result, it is possible to change the timing at which the first region is enabled according to the determination result of the determination means, and it is possible to increase the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

In the game machines E0 to E2
By using the determination result by the determination means, the second entry means or the third entry means is changed from a state in which the game ball is difficult or impossible to enter to a state in which the game ball can enter. Advantageous state means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) for making an advantageous state (for example, jackpot state),
In the advantageous state of 1, the game ball can enter either the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a maximum of 30 seconds or 10 winnings). A plurality of advantageous period execution means (for example, a round counter) that executes a state advantageous period (for example, one round) a plurality of times, and
By using the determination result of the determination means, a state setting means (for example, a big prize) for setting the second entry means or the third entry means in which the game ball can enter every advantageous period. A game machine E3 characterized by having a mouth opening / closing table 202f).

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects played by the game machines E0 to E2, the following effects are played. That is, by using the determination result by the determination means, the game ball can enter from the state where the second entry means or the third entry means is difficult or impossible to enter by the advantageous state means. It is considered to be an advantageous state that changes to a state. Further, in the advantageous state of 1, the advantageous period during which the game ball can enter either the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means until a predetermined condition is satisfied by the plurality of advantageous period execution means. Is executed multiple times. Further, by using the determination result of the determination means, the state setting means sets the second entry means or the third entry means in which the game ball can enter every advantageous period. As a result, in one advantageous state, it is possible to change the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means in which the game ball can enter for each advantageous period, and the variation of the game is enriched. It has the effect of improving the interest.

In the game machine E3
The state setting means
The second ball entry means and the third ball entry means are provided with alternating state means (for example, winning the jackpot type "probability variation A") that allows the game ball to enter alternately every advantageous period. A game machine E4 characterized by being

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine E3, the following effects are played. That is, the alternating state means provided in the state setting means makes it possible for the game ball to enter alternately between the second ball entering means and the third ball entering means at each advantageous period. As a result, in the advantageous state of 1, a case where the game ball enters the second entry means and a case where the game ball enters the third entry means are provided, and the entry pattern of the game ball into each entry means is provided. By making them different, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine E4
The alternating state means
When the second entry means or the third entry means in which the game ball can enter is made difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter, the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter. The third ball entry means or the second ball entry means within a predetermined period (for example, a state means within a predetermined period (for example, 0.001 second to 1 second) in which a game ball can enter within a predetermined period (for example, 0.001 second to 1 second)). The gaming machine E5, which is characterized by having (no interval time).

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of the game machine E4, the following effects are played. That is, when the second entry means or the third entry means in which the game ball can enter becomes difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter, within a predetermined period provided in the alternating state means. Depending on the state means, the third ball entry means or the second ball entry means, which was difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter, is brought into a state in which the game ball can enter within a predetermined period. As a result, there are few states in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter in both the second ball entry means and the third ball entry means, that is, the game ball cannot enter any of the ball entry means. can do. As a result, the number of times that the game ball can enter the second ball entry means and the third ball entry means defined in the advantageous state of 1 can be quickly performed, so that the time required for the advantageous state of 1. This has the effect of being able to quickly add game value to the player.

In any of the game machines E3 to E5
The effective switching means is
In the advantageous state of 1, a plurality of effective means (for example, 1 round, 3 rounds, and 9 rounds of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A") capable of effectively setting the first region in two or more advantageous periods. A game machine E6 characterized by being equipped.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effects played by the game machines E3 to E5, the following effects are played. That is, the plurality of effective means provided in the effective switching means make it possible to effectively set the first region in one advantageous state in two or more advantageous periods. As a result, even if the game ball cannot flow into the first region in any one advantageous period in which the game ball can flow into the first region, the first region is again in the other advantageous period. By enabling the game ball to flow in, it is possible to flow the game ball into the first region which is effective multiple times in the advantageous state of 1. Therefore, due to a sudden trouble (for example, a game abnormality such as a launch abnormality, a player's poor physical condition, etc.), the game ball is allowed to flow into the first area during one advantageous period in which the first area is effectively set. Even if there is a problem, the first area is set to be valid again in another advantageous period, and the possibility of flowing the game ball into the validly set first area is provided, so that it is unexpected. There is an effect that the player can realize a comfortable game without suffering a disadvantage due to the situation and can improve the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines E0 to E6
A first guiding means (for example, a passage 72d before detecting the first winning opening and a passage 72e after detecting the first winning opening) for guiding the game ball that has entered the second entering means toward the first region side.
A second guiding means (for example, a passage 74d before detecting the second major winning opening and a passage 74e after detecting the second major winning opening) for guiding the game ball that has entered the third entering means toward the first region side.
A confluence portion (for example, a confluence portion 73) at which the first guide means and the second guide means merge is provided.
The first region is
The gaming machine E7, which is arranged on the downstream side of the confluence portion.

According to the game machine E7, in addition to the effects of the game machines E0 to E6, the following effects are played. That is, the first guiding means guides the game ball that has entered the second entry means to the first region side, and the second guiding means guides the game ball that has entered the third entry means to the first region side. Will be done. Further, at the merging portion, the first guiding means and the second guiding means are merged. Then, the first region is arranged on the downstream side of the confluence portion. As a result, each game ball that has entered each ball entry means can enter the first region of 1 arranged on the downstream side of the confluence portion of each guide means. As a result, it is not necessary to provide a first area for each ball entry means, so that the third game value is given by the game ball flowing into the first area during the advantageous state while reducing the number of parts related to the game machine. It has the effect of creating a playability of whether or not it is played, and improving the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines E0 to E7
A game board (for example, a game board 13) on which the second ball entry means and the third ball entry means are arranged, and
A game in which the game ball is guided to a predetermined position where the game ball can enter any of the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means, which is arranged on the game board and is in a state where the game ball can enter. The gaming machine E8 comprising ball guiding means (for example, left side nail group 77 and right side nail group 78).

According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effects of the game machines E0 to E7, the following effects are played. That is, the second ball entry means and the third ball entry means are arranged on the game board. In addition, the game ball is placed at a position where the game ball can enter either the second entry means or the third entry means in which the game ball can enter by the game ball guide means arranged on the game board. You will be guided. As a result, by guiding the game ball to a predetermined position on the game board by the game ball guiding means, the game ball can be made to enter the second or third ball entering means in which the game ball can enter. it can. Therefore, since the game ball can be entered into the two entry means by the same method of launching the game ball, the game method in the advantageous state can be simplified even when a plurality of entry means are arranged. This has the effect of providing the player with an easy-to-understand game and improving the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines E0 to E8
The advantageous state means
A first region switching means (for example, a probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a) for switching whether or not to enable the game ball to flow into the first region is provided.
The first area switching means
In the advantageous state of 1, a plurality of inflowable state means for making the first region into the inflowable state in two or more advantageous periods (for example, 1 round, 3 rounds, and 9 rounds of the jackpot type “probability fluctuation A”). A game machine E9 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the game machine E9, in addition to the effects played by the game machines E0 to E8, the following effects are played. That is, the first region switching means provided in the advantageous state means switches whether or not the game ball can flow into the first region. Then, the plurality of inflowable state means provided in the first region switching means makes the first region inflowable state in one advantageous state and in two or more advantageous periods. As a result, even if the game ball cannot flow into the first region in any one advantageous period in which the first region is in the inflowable state, the first region is again in the other advantageous period. By making the region inflowable, it is possible to allow the game ball to flow into the first region. Therefore, due to a sudden trouble (for example, a game abnormality such as a launch abnormality, a player's poor physical condition, etc.), the game ball is made to flow into the first region during one advantageous period in which the first region can flow into the first region. Even if a problem occurs, the player will not be able to flow due to an unforeseen situation by making the first region inflowable again in another advantageous period and providing the possibility of inflowing the game ball into the first region. There is an effect that a comfortable game can be realized without suffering a profit and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines E0 to E9
By using the determination result by the determination means, a recognizable mode (for example, "probability fluctuation state") in which the player can recognize that the third game value is imparted by the third game value imparting means is executed. Recognizable mode execution means (for example, a dedicated background of the "probability fluctuation state" in the third symbol display device 81) and
By using the determination result by the determination means, it is difficult or unrecognizable to the player to assign the third game value by the third game value imparting means (for example, "latent probability fluctuation state"). ”) Is a difficult-to-recognize mode executing means (for example, a common background between the“ latent probability fluctuation state ”and the“ time reduction state ”in the third symbol display device 81). E10.

According to the game machine E10, in addition to the effects of the game machines E0 to E9, the following effects are played. That is, the recognizable mode execution means executes a recognizable mode that can make the player recognize that the third game value is to be given by the third game value giving means by using the determination result of the determination means. To. Further, by using the determination result of the determination means by the recognition difficulty mode execution means, the player is executed the recognition difficulty or unrecognizable recognition difficulty mode that the third game value is given by the third game value giving means. Will be done. As a result, the third game value that can be given by the inflow of the game ball into the first region can be recognized by the player if the recognizable mode is executed, while the player can recognize the third game value if the difficult-to-recognize mode is executed. Is difficult or impossible to recognize. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess which game value is given, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Group F: Deceleration rib in variable winning device>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched toward a game area provided on a game board, and a flow direction provided in the game area and capable of changing the flow direction of the game ball. A predetermined game value is given based on the game ball entering one of the plurality of entrances where the changing means are arranged, and a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the winning of a specific entrance. , When a player wins an advantageous state such as winning in a lottery, a game ball can be entered into the ball entry means, and a predetermined game value is given to the player (for example, a patent). Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264).

However, in the above-mentioned game machine, since many game parts are arranged, it is necessary to improve the degree of freedom in designing each game part, but there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Group F has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine that can contribute to an improvement in the degree of freedom in designing game parts.

A launching means for launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
A first ball entry means (for example, a first start port 64a) into which a game ball launched by the launch means can enter.
An information acquisition means (for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d) for acquiring predetermined information due to a game ball entering the first ball entry means, and
A determination means (for example, a jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A second ball entry means (for example, a first variable winning device 72) and a second ball entry means (for example, a first variable winning device 72) in which a flow direction changing means (for example, a first opening / closing plate 72a or a second opening / closing plate 74a) capable of changing the flow direction of a game ball is arranged. 3 ball winning means (for example, 2nd variable winning device 74) and
When a game ball enters the first ball entry means, a first game value giving means for giving a predetermined first game value to the player (for example, a prize ball based on detection of the ball by the first start port switch (for example, a prize ball 3)) and
When a game ball enters the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means, a second game value imparting means (for example, a first prize opening) that imparts a second game value different from the first game value. In a game machine equipped with a prize ball (15 pieces) based on the detection of a ball by the switch 72c or the second large winning opening switch 74c.
A first region (for example, a probability variation region 75) through which a game ball flowing in from the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means can pass, and
A first region switching means (for example, a probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a) for switching whether or not to enable the game ball to flow into the first region.
A third game value that imparts a third game value different from the first game value and the second game value when the game ball flows into the first area that has been made inflowable by the first area switching means. A granting means (for example, a probability variation transition flag 203i) is provided.
The game machine F0 is provided with a deceleration means (for example, a deceleration rib 72f) for decelerating the flow speed of a game ball entering from the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means.

According to the game machine F0, a game ball is launched by the launching means, and the game ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the first ball entry means, and the game ball enters the first entry means. Predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means due to the ball. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. In addition, a second ball entry means and a third ball entry means are provided, respectively, in which the flow direction changing means capable of changing the flow direction of the game ball are arranged. Then, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the player is given a predetermined first game value by the first game value giving means, and the game is given to the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means. When the ball enters, a second game value different from the first game value is given by the second game value giving means. Here, a first region through which a game ball flowing in from the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means can pass is provided. In addition, the first area switching means switches whether or not the game ball can flow into the first area. Then, when the game ball flows into the first area made available by the first area switching means, the third game value is different from the first game value and the second game value by the third game value giving means. Granted. Here, the deceleration means reduces the flow velocity of the game ball that has entered from the second entry means or the third entry means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the flow velocity of the game ball flowing down in the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means from becoming an excessive speed, and to flow down in the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means. It is possible to stabilize the flow mode of the game ball. Therefore, by providing a deceleration means for decelerating the game ball flowing into the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means, the restriction on the arrangement of the first region with respect to the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means is relaxed. This has the effect of improving the degree of freedom in designing game parts.

In the game machine F0
A first guiding means (for example, a passage 72d before detecting the first winning opening and a passage 72e after detecting the first winning opening) for guiding the game ball that has entered the second entering means toward the first region side.
A second guiding means (for example, a passage 74d before detecting the second major winning opening and a passage 74e after detecting the second major winning opening) for guiding the game ball that has entered the third entering means toward the first region side.
A confluence portion (for example, a confluence portion 73) at which the first guide means and the second guide means merge is provided.
The first region is
It is located on the downstream side of the confluence.
The deceleration means
A game machine F1 characterized in that it is arranged on the upstream side of the confluence portion.

According to the game machine F1, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F0, the following effects are played. That is, the first guiding means guides the game ball that has entered the second entry means to the first region side, and the second guiding means guides the game ball that has entered the third entry means to the first region side. Will be done. Further, at the merging portion, the first guiding means and the second guiding means are merged. Then, the first region is arranged on the downstream side of the confluence portion. In addition, a deceleration means is arranged on the upstream side of the confluence. As a result, each game ball that has entered each ball entry means can enter the first region of 1 arranged on the downstream side of the confluence portion of each guide means. As a result, it is not necessary to provide a first region for each ball entry means, so that the flow velocity of the game ball flowing down in the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means can be reduced while reducing the number of parts related to the game machine. It is possible to prevent the speed from becoming excessive, and it is possible to stabilize the flow mode of the game ball flowing down in the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means. Therefore, by providing a deceleration means for decelerating the game ball flowing into the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means, the restriction on the arrangement of the first region with respect to the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means is relaxed. This has the effect of improving the degree of freedom in designing game parts.

In the game machine F1
The deceleration means
The gaming machine F2, characterized in that it is provided only in either the first guiding means or the second guiding means.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F1, the following effects are played. That is, the deceleration means is provided only in either the first guide means or the second guide means. As a result, of the game balls flowing down the first guide means or the second guide means, the flow speed of one of the game balls is caused by the deceleration means provided only in the first guide means or the second guide means. Only can be slowed down. As a result, for example, when it is desired to increase the flow time difference of the game ball flowing down between the first guide means and the second guide means, or conversely, the flow time difference of the game ball flowing down between the first guide means and the second guide means. By providing a deceleration means in the desired (one) guide means, such as when it is desired to reduce the number of speeds, the above request can be realized. Therefore, by providing a deceleration means for decelerating the game ball flowing into the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means, the restriction on the arrangement of the first region with respect to the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means is relaxed. This has the effect of improving the degree of freedom in designing game parts.

In the game machine F2
The deceleration means
Of the first guide means or the second guide means, only the first guide means or the second guide means having a longer distance to the first region is provided (for example, the first in the first embodiment). Passage 72e after detecting the winning opening)
A game machine F3 characterized by this.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F2, the following effects are played. That is, the deceleration means is provided only in the first guide means or the second guide means having a longer distance to the first region among the first guide means or the second guide means. As a result, among the game balls that have entered the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means, the flow time for flowing down from the first guide means or the second guide means, which has a long distance to the first region, to the first region is set. It is possible to increase the difference from the flow-down time from the second guide means or the first guide means, which has a short distance to the first region, to the first region. As a result, when it is desired to increase the flow-down time difference of the game ball flowing down between the first guide means and the second guide means, the above request is made by providing the guide means having a longer distance to the first region. It will be possible to realize. Therefore, by providing a deceleration means for decelerating the game ball flowing into the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means, the restriction on the arrangement of the first region with respect to the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means is relaxed. This has the effect of improving the degree of freedom in designing game parts.

In the game machine F2
The deceleration means
Of the first guide means or the second guide means, only the first guide means or the second guide means having a shorter distance to the first region is provided (for example, the configuration of the modified example 22).
A game machine F4 characterized by this.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F2, the following effects are played. That is, the deceleration means is provided only in the first guide means or the second guide means having the shorter distance to the first region of the first guide means or the second guide means. As a result, among the game balls entered by the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means, the flow time for flowing down from the first guide means or the second guide means to the first region, which has a short distance to the first region, is set. It is possible to reduce the difference from the flow-down time from the second guide means or the first guide means, which has a long distance to the first region, to the first region. As a result, when it is desired to reduce the flow time difference of the game ball flowing down between the first guide means and the second guide means, the above request is made by providing the guide means having the shorter distance to the first region. It will be possible to realize. Therefore, by providing a deceleration means for decelerating the game ball flowing into the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means, the restriction on the arrangement of the first region with respect to the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means is relaxed. This has the effect of improving the degree of freedom in designing game parts.

In any of the game machines F1 to F4
The deceleration means
It is a projecting means (for example, 1 deceleration rib 72f) that protrudes into the passage from the side wall forming the passage (for example, the passage 72e after detecting the first winning opening) of the first guide means or the second guide means. A game machine F5 characterized by this.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects played by the game machines F1 to F4, the following effects are played. That is, the projecting means as the deceleration means protrudes into the passage from the side wall forming the passage of the first guide means or the second guide means. Since the game ball flowing down in the first guide means or the second guide means rolls to the downstream side due to the weight of the game ball, the bottom surface or the ceiling surface forming the passage of the first guide means or the second guide means. When the projecting means as the deceleration means is formed, the ball clogging in the first guide means or the second guide means may occur due to the large influence on the rolling due to the own weight. Therefore, by forming the projecting means on the side wall instead of the bottom surface or the ceiling surface forming the passage of the first guide means or the second guide means, the first guide is compared with the case where the projecting means is formed on the bottom surface or the ceiling surface. There is an effect that the occurrence of ball clogging in the means or the second guide means can be suppressed.

In the game machine F5
The protruding means
The first guide means or the back side protruding means (for example, the rib on the back side of the deceleration rib 72f on the back side of the front view) provided on the side wall on the back side of the front view of the first guide means.
The first guide means or the front side projecting means (for example, the rib on the front side of the deceleration rib 72f) provided on the side wall on the front side of the front view of the second guide means is provided.
The back-side protruding means and the front-side protruding means
The gaming machine F6 is characterized in that a game ball flowing down in the first guiding means or the second guiding means is arranged so as to meander between the back-side protruding means and the front-side protruding means. ..

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F5, the following effects are played. That is, the back-side protruding means provided in the protruding means is provided on the side wall of the first guide means or the second guide means on the back side in front view. Further, the front side protruding means also provided in the protruding means is provided on the side wall on the front side of the first guide means or the second guide means. Then, the back-side protruding means and the front-side protruding means are arranged so that the game ball flowing down in the first guide means or the second guide means meanders between the back-side protruding means and the front-side protruding means. Will be done. As a result, the game ball can be caused to meander between the plurality of projecting means, and the game ball flowing down in the first guide means or the second guide means can be efficiently decelerated, resulting in ball clogging or the like. It has the effect of suppressing this.

In any of the game machines F0 to F6
By using the determination result by the determination means, the second entry means or the third entry means is changed from a state in which the game ball is difficult or impossible to enter to a state in which the game ball can enter. Advantageous state means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) for making an advantageous state (for example, jackpot state),
In the advantageous state of 1, the game ball can enter either the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a maximum of 30 seconds or 10 winnings). A plurality of advantageous period execution means (for example, a round counter) that executes a state advantageous period (for example, one round) a plurality of times, and
By using the determination result of the determination means, a state setting means (for example, a big prize) for setting the second ball entry means or the third entry means that allows the game ball to enter every advantageous period. A game machine F7 characterized by having a mouth opening / closing table 202f).

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effects of the game machines F0 to F6, the following effects are played. That is, by using the determination result by the determination means, the game ball can enter from the state where the second entry means or the third entry means is difficult or impossible to enter by the advantageous state means. It is considered to be an advantageous state that changes to a state. Then, in the advantageous state of 1, the advantageous period in which the game ball can enter either the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means until a predetermined condition is satisfied by the plurality of advantageous period execution means. Is executed multiple times. Further, by using the determination result of the determination means by the state setting means, the second entry means or the third entry means in which the game ball can enter is set for each advantageous period. As a result, in one advantageous state, it is possible to change the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means in which the game ball can enter for each advantageous period, and the variation of the game is enriched. It has the effect of improving the interest.

In the game machine F7
The state setting means
The second ball entry means and the third ball entry means are provided with alternating state means (for example, winning the jackpot type "probability variation A") that allows the game ball to enter alternately for each advantageous period. A game machine F8 characterized by being

According to the game machine F8, in addition to the effect of the game machine F7, the following effects are played. That is, the alternating state means provided in the state setting means makes it possible for the game ball to enter alternately between the second ball entering means and the third ball entering means at each advantageous period. As a result, in the advantageous state of 1, a case where the game ball enters the second entry means and a case where the game ball enters the third entry means are provided, and the entry pattern of the game ball into each entry means is provided. By making them different, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines F0 to F8
A game board (for example, a game board 13) on which the second ball entry means and the third ball entry means are arranged, and
A game in which the game ball is guided to a predetermined position where the game ball can enter any of the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means, which is arranged on the game board and is in a state where the game ball can enter. The gaming machine F9 comprising ball guiding means (for example, left side nail group 77 and right side nail group 78).

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effects played by the game machines F0 to F8, the following effects are played. That is, the second ball entry means and the third ball entry means are arranged on the game board. In addition, the game ball is placed at a position where the game ball can enter either the second entry means or the third entry means in which the game ball can enter by the game ball guide means arranged on the game board. You will be guided. As a result, by guiding the game ball to a predetermined position on the game board by the game ball guiding means, the game ball can be made to enter the second or third ball entering means in which the game ball can enter. it can. Therefore, since the game ball can be entered into the two entry means by the same method of launching the game ball, the game method in the advantageous state can be simplified even when a plurality of entry means are arranged. This has the effect of providing the player with an easy-to-understand game and improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine F8 or F9
The first area switching means
In the advantageous state of 1, a plurality of inflowable state means for making the first region into the inflowable state in two or more advantageous periods (for example, 1 round, 3 rounds, and 9 rounds of the jackpot type “probability fluctuation A”). A game machine F10 characterized by having.

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effects of the game machine F8 or F9, the following effects are played. That is, the plurality of inflowable state means provided in the first region switching means brings the first region into the inflowable state in one advantageous state and in two or more advantageous periods. As a result, even if the game ball cannot flow into the first region in any one advantageous period in which the first region is in the inflowable state, the first region is again in the other advantageous period. By making the region inflowable, it is possible to allow the game ball to flow into the first region. Therefore, due to a sudden trouble (for example, a game abnormality such as a launch abnormality, a player's poor physical condition, etc.), the game ball is made to flow into the first region during one advantageous period in which the first region can flow into the first region. Even if a problem occurs, the player will not be able to flow due to an unforeseen situation by making the first region inflowable again in another advantageous period and providing the possibility of inflowing the game ball into the first region. There is an effect that a comfortable game can be realized without suffering a profit and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines F0 to F10
By using the determination result by the determination means, a recognizable mode (for example, "probability fluctuation state") in which the player can recognize that the third game value is imparted by the third game value imparting means is executed. Recognizable mode execution means (for example, a dedicated background of the "probability fluctuation state" in the third symbol display device 81) and
By using the determination result by the determination means, it is difficult or unrecognizable to the player to assign the third game value by the third game value imparting means (for example, "latent probability fluctuation state"). ”) Is a difficult-to-recognize mode executing means (for example, a common background between the“ latent probability fluctuation state ”and the“ time reduction state ”in the third symbol display device 81). F11.

According to the game machine F11, in addition to the effects played by the game machines F0 to F10, the following effects are played. That is, the recognizable mode execution means executes a recognizable mode that can make the player recognize that the third game value is to be given by the third game value giving means by using the determination result of the determination means. To. In addition, it is difficult for the player to recognize or cannot recognize that the third game value is given by the third game value giving means by using the determination result of the determination means by the recognition difficulty mode execution means. Is executed. As a result, the player can recognize that the second advantageous state that can occur due to the inflow of the game ball into the special area is executed if the recognizable mode is executed, but if the difficult recognition mode is executed, the player can recognize it. The player becomes difficult or impossible to recognize. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Group G: Probable change area for double dash attacker>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched toward a game area provided on a game board, and a flow direction provided in the game area and capable of changing the flow direction of the game ball. A predetermined game value is given based on the game ball entering one of the plurality of entrances where the changing means are arranged, and a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the winning of a specific entrance. , When a player wins an advantageous state such as winning in a lottery, a game ball can be entered into the ball entry means, and a predetermined game value is given to the player (for example, a patent). Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264).

However, in the above-mentioned game machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the G group was made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

A launching means for launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
A first ball entry means (for example, a first start port 64a) into which a game ball launched by the launch means can enter.
An information acquisition means (for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d) for acquiring predetermined information due to a game ball entering the first ball entry means, and
A determination means (for example, a jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A second ball entry means (for example, a first variable winning device 72) and a second ball entry means (for example, a first variable winning device 72) in which a flow direction changing means (for example, a first opening / closing plate 72a or a second opening / closing plate 74a) capable of changing the flow direction of a game ball is arranged. 3 ball winning means (for example, 2nd variable winning device 74) and
When a game ball enters the first ball entry means, a first game value giving means for giving a predetermined first game value to the player (for example, a prize ball based on detection of the ball by the first start port switch (for example, a prize ball 3)) and
When a game ball enters the second ball entry means, the second game value imparting means (for example, for detecting the ball by the first grand prize opening switch 72c) that imparts a second game value different from the first game value. Based prize balls (10 pieces)) and
When a game ball enters the third entry means, a third game value giving means that imparts a third game value different from the first game value (for example, for detecting a ball by the second grand prize opening switch 74c). In a game machine equipped with a prize ball (15 pieces) based on
The second ball entry means
It is arranged on the upstream side of the third ball entry means.
A first region (for example, a probability variation region 75) through which a game ball flowing in from the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means can pass, and
A first region switching means (for example, a probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a) for switching whether or not to enable the game ball to flow into the first region.
A fourth game value-imparting means (for example, probabilistic variation) that imparts the fourth game value different from the first game value, the second game value, and the third game value when the game ball flows into the first region. Transition flag 203i) and
By using the determination result of the determination means, the first region can be switched between a state in which the game ball of the second entry means can enter or a state in which the game ball of the third entry means can enter. The gaming machine G0 is characterized by comprising a pattern selection means (for example, a jackpot type counter C2) for selecting a combination pattern with the inflowable state of the first region by means.

According to the game machine G0, a game ball is launched by the launching means, and the game ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the first ball entry means, and the game ball enters the first entry means. Predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means due to the ball. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. In addition, a second ball entry means and a third ball entry means are provided in which a flow direction changing means capable of changing the flow direction of the game ball is arranged. Further, when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, a predetermined first game value is given to the player by the first game value giving means, and the game ball enters the second ball entry means. , The second game value giving means gives the player a second game value different from the first game value, and when the game ball enters the third ball entering means, the player is given by the third game value giving means. Is given a third game value different from the first game value. Here, the second ball entry means is arranged on the upstream side of the third ball entry means, and a first region through which the game ball flowing in from the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means can pass is provided. .. In addition, the first area switching means switches whether or not the game ball can flow into the first area. Then, when a game ball flows into the first region, a fourth game value different from the first game value, the second game value, and the third game value is given by the fourth game value giving means. Here, by using the determination result of the determination means, a state in which the game ball of the second entry means can enter or a state in which the game ball of the third entry means can enter by the pattern selection means. A combination pattern with the inflowable state of the first region by the first region switching means is selected. As a result, the game ball can flow into the first region from the second ball entry means arranged on the upstream side and the third ball entry means arranged on the downstream side of the second ball entry means. Since it is not necessary to provide a first area for each ball-entry means, the number of parts related to the game machine is reduced, and which ball-entry means is to be entered, and the game that is entered from any of the ball-entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to create a game property of whether or not the ball flows into the first area and the fourth game value is given, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine G0
The second ball entry means
As the flow direction changing means, a first movable means (for example, a first opening / closing plate 72a) for changing the flow direction of the game ball and
A first driving means (for example, a first large winning opening solenoid 72b) for driving the first movable means in a displaceable state in an open state or a closed state is provided.
The first movable means is
When the second entry means is in the closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter, the game ball is configured to be rollable on the upper surface thereof.
The third ball entry means
When the first movable means is in the closed state, the upper surface of the first movable means is arranged at a position where the game ball can enter after rolling from the upstream side to the downstream side. Game machine G1.

According to the game machine G1, in addition to the effect played by the game machine G0, the following effects are played. That is, the flow direction of the game ball is changed by the first movable means as the flow direction changing means provided in the second ball entry means, and the first drive means also provided in the second ball entry means first. The movable means is displaceably driven into an open or closed state. Here, when the first movable means is in a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second ball entry means, the game ball is configured to be rollable on the upper surface thereof. Then, when the first movable means is in the closed state, the third moving means is arranged at a position where the game ball can enter the upper surface of the first movable means after the game ball has rolled from the upstream side to the downstream side. To. That is, when the second ball entering means is in a state where the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter (closed state), the game ball does not completely roll on the upper surface of the first movable means from the upstream side to the downstream side. It is configured so that it does not flow into the third ball entry means. As a result, for example, the second entry means changes from a state in which the game ball can enter to a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter, and then the third entry means makes it difficult for the game ball to enter. Alternatively, when the game ball changes from an inaccessible state to an enterable state, in order for the game ball to enter the third entry means, the upper surface of the first movable means of the second entry means is upstream. It will take time to roll from the side to the downstream side. Therefore, after the time from when the second entry means is set to allow the game ball to enter to the time when the game ball reaches the first region and after the third entry means is set to the state where the game ball can enter. The effect is that the time difference from the time it takes for the game ball to reach the first area can be increased, the pattern of the game ball reaching the first area can be varied, and the interest of the game can be improved. is there.

In the game machine G0 or G1
A first guiding means (for example, a passage 72d before detecting the first winning opening and a passage 72e after detecting the first winning opening) for guiding the game ball that has entered the second entering means toward the first region side.
A second guiding means (for example, a passage 74d before detecting the second major winning opening and a passage 74e after detecting the second major winning opening) for guiding the game ball that has entered the third entering means toward the first region side.
A confluence portion (for example, a confluence portion 73) at which the first guide means and the second guide means merge is provided.
The first region is
A game machine G2 characterized in that it is arranged on the downstream side of the confluence portion.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine G0 or G1, the following effects are played. That is, the first guiding means guides the game ball that has entered the second entry means to the first region side, and the second guiding means guides the game ball that has entered the third entry means to the first region side. Will be done. Further, at the merging portion, the first guiding means and the second guiding means are merged. Then, the first region is arranged on the downstream side of the confluence portion. As a result, each game ball that has entered each ball entry means can enter the first region of 1 arranged on the downstream side of the confluence portion of each guide means. As a result, since it is not necessary to provide the first area for each ball entry means, whether or not to give the fourth game value by the inflow of the game ball into the first area while reducing the number of parts related to the game machine. It has the effect of creating the playability and improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine G2
The first area switching means
The first region is set to the inflowable state in relation to the state in which the game ball of the second entry means can enter or the state in which the game ball of the third entry means can enter.
The first guiding means is
It is configured so that it takes a predetermined first time (for example, 0.5 seconds) from the entry of the game ball into the second entry means to the arrival at the first region.
The second guiding means is
It is configured so that a predetermined second time (for example, 2.5 seconds) is required from the entry of the game ball into the third entry means to the arrival at the first region.
The first hour
The gaming machine G3, which is shorter than the second time.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G2, the following effects are played. That is, the state in which the game ball of the second entry means can enter by the first area switching means, or the state in which the first area can flow in relation to the state in which the game ball of the third entry means can enter. Will be done. Then, it is configured so that a predetermined first time is required from the entry of the game ball into the second entry means to the arrival at the first region by the first guide means, and the third entry by the second guide means. It is configured so that a predetermined second time is required from the entry of the game ball into the ball means to the arrival at the first region. Then, the first time becomes shorter than the second time. As a result, the time from when the second entry means is in a state where the game ball can enter to when the game ball reaches the first region and the time when the third entry means is in a state where the game ball can enter. The effect is that the time difference from the time it takes for the game ball to reach the first area can be increased, and the pattern of the game ball reaching the first area can be varied to improve the interest of the game. There is.

In any of the game machines G0 to G3
The third ball entry means
A second movable means (for example, a second opening / closing plate 74a) for changing the flow direction of the game ball as the flow direction changing means,
A second driving means (for example, a second large winning opening solenoid 74b) for driving the second movable means in a displaceable state in an open state or a closed state is provided.
The second movable means is
The gaming machine G4 is characterized in that when the third entry means is in the closed state in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter, the gaming ball is configured to be rollable on the upper surface thereof.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effects played by the game machines G0 to G3, the following effects are played. That is, the flow direction of the game ball is changed by the second movable means as the flow direction changing means provided in the third ball entry means, and the second drive means also provided in the third ball entry means second. The movable means is displaceably driven into an open or closed state. Here, when the second movable means is in a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or is difficult to enter in the third entry means, the game ball is configured to be rollable on the upper surface thereof. As a result, when the game ball is rolling on the upper surface of the second movable means in the closed state, by opening the second movable means, the rolling game ball becomes the third entry means. It can be inflowed. Therefore, when the third entry means is in a state where the game ball can enter, it is difficult for the game ball to flow down to the downstream side of the third entry means, and the game ball is allowed to enter the third entry means. By making it easier and accurately giving the player the game value, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines G0 to G4
By using the determination result by the determination means, the second entry means or the third entry means is changed from a state in which the game ball is difficult or impossible to enter to a state in which the game ball can enter. Advantageous state means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) for making an advantageous state (for example, jackpot state),
In the advantageous state of 1, the game ball can enter either the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a maximum of 30 seconds or 10 winnings). A plurality of advantageous period execution means (for example, a round counter) that executes a state advantageous period (for example, one round) a plurality of times, and
By using the determination result of the determination means, a state setting means (for example, a big prize) for setting the second entry means or the third entry means in which the game ball can enter every advantageous period. A game machine G5 characterized by having a mouth opening / closing table 202f).

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effects played by the game machines G0 to G4, the following effects are played. That is, by using the determination result by the determination means, the game ball can enter from the state where the second entry means or the third entry means is difficult or impossible to enter by the advantageous state means. It is considered to be an advantageous state that changes to a state. Further, in the advantageous state of 1, the advantageous period during which the game ball can enter either the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means until a predetermined condition is satisfied by the plurality of advantageous period execution means. Is executed multiple times. Further, by using the determination result of the determination means, the state setting means sets the second entry means or the third entry means in which the game ball can enter every advantageous period. As a result, in one advantageous state, it is possible to change the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means in which the game ball can enter for each advantageous period, and the variation of the game is enriched. It has the effect of improving the interest.

In the game machine G5
The state setting means
The second ball entry means and the third ball entry means are provided with alternating means (for example, winning the jackpot type "probability variation A") that allows the game ball to enter alternately for each advantageous period. A game machine G6 characterized by being.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of the game machine G5, the following effects are played. That is, the alternating means provided in the state setting means makes it possible for the game ball to enter alternately between the second entering means and the third entering means at each advantageous period. As a result, in the advantageous state of 1, a case where the game ball enters the second entry means and a case where the game ball enters the third entry means are provided, and the entry pattern of the game ball into each entry means is provided. By making them different, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine G6
The alternating means
When the second entry means or the third entry means in which the game ball can enter is made difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter, the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter. The third ball entry means or the second ball entry means within a predetermined period (for example, an interval) that enables the game ball to enter within a predetermined period (for example, 0.001 seconds to 1 second). Game machine G7 characterized by having (no time).

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine G6, the following effects are played. That is, when the second entry means or the third entry means in which the game ball can enter becomes difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter, the means within a predetermined period provided in the alternating means. As a result, the third entry means or the second entry means, which was difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter, is brought into a state in which the game ball can enter within a predetermined period. As a result, there are few states in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter in both the second ball entry means and the third ball entry means, that is, the game ball cannot enter any of the ball entry means. can do. As a result, the number of times that the game ball can enter the second ball entry means and the third ball entry means defined in the advantageous state of 1 can be quickly performed, so that the time required for the advantageous state of 1. This has the effect of being able to quickly add game value to the player.

In any of the game machines G5 to G7
The first area switching means
In the advantageous state of 1, a plurality of inflowable state means for making the first region into the inflowable state in two or more advantageous periods (for example, 1 round, 3 rounds and 9 rounds of the jackpot type “probability fluctuation A”). A game machine G8 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the game machine G8, in addition to the effects played by the game machines G5 to G7, the following effects are played. That is, the plurality of inflowable state means provided in the first region switching means brings the first region into the inflowable state in one advantageous state and in two or more advantageous periods. As a result, even if the game ball cannot flow into the first region in any one advantageous period in which the first region is in the inflowable state, the first region is again in the other advantageous period. By making the region inflowable, it is possible to allow the game ball to flow into the first region. Therefore, due to a sudden trouble (for example, a game abnormality such as a launch abnormality, a player's poor physical condition, etc.), the game ball is made to flow into the first region during one advantageous period in which the first region can flow into the first region. Even if a problem occurs, the player will not be able to flow due to an unforeseen situation by making the first region inflowable again in another advantageous period and providing the possibility of inflowing the game ball into the first region. There is an effect that a comfortable game can be realized without suffering a profit and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines G0 to G8
By using the determination result by the determination means, a recognizable mode (for example, "probability fluctuation state") in which the player can recognize that the fourth game value is imparted by the fourth game value imparting means can be determined. A recognizable mode execution means to be executed (for example, a dedicated background of the "probability fluctuation state" in the third symbol display device 81) and
By using the determination result by the determination means, it is difficult or impossible for the player to recognize that the fourth game value is given by the fourth game value imparting means (for example, "latent probability variation". A game characterized in that it includes means for executing a difficult-to-recognize mode (for example, a common background between a "latent probability fluctuation state" and a "time reduction state" in the third symbol display device 81) for executing a "state"). Machine G9.

According to the game machine G9, in addition to the effects played by the game machines G0 to G8, the following effects are played. That is, the recognizable mode executing means executes a recognizable mode that can make the player recognize that the fourth game value is given by the fourth game value giving means by using the determination result of the determination means. .. In addition, it is difficult for the player to recognize or cannot recognize that the fourth game value is given by the fourth game value giving means by using the determination result of the determination means by the recognition difficulty mode execution means. Will be executed. As a result, the player can recognize that the second advantageous state that can occur due to the inflow of the game ball into the special area is executed if the recognizable mode is executed, but if the difficult recognition mode is executed, the player can recognize it. The player becomes difficult or impossible to recognize. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Group H: The ball guide inclination of the passage in the variable winning device of 2 is different with respect to the flow direction of the ball>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched toward a game area provided on a game board, and a flow direction provided in the game area and capable of changing the flow direction of the game ball. A predetermined game value is given based on the game ball entering one of the plurality of entrances where the changing means are arranged, and a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the winning of a specific entrance. , When a player wins an advantageous state such as winning in a lottery, a game ball can be entered into the ball entry means, and a predetermined game value is given to the player (for example, a patent). Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264).

However, in the above-mentioned game machine, since many game parts are arranged, it is necessary to improve the degree of freedom in designing each game part, but there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Group H has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine that can contribute to an improvement in the degree of freedom in designing game parts.

A launching means for launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
A first ball entry means (for example, a first start port 64a) into which a game ball launched by the launch means can enter.
An information acquisition means (for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d) for acquiring predetermined information due to a game ball entering the first ball entry means, and
A determination means (for example, a jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A second ball entry means (for example, a first variable winning device 72) and a second ball entry means (for example, a first variable winning device 72) in which a flow direction changing means (for example, a first opening / closing plate 72a or a second opening / closing plate 74a) capable of changing the flow direction of a game ball is arranged. 3 ball winning means (for example, 2nd variable winning device 74) and
When a game ball enters the first ball entry means, a first game value giving means for giving a predetermined first game value to the player (for example, a prize ball based on detection of the ball by the first start port switch (for example, a prize ball 3)) and
When a game ball enters the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means, a second game value imparting means (for example, a first prize opening) that imparts a second game value different from the first game value. In a game machine equipped with a prize ball (15 pieces) based on the detection of a ball by the switch 72c or the second large winning opening switch 74c.
A first region (for example, a probability variation region 75) through which a game ball flowing in from the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means can pass, and
A third game value giving means (for example, a probability variation transition flag 203i) that gives a third game value different from the first game value and the second game value when the game ball flows into the first area. Prepare,
The second ball entry means
A first guiding means (for example, a passage 72d before detecting the first winning opening and a passage 72e after detecting the first winning opening) for guiding the game ball that has entered the second entering means toward the first region side is provided. ,
The third ball entry means
A second guiding means (for example, a passage 74d before detecting the second major winning opening and a passage 74e after detecting the second major winning opening) is provided to guide the game ball that has entered the third entry means toward the first region side. ,
The first guiding means is
It has a separation guiding means (for example, a passage before detecting the first large winning opening 72d) that guides a game ball that has entered the second entry means in a direction away from the first region.
The second guiding means is
It is characterized by having an approach guiding means (for example, a passage 74d before detecting a second major winning opening) that guides a game ball that has entered the third entry means in a direction approaching the first region. Game machine H0.

According to the game machine H0, a game ball is launched by the launching means, and the game ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the first ball entry means, and the game ball enters the first entry means. Predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means due to the ball. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. In addition, a second ball entry means and a third ball entry means are provided, respectively, in which the flow direction changing means capable of changing the flow direction of the game ball are arranged. Then, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the player is given a predetermined first game value by the first game value giving means, and the game is given to the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means. When the ball enters, a second game value different from the first game value is given by the second game value giving means. Here, a first region through which a game ball flowing in from the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means can pass is provided. Further, when a game ball flows into the first area, a third game value different from the first game value and the second game value is given by the third game value giving means. Here, the game ball that has entered the second entry means is guided to the first region side by the first guide means, and the game ball that has entered the third entry means is guided to the first region side by the second guide means. You will be guided. Then, the game ball that has entered the second ball entry means is guided in the direction away from the first region by the separation guidance means provided in the first guidance means. Further, the approach guiding means provided in the second guiding means guides the game ball that has entered the third entering means in the direction approaching the first region. As a result, the difference between the flow-down time for the game ball entering from the second entry means to flow down to the first region and the flow-down time for the game ball entering from the third entry means to flow down to the first region is large. can do. As a result, for example, when it is desired to increase the flow time difference of the game ball flowing down between the first guide means and the second guide means, the direction in which the game ball entered from the second entry means by the separation guidance means is moved away from the first region. On the other hand, the game ball that has entered from the third ball entry means by the proximity guiding means is guided in the direction approaching the first region, so that the above request can be realized. Therefore, since the restriction on the arrangement of the first region with respect to the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means can be relaxed, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing the game component can be improved.

In the game machine H0
The first guiding means is
A post-separation approach guiding means (for example, a passage 72e after detecting the first major winning opening) that guides a game ball guided in a direction away from the first region by the separation guiding means in a direction approaching the first region A game machine H1 characterized by being equipped.

According to the game machine H1, in addition to the effect of the game machine H0, the following effects are played. That is, the game ball guided in the direction away from the first region by the separation guidance means is guided in the direction approaching the first region by the separation and then approach guidance means provided in the first guidance means. As a result, the game ball that has entered from the second entry means can also enter the first area and the third game value can be given. Therefore, any entry means (excluding the first entry means). Even if the game ball enters the area, the effect that the game property can be created by the inflow of the game ball into the first area to determine whether or not the third game value is given, and the interest of the game can be improved. There is.

In the game machine H0 or H1
The first guiding means is
It is provided with an ascending inclination means (for example, an ascending inclination of the passage 72d before detecting the first large winning opening of the fifth embodiment), which is an ascending inclination with respect to the inflow direction of the game ball into the second entering means. A game machine H2 characterized by.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H0 or H1, the following effects are played. That is, the climbing inclination means provided in the first guiding means is formed so as to have an ascending inclination with respect to the inflow direction of the game ball into the second entering means. As a result, the game ball that has entered the second entry means flows into the climbing inclination means while maintaining the momentum of flowing down from the predetermined inflow direction, and the inflowing momentum of the game ball is gradually increased by the climbing inclination means. It is canceled and then flows down to the downstream side of the climbing and tilting means by the weight of the game ball. Therefore, when the game ball that has entered the second entry means is flowing down the climbing inclination means that is an ascending inclination with respect to the inflow direction, the gaming ball has entered the first guiding means while climbing the ascending inclination means. Since it stays a little, the difference between the flow-down time for the game ball entering from the second entry means to flow down to the first region and the flow-down time for the game ball entering from the third entry means to flow down to the first region is large. can do. As a result, for example, when it is desired to increase the flow time difference of the game ball flowing down between the first guide means and the second guide means, the direction in which the game ball entered from the second entry means by the separation guidance means is moved away from the first region. On the other hand, the game ball that has entered from the third ball entry means by the proximity guiding means is guided in the direction approaching the first region, so that the above request can be realized. Therefore, since the restriction on the arrangement of the first region with respect to the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means can be relaxed, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing the game component can be improved.

In any of the game machines H0 to H2
The second guiding means is
It is characterized in that it is provided with a downward inclination means (for example, a passage 74d before detecting the second major winning opening of the fifth embodiment) which is downwardly inclined with respect to the inflow direction of the game ball into the third entry means. Game machine H3 to play.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects played by the game machines H0 to H2, the following effects are played. That is, the downhill inclined means provided in the second guiding means is formed so as to be downhill with respect to the inflow direction of the game ball into the third ball entering means. As a result, the game ball that has entered the third entry means flows into the downhill inclination means while maintaining the momentum of flowing down from the predetermined inflow direction, and the inflowing momentum of the game ball is further amplified by the downhill inclination means. While being done, the game ball flows down to the downstream side of the downhill inclined means due to its own weight. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the third entry means accelerates in the second guide means by going down the downhill means when it is flowing down the downhill means that is downhill with respect to the inflow direction. Therefore, the difference between the flow time at which the game ball entering from the second entry means flows down to the first region and the flow time at which the game ball entering from the third entry means flows down to the first region is increased. Can be done. As a result, for example, when it is desired to increase the flow time difference of the game ball flowing down between the first guide means and the second guide means, the direction in which the game ball entered from the second entry means by the separation guidance means is moved away from the first region. On the other hand, the game ball that has entered from the third ball entry means by the proximity guiding means is guided in the direction approaching the first region, so that the above request can be realized. Therefore, since the restriction on the arrangement of the first region with respect to the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means can be relaxed, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing the game component can be improved.

In any of the game machines H0 to H3
A game board (for example, a game board 13) on which the second ball entry means and the third ball entry means are arranged, and
A game in which the game ball is guided to a predetermined position where the game ball can enter any of the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means, which is arranged on the game board and is in a state where the game ball can enter. The gaming machine H4 comprising ball guiding means (for example, left side nail group 77 and right side nail group 78).

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects played by the game machines H0 to H3, the following effects are played. That is, the second ball entry means and the third ball entry means are arranged on the game board. In addition, the game ball is placed at a position where the game ball can enter either the second entry means or the third entry means in which the game ball can enter by the game ball guide means arranged on the game board. You will be guided. As a result, by guiding the game ball to a predetermined position on the game board by the game ball guiding means, the game ball can be made to enter the second or third ball entering means in which the game ball can enter. it can. Therefore, since the game ball can be entered into the two entry means by the same method of launching the game ball, the game method in the advantageous state can be simplified even when a plurality of entry means are arranged. This has the effect of providing the player with an easy-to-understand game and improving the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines H0 to H4
A merging portion (for example, merging portion 73) at which the first guiding means and the second guiding means merge is provided.
The first region is
The gaming machine H5, which is arranged on the downstream side of the confluence portion.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effects played by the game machines H0 to H4, the following effects are played. That is, at the merging portion, the first guiding means and the second guiding means are merged. Then, the first region is arranged on the downstream side of the confluence portion. As a result, each game ball that has entered each ball entry means can enter the first region of 1 arranged on the downstream side of the confluence portion of each guide means. As a result, since it is not necessary to provide the first area for each ball entry means, whether or not the third game value is given by the inflow of the game ball into the first area while reducing the number of parts related to the game machine. It has the effect of creating playability and improving the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines H0 to H5
By using the determination result by the determination means, an advantageous state means (for example, a jackpot process) for making an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot state) in which a game ball can enter the second entry means or the third entry means. (S103)) and
In the advantageous state of 1, the game ball can enter either the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a maximum of 30 seconds or 10 winnings). A plurality of advantageous period execution means (for example, a round counter) that executes a state advantageous period (for example, one round) a plurality of times, and
By using the determination result of the determination means, a state setting means (for example, a big prize) for setting the second ball entry means or the third entry means that allows the game ball to enter every advantageous period. A game machine H6 characterized by having a mouth opening / closing table 202f).

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effects played by the game machines H0 to H5, the following effects are played. That is, by using the determination result by the determination means, the advantageous state means that the game ball can enter the second entry means or the third entry means. Further, in the advantageous state of 1, the advantageous period during which the game ball can enter either the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means until a predetermined condition is satisfied by the plurality of advantageous period execution means. Is executed multiple times. Further, by using the determination result of the determination means, the state setting means sets the second entry means or the third entry means in which the game ball can enter every advantageous period. As a result, in one advantageous state, it is possible to change the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means in which the game ball can enter for each advantageous period, and the variation of the game is enriched. It has the effect of improving the interest.

In the game machine H6
The state setting means
The second ball entry means and the third ball entry means are provided with alternating state means (for example, winning the jackpot type "probability variation A") that allows the game ball to enter alternately for each advantageous period. A game machine H7 characterized by being

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H6, the following effects are played. That is, the alternating state means provided in the state setting means makes it possible for the game ball to enter alternately between the second ball entering means and the third ball entering means at each advantageous period. As a result, in the advantageous state of 1, a case where the game ball enters the second entry means and a case where the game ball enters the third entry means are provided, and the entry pattern of the game ball into each entry means is provided. By making them different, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine H6 or H7
In the advantageous state of 1, a plurality of inflowable state means for making the first region into the inflowable state in two or more advantageous periods (for example, 1 round, 3 rounds, and 9 rounds of the jackpot type “probability fluctuation A”). A game machine H8 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the game machine H8, in addition to the effects of the game machine H6 or H7, the following effects are produced. That is, the first region can be inflowable in two or more advantageous periods in one advantageous state by the plurality of inflowable state means. As a result, even if the game ball cannot flow into the first region in any one advantageous period in which the first region is in the inflowable state, the first region is again in the other advantageous period. By making the region inflowable, it is possible to allow the game ball to flow into the first region. Therefore, due to a sudden trouble (for example, a game abnormality such as a launch abnormality, a player's poor physical condition, etc.), the game ball is made to flow into the first region during one advantageous period in which the first region can flow into the first region. Even if a problem occurs, the player will not be able to flow due to an unforeseen situation by making the first region inflowable again in another advantageous period and providing the possibility of inflowing the game ball into the first region. There is an effect that a comfortable game can be realized without suffering a profit and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines H0 to H8
By using the determination result by the determination means, a recognizable mode (for example, "probability fluctuation state") in which the player can recognize that the third game value is imparted by the three game value imparting means is executed. Recognizable mode execution means (for example, a dedicated background of the "probability fluctuation state" in the third symbol display device 81) and
By using the determination result by the determination means, it is difficult or impossible for the player to recognize that the third game value is given by the three game value imparting means (for example, "latent probability fluctuation state"). ”) Is a difficult-to-recognize mode executing means (for example, a common background between the“ latent probability fluctuation state ”and the“ time reduction state ”in the third symbol display device 81). H9.

According to the game machine H9, in addition to the effects played by the game machines H0 to H8, the following effects are played. That is, the recognizable mode executing means executes a recognizable mode that can make the player recognize that the third game value is given by the third game value giving means by using the determination result of the determination means. .. In addition, it is difficult for the player to recognize or cannot recognize that the third game value is given by the third game value giving means by using the determination result of the determination means by the recognition difficulty mode execution means. Will be executed. As a result, the player can recognize that the second advantageous state that can occur due to the inflow of the game ball into the special area is executed if the recognizable mode is executed, but if the difficult recognition mode is executed, the player can recognize it. The player becomes difficult or impossible to recognize. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Group I: Information output according to the detection mode of the upstream switch and the downstream switch>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched toward a game area provided on a game board, and a flow direction provided in the game area and capable of changing the flow direction of the game ball. A predetermined game value is given based on the game ball entering one of the plurality of entrances where the changing means are arranged, and a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the winning of a specific entrance. , When a player wins an advantageous state such as winning in a lottery, a game ball can be entered into the ball entry means, and a predetermined game value is given to the player (for example, a patent). Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264).

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is necessary to grasp the state related to the game at an early stage, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Group I was made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping information on a game at an early stage.

A launching means for launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
A first ball entry means (for example, a first start port 64a) into which a game ball launched by the launch means can enter.
An information acquisition means (for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d) for acquiring predetermined information due to a game ball entering the first ball entry means, and
A determination means (for example, a jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A second ball entry means (for example, a first variable winning device 72) in which a flow direction changing means (for example, a first opening / closing plate 72a or a second opening / closing plate 74a) capable of changing the flow direction of a game ball is arranged,
When a game ball enters the first ball entry means, a first game value giving means for giving a predetermined first game value to the player (for example, a prize ball based on detection of the ball by the first start port switch (for example, a prize ball 3)) and
When a game ball enters the second ball entry means, the second game value giving means (for example, for detecting the ball by the first grand prize opening switch 72c) that gives a second game value different from the first game value. In a game machine equipped with a prize ball (15 pieces) based on
A first region (for example, a probability variation region 75) through which a game ball flowing in from the second ball entry means can pass,
A first detecting means (for example, a first large winning opening switch 72c) capable of detecting that a game ball has flowed into the second entering means, and
A second detection means (for example, a probability change region switch 75c or an discharge switch 76a) capable of detecting that the game ball has passed through the first region, and
The game machine I0 is provided with a game information output means (for example, a winning abnormality notification) capable of outputting information about the game based on the detection mode of the first detection means and the second detection means. ..

According to the game machine I0, a game ball is launched by the launching means, the game ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the first ball entry means, and the game ball enters the first entry means. Predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means due to the ball. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. In addition, a second ball entry means is provided in which a flow direction changing means capable of changing the flow direction of the game ball is arranged. Then, when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, a predetermined first game value is given to the player by the first game value giving means, and the game ball enters the second ball entry means. , A second game value different from the first game value is given by the second game value giving means. Here, a first region through which the game ball flowing in from the second ball entry means can pass is provided. Further, the first detecting means is configured to be able to detect that the game ball has flowed into the second ball entering means, and the second detecting means is configured to be able to detect that the game ball has passed through the first region. .. Then, based on the detection modes of the first detection means and the second detection means, the game information output means can output information about the game. As a result, information on the game is output based on the fact that the game ball has flowed into the second ball entry means and the game ball has passed through the first area, and the information about the game is output to the second ball entry means and the first area. There is an effect that the inflow mode of the game ball can be notified and information about the game can be grasped at an early stage.

In the game machine I0
The game information output means
A time measuring means for measuring the time from the timing when the game ball is detected by the first detecting means (for example, 10 seconds after the ball is detected by the first winning opening switch 72c).
An abnormality notification executing means (for example, a winning abnormality notification) that executes a predetermined abnormality notification when the game ball is detected by the second detection means beyond the predetermined first time measured by the time measuring means. A game machine I1 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the game machine I1, in addition to the effect of the game machine I0, the following effects are played. That is, the time from the timing when the game ball is detected by the first detection means is measured by the time measuring means provided in the game information output means, and the time exceeds the predetermined first time measured by the time measuring means. 2 When the game ball is detected by the detecting means, the abnormality notification executing means executes a predetermined abnormality notification. After the game ball is detected by the first detection means, if it is originally (normally) configured so that the game ball is detected by the second detection means within the first time, the first time is set. If the ball is detected by the two detection means beyond that, it is highly probable that a winning abnormality has occurred due to fraudulent activity or ball clogging. As a result, when the game ball is detected by the second detection means after the first time has elapsed from the detection of the game ball by the first detection means, a predetermined abnormality notification is executed to generate a fraudulent act or a winning abnormality. It has the effect of being able to recognize the game at an early stage and grasp information about the game at an early stage.

In the game machine I1
The game information output means
A normal notification executing means (for example, a V winning notification effect) that executes a predetermined normal notification when a game ball is detected by the second detecting means within the first time measured by the time measuring means. A game machine I2 characterized by being equipped.

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine I1, the following effects are played. That is, when the game ball is detected by the second detection means within the first time measured by the time measuring means, the normal notification executing means provided in the game information output means executes a predetermined normal notification. .. As a result, when the game ball is detected by the second detection means within the first hour after being detected by the first detection means, by executing the predetermined normal notification, no fraudulent activity or winning abnormality has occurred. This has the effect of being able to recognize that and being able to grasp information about the game at an early stage.

In the game machine I1 or I2
The abnormality notification executing means is
The game machine I3 is characterized in that when the game ball is not detected by the second detection means within the first time measured by the time measuring means, the abnormality notification is executed.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine I1 or I2, the following effects are played. That is, when the game ball is not detected by the second detecting means within the first time measured by the time measuring means, the abnormality notification executing means executes the abnormality notification. As a result, if the game ball is not detected by the second detection means within the first hour after being detected by the first detection means, a predetermined abnormality notification is executed to accelerate the occurrence of fraudulent activity or winning abnormality. It has the effect of being able to recognize and grasp information about the game at an early stage.

In any of the game machines I1 to I3
The abnormality notification executing means is
The game machine I4 is characterized in that when the game ball is not detected by the first detection means and the game ball is detected by the second detection means, the abnormality notification is executed.

According to the game machine I4, in addition to the effects played by the game machines I1 to I3, the following effects are played. That is, when the game ball is not detected by the first detection means and the game ball is detected by the second detection means, the abnormality notification execution means executes the abnormality notification. When the game ball is detected by the second detection means, the game ball is detected by the second detection means within the first hour after the game ball is originally detected by the first detection means (normally). If the game ball is not detected by the first detection means and the ball is detected by the second detection means, it is probable that a winning error has occurred due to fraudulent activity or ball clogging. Is high. As a result, when the game ball is not detected by the first detection means and the game ball is detected by the second detection means, the occurrence of fraudulent activity or winning abnormality is recognized at an early stage by executing a predetermined abnormality notification. However, it has the effect of being able to grasp information about the game at an early stage.

In any of the game machines I0 to I4,
A third game value imparting means (for example, a probability variation transition flag 203i) that can impart a third game value different from the first game value and the second game value when the game ball passes through the first region. A game machine I5 characterized by being equipped.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effects played by the game machines I0 to I4, the following effects are played. That is, when the game ball passes through the first area, a third game value different from the first game value and the second game value can be given by the third game value giving means. As a result, the second game value is given based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means, and when the game ball passes through the first area, the third game value is added in addition to the second game value. Can be granted. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game property of whether or not to let the game ball that has entered the second ball entry means flow into the first area, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines I0 to I5
A third ball entry means (for example, a second variable winning device 74) in which a flow direction changing means (for example, a second opening / closing plate 74a) capable of changing the flow direction of the game ball is arranged,
When a game ball enters the third entry means, the fourth game value giving means (for example, the detection of the ball by the second large winning opening switch 74c) that imparts a fourth game value different from the first game value. Prize balls (15 pieces) based on
A third detecting means (for example, a second big winning opening switch 74c) capable of detecting that a game ball has flowed into the third entering means is provided.
The game information output means
Based on the detection mode of the first detection means or the third detection means and the second detection means, information about the game can be output.
The first region is
A game machine I6 characterized in that a game ball flowing in from the third ball entry means can pass through.

According to the game machine I6, in addition to the effects played by the game machines I0 to I5, the following effects are played. That is, a third ball entry means is provided in which the flow direction changing means capable of changing the flow direction of the game ball is arranged. Further, when a game ball enters the third ball entry means, a third game value different from at least the first game value is given by the third game value giving means. Further, the third detection means can detect that the game ball has flowed into the third ball entry means. Then, the game response output means is configured to be able to output information about the game based on the detection modes of the first detection means, the third detection means, and the second detection means. Here, the first region is configured so that the game ball that has flowed in from the third ball entry means can pass through. That is, the first region is configured so that the game balls that have flowed into the second ball entry means and the third ball entry means can pass through. As a result, the game ball can flow into the first region from at least two entry means, and it is not necessary to provide the first region for each entry means. Therefore, the number of parts related to the game machine can be reduced. , The information about the game is output based on the fact that the game ball has flowed into the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means, and the game ball has passed through the first area, and the second ball entry means or the second ball entry means or the second 3 There is an effect that the ball entry means and the inflow mode of the game ball into the first region can be notified, and information on the game can be grasped at an early stage.

In the game machine I6
The second ball entry means
As the flow direction changing means, a first variable means (for example, a first opening / closing plate 72a) that can change between a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a state in which the game ball can enter is provided.
The third ball entry means
As the flow direction changing means, a second variable means (for example, a second opening / closing plate 74a) that can change between a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a state in which the game ball can enter is provided.
By using the determination result by the determination means, the first variable means or the second variable means is changed from a state in which the game ball is difficult or impossible to enter to a state in which the game ball can enter. (For example, a jackpot state), an advantageous state means (for example, a jackpot process (S103)),
A first region switching means (for example, a probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a) for switching whether or not to enable the game ball to flow into the first region.
By using the determination result of the determination means, a timing setting means (for example, a probability variation region opening / closing table 202g) for setting a timing at which the first region becomes inflowable by the first region switching means is provided. A game machine I7 characterized by being present.

According to the game machine I7, in addition to the effect played by the game machine I6, the following effects are played. That is, the second ball entry means is provided with a first variable means that can change between a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a state in which the game ball can enter, as a means for changing the flow direction. The entry means is provided with a second variable means that can change between a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a state in which the game ball can enter, as a means for changing the flow direction. By using the determination result by the determination means, the advantageous state means changes the first variable means or the second variable means from a state in which the game ball is difficult or impossible to enter to a state in which the game ball can enter. It is considered to be in an advantageous state. Here, the first region switching means switches whether or not the game ball can flow into the first region. Then, by using the determination result of the determination means by the timing setting means, the timing at which the first region becomes inflowable is set by the first region switching means. As a result, the game balls can flow into the first region from each of the two entry means, and it is not necessary to provide the first region for each entry means. Therefore, while reducing the number of parts related to the game machine, It has the effect of creating a playability of whether or not the game ball flows into the first region during the advantageous state, and improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine I7
The advantageous state means
In the advantageous state of 1, the game ball can enter either the first variable means or the second variable means until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a maximum of 30 seconds or 10 winnings). A plurality of advantageous period execution means (for example, a round counter) that executes the advantageous period (for example, one round) a plurality of times.
By using the determination result of the determination means, the state setting means for setting the first variable means or the second variable means (for example, opening / closing the large winning opening) so that the game ball can enter every advantageous period. A game machine I8 characterized by having a table 202f).

According to the game machine I8, in addition to the effect of the game machine I7, the following effects are played. That is, the game ball can enter either the first variable means or the second variable means in one advantageous state by the plurality of advantageous period execution means provided in the advantageous state means until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The advantageous period of the state is executed multiple times. Further, the state setting means also provided in the advantageous state means sets the first variable means or the second variable means in which the game ball can enter every advantageous period by using the determination result of the determination means. To. As a result, in one advantageous state, the first variable means or the second variable means in which the game ball can enter can be changed for each advantageous period, and the variation of the game is enriched and the interest of the game is enhanced. It has the effect of being able to improve.

In the game machine I8
The state setting means
The first variable means and the second variable means are provided with alternating state means (for example, winning the jackpot type "probability variation A") that allows the game ball to enter alternately for each advantageous period. A game machine I9 characterized by this.

According to the game machine I9, in addition to the effect played by the game machine I8, the following effects are played. That is, the alternating state means provided in the state setting means allows the game ball to enter alternately between the first variable means and the second variable means for each advantageous period. As a result, in the advantageous state of 1, a case where the game ball enters the second ball entry means by the first variable means and a case where the game ball enters the third ball entry means by the second variable means are provided. By making the approach pattern of the game ball into the ball entry means different, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Group J: Variable ball entry means to win a prize changes depending on the launch mode>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched toward a game area provided on a game board, and a flow direction provided in the game area and capable of changing the flow direction of the game ball. A predetermined game value is given based on the game ball entering one of the plurality of entrances where the changing means are arranged, and a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the winning of a specific entrance. , When a player wins an advantageous state such as winning in a lottery, a game ball can be entered into the ball entry means, and a predetermined game value is given to the player (for example, a patent). Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264).

However, in the above-mentioned game machine, it is necessary to reduce the manufacturing cost, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Group J has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of reducing manufacturing costs.

A launching means for launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
A first ball entry means (for example, a first start port 64a) into which a game ball launched by the launch means can enter.
An information acquisition means (for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d) for acquiring predetermined information due to a game ball entering the first ball entry means, and
A determination means (for example, a jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A second ball entry means (for example, a first variable winning device 72) and a second ball entry means (for example, a first variable winning device 72) in which a flow direction changing means (for example, a first opening / closing plate 72a or a second opening / closing plate 74a) capable of changing the flow direction of a game ball is arranged. 3 ball winning means (for example, 2nd variable winning device 74) and
When a game ball enters the first ball entry means, a first game value giving means for giving a predetermined first game value to the player (for example, a prize ball based on detection of the ball by the first start port switch (for example, a prize ball 3)) and
When a game ball enters the second entry means, the second game value giving means (for example, the detection of the ball by the first grand prize opening switch 72c) that imparts a second game value different from the first game value. Prize balls (15 pieces) based on
When a game ball enters the three entry means, a third game value giving means that imparts at least a third game value different from the first game value (for example, for detecting a ball by the second big winning opening switch 74c). In a game machine equipped with a prize ball (15 pieces) based on
The second ball entry means
While the game ball launched in the predetermined first launch mode (for example, left-handed game) by the launch means is arranged at a position where the ball can enter, the second launch mode different from the first launch mode (for example, right). The game ball launched in the hitting game) is placed in a position where it is difficult or impossible to enter.
The third ball entry means
The game ball launched in the second launch mode is arranged at a position where the ball can enter by the launching means, while the game ball launched in the first launch mode is located at a position where it is difficult or impossible to enter. Placed,
The game machine J0 includes a first region (for example, a probability variation region 75) through which a game ball flowing in from the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means can pass.

According to the game machine J0, a game ball is launched by the launching means, and the game ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the first ball entry means, and the game ball enters the first entry means. Predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means due to the ball. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. In addition, a second ball entry means and a third ball entry means are provided, respectively, in which the flow direction changing means capable of changing the flow direction of the game ball are arranged. Then, when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, a predetermined first game value is given to the player by the first game value giving means, and the game ball enters the second ball entry means. , At least a second game value different from the first game value is given by the second game value giving means, and when a game ball enters the third ball entering means, at least the first game is given by the third game value giving means. A third game value different from the value is given. Here, the second ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the predetermined first launch mode by the launch means can enter, while is launched in a second launch mode different from the first launch mode. The game ball is placed in a position where it is difficult or impossible to enter. Further, while the third ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the second launch mode by the launch means can enter, the game ball launched in the first launch mode is difficult to enter. It is placed in a position where it is not possible to enter the ball. Then, a first region through which the game ball flowing in from the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means can pass is provided. As a result, the game balls can flow into the first region from the second ball entry means and the third ball entry means into which the game balls launched in different launch modes flow in, and the first ball entry means for each ball entry means. Since it is not necessary to provide an area, there is an effect that the number of parts related to the game machine can be reduced and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

In the game machine J0
When the game ball passes through the first area, a fourth game value giving means (for example, probabilistic transition) that can give a fourth game value different from the first game value, the second game value, and the third game value. The gaming machine J1 characterized by having the flag 203i).

According to the game machine J1, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J0, the following effects are played. That is, when the game ball passes through the first area, a fourth game value different from the first game value, the second game value, and the third game value can be given by the fourth game value giving means. As a result, the game balls can flow into the first region from at least two entry means, and it is not necessary to provide the first region for each entry means, so that the number of parts related to the game machine can be reduced. , The second game value or the third game value is given based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means, and the second game value when the game ball passes through the first area. Alternatively, a fourth game value can be added in addition to the third game value. As a result, there is an effect that the game property of whether or not the game ball that has entered the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means is allowed to flow into the first region can be created, and the interest of the game can be improved. ..

In the game machine J0 or J1
The second game value is
A game machine J2 characterized by being different from the third game value.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J0 or J1, the following effects are played. That is, the second game value is configured to be different from the third game value. As a result, the game value obtained in each launch mode is changed, and for example, the game value obtained in the second launch mode is larger than the game value obtained in the first launch mode, thereby increasing the variety of games. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines J0 to J2
The first ball entry means
The gaming machine J3, characterized in that it is arranged at a position where it can enter the ball in the first launch mode.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effects played by the game machines J0 to J2, the following effects are played. That is, the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where the ball can enter in the first launch mode. As a result, the game ball is inserted into the first ball entry means according to the first launch mode and is judged by the determination means, and the second ball entry means is in a state where the game ball can be entered based on the determination result. At that time, the game can be performed while maintaining the first launch mode. Therefore, since the game ball can be entered into the two entry means by the same method of launching the game ball, the game method can be simplified even when a plurality of entry means are arranged. It has the effect of providing players with easy-to-understand games and improving the interest of the games.

In any of the game machines J0 to J3
The second ball entry means
As the flow direction changing means, a first variable means (for example, a first opening / closing plate 72a) that can change between a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a state in which the game ball can enter is provided.
The third ball entry means
As the flow direction changing means, a second variable means (for example, a second opening / closing plate 74a) that can change between a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a state in which the game ball can enter is provided.
By using the determination result by the determination means, the first variable means or the second variable means is changed from a state in which the game ball is difficult or impossible to enter to a state in which the game ball can enter. (For example, a jackpot state), an advantageous state means (for example, a jackpot process (S103)),
A first region switching means (for example, a probability variation region opening / closing plate 75a) for switching whether or not to enable the game ball to flow into the first region.
By using the determination result of the determination means, a timing setting means (for example, a probability variation region opening / closing table 202g) for setting a timing at which the first region becomes inflowable by the first region switching means is provided. A game machine J4 characterized by being present.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effects played by the game machines J0 to J3, the following effects are played. That is, the second ball entry means is provided with a first variable means that can change between a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a state in which the game ball can enter, as a means for changing the flow direction. The entry means is provided with a second variable means that can change between a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a state in which the game ball can enter, as a means for changing the flow direction. By using the determination result by the determination means, the advantageous state means changes the first variable means or the second variable means from a state in which the game ball is difficult or impossible to enter to a state in which the game ball can enter. It is considered to be in an advantageous state. Here, the first region switching means switches whether or not the game ball can flow into the first region. Then, by using the determination result of the determination means by the timing setting means, the timing at which the first region becomes inflowable is set by the first region switching means. As a result, the game balls can flow into the first region from each of the two entry means, and it is not necessary to provide the first region for each entry means. Therefore, while reducing the number of parts related to the game machine, It has the effect of creating a playability of whether or not the game ball flows into the first region during the advantageous state, and improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine J4
The advantageous state means
In the advantageous state of 1, the game ball can enter either the first variable means or the second variable means until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a maximum of 30 seconds or 10 winnings). A plurality of advantageous period execution means (for example, a round counter) that executes the advantageous period (for example, one round) a plurality of times.
By using the determination result of the determination means, the state setting means for setting the first variable means or the second variable means (for example, opening / closing the large winning opening) so that the game ball can enter every advantageous period. A game machine J5 characterized by having a table 202f).

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J4, the following effects are played. That is, the game ball can enter either the first variable means or the second variable means in one advantageous state by the plurality of advantageous period execution means provided in the advantageous state means until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The advantageous period of the state is executed multiple times. Further, the state setting means also provided in the advantageous state means sets the first variable means or the second variable means in which the game ball can enter every advantageous period by using the determination result of the determination means. To. As a result, in one advantageous state, the first variable means or the second variable means in which the game ball can enter can be changed for each advantageous period, and the variation of the game is enriched and the interest of the game is enhanced. It has the effect of being able to improve.

In the game machine J5
The state setting means
It is provided with an alternating state means (for example, winning the jackpot type "probability variation A") that allows the game ball to enter the first variable means and the second variable means alternately for each advantageous period. A game machine J6 characterized by this.

According to the game machine J6, in addition to the effect of the game machine J5, the following effects are played. That is, the alternating state means provided in the state setting means allows the game ball to enter alternately between the first variable means and the second variable means for each advantageous period. As a result, in the advantageous state of 1, a case where the game ball enters the second ball entry means by the first variable means and a case where the game ball enters the third ball entry means by the second variable means are provided. By making the approach pattern of the game ball into the ball entry means different, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine J6
The alternating state means
When the first variable means or the second variable means in which the game ball can enter is made difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter, the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter. The second variable means or the first variable means within a predetermined period (for example, no interval time) that allows the game ball to enter within a predetermined period (for example, 0.001 seconds to 1 second). ), A game machine J7 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the game machine J7, in addition to the effect of the game machine J6, the following effects are played. That is, when the first variable means or the second variable means in which the game ball can enter becomes difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter, the state means within a predetermined period provided in the alternating state means. As a result, the second variable means or the first variable means, which was difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter, is brought into a state where the game ball can enter within a predetermined period. As a result, both the first variable means and the second variable means are in a state where the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter, that is, the game ball cannot enter either the second entry means or the third entry means. The condition can be reduced. As a result, the number of times that the game ball can enter the first variable means and the second variable means defined in the advantageous state of 1 can be quickly performed, so that the time required for the advantageous state of 1 can be shortened. At the same time, it has the effect of being able to quickly add game value to the player.

In any of the game machines J0 to J7
A first guiding means (for example, a passage 72d before detecting the first winning opening and a passage 72e after detecting the first winning opening) for guiding the game ball that has entered the second entering means toward the first region side.
A second guiding means (for example, a passage 74d before detecting the second major winning opening and a passage 74e after detecting the second major winning opening) for guiding the game ball that has entered the third entering means toward the first region side.
A confluence portion (for example, a confluence portion 73) at which the first guide means and the second guide means merge is provided.
The first region is
The gaming machine J8, which is arranged on the downstream side of the confluence portion.

According to the game machine J8, in addition to the effects played by the game machines J0 to J7, the following effects are played. That is, the first guiding means guides the game ball that has entered the second entry means to the first region side, and the second guiding means guides the game ball that has entered the third entry means to the first region side. Will be done. Further, at the merging portion, the first guiding means and the second guiding means are merged. Then, the first region is arranged on the downstream side of the confluence portion. As a result, each game ball that has entered each ball entry means can enter the first region of 1 arranged on the downstream side of the confluence portion of each guide means. As a result, it is not necessary to provide a first area for each ball entry means, so that while reducing the number of parts related to the game machine, it is possible to create a game property of whether or not the game ball flows into the first area. It has the effect of improving the interest.

In any of the game machines J4 to J8
The first area switching means
In the advantageous state of 1, a plurality of inflowable state means for making the first region into the inflowable state in two or more advantageous periods (for example, 1 round, 3 rounds and 9 rounds of the jackpot type “probability fluctuation A”). A game machine J9 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the game machine J9, in addition to the effects played by the game machines J4 to J8, the following effects are played. That is, the plurality of inflowable state means provided in the first region switching means brings the first region into the inflowable state in one advantageous state and in two or more advantageous periods. As a result, even if the game ball cannot flow into the first region in any one advantageous period in which the first region is in the inflowable state, the first region is again in the other advantageous period. By making the region inflowable, it is possible to allow the game ball to flow into the first region. Therefore, due to a sudden trouble (for example, a game abnormality such as a launch abnormality, a player's poor physical condition, etc.), the game ball is made to flow into the first region during one advantageous period in which the first region can flow into the first region. Even if a problem occurs, the player will not be able to flow due to an unforeseen situation by making the first region inflowable again in another advantageous period and providing the possibility of inflowing the game ball into the first region. There is an effect that a comfortable game can be realized without suffering a profit and the interest of the game can be improved.

For any of the configurations of the game machines A0 to A10, the game machines B0 to B10, C0 to C9, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F11, G0 to G9, H0 to H9, I0 to 0. The configuration limited to any one of I9, J0 to J9 may be applied.

Further, for any of the configurations of the game machines B0 to B10, the game machines A0 to A10, C0 to C9, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F11, G0 to G9, H0 to H9, I0 to 0. The configuration limited to any one of I9, J0 to J9 may be applied.

Further, for any of the configurations of the game machines C0 to C9, the game machines A0 to A10, B0 to B10, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F11, G0 to G9, H0 to H9, I0 to 0. The configuration limited to any one of I9, J0 to J9 may be applied.

Further, for any of the configurations of the game machines D0 to D8, the game machines A0 to A10, B0 to B10, C0 to C9, E0 to E10, F0 to F11, G0 to G9, H0 to H9, I0 to 0. The configuration limited to any one of I9, J0 to J9 may be applied.

Further, for any of the configurations of the game machines E0 to E10, the game machines A0 to A10, B0 to B10, C0 to C9, D0 to D8, F0 to F11, G0 to G9, H0 to H9, I0 to 0. The configuration limited to any one of I9, J0 to J9 may be applied.

Further, for any of the configurations of the game machines F0 to F11, the game machines A0 to A10, B0 to B10, C0 to C9, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, G0 to G9, H0 to H9, I0 to 0. The configuration limited to any one of I9, J0 to J9 may be applied.

Further, for any of the configurations of the game machines G0 to G9, the game machines A0 to A10, B0 to B10, C0 to C9, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F11, H0 to H9, I0 to 0. The configuration limited to any one of I9, J0 to J9 may be applied.

Further, for any of the configurations of the game machines H0 to H9, the game machines A0 to A10, B0 to B10, C0 to C9, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F11, G0 to G9, I0 to 0. The configuration limited to any one of I9, J0 to J9 may be applied.

Further, for any of the configurations of the game machines I0 to I9, the game machines A0 to A10, B0 to B10, C0 to C9, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F11, G0 to G9, H0 to 0. The configuration limited to any one of H9, J0 to J9 may be applied.

Further, for any of the configurations of the game machines J0 to J9, the game machines A0 to A10, B0 to B10, C0 to C9, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F11, G0 to G9, H0 to 0. The configuration limited to any one of H9 and I0 to I9 may be applied.

In these cases, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

In any of the game machines A0 to A10, B0 to B10, C0 to C9, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F11, G0 to G9, H0 to H9, I0 to I9, J0 to J9, the game machine is A game machine I1 characterized by being a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B10, C0 to C9, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F11, G0 to G9, H0 to H9, I0 to I9, and J0 to J9, the gaming machine is A gaming machine I2 characterized by being a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (large winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B10, C0 to C9, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F11, G0 to G9, H0 to H9, I0 to I9, J0 to J9, the gaming machine is A gaming machine I3 characterized in that it is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
13 Game board (part of the game board)
22 Frame button (part of operation means)
64a 1st starting port (a part of the 1st ball entry means, a part of the 1st game value adding means)
66a Out switch (part of the second detection means)
72 1st variable winning device (part of 2nd ball winning means)
72a 1st opening / closing plate (part of flow direction changing means, part of 1st variable means, part of 1st movable means)
72b 1st Grand Prize Opening Solenoid (Part of 1st Drive Means)
72c 1st prize opening switch (part of 2nd game value giving means, part of predetermined value giving means, part of game value giving means, part of 1st detecting means, 1 of 1 game value giving means Department)
72d Passage before detection of the 1st prize opening (part of the 1st guidance means, part of the separation guidance means, part of the climbing inclination means)
72e Passage after detecting the first prize opening (part of the first guidance means, part of the passage, part of the approach guidance means after separation)
72f Deceleration rib (part of deceleration means, part of projecting means, part of back projecting means, part of front projecting means)
73 Confluence (part of the confluence)
74 Second variable winning device (part of the third ball winning means)
74a Second opening / closing plate (part of the flow direction changing means, part of the second variable means, part of the second movable means)
74b 2nd Grand Prize Opening Solenoid (Part of 2nd Drive Means)
74c Second big winning opening switch (part of the second game value giving means, part of the specific value giving means, part of the game value giving means, part of the second detecting means, one of the first game value giving means Part, part of the third game value giving means, part of the fourth game value giving means, part of the third detecting means)
74d Passage before detection of the 2nd prize opening (part of the 2nd guidance means, part of the approach guidance means, part of the downhill slope means)
74e Passage after detecting the 2nd prize opening (part of the 2nd guidance means)
75 Probability change area (part of the first area)
75a Probability change area opening / closing plate (part of the first area switching means)
75c Probability change area switch (part of the second detection means)
76 Discharge passage (part of discharge means)
76a Ejection switch (part of the second detection means)
77 Left side nail group (part of game ball guidance means)
78 Right side nail group (part of game ball guidance means)
81 Third symbol display device (part of game information output means, part of recognizable mode execution means, part of recognition difficult mode execution means, part of display means)
110 Main controller (part of judgment means)
112a Ball launch unit (part of launch means)
113 Voice lamp control device (part of special production execution means)
202a jackpot random number table (part of judgment means)
202f Grand prize opening opening / closing table (part of state setting means)
202g Probability change area open / close table (part of timing setting means)
203d 1st reserved ball storage area (part of information acquisition means)
203h Probability change area valid flag (part of valid switching means)
203i Probability change transition flag (part of the third game value giving means, part of the second advantageous state generating means, part of the second game value giving means, part of the fourth game value giving means)
C2 jackpot type counter (part of pattern selection means, part of effective timing determination means)
S103 jackpot processing (part of advantageous state means)

Claims (5)

Launch means to launch a game ball,
A first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launch means, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information due to a game ball entering the first ball entry means, and
A determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
The second and third ball entry means in which the flow direction changing means capable of changing the flow direction of the game ball are arranged, respectively,
When a game ball enters the first ball entry means, the first game value giving means for giving a predetermined first game value to the player and the first game value giving means.
A second game value giving means that gives a second game value different from the first game value when a game ball enters the second ball entering means, and
In a game machine provided with a third game value-imparting means for imparting a third game value different from the first game value when a game ball enters the third ball-entry means.
The second ball entry means
It is arranged on the upstream side of the third ball entry means.
A first region through which a game ball flowing in from the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means can pass,
A first area switching means for switching whether or not to enable the game ball to flow into the first area.
A fourth game value-imparting means that imparts the fourth game value different from the first game value, the second game value, and the third game value when the game ball flows into the first region.
By using the determination result of the determination means, the first region can be switched between a state in which the game ball of the second entry means can enter or a state in which the game ball of the third entry means can enter. A gaming machine comprising: a pattern selection means for selecting a combination pattern with the inflowable state of the first region by means. The second ball entry means
The first movable means for changing the flow direction of the game ball as the flow direction changing means, and
A first driving means for driving the first movable means in a displaceable state in an open state or a closed state is provided.
The first movable means is
When the second entry means is in the closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter, the game ball is configured to be rollable on the upper surface thereof.
The third ball entry means
When the first movable means is in the closed state, the upper surface of the first movable means is arranged at a position where the game ball can enter after rolling from the upstream side to the downstream side. The gaming machine according to claim 1. A first guiding means for guiding a game ball that has entered the second entering means toward the first region side,
A second guiding means for guiding the game ball that has entered the third entering means toward the first region side,
A confluence portion where the first guide means and the second guide means meet is provided.
The first region is
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the gaming machine is arranged on the downstream side of the merging portion. The first area switching means
The first region is set to the inflowable state in relation to the state in which the game ball of the second entry means can enter or the state in which the game ball of the third entry means can enter.
The first guiding means is
It is configured so that a predetermined first time is required from the entry of the game ball into the second entry means to the arrival at the first region.
The second guiding means is
It is configured so that a predetermined second time is required from the entry of the game ball into the third entry means to the arrival at the first region.
The first hour
The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the time is shorter than the second time. The third ball entry means
A second movable means for changing the flow direction of the game ball as the flow direction changing means, and
A second driving means for driving the second movable means in a displaceable state in an open state or a closed state is provided.
The second movable means is
From claim 1, the third ball-entry means is configured so that the game ball can roll on the upper surface of the third ball-entry means in the closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter. The gaming machine according to claim 4.

Images